Mi 
 

 lO f^' C: 7>ip cauf ; .? '^^ Co >npay?.i/^ 
 
 "T'^ -D 
 
 h.ft'Wri' i. 
 
 7V^ z/iviii/i't 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 RxaJih T4^z.7t^ 
 
 j ' XFi^fd Music 
 
 a. S Ca .^llasec' -SV.y ^ lit 
 
 zz'J. .innirzTxxirT: 
 
 nmnuini 
 
 :~! TJ ^T ^ I T 
 
 XT-la: 
 
 / -^ /•/. 
 
 Lt3 Fu".sc Lzrivf 
 
 L_J SecfritZ Xzevii . 
 
 I_! Thvt'd L\£ut 
 
 S Severed S'e^-ji- 
 
 B Tfu;r'd Se*:y^ 
 
 a Fvzif^tJL Sen ^ 
 
 77, FzftJv Serj.^ 
 
R 1 F L E 
 
 AND 
 
 LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS: 
 
 THE EXERCISE AND MANCETJVRES 
 
 K(M)l>f^ \\ HKN ACTING AS LIGHT INFANTRY OK 
 RIFLEMEN. 
 
 I'Kfcl'AKED INDER THE DIKECTIOX OK 
 THE WAR DEi'ARTMEXT, 
 
 BREVET LIEUT.-COL. W. J. HARDEE, 
 
 r. S. AKMI. 
 
 AOL. I. 
 
 ^SCHOOLb OF THE SOLDIER AND COMPANY; 
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 RICHMOND. VA. 
 
 .1. W. TJANDOLPH. 121 .MAIN STKEET. 
 
 1861. 
 
STEAM-POWER PRESSES OF KVAN8 & COaSWELL. 
 
 BROAD STREKT. CHARLESTON. .«. C. 
 

 M'"ak Department, 
 
 March 29, 1855. 
 TiiK Systom of Tactics for Light Infantry and 
 Riflemen, prepared under tlie direction of the War 
 l)t]»artment by Brevet Lieutenant-Colonel William 
 J. Hardee, of the Cavalry, having been approved by 
 the President, is adopted for the instruction of the 
 troops when acting as Light Infantry or Riflemen, 
 and, under the Act of May 12, 1820, for the ob- 
 >;crvance of the Militia when so employed. 
 
 JEFFERSON DAVIS, 
 
 Secretary of War. 
 
 ^1 
 
 ^'CJfLL -i 
 
RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS. 
 
 TITLE FIRST. 
 
 Article First. 
 
 Information of a Regiment in order of battle, or in 
 line. 
 
 1. A REGiMEyr is composed of ten comi)anics, which 
 will habitually be posted from right to left, in the follow- 
 ing order : first, sixth, fourth, ninth, third, eighth, fifth, 
 tenth, seventh, second, according to the rank of captains. 
 
 2. With a less number of companies the same principle 
 will be observed, viz. : the first captain will command the 
 right company, the second captain the left company, the 
 third captain the right centre company, and so on. 
 
 3. The companies thus posted will be designated from 
 right to left, first company, second company, etc. This 
 designation will be observed in the manoeuvres. 
 
 4. The first two companies on the right, whatever their 
 
 XL 
 
 .% 
 
t> I OIJMATION OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 (lenominatiou, will form the first division ; tho next two 
 companies the second dirision ; and so on, to the left. 
 
 5. Each company will he divided into two equal parts, 
 which will be designated as the first and second platoon, 
 counting from the right; and each platoon, in like man- 
 ner, will be subdivided into two sections. 
 
 6. In all exercises and manoeuvres, every regiment, or 
 part of a regiment, composed of two or more companies, 
 will be designated as a battalion. 
 
 7. Th« color, with a guard to be horeinnftor designated, 
 will be postc ": on the left of the right centre battalion 
 company. That company, and all on its right, will be 
 denominated the ri(jJit wine/ of the battalion ; the remain- 
 ing companies the left wing. 
 
 8. The formation of a regiment is in two ranks; and 
 each company will be formed into two ranks, in the fol- 
 lowing manner : the corporals will be posted in the front 
 rank, and on the right and left of platoons, according to 
 height; the tallest corporal and the tallest man will form 
 the first file, the next two tallest men will form the second 
 file, and so on to the last file, which will be composed of 
 the shortest corporal and the shortest man. 
 
 9. The odd and even files, numbered as one, two, in the 
 company, from right to left, will form groups of four men, 
 who will be designated comrades in battle. 
 
 10. The distance from one rank to another will bo thir- 
 teen inches, measured from the breasts of the rear rank 
 men to the backs or knapsacks of the front rank men. 
 
 11. For manoeuvring, tho companies of a battalion will 
 always bo eciualized, by transferring mou from the strong- 
 est to the weakest companies. 
 
FORMATION OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Posts of Company Officers^ Sergeants and Corporals. 
 
 12. The company ofl&cers and sergeants are nine in num- 
 ber, and will be posted in the following manner : 
 
 13. The cajitain on the right of the company, touching 
 with the left elbow. 
 
 14. The first sergeant in the rear rank, touching with 
 the left elbow, and covering the captain. In the manoeu- 
 vres he will be denominated covering sergeant, or right guide 
 of the company. 
 
 15. The remaining officers and sergeants will be posted 
 as file closers, and two paces behind the rear rank. 
 
 16. The first Zieu/exaH/, opposite the centre of the fourth 
 section. 
 
 17. The second lieutenant, opposite the centre of the first 
 platoon. 
 
 18. The third lieutenant, opposite the centre of the sec- 
 ond platoon. 
 
 19. The second sergeant, opposite the second file from the 
 left of the company. In the manoeuvres he will be desig- 
 nated left guide of the company. 
 
 20. The third sergeant, opposite the second file from the 
 right of the second platoon. 
 
 21. The fourth sergeant, opposite the second file from 
 the left of the first platoon. 
 
 22. Tha fifth sergeant, opposite the second file from the 
 right of the first platoon. 
 
 23. In the left or tenth company of the battalion, the 
 second sergeant will be posted in the front rank, and on 
 the left of the battalion. 
 
8 FORMATION OF THE IJATTALIOX. 
 
 24. The corporals will be posted in tbe front rank, as 
 prescribed No. 8. 
 
 25. Absent officers and sergeants will be replaced — offi- 
 cers by sergeants, and sergeants by corporals. The colo- 
 nel may detach a first lieutenant from one company to 
 command another, of which both the captain and first 
 lieutenant are absent; but this authority will give no right 
 to a lieutenant to demand to be so detached. 
 
 Posts of Field Officers and Regimental Staff. 
 
 26. The field officers, colonel, lieutenant -colonel and 
 major, are supposed to be mounted, and on active service 
 shall be on horseback. The adjutant, when the battalion 
 is manoeuvring, will be on foot. 
 
 27. The colonel will take post thirty paces in rear of the 
 file closers, and opposite the centre of the battalion. This 
 distance will be reduced whenever there is a reduction in 
 the front of the battalion. 
 
 28. The lieutenant-colonel and the major will be opposite 
 the centres of the right and left wings respectively, and 
 twelve paces in rear of the file closers. 
 
 29. The adjutant and sergeant major will bo opposite 
 tbe right and left of the battalion, respectively, and eight 
 paces in rear of the file closers. 
 
 30. The adjutant and sergeant major will aid the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel and major, respectively, in the manoeuvres. 
 
 31. The colonel, if absent, will be replaced by the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel, and the latter by the major. If all the field 
 officers be absent, the senior captain will command the 
 battalion; but if either be present, he will not call the 
 
FORMATION OF THE BATTALION. 9 
 
 senior captain to act as field officer, except in case of evi- 
 dent necessity. 
 
 32. Tlie quarter-master, surgeon, and other staff officers, 
 in one rank, on the left of the colonel, and three paces in 
 his rear. 
 
 33. The quarter-master sergeant on a line with the front 
 rank of the field music, and two paces on the right. 
 
 Posts of Field Music and Band. 
 
 34. The buglers will be drawn up in four ranks, and 
 posted twelve paces in rear of the file closers, the left op- 
 posite the centre of the left centre company. The senior 
 principal musician will be two paces in front of the field 
 music, and the other two paces in the rear. 
 
 35. The regimental band, if there be one, will be drawn 
 up in two or four ranks, according to its numbers, and 
 posted five paces in rear of the field music, having one of 
 the principal musicians at its head. 
 
 Color-guard. 
 
 36. In each battalion the color-guard will be composed 
 '•f eight corporals, and posted on the left of the right 
 centre companj^, of which compan}^, for the time being, the 
 guard will make a part. 
 
 37. The front rank will be composed of a sergeant, to be 
 selected by the colonel, who will be called, for the time, 
 rolor-bearer, with the two ranking corporals, respectively, 
 on his right and left ; the rear rank will be composed of 
 ihe three corporals next in rank ; and the three remaining 
 
10 FORMATION OF THK IJATTALION. 
 
 corporals will be posted in their rear, and on the line of 
 file closers. The left guide of the color-company, when 
 these three last named corporals are in the rank of file- 
 closers, will be immediately on their left. 
 
 38. In battalions with less than five companies present, 
 there will be no color-guard, and no display of colors, ex- 
 cept it may be at reviews. 
 
 39. The corporals for the color-guard will be selected 
 from those most distinguished for regularity and precision, 
 as well in their positions under arms as in their inarching. 
 The latter advantage, and a just carriage of the person, 
 are to be more particularly sought for in the selection of 
 the color-bearer. 
 
 General Guides. 
 
 40. There will be two general guides in each battalion, 
 selected, for the time, by the colonel, from among the ser- 
 geants (other than first sergeants) the most distinguished 
 for carriage under arms and accuracy in marching. 
 
 41. These sergeants will be respectively denominated, in 
 the manoeuvres, right general guide and left general guide, 
 and be posted in the line of file closers; the first in rear of 
 the right and the second in, rear of the left flank of the 
 battalion. 
 
INSTRUCTION OF THE BATTALION. 11 
 
 Article Second. 
 
 histruction of the Battalion. 
 
 42. Every commanding officer is responsible for the in- 
 struction of bis command. He will assemble the officers 
 together for theoretical and practical instruction as often 
 as ho maj- judge necessary: and when unable to attehd lo 
 this duty in i)erson, it will be discharged by the officer 
 next in rank. 
 
 43. Captains will be held responsible for the theoretical 
 and practical instruction of their non-commissioned officers, 
 and the adjutant for the instruction of the non-commis- 
 sioned staff. To this end they will require these tactics to 
 be studied and recited lesson by lesson ; and when instruc- 
 tion is given on the ground, each non-commissioned officer, 
 as he explains a movement, should be required to put it 
 into practical operation. 
 
 44. The non-commissioned officers should also be prac- 
 tised in giving commands. Each command, in a lesson, at 
 the theoretical instruction, Shovild first be given by the in- 
 structor, and then repeated, in sviccession, by the non-com- 
 missioned officers, so that while thej'^ become habituated to 
 the commands, uniformity may be established in the man- 
 ner of giving them. 
 
 45. In the school of the soldier, the company officers 
 will be the instructors of the squads ; but if there be not a 
 sufficient number of company officers present, intelligent 
 sergeants may be substituted; and two or three squads, 
 
12 INSTRUCTION OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 under sergeant instructors, be superintended at the same 
 time by an officer. 
 
 46. In 'the school of the company, the lieutenant-colonel 
 and the major, under the colonel, will be the principal in- 
 structors, substituting frequently the captain of the com- 
 pany, and sometimes one of the lieutenants : the substitute, 
 as far as practicable, being superintended by one of the 
 principals. 
 
 47. In the school of the battalion, the brigadier-general 
 may constitute himself the principal instructor, freiiucntly 
 substituting the colonel of the battalion, sometimes the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel or major, and twice or thrice, in the same 
 course of instruction, each of the three senior captains. In 
 this school, also, the substitute will always, if j)racticable, 
 be superintended by the brigadier-general or tlie colonel, 
 or (in case of a captain being the instructor) l)y the lieuten- 
 ant-colonel or major. 
 
 48. Individual instruction being the basis of the instruc- 
 tion of companies, on which that of the regiment depends, 
 and the first principles having the greatest influence upon 
 this individual instruction, classes of recruits should bo 
 watched with the greatest care. 
 
 49. Instructors will explain, in a few clear and precise 
 words, the movement to be executed ; and not to over- 
 burden the memory of the men, they will always use the 
 same terms to explain the same principles. 
 
 5U. They should often join example to precept, should 
 keep up the attention of the men by an animated tone, and 
 pass rapidly from one movement to another, as soon as 
 that which they command has been executed in a satisfac- 
 tory manner. 
 
INSTRUCTION OF THE BATTALION. 13 
 
 51. The sabre bayonet should only be fixed when 
 required to be used, either for attack or defence; the 
 exercises and manoeuvres will be executed without the 
 bayonet. 
 
 52. In the movements which require the bayonet to be 
 fixed, the chief of the battalion will cause the signal to fix 
 bayonet, to be sounded; at this signal the men will fix 
 bayonets without command, and immediately replace their 
 pieces in the position they were before the signal. 
 
 Instruction of Officers. 
 
 53. The instruction of oflSeers can be perfected only by 
 joining theory to practice. The colonel will often practise 
 them in marching, and in estimating distances, and he 
 will carefullj' endeavor to cause them to take steps equal 
 in length and swiftness. They will also be exercised in 
 the double quick step. 
 
 54. The instruction of officers will include all the Titles 
 in this system of drill, and such regulations as prescribe 
 their duties in peace and war. 
 
 55. Every officer will make himself perfectly acquainted 
 with the bugle signals: and should, by practice, be enabled, 
 if necessary, to sound them. This knowledge, so neces- 
 sary in general instruction, becomes of vital importance 
 on actual service in the field. 
 
 Instruction of Sergeants. 
 
 56. As the discipline and efficiencj' of a company mate- 
 rially depend on the conduct and character of its ser- 
 
14 INSTUUCTION OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 gcants, they should be selected with care, and properly 
 instructed in all the duties appertaining to their rank. 
 
 57. Their theoretical instruction should include the 
 School of the Soldier, the School of the Company, and the 
 Drill for Skirmishers. They should likewise know all the 
 details of service, and the regulations prescribing their 
 duties in garrison and campaign. 
 
 58. The captain selects from the corporals in his com- 
 pany those whom he judges fit to be admitted to the theo- 
 retical instruction of the sergeants. 
 
 Instruction of Corporals. 
 
 59. Their theoretical instruction should include the 
 School of the Soldier, and such regulations as prescribe 
 their duties in garrison and in campaign. 
 
 60. The captain selects from his company a few privates, 
 who may be admitted to the theoretical instruction of the 
 corporals. 
 
 61. As the instruction of sergeants and corporals is 
 intended principally to qualify them for the instruction of 
 the privates, they should be taught not only to execute, 
 but to explain intelligibly everything they may be re- 
 quired to teach. 
 
 Commands. 
 
 There are three kinds. 
 
 62. The command of caittioii, which is attention. 
 
 63. The prrpdvntonj command, which indicates the move- 
 ment which is to be executed. 
 
 64. The command of execntlon, such as march or halt, or, 
 
INSTRUCTION OF THE BATTALION. 15 
 
 in the manual of arms, tlie part of command which causes 
 an execution. 
 
 65. The tone of command should be animated, distinct, 
 and of a loudness proportioned to the number of men 
 under instruction. 
 
 66. The command attention, is pronounced at the top of 
 the voice, dwelling on the last syllable. 
 
 67. The command of execution will be pronounced in a 
 tone firm and brief. 
 
 68. The commands of caution and the preparatory com- 
 mands are herein distinguished by italics, those of execu- 
 tion by CAPITALS. 
 
 69. Those preparatory commands which, from their 
 length, are diflBcult to be pronounced at once, must be 
 divided into two or three parts, with an ascending progres- 
 sion in the tone of command, but always in such a manner 
 that the tone of execution may be more energetic and ele- 
 vated; the divisions are indicated by a hyphen. The parts 
 of commands which are placed in a parenthesis, are not 
 pronounced. 
 
TITLE SECOND 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 General Rules and division of the School of the 
 Soldier. 
 
 70. The object of this school being the indivitlual and 
 progressive instruction of the recruits, the instructor never 
 requires a movement to be executed until he has given an 
 exact explanation of it ; and he executes, himself, the 
 movement which he commands, so as to join example to 
 precept, lie accustoms the recruit to take, by himself, the 
 position which is explained — teaches him to rectify it only 
 when required by his want of intelligence — and sees that 
 all the movements are performed without precij^itation. 
 
 71. Each movement should be understood before passing 
 to another. After they have been properly executed in the 
 order laid down in each lesson, the instructor no longer 
 confines himself to that order j on the contrary, he should 
 change it, that ho may judge of the intelligence of the 
 men. 
 
 72. The instructor allows the men to rest at the end of 
 each part of the lessons, and oftener, if he thinks proper, 
 especially at the commencement; for this purpose he com- 
 mands Rkst. 
 
 73. At the command Rkst, the soldier is no longer re- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART I. 17 
 
 quired to preserve immobility, or to remain in his place. 
 If the instructor wishes merely to relieve the attention of 
 the recruit, he commands, in place — Rest; the soldier is 
 then not required to preserve his immobility, but he 
 always keeps one of his feet in its place. 
 
 74. When the instructor wishes to commence the instruc- 
 tion, he commands — Attention ; at this command the 
 soldier takes his position, remains motionless, and fixes 
 his attention. 
 
 75. The School of (he Soldier will be divided into three 
 parts : the first, comprehending what ought to be taught 
 to recruits without arms ; the second, the manual of arms, 
 the loadings and firings; the third, the principles of align- 
 ment, the march by the front, the different steps, the march 
 by the flank, the principles of wheeling, and those of 
 change of direction ,• also, long marches in double quick 
 time and the run. 
 
 76. Each part will be divided into lessons, as follows : 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 Lesson 1. Position of the soldier without arms : Eyes 
 right, left and front. 
 
 Lesson 2. Facings. 
 
 Lesson 3. Principles of the direct step in common and 
 quick time. 
 
 Lesson 4. Principles of the direct step in double quick 
 time and the run. 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 Lesson 1. Principles of shouldei'cd arms. 
 Lesson 2. Manual of arms. 
 
18 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART I. 
 
 Lesson 3. To load in four times, and at will. 
 Lesson 4. Firings, direct, oblique, by file, and by rank. 
 Lesson 5. To fire and load, kneeling and lying. 
 Lesson 6. Bayonet exercise. 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 Lesson 1. Union of eight or twelve men for instruction 
 in the principles of alignment. 
 
 Lesson 2. The direct march, the oblique march and the 
 different steps. 
 
 Lesson 3. The march by the flank. 
 
 Lesson 4. Principles of wheeling and change of direc- 
 tion. 
 
 Lesson 5. Long marches in double quick time, and the 
 run, with arms and knapsacks. 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 77. This will be taught, if practicable, to one recruit at 
 a time; but three or four may be united, when the number 
 be great, compared with that of the instructors. In this 
 case, the recruits will be placed in a single rank, at one 
 pace froTU each other. In this part, the recruits will be 
 without arms. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 Position of the Soldier. 
 
 78. Heels on the same line, as near each other as the 
 conformation of the man will permit; 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART I. 19 
 
 The feet turned out equally, and forming with each other 
 something less than a right angle ; 
 
 The knees sti-aight without stiffness; 
 
 The body erect on the hijDs, inclining a little forward ; 
 
 The shoulders square, and falling equally ; 
 
 The arms hanging naturally ; 
 
 The elbows near the body: 
 
 The palm of the hand turned a little to the front, the 
 little finger behind the seam of the pantaloons : 
 
 The head erect and square to the front, without con- 
 straint; 
 
 The chin near the stock, without covering it ; 
 
 The eyes fixed straight to the front, and striking the 
 ground about the distance of fifteen paces. 
 
 Remarks on the position of the Soldier'. 
 
 Herts on the. same line ; 
 
 79. Because, if one were in rear of the other, the shoul- 
 der on that side would be thrown back, or the position of 
 the soldier would be constrained. 
 
 Heelu more or less closed ; 
 
 t 
 Because, men who are knock-kneed, or who have legs 
 
 with large calves, cannot, without constraint, make their 
 
 heels touch while standing. 
 
20 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PAUT I. 
 
 The feet equfdli/ tUDicd out, (otd not formiiuj too large an 
 aufjle ; 
 
 Because, if oue foot were turned out move than the 
 other, a shoulder would be derangeil, and if both feet be 
 too much turned out, it would not be practicable to incline 
 the upper part of the body forward without rendering the 
 whole position unsteady. 
 
 Knees extoidcd ultJiout atijf'tiesH ; 
 
 Because, if stiffened, constraint and fatigue would be 
 unavoidable. 
 
 The body trert on the hipn ; 
 
 Because, it gives equilibrium to the position. The in- 
 structor will observe that many recruits have the bad 
 habit oF dropping a shoulder, of drawing in a side, or of 
 advancing a hip, particularly the right when under arms. 
 These are defects he will lal)or to correct. 
 
 The upper part of the bodij inclinintj forward ; 
 
 Because, commonly, recruits are disposed to do the 
 reverse, to project the belly and to throw back the shoul- 
 ders, when they wish to hold themselves erect, from which 
 result great inconveniences in marching. The habit of 
 inclining forward the upper part of the body is so impor- 
 tant to contract, that the instructor must enforce it at the 
 beginning, particularly^ with recruits who have naturally 
 the opposite habit. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART I. 21 
 
 Shoulders square ; 
 
 Because, if the shoulders be advanced beyond the line 
 of the breast, and the back arched (the defect called 
 round-shouldered, not uncommon among recruits) the man 
 cannot align himself, nor use his piece with address. It is 
 important, then, to correct this defect, and necessary to ' 
 that end that the coat should set easy about the shoulders 
 and arm-pits; but in correcting this defect, the instructor 
 will take care that the shoulders be not thrown too much 
 to the rear, which would cause the belly to project, and 
 the small of the back to be curved. 
 
 The arms hanging naturally, elhou-s near the hody, the ]ialm 
 of the hand a little turned to the front, the little finger 
 behind the seam of the pantaloons ; 
 
 Because, these positions are equally important to the 
 ■shoulder-arms, and to prevent the man from occupying 
 more space in a rank than is necessary to a free use of the 
 piece; they have, moreover, the advantage of keeping in 
 the shoulders. 
 
 The face straight to the front, and without constraint ; 
 
 Because, if there be stiffness in the latter position, it 
 would communicate itself to the whole of the upper part 
 of the bodj', embarrass its movements, and give pain and 
 fatigue. 
 
 Eyes direct to the front ; 
 
 Because, this is the surest means of maintaining the 
 shoulders in line — an essential object, to be insisted on 
 and attained. 
 
22 .SCHOOL OK THE SOLDIER — PART I. 
 
 80. The instructor having given the recruit tiic position 
 of the soldier without arms, will now teach him the turn- 
 ing of the head and eyes. He will command : 
 
 1. Eyes — Right. 2. Front. 
 
 81. At the word right, the recruit will turn the bead 
 gently, so as to bring the inner corner of the left eye in 
 a line with the buttons of the coat, the eyes fixed on the 
 line of the eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in. the 
 same rank. 
 
 82. At the second command, the head will resume the 
 direct or habitual position. 
 
 83. The movement of Ei/es — Lktt will be executed by 
 inverse means. 
 
 84. The instructor will take particular care that the 
 movement of the head does not derange the sq.uareness of 
 the shoulders, which will happen if the movement of the 
 former be too sudden. 
 
 85. When the instructor shall Avish the recruit to pass 
 from the state of attention to that of earic, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Rest. 
 
 86. To cause a resumption of the habitual position, the 
 instructor will command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squad. 
 
 87. At the first word, the recruit will iix his attention ; 
 at the second, he will resume the prescribed position and 
 steadiness. 
 
f^OHOOr. OF THE SOLDIER PAUT I. 23 
 
 Lks8o.\ ir. 
 
 yuciilf/fi. 
 
 SS. Faciug tu the right and leit will Ijc executed in one 
 i''>iu\ or pause. The instructor will command: 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Right (ov left)— Face. 
 
 89. At the second coniniaud. raise the right foot slightly,, 
 turn on the left heel, raising the toes a little, and then re- 
 place the right heel by the side of the left, and on the 
 f<ame line. 
 
 00. The full face to the rear (or front) will be executed 
 in two tivies, or pauses. The instructor will command : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. About — Face. 
 
 91. (First time.) At the word about, the recruit will 
 turn on the left heel, bring the left toe to the front, carry 
 the right foot to the rear, the hollow opposite to, and full 
 three inches* from, the left heel, the feet square to each 
 other. 
 
 92. [Second time.) At the word fact, the recruit will 
 turn on both heels, raise the toes a little, extend the ham^. 
 face to the rear, bringing, at the same time, the right heel 
 by the side of the left. 
 
 93. The insti'uctor will take care that these motions do 
 not derange the position of the body. 
 
'24 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIKR PART I. 
 
 Lesson III. 
 Principles of ike Direct Step. 
 
 94. The length of the direct step, or pace, in common 
 time, will be twenty eight inches, reckoning from heel to 
 heel, and in swiftness, at the rate of ninety in a minute. 
 
 95. The instructor, seeing the recruit confirmed in his 
 position, will explain to him the principle and mechanism 
 of this step — placing himself six or seven paces from, and 
 facing to, the recruit. He will himself execute slowly the 
 step in the -nay of illustration, and then command : 
 
 1. Squad, forvmrd. 2. Common time. .'). March. 
 
 96. At the first command, the recruit will throw the 
 weight of the body on the rio-ht leg, without bending the 
 left knee, 
 
 97. At the third command, he will smartly, but without 
 a jerk, carry straight forward the left foot twenty-eight 
 inches from the right, the sole near the ground, the ham 
 extended, the toe a little depressed, and, also the knee, 
 slightly turned out; he will, at the same time, throw the 
 body forward, and plant flat the left foot, without shock, 
 precisely at the distance where it finds itself from the 
 right when the weight of the body is brought forward, 
 the whole of which will now rest on the advanced foot. 
 The recruit will next, in like manner, advance the right 
 foot and plant it as above, the heel twenty-eight inches 
 from the lieel of the left foot, and thus continue to march 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — TAUT I. 25 
 
 without crossing the legs, or striking the one against the 
 other, without turning the shoulders, and preserving al- 
 ways the face direct to the front. 
 
 98. When the instructor shall wish to arrest the march, 
 he will command: 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 99. At the second command, which will be given at the 
 instant when either foot la coming to the ground, the foot 
 in the rear will be brought up, and planted by the side of 
 the other, without shock. 
 
 100. The instructor will indicate, from time to time, to 
 the recruit, the cadence of the step by giving the com- 
 mand one at the instant of raising a foot, and two at the 
 instant it ought to be planted, observing the cadence of 
 ninety steps in a minute. This method will contribute 
 greatly to impress upon the mind the two motions into 
 which the step is naturally divided. 
 
 101. Common time will be employed only in the first 
 and second parts of the School of the Soldier. As soon as 
 the recruit has acquired steadiness, has become established 
 in the principles of shouldered arms, and in the mechan- 
 ism, length and swiftness of the step in common time, he 
 will be practised only in quick time, the double quick 
 time, and the run. 
 
 102. The principles of the step in quick time are the 
 same as for common time, but its swiftness is at the rate of 
 one hundred and ten steps per minute. 
 
 2 
 
2G SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIKR — PAHT I. 
 
 103. The instructor wishing the squad to march in quick 
 time, will command : 
 
 1. Squad, forward. 2. March. 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 Principles of the Double Quick Step. 
 
 104. The length of the double quick steji is thirty-three, 
 inches and its swiftness at the rate of one hundred and 
 sixty-five steps per minute. 
 
 105. The instructor wishing to teach the recruits the 
 principles and mechanism of the double quick step, will 
 command : 
 
 1. Double quick step. 2. March. 
 
 106. At the first command, the recruit will raise his 
 hands to a level with his hips, the hands closed, the nails 
 toward the body, the elbows to the rear. 
 
 107. At the second command, he will raise to the front, 
 his left leg bent, in order to give to the knee the greatest 
 elevation, the part of the leg between the knee and the 
 instep vertical, the toe depressed; ho will then replace his 
 foot in his former position; with the right leg he will 
 execute what has just been prescribed for the left, and the 
 alternate movement of the legs will bo continued until the 
 command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART I. 27 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 108. At the second command, the recruit will bring the 
 foot which is raised by the side of the other, and dropping 
 at the same time his hands by his side, will resume the 
 l)Osition of the soldier without arms. 
 
 109. The instructor placing himself seven or eight paces 
 from, and facing the recruit, will indicate the cadence by 
 the commands, one and two, given alternately at the instant 
 each foot should be brought to the ground, which at first 
 will be in common time, but its rapidity will be gradually 
 augmented. 
 
 110. The recruit being sufficiently established in the 
 principles of this step, the instructor will command: 
 
 1. Squad, forward. 2. Double quick. 3. March. 
 
 111. At the first command, the recruit will throw the 
 weight of his body on the right leg. 
 
 112. At the second command, he will place his arms as 
 indicated No. 106. 
 
 113. At the third command, he will carry forward the 
 left foot, the leg slightly bent, the knee somewhat raised — 
 will plant his left foot, the toe first, thirty-three inches 
 from the right, and with the right foot will then execute 
 what has just been prescribed for the left. This alternate 
 movement of the legs will take place by throwing the 
 weight of the body on the foot that is planted, and by 
 allowing a natural, oscillatory motion to the arms. 
 
 114. The double quick step may be executed with differ- 
 
28 SCHOOL OF the soldikr — part ir. 
 
 ent degrees of swiftness. Under urgent circumstances the 
 cadence of this step may be increased to one hundred and 
 eighty per minute. At this rate a distance of four thou- 
 sand yards would be passed over in about twcnty-tivc 
 minutes. 
 
 115. The recruits will be exercised also in running. 
 
 116. The principles are the same as for the double quick 
 step, the only difiference consisting in a greater degree of 
 swiftness. 
 
 117. It is recommended in marching at double quick 
 time, or the run, that the men should breathe as much as 
 possible through the nose, keeping the mouth closed. 
 Experience has proved that, by conforming to this princi- 
 ple, a man can pass over a much longer di!<tance, and with 
 less fatigue. 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 GENEUAL HULES. 
 
 118. The instructor will not pass the men to this second 
 part until they shall be well established in the position of 
 the body, and in the manner of marching at the diflforent 
 steps. 
 
 119. lie will thou unite four men, whom he avI'. place in 
 the same rank, elbow to elbow, and instruct them in the 
 position of shouldei'ed arms, as follows : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — rART II. 29 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 Principles of Shouldered Arms. 
 
 120. The recruit being placed as explained in the first 
 lesson of the first part, the instructor will cause him to 
 bend the right arm slightly, and to place the piece in it in 
 the following manner: 
 
 121. The piece in the right hand — the barrel nearly 
 vertical and resting in the hollow of the shoulder — the 
 guard to the front, the arm hanging nearly at its full 
 length near the body ; the thumb and forefinger embrac- 
 ing the guard, the remaining fingers closed together, and 
 grasping the swell of the stock just under the cock, which 
 rests on the little finger. 
 
 122. Recruits are frequently seen with natural defects in 
 the conformation of the shoulders, breast and hips. These 
 the instructor will labor to correct in the lessons without 
 arms, and afterwards by steady endeavors, so that the 
 appearance of the pieces in the same line may be uniform, 
 and this without constraint to the men in their positions. 
 
 123. The instructor will have occasion to remark that 
 recruits, on first bearing arms, are liable to derange their 
 position by lowering the right shoulder and the right hand, 
 or by sinking the hip and spreading out the elbows. 
 
 124. He will be careful to correct all these faults by 
 continually rectifying the position; he will sometimes take 
 away the piece to replace it the better: he will avoid 
 fatiguing the recruits too much in the beginning, but labor 
 
30 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIKU — PART 11. 
 
 by degrees to render this position so natural and easy that 
 they may remain in it a long time without fatigue. 
 
 125. Finally, the instructor will take great care that the 
 piece, at a shoulder, be not carried too high nor too low: 
 if too high, the right elbow would spread out, the soldier 
 would occupy too much space in his rank, and the piece 
 be made to waver j if too low, the files would bo too much 
 closed, the soldier would not have the necessary space to 
 handle his piece with facility, the right arm would become 
 too much fatigued, and would draw down the shoulder. 
 
 126. The instructor, before passing to the second lesson, 
 will cause to be repeated the movements of '■_*/*■« right, left 
 and front, and the facinfjs. 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 Manual of Arms. 
 
 127. The manual of arms will be taught to four men, 
 placed, at first, in one rank, elbow to elbow, and afterwards 
 in two ranks. 
 
 128. Each command will bo executed in one time (or 
 pause), but this time will be divided into motions, the bet- 
 ter to make known the mechanism. 
 
 129. The rate or (swiftness) of each motion, in the 
 manual of arms, with the exceptions herein indicated, is 
 fixed at the ninetieth part of a minute; but, in order not 
 to fatigue the attention, the instructor will, at first, look 
 more particularly to the execution of the motions, without 
 requiring a nice observance of the cadence, to which he 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER PART II. 31 
 
 will bring the recruits progressively, and after they shall 
 have become a little familiarized with the handling of the 
 piece. 
 
 loO. As the motions relative to the cartridge, to the 
 rammer, and to the fixing and unfixing of the bayonet, 
 cannot be executed at the rate prescribed, nor even with a 
 uniform swiftness, they will not be subjected to that ca- 
 dence. The instructor will, however, labor to cause these 
 motions to be executed with promptness : and, above all, 
 with regularity. 
 
 131. The last syllable of the command Tvill decide the 
 brisk execution of the first motion of each time (or pause). 
 The commands tico, three and four, will decide the brisk 
 execution of the other motions. As soon as the recruits 
 shall well comprehend the positions of the several motions 
 of a time, they will be taught to execute the time without 
 resting on its different motions : the mechanism of the 
 time will, nevertheless, be observed, as well to give a per- 
 fect use of the piece, as to avoid tiie sinking of, or slurring 
 over, either of the motions. 
 
 132. The manual of arms will be taught in the following 
 progression; The instructor will command: 
 
 Support — Arms. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 133. (First motion.) Bring the piece, with the right 
 hand, perpendicularly to the front and between the eyes, 
 the barrel to the rear; seize the piece with the left hand at 
 
32 SCHOOL OF the soldier — pakt ii. 
 
 the lower band, raise this hand as high as the chin, and 
 seize the piece at the same time with the right hand four 
 inches below the cock. 
 
 134. {Second motion.) Turn the piece with the right 
 hand, the barrel to the front j carr}' the piece to the left 
 shoulder, and pass the forearm extended on the breast 
 between the right hand and the cock; support the cock 
 against the left forearm, the left hand resting on the right 
 breast. 
 
 135. {Third motion.) Drop the right hand bjMhe side. 
 
 136. When the instructor may wish to give repose in 
 this position, he will command : 
 
 Rest. 
 
 137. At this command, the recruits will bring up smartly 
 the right hand to the handle of the piece (small of the 
 stock), when they will not be required to preserve silence 
 or steadiness of position. 
 
 138. When the instructor may wish the recruits to pass 
 from this ])osition to that of silence and steailiness, be will 
 command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squad. 
 
 139. At the second word, the recruits will resume the 
 position of the third motion of support arms. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART II. 33 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 140. {First motion.) Grasp the piece with the right 
 hand under and against the left forearm ; seize it with 
 the left hand at the lower band, the thumb extended; de- 
 tach the piece slightly from the shoulder, the left forearm 
 along the stock. 
 
 141. {Second motion.) Carry the piece vertically to the 
 right shoulder with both hands, the rammer to the front, 
 change the position of the right hand so as to embrace the 
 guard with the thumb and forefinger, slip the left hand to 
 the height of the shoulder, the fingers extended and join- 
 ed, the right arm nearly straight. 
 
 142. {Third motion.) Drop the left hand quickly by the 
 side. 
 
 Present — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 143. {First motion.) With the right hand bring the 
 piece erect before the centre of the body, the rammer to 
 the front ; at the same time seize the piece with the left 
 hand half-way between the guide sight and lower band, 
 the thumb extended along the barrel and against the 
 stock, the forearm horizontal and resting against the 
 body, the hand as high as the elbow. 
 
 144. {Second motion.) Grasp the small of the stock with 
 the right hand below and against the guard. 
 
34 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER PART II. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 145. {First motion.) Bring the piece to the right should- 
 er, at the same time change the position of the right hand 
 so as to embrace the guard with the thumb and forefinger, 
 slip up the left hand to the height of the shoulder, the 
 fingers extended and joined, the right arm nearly straight. 
 
 146. {Second motion.) Drop the left hand quickly by the 
 side. 
 
 Order — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 147. {First motion.) Seize the piece briskly with the left 
 hand near the upper band, and detach it slightly from the 
 shoulder with the right hand: loosen the grasp of the right 
 hand, lower the piece with the left, reseize the piece with 
 the right hand above the lower band, the little finger in 
 rear of the barrel, the butt about four inches from the 
 ground, the right hand supported against the hip, drop the 
 left hand by the side. 
 
 148. {Second motion.) Let the piece slip through the 
 right hand to the ground by opening slightly the fingers, 
 and take the position about to be described. 
 
 Position of order arms. 
 
 149. The hand low, the barrel between the thumb and 
 forefinger extended along the stock j the other fingers 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART II. 35 
 
 extended and jftined; the muzzle about two inches from 
 the right shoulder; the rammer in front ; the toe (or beak) 
 of the butt, against, and in a line with, the toe of the right 
 foot, the barrel perpendicular. 
 
 150. "When tlie instructor may wish to give repose in 
 this position, he will command : 
 
 Kest. 
 
 151. At this command, the recruits will not be required 
 to preserve silence or steadiness. 
 
 152. When the instructor may wish the recruits to jjass 
 from this position to that of silence and steadiness, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squad. 
 
 153. At the second word, the recruits will resume the 
 position of order arms. 
 
 SJioulder — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 154. {First motion.) Raise the piece vertically with the 
 right hand to the height of the right breast, and opposite 
 the shoulder, the elbow close to the body; seize the piece 
 with the left hand below the right, and drop quickly the 
 right hand to grasp the piece at the swell of the stock, the 
 thumb and forefinger embracing the guard; press the 
 piece against the shoulder with the left hand, the right 
 arm nearly straight. 
 
36 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PAUT IL 
 
 155. {Second motion.) Drop the left hand quickly by tlit- 
 Pi<le. 
 
 Load in nine times. 
 
 1. Load.* 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 156. Grasp the piece with the loft hand as high as the 
 right elbow, and bring it vertically opposite the middle of 
 the body, shift the right hand to the upper band, place the 
 butt between the feet, the barrel to the front ; seize it with 
 the left hand near the muzzle, which should be three 
 inches from the body; carry the right hand to the car- 
 tridge box. 
 
 2. Handle — Cartridge. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 157. Seize the cartridge with the thumb and n»xt two 
 fingers, and place it between the teeth. 
 
 3. Tear — Cartridge. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 158. Tear the paper to the powder, hold the cartridge 
 upright between the thumb and first two fingers, near the 
 top J in this position place it in front of and near the muz- 
 zle — the back of the hand to the front. 
 
 * Whenever the loadings and firings are to be executed, the in- 
 etructor will cause the cartridge boxes to be brought to the front. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER PART IL 37 
 
 4. Charge — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 159. Empty the powder into the barrel : disengage the 
 ball from the paper with the right hand and the thumb 
 and first two fingers of the left; insert it into the bore, 
 the pointed end uppermost, and press it down with the 
 right thumb ; seize the head of the rammer Avith the 
 thumb and forefinger of the right hand, the other finger.*^ 
 closed, the elbows near the body. 
 
 5. Draio — Rammer. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 160. {First motion.) Half draw the rammer by extend- 
 ing the right arm ; steady it in this position with the left 
 thumb ; grasp the rammer near the muzzle with the right 
 hand, the little finger uppermost, the nails to the front, 
 the thumb extended along the rammer. 
 
 161. {Second motion.) Clear the rammer from the pipe? 
 by again extending the arm ; the rammer in the prolonga- 
 tion of the pipes. 
 
 162. {Third motion.) Turn the rammer, the little end of 
 the rammer passing near the left shoulder; place the head 
 of the rammer on the ball, the back of the hand to the 
 front. 
 
 6. Ram — Cartridge. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 163. Insert the rammer as far as the right, and steady 
 3 
 
,'i8 SCHOOL OF TIIK SOLDIER — PART II. 
 
 it in this position with the thumb of the left hand ; seizo 
 the rammer at the small end with the thumb and fore- 
 finger of the right hand, the back of the hand to the 
 front; press the ball homo, the elbows near the bod}-. 
 
 7. Return — Rammer. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 164. (First motion.) Draw the rammer half way out. 
 and steady it in this position with the left thumb; grasp 
 it near the muzzle with the right hand, the little finger 
 uppermost, the nails to the front, the thumb along the 
 rammer ; clear the rammer from the bore by extending 
 the arm, the nails to the front, the rauiiuor in the prolonga- 
 tion of the bore. 
 
 165. (Second inotion.) Turn the rammer, the head of the 
 rammer passing near the left shoulder, and insert it in the 
 pipes until the right hand reaches the muzzle, the nails to 
 the front. 
 
 166. (Third motion.) Force the rammer home by plac- 
 ing the little finger of the right baud on the head of the 
 rammer; pass the loft hand down the barrel to the extent 
 (tf the arm, without dcprcs-siiig the shoulder. 
 
 8. Prime.* 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 167. (Firnt motion.) "With the left hand raise the piece 
 
 *lf Maynard's primer be used, the command will be, load in 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART 11. ;!1» 
 
 r 
 
 till the hand is as high as the eye, grasp the small of the 
 stock with the right hand; half face to the right; place, 
 at the same time, the right foot behind and at right angles 
 with the left; the hollow of the right foot against the left 
 heel. Slip the left hand down to the lower band, the 
 thumb along the stock, the left elbow against the body ; 
 bring the piece to the right side, the butt below the^igbt 
 forearm — the small of the stock against the body and two 
 inches below the right breast, the barrel upward, the muz- 
 zle on a level with the eye. 
 
 168. {Second motion.) Half cock with the thumb of the 
 right hand, the fingers supported against the guard and 
 the small of the stock — remove the old cap with one of the 
 fingers pf the right hand, and with the thumb and fore- 
 finger of the same hand take a cap from the pouch, place 
 it on the nipple, and press it down with the thumb ; seize 
 the small of the stock with the right hand. 
 
 9. Shoidder — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 169. (First motion.) Bring the piece to the right shoul- 
 der and support it there with the left hand, face to the 
 
 eight times, and the eighth command will be, shoulder arms, and 
 executed from return rammer, in one time and two motions, as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 (First motion.) Raise the piece with the left hand, and take the 
 position of shoulder arms, as indicated No. 145. 
 
 (Second motion.) Drop the left hand quickly by the side. 
 
4U SCHOOL or Tin: soLDfEU — PART II. 
 
 % 
 front : bring the right heel to the side of and on a line 
 with the left; grasp the piece with the right hand as indi- 
 cated in the position of nhonldcr arms. 
 
 170. {Second iHotioii.) Drop the left hand (juickly by the 
 side. 
 
 • Ready. 
 
 One time and three ynotions. 
 
 171. [First mot ton.) Riiisc the piece slightly with the 
 right hand, making a half face to the right on the left 
 heel ; carry the right foot to the rear, and place it at right 
 angles to the left, the hollow of it opposite to, and against 
 the left heel ; grasp the piece with the left hand at the 
 lower band and detach it slightly from the shoulder. 
 
 172. {Second motion.) Bring down the piece with both 
 hands, the barrel upward, the left thumb extended along 
 the stock, the butt below the right forearm, the small of 
 tlie stock against the body and two inches below the right 
 breast, the muzzle as high as the eye, the left elbow against 
 the side; place, at the same time, the right thumb on the 
 head of the cock, the other fingers under and against the 
 guard. 
 
 173. {Third motion.) Cock, and seize the piece at the 
 FiiKill of the stock without deranging the position of the 
 butt. 
 
 ' 
 
school of the soldier part ii. 41 
 
 Aim. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 174. Raise the piece with both hands, and support the 
 butt against the right shoulder; the left elbow down, the 
 right as hiiib as the shoulder ; incline the head upon the 
 butt, so that the right eye may perceive quickly the notch 
 of the hausse, the front sight and the object aimed at; the 
 left eye closed, the right thumb extended along the stock, 
 the forefinger on the trigger, 
 
 175. When recruits are formed in two ranks to execute 
 the firings, the front, rank men will raise a little less the 
 right elbow, in order to facilitate the aim of the rear rank 
 men. 
 
 176. The rear rank men, in aiming, will each carry the 
 right foot about eight inches to the right, and toward the 
 left heel of the man next on the right, inclining the upper 
 part of the body forward. 
 
 Fire. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 177. Press the forefinger against the trigger, fire, with- 
 out lowering or turning the head, and remain in this po- 
 sition. 
 
 178. Instructors will be careful to observe when the men 
 fire, that they aim at some distinct object, and that the 
 barrel be so directed that the line of fire and the line of 
 sight be in the same, vertical plane. They will often cause 
 
42 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIKR — PART II. 
 
 the firing to be executed ou ground of dilTcrcnt inclinations, 
 in order to a(*'custom the men to fire at objects either above 
 or below them. 
 
 Load. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 179. Bring down the piece with both hands, at the same 
 time face to the front and take the position of load as indi- 
 cated No. 15fi. Each rear rank man will bring his right 
 foot by the side of the left. 
 
 180. The men being in this position, the instructor will 
 cause the loading to be continued by the commands and 
 means prescribed No. 156 and following. 
 
 181. If, after firing, the instructor should not wish the 
 recruits to reload, he will eommand : 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 182. Throw up the piece briskly with the left hand and 
 resume the position of vhuidder arms, at the same time face 
 to the front, turning on the left heel, and bring the right 
 heel on a lino with the left. 
 
 183. To accustom the recruits to wait for the cGmmand 
 Jire, the instructor, when they are in the position of aim. 
 will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THK SOLDIER PART IT. 411 
 
 Recover — Arms. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 184. At the first part of the command, withdraw the 
 finger from the trigger : at the command arms, retake the 
 position of the third motion of ready. 
 
 185. The recruits being in the position of the third mo- 
 tion of readi/. if the instructor shouhl wish to bring them 
 to a shoulder, he will command : 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 186. At the command xhoiilder, place the thumb upon 
 the cock, the forefinger on the trigger, half-cock, and 
 seize the small of the stock with the right hand. At the 
 command arms, bring up the piece briskly to the right 
 shoulder, and retake the position of shoulder arms. 
 
 187. The recruits being at shoulder arms, when the in- 
 structor shall wish to fix bayonets, he will command : 
 
 Fix — Bayonet. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 188. (First motion.) Grasp the piece with the left band 
 *at the height of the shoulder, and detach it slightly from 
 '-the shoulder with the right hand. 
 
 y 189. (Second motion.) Quit the piece with the right hand, 
 
44 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART II. 
 
 lower it with the left hand, opposite the middle of the body, 
 and place the butt between the feet without shock; the 
 rammer to the rear, the barrel vertical, the muzzle three 
 inches from the body ; seize it with the rii^ht hand at the 
 upper band, and carry the left hand reversed to the handle 
 of the sabre-bayonet, 
 
 190. (Third motion.) Draw the sabre-bayonet from the 
 scabbard and fix it on the extremity of the barrel; seize 
 the piece with the left hand, the arm extended, the right 
 hand at the upi)er band. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and ttvo jnotions. 
 
 191. (Firtit ))in(i<»i.) Raise the piece with the left hand 
 and place it against the right shoulder, the rammer to the 
 front ; seize the piece at the same time with the right hand 
 at the swell of the stock, the thumb and forefinger embrac- 
 ing the guard, the right arm nearly extended. 
 
 192. {Second motion.) Drop briskly the left hand by the 
 side. 
 
 Charge — Bayonet. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 193. {FivHt motion.) Raise the piece slightly with the 
 right hand and make a half face to the right on the left 
 heel; place the hollow of the right foot opposite to, and 
 three inches from the left heel, the feet square; seize the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDLER — PART II. 45 
 
 piece at the same time with the left hand a little above the 
 lower band. 
 
 194. {Second motion.) Bring down the piece with both 
 hands, the barrel uppermost, the left elbow against the 
 body ; seize the small of the stock, at the same time, with 
 the right hand, which will be supported against the hip : 
 the point of the sabre-bayonet as high as the eye. 
 
 Shoulder— Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 195. (First motion.) Throw up the piece briskly with the 
 left hand in facing to the front, place it against the right 
 shoulder, the rammer to the front ; turn the right hand so 
 as to embrace the guard, slide the left hand to the height 
 of the shoulder, the right hand nearly extended. 
 
 .196. (Second motion.) Drop the left hand smartly by the 
 side. 
 
 Ti-ail — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 197. (First motion.) The same as the first motion of 
 order arms. 
 
 198. (Second motion.) Incline the muzzle slightly to the 
 front, the butt -to the rear and about four inches from the 
 ground. The right hand supported at the hip, will so hold 
 the piece that the rear rank man may not touch with their 
 bayonets the men in the front rank. 
 
4(i SCHOOL OF THK 80LD1KU — I'AUT II. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 199. At the conimand nhoulder, raise the piece perpen 
 (licularly in the right hand, the little finger in rear of tht 
 barrel; at the command ariuH, execute what has been pre 
 scribed for the vhonlder from the position of order amis. 
 
 Unfix — Bay o net. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 200. {First and ncci>nd motioim.) The same as the first 
 and second motions of fix bayonet, except that, at the end 
 of the second command, the thumb of the right hand will 
 be placed on the spring of the sabre-bayonct, and the left 
 hand will embrace the handle of the sabre-bayonet and the 
 barrel, the thumb extended along the blade. 
 
 201. {7%ird motion.) Press the thumb of the right hand 
 on the spring, wrest off" the sabre-bayonet, turn it to the 
 right, the edge to the front, lower the guard until it 
 touches the right hand, which will seize the back and the 
 edge of the blade between the thumb and first two fingers, 
 the other fingers holding the piece; change the position of 
 the hand without nuitting the handle, return the sabre- 
 bayonet to the scabbard, and seize the piece with the left 
 hand, the arm extcn<led. 
 
^ 
 
SCHOOL OF TUB SOLDIER — PART 11. 4 7 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 202. (First motion.) The same as the first motion from 
 Ji.v bayonet, No. 191. 
 
 203. {Second motion.) Tbe same as the second motion 
 from fix bayonet, No. 192. 
 
 Secure — Arms. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 204. (First motion.) The same as the first motion o^ sup- 
 port arms, No. 133, except with the right hand seize the 
 piece at the small of the stock. 
 
 205. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with both hands, 
 the barrel to the front; bring it opposite the left shoulder, 
 the butt against the hip, the left hand at the lower band, 
 the thumb as high as the chin and extended on the ram- 
 mer ; the piece erect and detached from the shoulder, the 
 left forearm against the piece. 
 
 206. ( Third motion.) Reverse the piece, pass it under the 
 left arm, the left hand remaining at the lower band, the 
 thumb on the rammer to prevent it from sliding out, the 
 little finger resting against the hip, the right hand falling 
 at the same time by the side. 
 
48 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART IL 
 
 Shoulde 
 
 Arms. 
 
 One lime and three jnolions. 
 
 207. (First motion.) Raise the piece with the left han'l, 
 and seize it with the right hand at the small of the stock. 
 The piece erect and detached from the shoulder, the butt 
 against the hip, the left forearm along the piece. 
 
 208. {Second motion.) The same as the second motion of 
 dhoitlder arma from a support, 
 
 209. [Third motiov.) The same as the third motion of 
 Khonldcr anus from « aujijiart. 
 
 Right shoulder shift — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 210. {First viotioii.) Detach tbc jjiecc perpendicularly 
 from the shoulder with the right hand, and seize it with 
 the left between the lower band and guide sight, raise th» 
 piece, the left hand at the height of the shoulder and four 
 inches from it; place, at the same time, the right hand on 
 the butt, the beak between the first two fingers, the other 
 two fingers under the butt plate. 
 
 211. {Second motion.) Quit the piece with tho left hail<)f 
 raise and place the piece on tho right shoulder with the 
 right hand, the lock plate upwards; let fall, at tho same 
 time, the left hand by the side. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART II. 49 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and tioo motions. 
 
 212. {First motion.) Raise the piece perpeudicularly by 
 extending the right arm to its full length, the rammer to 
 the front, at the same time seize the piece with the left 
 hand between the lower band and guide sight. 
 
 213. {Secoud motion.) Quit the butt with the right hand, 
 which will immediately embrace the guard, lower the piece 
 to the position of shoulder arms, slide up the left hand to 
 the height of the shoulder, the fingers extended and closed. 
 Drop the left hand by th^ side. 
 
 214. The men being at support arms, the instructor will 
 sometimes cause pieces to be brought to the right shoulder. 
 To this effect, he will command: 
 
 Right shoulder shift — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 215. {First motion.) Seize the piece with the right hand, 
 below and near the left forearm, place the left hand un- 
 der the butt, the heel of the butt between the first two 
 fingers. 
 
 216. {Second motion.) Turn the piece with the left hand, 
 the lock plate upward, carr}"^ it to the right shoulder, the 
 left hand still holding the butt, the muzzle elevated ; bold 
 the piece in this position and place the right band upon 
 
.jO SCHOOL OK THE SOJ.DIKK PART II. 
 
 the butt lis is prescri])ed Xo. 210, aud let fall the left baud 
 by tbe side. 
 
 Support — Arms. 
 One time and tico motions. 
 
 217. {First motion.) The pame as the first motion of 
 xhouldcr arms, No. 212. 
 
 218. {Second motion.) Turn tbe piece with both bands, 
 the barrel to the front, carry it opposite tbe left shoulder, 
 slip the right band to the small of the stock, place tbe left 
 forearm extended on tbe breast as is presci'ibed No. 134, 
 and let fall the right band by the side. 
 
 Arms — At will. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 219. At this comuiuiul. carry the piece at pleasure on 
 either shoulder, with one ur both hands, tbe muzzle ele- 
 vated. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 220. At this eomiuaud, retake (juickly the position of 
 shoulder arms. 
 
 221. The recruits being at ordered arms, when tbe in- 
 structor shall wish to cause the pieces to be placed on the 
 ground, he will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART II. 51 
 
 Ground — Arm s . 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 222. {Firat motion.) Turn the piece with the right hand, 
 the barrel to the left, at the same time seize the cartridge 
 box with the left hand, bend the body, advance the left 
 foot, the heel opposite the lower band; lay the piece on the 
 ground with the right hand, the toe of the butt on a line 
 with the right toe, the knees slightly bent, the right heol 
 raised. 
 
 223. {Second motion.) Rise up, bring the left foot by the 
 side of the right, quit the cartridge box with the left hand, 
 and drop the hands by the side. 
 
 Raise — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 22-4. (First motion.) Seize the cartridge box with the left 
 hand, bend the body, advance the left. foot opposite the 
 lower band, and seize the piece with the right hand. 
 
 225. (Second tnotion.) Raise the piece, bringing the left 
 foot by the side of the right; turn the piece with the right 
 hand, the rammer to the front; at the same time quit the 
 cartridge box with the left hand, and drop this hand by 
 the side. 
 
 Inspection of arms. 
 
 226. The recruits being at ordered arms, and having the 
 
52 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART IL 
 
 saljrc-bayonct in the scahbard, if the instructor wishes to 
 cause an inspection of arms, he will command: 
 
 Inspection — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 227. {First motion.) Seize the j.iece with the left hand 
 V/olow and near the upper band, carry it with both hands 
 opposite the middle of the body, the butt between the feet, 
 the rammer to the rear, the barrel vertical, the muzzle 
 about three inches from the body ; carry the left hand re- 
 versed to the sabre-bayonet, draw it from the scabbard and 
 fix it on the barrel ; grasp the piece with the left hand be- 
 low and near the upper band, seize the rammer with the 
 thumb and forefinger of the right hand bent, the other 
 tingers closed. 
 
 228. (Second motion.) Draw the rammer as has been 
 explained in loading, and let it glide to the bottom of the 
 bore, replace the piece with the left hand opposite the right 
 shoulder, and retake the position of ordered arms. 
 
 229. The instructor will then inspect in succession the 
 piece of each recruit, in passing along the front of the 
 rank. Each, as the instructor reaches him, will raise 
 smartly his piece with his right hand, seize it with the left 
 between the lower band and guide sight, the lock to the 
 front, the loft hand at the height of the chin, the piece op- 
 posite to the left eye; the instructor will take it with the 
 right hand at the handle, and, after inspecting it, will re- 
 turn it to the recruit who will receive it back with the right 
 hand, and replace it in the position of ordered arms. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART II. O.) 
 
 2^0. When the instructor shall have passed him, each 
 recruit will retake the position prescribed 'it the command 
 ■Insiiecfion of arms, return the rammer and resume the posi- 
 tion of nrdrred nrms. 
 
 231. If, instead of inspection of arms, the instructor 
 should merely wish to cause bayonets to be fixed, he will 
 command : 
 
 Fix — Bayonet. 
 
 232. Take the position indicated in No. 227, fix bayonets 
 as has been explained, and immediately resume the posi- 
 tion of ordered arms. 
 
 233. If it be the wish of the instructor, after firing, to 
 ascertain whether the pieces have been discharged, he will 
 command: 
 
 Spring — Ram m e r « 
 
 234. Put the rammer in the barrel as has been explained 
 above, and immediately retake the position of ordered 
 arms. 
 
 235. The instructor, for the purpose stated, can take thq 
 rammer by the small end and spring it in the barrel, or 
 cause each recruit to make it ring in the barrel. 
 
 236. Each recruit, after the instructor passes him, will 
 i*eturn rammer and resume the position of ordered arms. 
 
54 SCHOOL or thk soldieu — vxnr ii. 
 
 Remarks on the Manual of Arms. 
 
 2'M. The manual of arms frc((aently distorts the persous 
 of recruits before they acquire ease and contiilcnce in the 
 several positions. The instructoi-s will, therefore, fre- 
 quently recur to elementar}' principles in the course of the 
 lessons. 
 
 238. Recruits are also extremely liable to curve the 
 sides and back, and to derange tlie shouldors. especially in 
 loading. Consequently, the instructor will not cause them 
 to dwell too long at a time in one position. 
 
 239. When, after some days of exercise in the manual 
 of arms, the four men shall be well established in their 
 use, the instructor will always terminate the lesson by 
 marching the men for some time in one rank, and at one 
 pace apart, in common and quick time, in order to confirm 
 them more and more in the mechanism of the step ; he 
 will also teach them to mark time and to change step, 
 which will be executed in the following manner: 
 
 To mark time. 
 
 240. The four men marcdiing in the direct step, the 
 instructor will command: 
 
 1. Mark lime. 2. Makcii. 
 
 241. At the second command, which will be given at the 
 instant a foot is coming to the ground, the recruits will 
 make a semblance of marcliin.Lr. by bringing the heels by 
 
SCHOOL OF TllK SOLDIER PART II. 55 
 
 the side of each other, and observing the cadence of the 
 step, by raising each foot alternately without advancing. 
 
 2-t2. The instructor witching the direct step to be resumed, 
 will command : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 2-13. At the second command, which will be given as 
 prescribed above, the recruits will retake the step of twenty- 
 eight inches. 
 
 To change step. 
 
 244. The squad being in march, the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Change step. 2. March. 
 
 245. At the second command, which will be given at the 
 instant either foot is coming to the ground, bring the foot 
 which is in rear by the side of that which is in front, and 
 step off again with the foot which Avas in front. 
 
 To march hackwards. 
 
 246. The instructor wishing the squad to march back- 
 wards, will command : 
 
 1. Squad backward. 2. March. 
 
 2i7. At the second command, the recruits will step off 
 smartly with the left foot fourteen inches to the rear, reck- 
 onino- from heel to- heel, and so on with the feet in succes- 
 
."^n SCHOOL OF TirE SOLDIKK — PART II. 
 
 sion till the command h<tlf, which will always bo preceded 
 by the caution Hquad. Tho men will halt at this command, 
 and bring back tho foot in front by the side of the other. 
 
 248. This step will always be executed in quick time. 
 
 249. The instructor will be watchful that the recruits 
 march straight to the rear, and that the erect position of 
 the body and the piece be not deranged. 
 
 Lesson III. 
 To load in four times. 
 
 250. The object of this lesspu is to prepare tho recruits 
 to load at will, and to cause them to distinguish the times 
 which require the greatest regularity and attention, such 
 as chari/e cartridye, ram cartridcje and prime. It will be 
 divided as follows: 
 
 251. The first time will be executed at the end of the 
 command; the three others at the commands two, thrte 
 and four. 
 
 The infrtructor will command: 
 
 1. Load in four times. 2. Load. 
 
 252. Execute the times to include charge cartridge. 
 
 Two. 
 
 25.3. Execute the times to include ram cartridge. 
 
I 
 
 school of the soldier — part ii. 57 
 Three. 
 
 254. Exeqjate the times to include prime. 
 
 Four. 
 
 255. Execute the time of shovldcr arms. 
 
 To load at will. 
 
 256. The instructor will next teach loading at will, 
 which will be executed as loading in four times, but con- 
 tinued, and without resting on either of the times. He 
 will command : 
 
 1. Load at loill. 2. Load. 
 
 257. The instructor will habituate the recruits, by de- 
 grees, to load with the greatest possible promptitude, each 
 without regulating himself by his neighbor, and above all 
 without waiting for him. 
 
 258. The cadence prescribed No. 129, is not applicable 
 to loading in four times, or at will. 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 Firings. 
 
 259. The firings are direct or oblique, and will be exe- 
 cuted as follows : 
 
58 SCHOOL OF TIIK SOLDIKU — PAUT II. 
 
 The direct fire. 
 
 » 
 
 260. The instructor will give the follnwing coiunninds : 
 
 1 . Fire h)j stpiarL 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Aim. 
 0. Fire. 6. Load. 
 
 261. These several coiniuands will be executed as has 
 been prescribed in the Manual of Arms. At the third 
 command, the men will come to the position of ready^ as 
 horetofure explained. At the fourth they will aim accord- 
 ing to the rank in which each may find himself placed, the 
 rear rank men inclining forward a little the upper part of 
 the body, in order that their pieces may reach as much 
 beyond the front rank as possible. 
 
 262. At the sixth command, they will load their pieces 
 and return immediately to the position of ready. 
 
 263. The instructor will recominoncc the firing by the 
 commands : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Aim. 3. Fiuk. 4. Load. 
 
 264. When the instructor wishes tlui tiling to cease, he 
 will conmiauJ : 
 
 Cease firinrj. 
 
 •265. At this command, the men wiH cease firing, but 
 will load their pieces if unloaded, and, afterward, bring 
 them to a shoulder. 
 
«CIIOOL OF THE SOLDIER PART II. 59 
 
 Oblique Jirings. 
 
 266. The o'blique firings will be executed to the right 
 and left, and by the same commands as the direct fire, 
 with this single difference — the common aim will always 
 be preceded by the caution, right or left oblique. 
 
 Position of the two ranks in the Oblique Fire to the 
 right. 
 
 267. At the command ready, the two ranks will execute 
 what has been prescribed for the direct fire. 
 
 268. At the cautionary command, riijht oblique, the two 
 ranks will throw back the right shoulder and look steadily 
 at the object to be hit. 
 
 269. At the command aim, each front rank man will aim 
 to the right without deranging the feet; each rear rank 
 man will advance the left foot about eight inches toward 
 
 .the right heel of the man next on the right of his file 
 'leader and aim to the right, inclining the upper part of 
 , ^the body forward and bending a little the left knee. 
 
 i' .. ■ . '. . 
 
 Position of the two ranks in the Oblique Fire to the 
 left. 
 
 270. At the cautionary command, left oblique, the two 
 ranks will throw back the loft shoulder and look steadily 
 at the object to be hit. 
 
 271. At the command aim, the front rank will take aim 
 to the left without deranging the feet ; each man in the 
 
(•" SCIIOOI. OF THE SOLDIEK — PART II. 
 
 rear rank will advance the right foot about ciglit incbcs 
 toward the right heel of the man next on the right of his 
 file leader, and aim to the left, iueliniug the upper part of 
 the body forward and bending a little the right knee. 
 
 272. In both cases, at the command load, the men of 
 each rank will come to the position of load as prescribed 
 in the direct lire; the rear rank men bringing back the 
 fout which is to the right and front by the side of the other. 
 Each man will continue to load as if isolated. 
 
 To Jire hy fie. 
 
 273. The fire by file will be executed by the two ranks, 
 the files of which will fire successively, and without regu- 
 lating on each other, except for the first fire. 
 
 274. The instructor will command: 
 
 1. Fire hij file. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Com- 
 mence FIRING. 
 
 275. At the third command, the two ranks will take the 
 position prescribed in the direct tire. 
 
 276. At the fourth command, the file on the right will I 
 aim and fire ; the rear rank man in aiming will take the 
 position indicated No. 176. 
 
 277. The men of this file will load their pieces briskly 
 and fire a second time ; reload and fire again, and 80 on 
 in continuation. 
 
 278. The second file will aim, at the instant the first 
 brings down pieces to reload, and will conform in all re- 
 spects to that which has just been prescribed for the first 
 file. 
 
 JkL 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART IL 61 
 
 279. After tlie first fire, the front and rear rank men will 
 not be required to fire at the same time. 
 
 280. Each man, after loading, will return to the position 
 of ready, and continue the fire. 
 
 281. When the instructor wishes the fire to cease, he will 
 command : 
 
 Cease — Firing. 
 
 282. At this command, the men will cease firing. If 
 they have fired they will load their pieces and bring them 
 to a shoulder ; if at the position of ready, they will half- 
 cock and shoulder arms. If in the position of aim, they 
 will bring down their pieces, half-cock, and shoulder arms. 
 
 To fre hy rank. 
 
 2S3. The fire by rank will be executed by each entire 
 rank, alternately. 
 
 284. The instructor will command: 
 
 1. Fire hy rank. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Rear 
 rank. 5. Aim. 6. Fire. 7. Load. 
 
 285. At the third command, the two ranks will take the 
 position of ready^ as prescribed in the direct fire, 
 
 286. At the seventh command, the rear rank will exe- 
 cute that which has been prescribed in the direct fire, and 
 
 \ afterward take the position of ready. 
 4 
 
G2 SCHOOL OI-" the soi.diek — i'akt ii. 
 
 287. As soon as the insti-uctor sees several men of liic 
 rear rank in the position of ready, he will command : 
 
 1. Front rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fiuk. 4. Load. 
 
 288. At these commands, the men in the front rank will 
 execute what has been prcscrilieil for the rear rank, hut 
 they will not step off with the right foot. 
 
 289. The instructor will recommence the firing by the 
 rear rank, and will thus continue to alternate from rank lu 
 rank, until he shall wish the firing to cease, when he will 
 command, cense firing, which will be executed as hereto- 
 fore prescribed. 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 To fire and load kneeling. 
 
 290. In this exercise the .sijiiad will be suiiposcd loadeil 
 and drawn up in one rank. Tlic instruction will bo given 
 to each man individually, without times or motions, and in 
 the following manner. 
 
 291. The instructor will comuiand : 
 
 Fire and load kneelixg. 
 
 292. At this command, the man on the right of the squad 
 will move forward three paces and halt; then carry the 
 right foot to the rear and to the right of the left heel, and 
 in a position convenient for placing the right knee upon 
 
^2 
 
 7V^, 
 
■fi^ 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART II. 63 
 
 the ground in bending the left leg: place the right knee 
 upon the ground; lower the piece, the left forearm sup- 
 ported upon the thigh on the same side, the right hand on 
 the small of the stock, the butt resting on the right thigh, 
 the left hand supporting the piece near the lower band. 
 
 293. He will next move the right leg to the left around 
 the knee supported on the ground, until this leg is nearly 
 perpendicular to the direction of the left foot, and thus seat 
 himself comfortably on the right heel. 
 
 29i. Raise the piece with the right hand and support it 
 with the left, holding it near the lower band, the left elbow 
 resting on the left thigh near the knee; seize the hammer 
 with the thumb, the forefinger under the guard, cock and 
 ?eize the piece at the small of the stock; bring the piece 
 to the shoulder, aim audi fire. 
 
 295. Bring the piece down as soon as it is fired, and sup- 
 port it with the left hand, the butt resting against the right 
 thigh ; carry the piece to the rear rising on the knee, the 
 barrel downward, the butt resting on the ground; in this 
 position support the piece with the left hand at the upper 
 band, draw cartridge with the right and load the piece, 
 ramming the ball, if necessary, with both hands. 
 
 296. When loaded bring the piece to the front with the 
 left hand, which holds it at the upper band ; seize it at the 
 same time with the right hand at the small of the stock; 
 turn the piece, the barrel uppermost and nearly horizontal, 
 the left elbow resting on the left thigh ; half-cock, remove 
 the old cap and prime, rise and return to the ranks. 
 
 297. The second man will then be taught what has just 
 been prescribed for the first, and so on through the remain- 
 der of the squad. 
 
CI SCHOOL or the soldikr — part ii. 
 
 To fire and load lying. 
 
 29S. In this exercise the squad will be in one rank anil 
 loaded; the instruction will be given individually and with- 
 out times or motions. 
 
 299. The instructor will command: 
 
 Fire and load lying. 
 
 / 
 
 300. At this command, the man on the right of the squad 
 will move forward three paces and halt; he will then bring 
 his piece to an order, drop on both knees, and place him- 
 self on the ground flat on his belly. In this position be 
 will support the piece nearly horizontal with the left hand, 
 holding it near the lower band, the butt end of the piece 
 and the left elbow resting on the ground, the barrel upper- 
 most; cock the piece with the right hand, and carry this 
 hand to the small of the stock ; raise the piece with both 
 hands, firess the butt against the shoulder, and resting on 
 both elbows, aim ami fire. 
 
 30). As soon as he has fired, bring the piece down and 
 turn upon his left side, still resting on his left elbow; bring 
 back the piece until the cock is opposite his breast, the butt 
 end resting on the ground; take out a cartridge with the 
 right lian<l ; seize the small of the stock with this hand, 
 holding the cartridge with the thumb and two first fingers; 
 he will then throw himself on his back, still holding the 
 piece with both hands; carry the piece to the rear, place 
 the butt between the heels, the barrel up, the muzzle ele- 
 
.dSms.iL.^Mm.M 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART II. 65 
 
 vated. In this position, charge cartritlge, draw rammer, 
 ram cartridge, and return rammer. 
 
 302. When finished loading, the man will turn again 
 upon his left side, remove the old cap and prime, then raise 
 the piece vertically, rise, turn about, and resume his posi- 
 tion in the ranks. 
 
 303. The second man will be taught what has just been 
 prescribed for the first, and so On throughout the squad. 
 
 Lesson VI. 
 Bayonet Exercise. 
 
 304. The bayonet exercise in this book will be confined 
 to two movements, the (jiiard against infautit/, and the 
 guard against cavalry. The men will be placed in one 
 rank, with two paces interval, and being at shoulder arms, 
 the instructor will command: 
 
 1. Guard against Infantry. 2. Guard. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 305. {First motion.) Make a half face to the right, turn- 
 ing on both heels, the feet square to each other; at the 
 same time raise the piece slightly, and seize it with the 
 left hand above and near the lower band. 
 
G6 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART II. 
 
 oOG. {Second ?noti<)U.) Carry the riglit foot twenty inches 
 perpendicularly to the rear, the right heel on the prolonga- 
 tion of the left, the knees glightly bent, the weight of the 
 body resting equally on both legs ; lower the piece with 
 both hands, the barrel uppermost, the left elbow against 
 the body; seize the piece at the same time with the right 
 hand at the small of the stock, the arms falling naturally, 
 the point of the bayonet slightly elevated. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 307. Throw up the piece with the left hand, and place it 
 against the right shoulder, at the same time bring the 
 right heel by the side of the left, and face to the front. 
 
 1. Guard against Camlry. 2. Guard. 
 One time and two motijns. 
 
 308. Both motions the same as for (/iiard arjaiimt in/ n- 
 try, e.vcept that the right hand will be supported against 
 the hip, and the bayonet held at the height of the eye, as 
 
 in chanjc bai/unet. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART III. 67 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 309. Spring up the piece with the left haud and place it 
 against the right shoulder, at the same time bring the 
 right heel hy the side of the left, and face to the front. 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 310. AVhcn the recruits arc well established in the j^rZ/i- 
 eiple8 and lueclutnism of the ntep, the position of the body, 
 and the hkidiuiI <f arms, the instructor will unite eight 
 men, at least, and twelve men, at most, in order to teach, 
 them the principles of alignment, the principles of the 
 touch of elbows in marching to the front, the principles of 
 the march by the flank, wheeling from a halt, wheeling in 
 marching, and the change of direction to the side of the 
 guide. He will place the squad in one rank, elbow to 
 elbow, and number the men from right to left. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 Alignments. 
 
 311. The irstructor will at first teach the recruits to 
 align themselves man by man, in order the better to make 
 
 ,Jk. 
 
G8 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART HI. 
 
 them comprehend the principles of alignment; to this end 
 he will command the two men on the right flank to march 
 two paces to the front, and having aligned them, he will 
 caution the remainder of the squad to move up, as they 
 may be successively called, each by his number, and align 
 themselves successively on the line of the first two men. 
 
 iU2. Each recruit, as designated by his number, will 
 turn the head and eyes to the right as prescribed in the 
 first lesson of the first part, and will march in quicic time 
 two paces foricard, shortening the last, so as to find him- 
 self about six inches behind the new alignment, which he 
 ought never to pass, he will next move up steadily by steps 
 of two or three inches, the hams extended, to the side of 
 the man next to him on the alignment, so that, without 
 deranging the head, the line of the eyes, or that of the 
 shoulders, he may find himself in the exact lino of his 
 neiglibor, whose elbow he will lightly touch without open- 
 ing his own. 
 
 313. The instructor seeing the rank well ali;^ned, will 
 command : 
 
 Froxt. 
 
 314. At this, the recruits will turn eyes to the front, and 
 remain firm. 
 
 315. Alignments to the left will be executed on the same 
 principles. 
 
 310. When the recruits shall have thus learned to align 
 themselves man by man, correctly, and Avithout groping or 
 jostling, the instructor will cause the entire rank to align 
 itself at once by the command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— ^PAKT III. 69 
 
 Right (or left) — Dress. 
 
 317. At this, the rank, except the two men placed in 
 advance as a basis of alignment, will move up in quick 
 time, and place themselves on the new line, according to 
 the principles prescribed No. 312. 
 
 318. The instructor, placed five or six paces in front, 
 and facing the rank, will carefully observe that the prin- 
 ciples are followed, and then pass to the flank that has 
 served as the basis, to verify the alignment. 
 
 319. The instructor, seeing the greater number of the 
 rank aligned, will command : 
 
 Froxt. 
 
 320. The instructor may afterwards order this or that 
 ^\q foricnrd or back, designating each by its number. The 
 file or files designated, only, will slightly turn the head 
 toward the basis, to judge how much they ought to move 
 up or back, steadily place themselves on the line, and then 
 turn eyes to the front, without a particular command to 
 that eflFect. 
 
 321. Alignments to the rear will be executed on the 
 same principles, the recruits stepping back a little beyond 
 the line, and then dressing up according to the principles 
 prescribed No. 312, the instructor commanding: 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOr.DIKU — I'AIJT III. 
 
 lihjht (or lefi) backward — Drkss. 
 
 322. After each alignment, the iustructDi- will exaiuim' 
 the po«ition of the men, and cause tlio rank to como to 
 ordered arms, to prevent too mucli f 'tiguc, anil also tbe 
 'langer of ncglijirence at vlioitlih-rcd arms. 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 .32."). The men having learued, in the fir.-;t and second 
 parts, to march with steadiuess iu common time, and to 
 take steps ejjual in length and swiftness, will be exercised 
 in the third part onl}' iu quick time, double quick time, and 
 the run ; the instructor will cause them to execute succes- 
 sively, at these different gaits, the march to the front, the 
 facing about in marching, the march by the flank, the 
 wheels at a halt and in marching, and tlio changes of 
 direction to the side of the guide. 
 
 32-1. The instructor will inform the recruits tliat at the 
 command m<uch, they will always niovo off in quick time, 
 unless this cdmniand should bo preceded by that of double 
 7 "'■'■''•• 
 
 7'o march to the front. 
 
 325. The rank being correctly aligned, wlien the in- 
 structor shall wish to cause it to march by the front, he 
 will place a well-instructed man on the right or the left, 
 according to the side on which he may wish the guide to 
 be, and command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIKR — PAKT III. 71 
 
 1. Squad., forioard. 2. Guide right (ov left.') 
 3. Maucii. 
 
 326. At the comrnand march, the rank will step off 
 smartly with the left foot; the guide will take care to 
 march straight to the front, keeping his shoulders always 
 in a square with that line. 
 
 327. The instructor will observe, in marching to the 
 front, that the men touch lightly the elbow toward the 
 side of the guide ; that they do not open out the left 
 elbow, nor the right arm ; that they yield to pressure com- 
 ing from the side of the guide, and resist that coming 
 from the opposite side; that they recover by insensible 
 degrees the slight touch of the elbow, if lost ; that they 
 maintain the head direct to the front, no matter on which 
 side the guide may be; and if found before or behind the 
 alignment, that the man in fault corrects himself by 
 shortening or lengthening the step, by degrees, almost 
 insensible. 
 
 328. The instructor will labor to cause recruits to com- 
 prehend that the alignment can only be preserved, in 
 marching, by the regularity of the step, the touch of the 
 elbow, and the maintenance of the shoulders in a square 
 witlj the line of direction ; that if, for example, the step 
 of some be longer than that of others, or if some march 
 faster than others, a separation of elbows, and a loss of 
 the alignment, would be inevitable; that if (it being re- 
 quired that the head should be direct to the front) they do 
 not strictly observe the touch of elbows, it would be im- 
 
72 SCHOOL OF THE soldier — PART III. 
 
 possible for an individual to judge whetlier be marches 
 abreast with his neighbor, or not, and whether there bo 
 not an interval between them. 
 
 329. The impulsion of the quick step having a tendeniy 
 to make men too easy and free in their movements, the 
 instructor will be careful to regulate the cadence of this 
 step, and to habituate them to preserve always the erectness 
 of the body, and the due length of the pace. 
 
 330. The men being well established in the principles of 
 the direct march, the instructor will exorcise them in 
 marching obliquely'. The rank being in march, the in- 
 structor will command : 
 
 1. llujlit (or l(>ft) oblique. 2. INIarch. ' 
 
 331. At the second command, each man will make a 
 half face to the right (or left), and will then march straight 
 forward in the now direction. As the men no longer touch 
 elbows, they will glance along the shoulders of the nearest 
 files, toward the side to which they are obliquing, and will 
 regulate their steps so that the shoulders shall always be 
 behind that of their next neighbor on that side, and that 
 his head shall conceal the heads of the other men in the 
 rank. Besides this, the men should preserve the same 
 length of pace, and the same degree of obliquity. 
 
 332. The instructor, wishing to resume the primitive 
 direction, will command : 
 
 1. Forimrd. 2. March. 
 
 333. At the second command, each man will make a 
 half face to the left (or right), and all will then march 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART IIL 73 
 
 straight to the front, conforming to the principles of the 
 direct march. 
 
 To march to the front in double quick time. 
 
 334. When the several principles, heretofore explained, 
 have become familiar to the recruits, and they shall be well 
 established in the position of the body, the bearing of 
 arms, and the mechanism, length, and swiftness of the 
 step, the instructor will pass them from quick to double 
 quick time, and the reverse, observing not to make them 
 march obliquely in double quick time, till they are well 
 established in tbe cadence of this step. 
 
 335. The squad being at a march in quick time, the in- 
 structor will command : 
 
 1. Double quick. 2. March. 
 
 33G. At the command march, which will be given when 
 cither foot is coming to the ground, the squad will step oflf 
 in double quick time. The men will endeavor to follow 
 the principles laid down in the first part of this book, and 
 to preserve the alignment. 
 
 337. When the instructor wishes the squad to resume 
 the step in quick time, he will command : 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. March. 
 
 338. At the command march, which will be given when 
 either foot ia* coming to the ground, the squad will retake 
 the step in quick time. 
 
 339. The squad being in march, the instructor will halt 
 5 
 
74 SCHOOL or T^^: soldikr — part hi. 
 
 it hy the commands and means prescribed Nos. 98 and 99. 
 The command halt, will be given an instant before the foot 
 is ready to be placed on the ground. 
 
 340. The squad being in march in double quick time, 
 the instructor will occasionally cause it to mark time by 
 the commands prescribed No. 240. The men will then 
 mark double (juick time, without altering the cadence of 
 the step. Ue will also cause them to pass from the direct 
 to the oblique step, and reciprocally, confurming to what 
 has been prcscril)ed No. 330, and following. 
 
 341. The squad being at a halt, the instructor will cause 
 it to march in double quick time, by preceding the com- 
 mand march, by double quick. 
 
 342. The instructor will endeavor to regulate well the 
 cadence of this step. 
 
 To face about in marching. 
 
 343. If the squad be marching in quick, or double quick 
 time, and the instructor should wish to march it in retreat, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. Squad right about. 2. March. 
 
 344. At the command march, which will be given at the 
 instant the left foot is coming to the ground, the recruit 
 will bring this foot to the ground, and turning on it, will 
 face to the rear; he will then place the right foot in the 
 new direction, and step off with the left foot. i 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART IIL 
 
 To march backwards. 
 
 345. The squad being at a halt, if the instructor should 
 wish to march it in the back step, he will command : 
 
 1. Squad backward. 2. Guide left (or right). 
 3. March. 
 
 346. The back step will be executed by the means pre- 
 scribed No. 247. 
 
 347. The instructor, in this step, will be watchful that 
 the men do not lean on each other. 
 
 348. As the march to the front in quick time should only- 
 he executed at shouldered arms, the instructor, in order 
 not to fatigue the men too much, and also to prevent neg- 
 ligence in gait and position, will halt the squad from time 
 to time, and cause arms to be ordered. 
 
 349. In marching at double quick time, the men will al- 
 ways carry their pieces on the rifjht shoulder, or at a trail. 
 This ride is tjeneral. 
 
 350. If the instructor shall wish the pieces carried at a 
 trail, he will give the command trail arms, before the com- 
 mand double quick. If, on the contrary, this command be 
 not given, the men will shift their pieces to the right 
 shoulder at the command double quick. In either case, at 
 the command halt, the men will bring their pieces to the 
 position of shoulder arms. This ride is general. 
 
76 SCHOOL or THE SOLDIKJl — I'ART III. 
 
 Lesson III. 
 
 The march by the jlank. 
 
 351. The rank being at a halt, and correctly aligned, 
 the instructor will comniantl : 
 
 1. Squad, right — Face. 2. Forward. 3. March. 
 
 362. At the last part of the first command, the rank will 
 face to the right; the even numbered men, after facing to 
 the right, will stop quickly to the right side of the odd 
 numbered men, the latter standing fast, so that when the 
 movement is executed, the men will be formed into files of 
 two men abreast. 
 
 353. At the third command, the squad will step oil' 
 smartly with the left foot; the files keeping aligned, and 
 preserving tlieir intervals. 
 
 354. The march by the left flank will be executed by the 
 same commands, substituting the word left for right, and 
 by inverse means; in this case, the even numbered men, 
 after facing to the left, will stand fast, and the odd num- 
 bered will place themselves on their left. 
 
 355. The instructor will place a well-instructed soldier 
 by the side of the recruit who is at the head of the rank, 
 to regulate the step, and to conduct him ; and it will be 
 enjoined on this recruit to march always elbow to elbow 
 with the soldier. 
 
 356. The instructor will cause to be observed in the 
 march, by the flank, the following rules : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART III. 77 
 
 That the stej) he executed according to the principles pre- 
 scribed for the direct step ; 
 
 Because these principles, without which men placed 
 elbow to elbow, in the same rank, cannot preserve unity 
 and harmony of movement, are of a more necessary ob- 
 servance in marching in file. 
 
 That the head of the man who immediately precedes, covers 
 the heads of all who are in front; 
 
 Because it is the most certain rule by which each man 
 may maintain himself in the exact line of the file. 
 
 367. The instructor will place himself habitually five or 
 six paces on the flank of the rank marching in file, to 
 watch over the execution of the principles prescribed 
 above. He will also place himself sometimes in its rear, 
 halt, and suflfcr it to pass fifteen or twenty paces, the better 
 to see whether the men cover each other accurately. 
 
 358. When he shall wish to halt the rank, marching by 
 the flank, and to cause it to face to the front, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 o59. At the second command, the rank will halt, and 
 afterward no man will stir, although he may have lost 
 his distance. This prohibition is necessary, to habituate 
 the men to a constant preservation of their distances. 
 
 360. At the third command, each man will front by 
 
/8 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART III. 
 
 facing to the left, if murchinf; by tbc right Hank, and by a 
 face to the right, if marching by the loft flank. The rear 
 rank men will at the same time move quickly into their 
 places, so as to form the squad again into one rank. 
 
 361. When the men have become accustomed to march- 
 ing by the flank, the instructor will cause them to change 
 direction by file j for this purpose, he will connnand: 
 
 1. By fie left (or right.) 2. ISIarch. 
 
 362. At the command march, the first file will change 
 direction to the left (or right) in describing a small arc of 
 a circle, and will then march straight forward ; the two 
 men of this file, in wheeling, will keep up the touch of the 
 elbows, and the man on the side to which the wheel is 
 made, will shorten the first three or four steps. Each file 
 will come successively to wheel on the same spot where 
 that which preceded it wheeled. 
 
 363. The instructor will also cause the squad to face by 
 the right or left flank in marching, and for this purpose 
 will command : 
 
 1. Squad by the left {or right) flank. 2. March. 
 
 364. At the second command, which will bo given a lit- 
 tle before either foot comes to the ground, the recruits will 
 turn the body, plant the foot that is raised in the new di- 
 rection, and step ofi" with the other foot without altering 
 the cadence of the step; the men will double or undouble 
 rapidly. ^^ 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART III. 79 
 
 365. If, in facing by the right or the left flank, the squad 
 should face to the rear, the men will come into one rank, 
 agreeably to the principles indicated No. 360. It is to be 
 remarked that it is the men who are in rear who always 
 move up to form into single rank, and in such manner as 
 never to invert the order of the numbers in the rank. 
 
 366. If, when the squad has been faced to the rear, the 
 instructor should cause it to face by the left flank, it is 
 the even numbers who will double by moving to the left of 
 the odd numbers ; but if by the right flank, it is the odd 
 numbers who will double to the right of the even numbers. 
 
 367. This lesson, like the preceding one, will be prac- 
 ticed with pieces at a shoulder; but the instructor may, to 
 give relief by change, occasionally order support armx, 
 and he will require of the recruits marching in this posi- 
 tion, as much regularity as in the former. 
 
 The march hy the Jlank in double quick time. 
 
 368. The principles of the march by the flank in double 
 quick time, are the same as in quick time. The instructor 
 will give the commands prescribed No. 351, taking care 
 always to give the command double quick before that of 
 VI arch. 
 
 369. He will pay the greatest attention to the cadence 
 of the step. 
 
 370. The instructor will cause the change of direction, 
 and the march by the flank, to be executed in double quick 
 time, by the same commands, and according to the same 
 principles, as in quick time. 
 
«U SCIIQOL or TIIK SOLDIER— PART III. 
 
 371. The instructor will cause the pieces to be carried 
 cither on the right shoulder or at a trail. 
 
 372. The instructor will sometimes march the squad by 
 the flank, without doubling the files. 
 
 373. The principles of this march are the same as in 
 two ranks, and it will always be executed in quick time. 
 
 374. The instructor will give the commands prescribed 
 No. 351, but he will be careful to caution the squad not to 
 double files. 
 
 37o. The instructor will be watchful that the men do 
 not bend their knees unequally, which would cause them 
 to tread on the heels of the men in front, and also to lose 
 the cadence of the step and their distances. 
 
 376. The various movements in this lesson will be exe- 
 cuted in single rank. In the changes of direction, the 
 leading man will change direction without altering the 
 length or the cadence of the step. The instructor will 
 recall to the attention of the men, that in facing by the 
 right or left flank in marching, they will not double, but 
 march in one rank. 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 WHEELINGS. 
 
 General principles of Wheeling. 
 
 377. Wheelings are of two kinds: from halts, or on 
 fixed pivots, and in march, or on moveable pivots. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER PART III. 81 
 
 378. Wheeliog on a fixed pivot takes place in passing a 
 corps from the order in battle to the order in column, or 
 from the latter to the former. 
 
 379. Wheels in marching take place in changes of direc- 
 tion in column, as often as this movement is executed to 
 the side opposite to the guide. 
 
 380. In wheels from a halt, the pivot-man only turns in 
 his place, without advancing or receding. 
 
 381. In the wheels in marching, the pivot takes steps of 
 nine or eleven inches, according as the squad is marching 
 in quick or double quick time, so as to clear the wheeling 
 point, which is necessary, in order that the subdivisions of 
 a column may change direction without losing their dis- 
 tances, as will be explained in the school of the company. 
 
 382. The man on the wheeling flank will take the full 
 step of twenty-eight inches, or thirty-three inches, accord- 
 ing to the gait. 
 
 Wheeling from a halt, or on a fixed point. 
 
 383. The rank being at a halt, the instructor will place 
 a well-instructed man on the wheeling flank to conduct it, 
 and then command : 
 
 1. By squad, right ivheel. 2 March. 
 
 384. At the second command, the rank will step off" with 
 the left foot, turning at the same time the head a little to 
 the left, the eyes fixed on the line of the eyes of the men 
 to their leftj the pivot-man will merely mark time in 
 gradually turning his body, in order to conform himself to 
 
82 SCHOOL OF TUE SOLDIEU — PAUT III. 
 
 the movement of the marching flank; the man who con- 
 ducts this flank will take steps of twenty-eif^ht inches, and 
 from the first step advance a little the left shoulder, cast 
 his eyes from time to time along the rank and feel con- 
 stantly the elbow of the next man lightly, but never push 
 him. 
 
 385. The other men will feel lightly the elbow of the 
 next man, towards the pivot, resist pressure coming from 
 the opposite side, and each will conform himself to the 
 marching flank — shortening his step according to his ap- 
 proximation to the pivot. 
 
 3SC. The instructor will make the rank wheel round the 
 circle once or twice before halting, in order to cause the 
 principles to be the better understood, and he will be watch- 
 ful that the centre does not break. 
 
 387. Ho will cause the wheel to the left to be executed 
 according to the same principles. 
 
 388. When the instructor shall wish to arrest the wheel, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 389. At the second command, the rank will halt and no 
 man stir. The instructor, going to the flank opposite the 
 pivot, will place the two outer men of that flank in the 
 direction he may wish to give to the rank, without, how- 
 ever, displacing the pivot, who will conform the line of his 
 shoulders to this direction. The instructor will take care 
 to have between these two men and the pivot, only the 
 space necessary to contain the other men. Ho will then 
 command: 
 
SCHOOL OF THE S0LDIP:R — PART III. 83 
 
 Left (or right) — Dress. 
 
 390. At this the rank will place itself on the alignment 
 of the two men established as the basis, in conformity with 
 the principles prescribed. 
 
 391. The instructor will next command Front, which 
 will be executed as prescribed No. 314. 
 
 Remarks on tlie principles of the wheel from a halt. 
 
 392. Turn a little the head toivard the marching flank, and 
 Jijc the eyes on the line of the eyes of the men who are on 
 that side; 
 
 Because, otherwise, it would be impossible for each man 
 to regulate the length of his step so as to conform his own 
 movement to that of the marching flank. 
 
 Touch lightly the elbotc of the next man toward the jjivot ; 
 In order that the files may not open out in the wheel. 
 
 Resist pressure that comes from, the side of the marching 
 flank ; 
 
 Because, if this principle be neglected, the pivot, which 
 ought to be a fixed point, in wheels from a halt, might be 
 pushed out of its place by pressure. 
 
84 SCHOOL OF TIIK SOLDIEU — PAKT III. 
 
 Wheeling in marching, or on a moveable pivot. 
 
 393. When tlie recruits have been brought to execute 
 well the wheel from a halt, they will be tau^'ht to wheel 
 marching. 
 
 394. To this end, the rank being in march, when the 
 instructor shall wish to cause it to change direction to the 
 reverse flank, (to^he side opposite to tlie guide or pivot 
 flank,) ho will command : 
 
 1. Right (or left) wheel. 2. March. 
 
 395. The first command will be given when the rank ia 
 yet /our paces from the wheeling point. 
 
 396. At the second command, the wheel will be executed 
 in the same manner as from a halt, except that the touch 
 of the elbow will remain toward the marching flank (or 
 side of the guide) instead of the side of the actual pivot: 
 that the pivot-man, instead of merely turning in his place, 
 will conform himself to the movement of the marching 
 flank, feel lightly the elbow of the next man, take steps of 
 full nine inches, and thus gain ground forward in describ- 
 ing a small curve so as to clear the i)oint of the wheel. 
 The middle of the rank will bend slightly to the rear. As 
 soon as the movement shall commence, the man who con- 
 ducts the marching flank will cast his eyes on the ground 
 over which ho will have to pass. 
 
 397. The wheel being ended, the instructor will com- 
 mand: 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART III. 85 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 .'598. The first command will be pronounced when four 
 paces are yet required to complete the change of direc- 
 tion. 
 
 399. At the command march, which will be given at the 
 instant of completing the wheel, the man who conducts 
 the marching flank will direct himself straight forward ; 
 
 ■ the pivot-man and all the rank will retake the step of 
 twenty-eight inches, and bring the head direct to the 
 front. 
 
 {Turning, or change of direction to the side of the 
 guide. 
 
 400. The change of direction to the side of the guide, 
 in marching, will be executed as follows: The instructor 
 will command : 
 
 1. Left (or light) turn. 2. March. 
 
 i |i 401. The first command will be given when the rank is 
 ' 'iyet four paces from the turning point. 
 ' ' 402. At the command march, to be pronounced at the 
 •ii instant the rank ought to turn, the guide will face to the 
 ' left (or right) in marching, and move forward in the new 
 ■ direction without slackening or quickening the cadence, 
 ' and without shortening or lengthening the step. The 
 
 .whole rank will promptly conform itself to the new direc- 
 'jition : to effect which, each man will advance the shoulder 
 
 " 6 
 
86 SCHOOL OK Tlir. SOLDIKU — PAUT HI. 
 
 opposite to the frnide. take the doul.lc quick step, to ciirrj 
 himself in the new direction, turn the head and ej-es to 
 the side of the guide, and retake the touch of the elbow 
 on that side, in pliicin;^ himself on the alignment of thei 
 guide, from whom ho will take the step, and then resume 
 the direct position of the head. Each man will thus arri\ i- 
 successively on the iilijrnment. 
 
 Wheeling and changinc/ direction to the side of the\ 
 guide, in double quick time. 
 
 iO'.i. When tht.' riiruits comprehend and execute well, in 
 quick time, the wheels, at a halt and in marching, and the 
 change of direction to the side of the guide, the instructor 
 will cause the same movements to be repeated in double 
 quick time. 
 
 iOi. These various movements will be executed by tb 
 same commands and according to the same principles as 
 in quick time, except that the command doiibte quiclc will 
 precede that of march. In wheeling while marching, the 
 pivot-man will take steps of eleven inches, and in the 
 changes of direction to the side of the guide, the men on 
 the side opposite the guide must increase the gait in order 
 to bring themselves into line. 
 
 405. The instructor, in order not to fatigue the recruits, 
 and not to divide their attention, will cause them to exe- 
 cute the several movements of which this lesson is coai- 
 posed, first without arms, and next, after the mochanism 
 be well comprehended, with arms. 
 
.SCHOOL OF THE SOI.DIKK I'AHT III. 
 
 Lessox V. 
 
 Lony marches in double quick time and the run. 
 
 400. The instructor will cause to be resumed the exer- 
 cises in douWe quick time and the run, with arms and 
 knapsacks. 
 
 407. He will cause long marches to be executed in 
 double quick time, both by the front and by the flank. 
 and by constant practice will lead the men to pass over 
 a distance of five miles in sixty minutes. The pieces will 
 be carried on either shoulder, and sometimes at a trail. 
 
 408. He will also exercise them in long marches at a 
 run, the pieces carried at will ; the men will be instructed 
 to keep as united as possible, without, however, exacting 
 much regularity, which is impracticable. 
 
 409. The run, in actual service, will only be resorted to 
 when it may be highly important to reach a given point 
 with great promptitude. 
 
 To stack arms. 
 
 The men being at order arms, the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Stack — Arms. 
 
 m 410. At this command, the front rank man of every 
 even numbered file will pass his piece before him, seizing 
 it with the left hand near the upper band ; will place the 
 
S8 SCTIOOT. or THE SOLniKR — PART III. 
 
 butt a little in advance of his left toe, the barrel turmd 
 toward the body, and draw the rammer sliirhtjy from itf 
 place; the front rank man of every odd numbered file 
 will alRO draw the rammer slightly, and pass his piece to 
 the man next on his left, who will seize it with the right 
 hand near the upper band, and place the butt a little in 
 advance of the right toe of the man next on his right, the 
 barrel turned to the front; he will then cross the rammers 
 of the two pieces, the rammer of the piece of the odd num- 
 bered man being inside; the rear rank man of every even 
 file will also draw his rammer, lean his piece forward, the 
 lock-plate downwards, advance the right foot about Hx 
 inches, and insert the rammer between the rammer and 
 barrel of the }iiece of his front rank man ; with his left 
 hand he will place the butt of his piece on the ground, 
 thirty-two inches in rear of, and perpendicular to, the 
 front rank, bringing b.ack his right foot by the side of the 
 left; the front rank man of every even file will at the 
 same time lean the stack to the rear, quit it with his right 
 hand, and force all the rammers down. The stack being 
 thus formed, the rear rank man of every odd file will pass 
 his piece into his left hand, the barrel to tho front, and 
 inclining it forward, will rest it on the stack. 
 
 411. The men of both ranks having taken the position 
 of the soldier without arras, the instructor will command ; 
 
 1. Break ranks. 2. Maucii. 
 
 To resume arms. 
 
 412. Both ranks being rc-forincd in rear of their stack?, 
 the instructor will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER — PART III. 89 
 
 Take — Arms. 
 
 413. At this command, the rear rank man of every odd 
 numbered piece Avill withdraw his piece from the stack ; 
 the front ranlc man of every even file will seize his own 
 piece with the left hand, and that of the man on his right 
 with his right hand, both above the lower band ; the rear 
 rank man of the even file will seize his piece with the 
 right hand below the lower band ; these two men will 
 raise up the stack to loosen the rammers ; the front rank 
 man of every odd file will facilitate the disengagement of 
 the rammers, if necessary, by drawing them out slightly 
 with the left hand, and will receive his piece from the 
 hand of the man next on his left; the four men will re- 
 take the position of the soldier at order arms. 
 
TITLE TniRD, 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 General Utiles and division of (he School of the 
 Company. 
 
 1. Instruction by company will always precede that hy 
 battalion, and the oVjcct being to prepare the soldiers for 
 the hij^her sc-hool, the exercises of detail by company will 
 be strictly adhered to, as well in respect to principles as 
 the order of progression herein prescribed. 
 
 2. There will be attached to a company undergoing ele- 
 mentary instruction, a captain, a covering sergeant, and a 
 certain number of file closers, the whole posted in tht- 
 manner indicated. Title First, and, according to the same 
 Title, the officer charged with the exercise of such com- 
 pan}' will herein be denominated the itintnutor. 
 
 3. The School of the Company will be divided into six 
 Icsf^ons, and each lesson will comprehend five article?, as 
 follows : 
 
 Lesson L 
 
 1. To open ranks. 
 
 2. Alignments in open ranks. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 91 
 
 3. Manual of arms. 
 
 4. To close ranks. 
 
 5. Alignments, and manual of arras in closed ranks. 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 1. To load in four times and at will. 
 
 2. To fire by company. 
 
 3. To fire by file. 
 
 4. To fire by rank. 
 
 5. To fire by the rear rank. 
 
 Lesson III. 
 
 1. To march in line of battle. 
 
 2. To halt the company marching in line of battle, and 
 to align it. 
 
 .3. Oblique march in line of battle. 
 
 4. To mark time, to march in double quick time, and 
 the back step. 
 
 5. To march in retreat in line of battle. 
 
 Lesson IY. 
 
 1. To march by the flank. 
 
 2. To change direction by file. 
 
 .3. To halt the company marching by the flank, and to 
 face it to the front. 
 
 4. The company being in march by the flank, to form it 
 on the right or left by file into line of battle. 
 
 1 
 
92 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 5. The company marching by the flank, to form it .by 
 company or platoon into line, and cause it to face to the 
 right and left in marching. 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 1. To break into column by platoon either at a halt or 
 while marching. 
 
 2. To march in column. 
 
 3. To change direction. 
 
 4. To halt the column, 
 
 5. Being in column by platoon, to form to the right or 
 left into line of battle, either at a halt or marching. 
 
 Lesson VL 
 
 1. To break into platoons, and to re-form the company. 
 
 2. To break iiles to the rear, and to cause them to re- 
 enter into line. 
 
 3. To march in column in route, and to execute the 
 movements incident thereto. 
 
 4. Countermarch. 
 
 5. Being in column by platoon, to form on the right or 
 left into lino of battle. 
 
 4. The company will always be formed in two ranks. 
 The instructor will then cause the files to bo numbered, 
 and for this purpose will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF TllK C;OMPAXY — LPZSSON I. ;>3 
 
 In each rank — Count Twos. 
 
 5. At this command, the men count in each rank, from 
 right to left, pronouncing in a loud and distinct voice, in 
 the same tone, without hurry and without turning the head, 
 one, two, according to the place which each one occupies. 
 He will also cause the company to be divided into platoon? 
 and sections, taking care that the first platoon is always 
 composed of an even number of files. 
 
 6. The instructor will be as clear and concise as possible 
 in his explanations; he will cause faults of detail to be 
 rectified by the captain, to whom he will indicate them, if 
 the captain should not have himself observed them : an<l 
 the instructor will not otherwise interfere, unless the cap- 
 tain should not well comprehend, or should badly execute 
 his intentions. 
 
 7. Composure, or presence of mind, in him who com- 
 mands, and in those who obey, being the first means of 
 order in a body of troops, the instructor will labor to 
 habituate the company to this essential quality, and will 
 himself give the example. 
 
 LESSON FIRST. 
 
 Article First. 
 
 To open ranks. 
 
 8. The company being at ordered arms, the ranks and 
 file closers well aligned, when the instructor shall wish to 
 
!)4 SCHOOL OK TIIK COMl'AXY — LKSSON I. 
 
 cause the ranks to be opened, ho will direct the left guide 
 to place hiuKself on the left of the front rank, which being 
 executed, be will command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Compani/. 3. Shoulder — Arms. 
 4. 7o the rear open order. 
 
 9. At the fourth comuiaiid, the covering sergeant and 
 the left guide will step off smartly to the rear, four paces 
 from the front rank, in order to mark the alignment of the 
 rear rank. They will Jud^^e this distance by the eye, 
 without counting the steps. 
 
 10. The instructor will place himself at the same time 
 on the right flank, in order to observe if these two non- 
 commissioned oflScers are on a line parallel to the front 
 rank, and if necessary, to correct their position, which 
 being executed, he will command : 
 
 5. March. 
 
 11. At this command, the front rank will stand fast. 
 
 12. The rear rank will step to the rear, without counting 
 the steps, and will place themselves on the alignment 
 marked for this rank, conforming to wliat is i)r<.!scribed in 
 the school of the soldier. No. 321. 
 
 13. The covering sergeant will align the rear rank on 
 the left guide placed to mark the left of this rank. 
 
 14. The file closers will march to the rear at the same 
 time with the rear rank, and will place themselves two 
 paces from this rank when it is aligned. 
 
SCHOOL OF THK COMPANY — LESSON L 95 
 
 15. The instructor seeing the rear rank aligned, will 
 command : 
 
 6. Front. 
 
 16. At this command, the sergeant on the left of the 
 rear rank will return to his place as a file closer. 
 
 17. The rear rank being aligned, the instructor will 
 direct the captain and the covering sergeant to observe 
 the men in their respective ranks, and to correct, if neces- 
 sary, the positions of persons and pieces. 
 
 Article Second. 
 Alignments in open ranks. 
 
 18. The ranks being open, the instructor will, in the 
 first exercises, align the ranks, man by man, the better to 
 inculcate the principles. 
 
 19. T^ effect this, he will cause two or four men on the 
 right or left of each rank to march two or three paces for- 
 ward, and after having aligned them, command : 
 
 By Jile right (or left) — Dress. 
 
 20. At this, the men of each rank will move up succes- 
 sively on the alignment, each man being preceded by hie 
 neighbor in the same rank, toward the basis, by two 
 paces, and having correctly aligned himself, will cast his 
 eyes to the front. 
 
:>»j SCHOOL of the company — I.KSriON I. 
 
 21. Successive alignments having habituated the soldier.* 
 to dress correctly, the instructor will cause the ranks tn 
 align themselves at once, forward and backward, some- 
 times in a direction parallel, and sometimes in one oblique, 
 to the original direction, giving, in each case, two or four 
 men to serve as a basis of alignment to each rank. To 
 effect which, he will command : 
 
 1. Right (ov left) — Drkss. 2. FuoNT. 
 
 or 
 
 1. Right (ov left) backward — Dress. 2. Front. 
 
 22. In oblique alignments, in oj^cncd ranks, the men nt 
 the rear rank will not seek to cover their lilo leaders, a.s 
 the sole object of the exercise is to teach them to align 
 themselves correctly in their respective ranks, in the dif- 
 ferent directions. 
 
 23. In the several alignments, the captain will sir^ier- 
 intend the front rank, and the covering sergeant the rear 
 rank. For this purpose, they will place themselves on the 
 side by which the ranks are dressed. 
 
 24. In oblique alignments, the men will conform the line 
 of their shoulders to the new direction of their rank, and 
 will place themselves on the alignment, as has been pre- 
 scribed in the school of the soldier. No. 317 or No. 321, 
 according as the new direction .shall be in front or rear of 
 the original one. 
 
 25. At the end of each alignment, the captain and the 
 covering sergeant will pass along the front of the ranks to 
 correct the positions of persons and arms. 
 
school of the company — lesson i. 97 
 
 Article Third. 
 Manual of arms. 
 
 26. The ranks being open, the instructor will place him- 
 jielf in a position to see the rank?, and will command the 
 manual of arms in the following order : 
 
 Present arms. Shoulder arms. 
 Order arms. 
 Ground arms. 
 
 Raise arms. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Support arms. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Fix bayonet. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Charge bayonet. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Trail arms. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Unfix bayonet. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Secure arms. Shoulder arms. 
 Load in nine times. 
 
 27. The instructor will take care that the position of the 
 body, of the feet, and of the piece, be always exact, and 
 that the times be briskly executed and close to the person. 
 
s'^ school oi thk company lkssox 1. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 To close ranks. 
 
 28. The maiinal of arms being ended, the instructor will 
 command : 
 
 1. Close order. 2. March. 
 
 29. At the command march, the rear rank will close uji 
 in quick time, each man directing himself on his file 
 leader. 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 Alignments, and manual of arms in closed ranks. 
 
 oO. The ranks being closed, the instructor will cause to 
 be executed parallel and oblique alignments by the right 
 and left, forward and backward, observing to place always 
 two or four files to serve as a basis of alignment. He will 
 give the commands prescribed. No. 21. 
 
 31. In alignments in closed ranks, the captain will 
 superintend the front rank, and the covering sergeant the 
 rear rank. They will habituate themselves to judge the 
 alignment by the lines of the eyes and shoulders, in cast- 
 ing a glance of the eye along the front and rear of the 
 ranks. 
 
 .32. The moment the captain perceives the greater num- 
 ber of the front rank aligned, he will command Fuont, 
 and rectify, afterward, if necessary, the alignment of the 
 
SCHOOL OF THK COMPANY — LESSON I. 99 
 
 other men by the means prescribed in the school of the 
 soldier, No. 320. The rear rank will conform to the align- 
 ment of the front rank, superintended by the covering 
 sergeant. 
 
 33. The ranks being steady, the instructor will place 
 himself on the flank to verify their alignment. He will 
 also see that each rear rank man covers accurately his file 
 leader. 
 
 31. In oblique alignments, the instructor Avill observe 
 what is prescribed, No. 24. 
 
 35. In all alignments, the file closers will preserve the 
 distance of two paces from the rear rank. 
 
 36. The alignments being ended, the instructor will 
 cause to be executed the manual of arms. 
 
 37. The i.istruotor, wishing to rest the men, without 
 deranging the alignment, will first cause arms to be sup- 
 l)()rted, or ordered, and then command: 
 
 In place — Rest. 
 
 38. At this command, the men will no longer be con- 
 .<trained to presei've silence or steadiness of position ; but 
 they will always keep one or other heel on the alignment. 
 
 39. If, on the contrary, the instructor should wish to 
 rest the men without constraining them to preserve the 
 alignment, he will command : 
 
 Rest. 
 
 40. At which command, the men will not be required to 
 preserve immobility, or to remain in their places. 
 
100 SCHOOL OF rni-: comtany — lksson ii. 
 
 41. The instructor may, also, when ho shall judf^e pro- 
 per, causo arms to bo stacked, M'hich will be executed n^ 
 })rescribed, school of the soldier. 
 
 LESSON SECOND. 
 
 42. The instructor, wishing to pass to the second lesson, 
 will cause the company to take arms, if stacks have been 
 formed, and command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 43. The instructor will then cause loadings and firings 
 to be executed in the followiu"; order: ♦ 
 
 Article First. 
 7o load in four times and at will. 
 
 44. Loading in four timcn will be commanded and exe- 
 cuted as prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 261. 
 and following. The instructor will causo this exercise U> 
 be often repeated, in succession, before passing to loading 
 at will. 
 
 45. Loading at will will be commanded and executed asi 
 prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 256. In prim- 
 ing, when loading in four times, and also at will, the cap- 
 tain and covering sergeant will half face to the right with 
 the men, and face to the front when the man next to thorn, 
 respectively, brings his piece to the shoulder. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON II. 101 
 
 46. The instructor will labor to the utmost to cause the 
 men, in the difiFerent loadings, to execute what has been 
 prescribed in the school of the soldier, Nos. 257 and 258. 
 
 47. Loading at will being that of battle, and, conse- 
 quently, the one with which it is most important to render 
 the men familiar, it will claim preference in the exercises 
 the moment the men be well established in the principles. 
 To these they will be brought by degrees, so that every 
 man may be able to load with cartridges, and to fire at 
 least three rounds in a minute with ease and regularity. 
 
 Article Second. 
 To fire hy company. 
 
 48. The instructor wishing to cause the fire by company 
 to be executed, will command : 
 
 1. Fire hy company. 2. Commence firing. 
 
 49. At the first command, the captain will promptly 
 place himself opposite the centre of his company, and four 
 paces in rear of the line of file closers : the covering ser- 
 geant will retire to that line, and place himself opposite 
 to his interval. This rule is general, for both the captain 
 and covering sergeant, in all the different firings, 
 
 50. At the second command, the captain will add: 1. 
 Oovipany ; 2. Ready; 3. Anr; 4. Fire; 5. Load. 
 
 51. At the command load, the men will load their pieces, 
 
102 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON II. 
 
 and then take the position of rendu, '^^ prescribed in the 
 school of the soldier. 
 
 62. The captain will immediately recommence the firing, 
 by the commands : 
 
 1. Company. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load. 
 
 53. The firinf^ will be thun continued until the signal to 
 cease firing is sounded. 
 
 54. The captain will sometimes cause aim to be taken t.o 
 the right and left, simply observing to pronounce right (or 
 left) oblique, before the command aim. 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 The /ire hy file. 
 
 bb. The instnictor wishing lo cause the fire by file to be 
 executed, will command : 
 
 1. Fire hy file. 2. Company. 3. Ready. 4. Com- 
 mence firing. 
 
 50. The third and fourth tumniands will be executed a^ 
 prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 275 and fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 57. The fire will be commenced by the right file of the 
 company ; the next file will take aim at the instant the 
 first brings down pieces to reload, and so on to the left: 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY LESSON II. 103 
 
 but this progression will only be observed in the first dis- 
 charge, after which each man will reload and fire without 
 regulating himself by others, conforming himself to what 
 is prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 280. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 The fire hy rank. 
 
 58. The instructor wishing the fire by rank to bo exe- 
 cuted, will command: 
 
 1. Fire hy rank. 2. Company. 3. Ready. 4. Hear 
 rank — Aim. 5. Fire. 6. Load. 
 
 69. The fifth and sixth commands will be executed as is 
 prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 285 and fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 60. When the instructor sees one or two pieces in the 
 rear rank at a ready, he will command : 
 
 1. Front rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load. 
 
 61. The firing will be continued thus by alternate ranks, 
 until the signal is given to cease firing. 
 
 62. The instructor will sometimes cause aim to be taken 
 to the right and left, conforming to what is prescribed No. 
 54. 
 
104 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON IL 
 
 63. The instructor will cause the firing to cease, whether 
 by company, by file, or by rank, l>y sounding the signal to 
 cease fin'nf/, and at the instant this sound commences, the 
 men will cease to fire, conforming to what is prescribed iu 
 the school of the soldier, No. 282. 
 
 64. The signal to cease firing will be always followed bv 
 a bugle note; at which sound the captain and covering 
 sergeant will promptly resume their places in line, and 
 will rectify, if necessary, the alignment of the ranks. 
 
 65. In this school, except when powder is used, the sig- 
 nal to cease firing will be indicated by the command cean> 
 jiriufj, which will be pronounced by the instructor when he 
 wishes the souil)lance of firing to cease. 
 
 66. The command posts will be likewise substituted, 
 under similar circumstances, for the bu^le note employed 
 as the signal for the return of the captain and covering 
 sergeant to their places iu line, which command will be 
 given when the instructor sees the men have brought their 
 pieces to a shoulder. 
 
 67. The fire by file being that which is most frequently 
 u.Mcd against an enemy, it is highly important that it be 
 rendered perfectly familiar to the troops. The instructor 
 will, therefore, give it almost exclusive preference, and 
 labor to cause the men to aim with care, and always, 
 if possible, at some particular object. As it is of the 
 utmost importance that the men should aim with precision 
 in battle, this principle will bo rigidly enforced in the 
 exercises for purposes of instruction. 
 
school of the company — i.ksson ii. 10'; 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 
 To fire hy the rear rank. 
 
 68. The instructor will cause the several fires to be exe- 
 cuted to the rear, that is, by the rear rank. To efFect thip, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. Face hij the rear rank. 2. Company. 3. Abovt — 
 Face. 
 
 ()9. At the first command, the captain will step out an<I 
 place himself near to, and facing the right file of his com- 
 pany ; the covering sergeant and file closers will pass 
 quickly through the captain's interval, and place them- 
 selves faced to the rear, the covering sergeant a pace 
 behind the captain, and the file closers two paces from the 
 front rank opposite to their places in line, each passing 
 behind the covering sergeant. 
 
 70. At the third command, which will be given at the 
 instant the last file closer shall have passed through the 
 interval, the company will face about ; the captain will 
 place himself in his interval in the rear rank, now become 
 the front, and the covering sergeant will cover him in the 
 front rank, now become the rear. 
 
 71. The company having faced by the rear rank, the 
 instructor will cause it to execute the fire by company, 
 both direct and oblique, the fire bj' file, and the fire by 
 xank, by the commands and means prescribed in the three 
 
106 SCHOOL OF THK COMPANY — LESSON FT. 
 
 preceding articles; tlie captain, covering sergeant, and tin 
 men will conform themselves, in like manner, to what i> 
 therein prescribed. 
 
 72. The fire by file will commence on the left of the 
 company, now become the right. In the fire by rank, the 
 firing will commence with the front rank, now become the 
 rear. 
 
 73. To resume the proper front, the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Face by the fronl rank. 2. Couipany. 3. About — 
 Face. 
 
 74. At the first command, the captain, covering sergeant 
 nnd file closers will conform to what is prescribed Nos. 09 
 and 70. 
 
 75. At the third command, the company having faced 
 about, the captain and covering sergeant will resume their 
 places in line. 
 
 76. In this lesson, the instructor will impress on the 
 men the importance of aiming always at some particular 
 object, and of holding the piece as prescribed in the school I 
 of the soldier, No. 178. 
 
 77. The instructor will recommend to the captain to 
 make a short pause between the commands aim and fire, 
 to give the men time to aim with accuracy. 
 
 78. The instructor will place himself in position to see 
 the two ranks, in order to detect faults ; he will charge the 
 captain and file closers to be equally watchful, and to re- 
 port to him when the ranks aro at rest. He will remand, 
 for individual instruction, the men who may be observed 
 to load badly. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON IL 107 
 
 79. The instructor will recommend to the soldiers, in 
 the firings, the highest degree of composure or presence of 
 mind ; he will neglect nothing that may contribute to thir. 
 end. 
 
 80. He will give to the men, as a (/eiieral principle, to 
 maintain, in the direct fire, the left heel in its place, in 
 order that the alignment of the ranks and files may not be 
 deranged ; and he will verify, by examination, after each 
 exercise in firing, the observance of this principle. 
 
 81. The instructor will ol)serve, in addition to these re- 
 marks, all those which follow. 
 
 82. When the firing is executed with cartridges, it is par- 
 ticularly recommended that the men observe, in uncock- 
 ing, whether smoke escapes from the tube, which is a 
 certain indication that the piece has been discharged ; but 
 if, on the contrary, no smoke escapes, the soldier, in such 
 case, instead of reloading, will pick and prime again. If, 
 believing the load to be discharged, the soldier should put 
 a second cartridge in his piece, he ought, at least, to per- 
 ceive it in ramming by the height of the load ; and he 
 would be very culpable, should he put in a third. The in- 
 
 I structor will always cause arms to be inspected after firing 
 with cartridges, in order to observe if the fault has been 
 committed, of putting three cartridges, without a dis- 
 charge, in the same piece, in which case the ball screw will 
 be applied. 
 
 83. It sometimes happens, when a cap has missed fire, 
 that the tube is found stopped up with a hard, white, and 
 compact powder; in this case, picking will be dispensed 
 with, and a new cap substituted for the old one. 
 
108 8CHOOL OF THK COMPANY — LESSON III. 
 
 LESSON T n I 11 D . 
 AiiTicLK First. 
 
 To advance in line of battle. 
 
 M. The company being in line ol" battle, and correctly 
 aligned, when the instructor shall wish to exercise it in 
 marching by the front, he will assure himself that the 
 shoulders of the captain and covering sergeant are per- 
 fectly in the direction of their respective ranks, and that 
 the sergeant accurately covers the captain ; the instructor 
 will then place himself twenty-five or thirty paces in front 
 of them, face to the rear, and place himself exactly on the 
 prolongation of the line passing between their heels. 
 
 85. The instructor, being aligned on the directing file, 
 will command : 
 
 1 . Company, forward. 
 
 86. At this, a sergeant, previously designated, will move 
 »ix paces in advance of the captain ; the instructor, from 
 the position prescribed, will correctly align this sergeant 
 on the prolongation of the directing file. 
 
 87. This advanced sergeant, who is to be charged with 
 the direction, will, the moment his position is assured, 
 take two points on the ground in the straight line which 
 would pass between his own and the heels of the. instructor. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LKSSOX III. 109 
 
 88. These dispositions being made, the instructor will 
 step aside, and command : 
 
 2. March. 
 
 SO. At this, the company will step oflf with life. The 
 directing sergeant will observe, with the greatest precision, 
 the length and cadence of the step, marching on the two 
 points he has chosen; he will take in succession, and 
 always a little before arriving at the point nearest to him, 
 new points in advance, exactly in the same line with the 
 first two, and at the distance of some fifteen or twenty 
 paces from each oth^r. The captain will march steadily in 
 the trace of the directing sergeant, keeping always six 
 paces from him ; the men will each maintain the head 
 direct to the front, feel lightly the elbow of his neighbor 
 on the side of direction, and conform himself to the prin- 
 ciples prescribed, school of the soldier, for the march by 
 the front. 
 
 90. The man next to the captain will take special care 
 not to pass him; to this end he will keep the line of his 
 shoulders a little in the rear, but in the same direction 
 with those of the captain. 
 
 91. The file closers will march at the habitual distance 
 of two paces behind the rear r.ank. 
 
 92. If the men lose the step, the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 To the— Step. 
 
 93. At this command, the men will glance toward the 
 directing sergeant, retake the step from him, and again 
 direct their eyes to the front. 
 
110 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON IIL 
 
 9i. Tlio instnu'tor will cause the captain iind oovorin.;^ 
 s.^rgcaut to be posted sometimes on tlic right rtml some- 
 times on the left of the company. 
 
 95. The directing sergeant, in advance, having tho great- 
 est influence on the march of the company, he will' be 
 selected for the precision of his step, his habit of maintain- 
 ing his shoulders in a square with a given line of direc- 
 tion, and of prolonging tliat line without variation. 
 
 96. If this sergeant should fail to observe thesu princi- 
 ples, undulations in the front of the company must neces- 
 sarily follow ; tho men will be unable to contract the 
 habit of taking steps eijual in length and swiftness, and of 
 maintaining their shoulders in a sijuare with the line of 
 direction — the only means of attaining perfection in the 
 march in line. 
 
 97. The instructor, with a view the better to establish 
 the men in the length and cadence of the step, and in the 
 principles of the march in line, will cause the company to 
 advance three or four hundred paces, at once, without 
 halting, if the ground will permit. In the first exercises, 
 he will march tho company with open ranks, the better to 
 observe the two ranks. 
 
 9S. The instructor will see, with care, that all the prin- 
 ciples of the march in line are strictly observed j he will 
 generally be on the directing flank, in a position to ob- 
 serve the two ranks, and the faults they may commit; he 
 will sometimes halt behind tho directing file during some 
 thirty successive steps, in order to judge whether the 
 directing sergeant, or the <lirccting file, deviate from the 
 perpendicular. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON III. Ill 
 
 Article Second. 
 
 To halt the company^ marching in line of battle, and 
 to align it. 
 
 99. The instructor, wishing to halt the company, Avill 
 command: 
 
 1. Comjmny. 2. Halt. 
 
 100. At the second command, the company will hak : 
 the directing sergeant will remain in advance, unless 
 ordered to return to the line of file closers. The company 
 being at a halt, the instructor may advance the first three 
 or four files on the side of direction, and align the company 
 on that basis, or he may confine himself to causing the 
 alignment to be rectified. In this last case, he will com- 
 mand: Captain, rcctifij the alignment. The captain will 
 direct the covering sergeant to attend to the rear rank, 
 when each, glancing his eyes along his rank, will promptly 
 rectify it, conforming to what is prescribed in the school 
 of the soldier. No. 320. 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 Oblique march in line of battle. 
 
 101. The company being in the direct march, when ihf 
 instructor shall Avish to cause it to march obliquely, be 
 will command : 
 
 1. Right (or left) oblique. 2. March. 
 
 102. At the command march, the company will take the 
 
W'i S( lIOC>L .)K rilK COMPANY — LKSSON III. 
 
 oblique step. The men will accurately observe the priuei- 
 ples prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 331. The 
 rear rank men will preserve their distances, and march in 
 roar of the man next on the right (or left) of their habitnal 
 file leaders. 
 
 103. "When the instructor wishes the direct march to be 
 resumed, he will command : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 104. At the command inarch, the company will resume 
 the direct march. The instructor will move briskly twenty 
 paces in front of the captain, and facing the company, 
 will place himself exactly in the prolongation of the cap- 
 tain and covering sergeant ; and then, by a sign, will move 
 the directing sergeant on the same line, if he be not 
 already on it; the latter will immediately take two points 
 on the ground between himself and the instructor, and as 
 ho advances, will take new points of direction, as is ex- 
 plained No. SO. 
 
 106. In the oblique march the men not having the touch 
 of elbows, the guide will always be on the side toward 
 which the oblique is made, without any indication to that 
 effect being given; and when the direct march is resumed, 
 the guide will be, equally without indication, on the side 
 where it was previous to the oblique. 
 
 106. The instructor will, at first, cause the oblique to be 
 made toward the side of the guide. lie will also direct 
 the captain to have an eye on the directing sergeant, in 
 order to keep on the same perpendicular line to the front 
 with him, while following a parallel directiuii. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON III. 113 
 
 107. During the continuance of the march, the instructor 
 will be watchful that the men follow parallel directions, in 
 conforming to the principles prescribed in the school of 
 the soldier, for preserving the general alignment j when- 
 ever the men lose the alignment, he will be careful that 
 they regain it by lengthening or shortening the step, with- 
 out altering the cadence or changing the direction. 
 
 108. The instructor will place himself in front of the 
 company and face to it, in order to regulate the march of 
 the directing sergeant, or the man who is on the flank 
 toward which the oblique is made, and to see that the 
 principles of the march are properly observed, and that 
 the files do not crowd. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 To mark time, to march in double quick time, and the 
 hack step. 
 
 109. The company being in the direct march and in 
 quick time, the instructor, to cause it to mark time, will 
 command: 
 
 1. Mark time. 2. March. 
 
 110. To resume the march, he will command : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 111. To cause the march in double quick time, the 
 instructor will command : 
 
114 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — I.r.SSON III. 
 
 1. Double quicl:. 2. ^Makcii. 
 
 112. The coramaiiil march will be pronounced at tht 
 instant either foot is coming to the ground. 
 
 llo. To resume quick time, the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. Makcii. 
 
 114. The command luarvh will be pronounced at the 
 instant either foot is coming to the ground. 
 
 115. The company being at a halt, the instructor may 
 cause it to march in the back step ; to this effect, he witf 
 command: 
 
 1. Company^ backward. 2. March. 
 
 110. The back stop will be executed according to the 
 principles prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 247, 
 but the use of it being rare, the instructor will not cause 
 more than fifteen or twenty steps to be taken in succession, 
 and to that extent but seldom. 
 
 117. The instructor ought not to exercise the company 
 iti marching in double quick time till the men are well 
 established in the length and swiftness of the pace in quick 
 time: ho will then endeavor to render the march of one 
 hundred and sixty-five steps in the minute cquallj' easy 
 and familiar, and also cause them to observe the same 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON III. 115 
 
 ereetness of body and composure of mind, as if marching 
 in quick time. 
 
 118. When marching in double quick time, if a subdi- 
 vision (in a column) has to change direction by turnhig, or 
 has to form into line, the men will quicken the pace to one 
 hundred and eighty steps in a minute. The same swift- 
 ness of step will be observed under all circumstances 
 where great rapidity of movement is required. But, as 
 ranks of men cannot march any length of time at so swift 
 a rate, without breaking or confusion, this acceleration 
 will not be considered a prescribed exercise, and accord- 
 ingly companies or battalions will only be habitually exer- 
 cised in the double quick time of one hundred and sixty- 
 f ve steps in the minute. 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 To march in retreat. 
 
 119. The company being halted and correctly aligned, 
 when the instructor shall wish to cause it to march in 
 retreat, he will command : 
 
 1. Company. 2. About — Face. 
 
 120. The company having faced to the rear, the in- 
 structor will place himself in front of the directing file, 
 conforming to what is prescribed. No. 84. 
 
110 SCHOOL OF THK COMPANY — LESSON III. 
 
 121. The instructor, being correctlj' established on the 
 prcilongation of the directing file, will oommand: 
 
 3. Company forward. 
 
 122. At this, the directing sergeant will conform himself 
 to what is prescribed, Nos. S6 and 87, with this dilference — 
 he will place himself six pates in front of the line of file 
 closers, notv leading. 
 
 12.3. The covering sergeant will step into the line of file 
 closers, opposite to his interval, and the captain will place 
 himself in the rear rank, now become the front. 
 
 124. This disposition being promptly made, the in- 
 structor will command: 
 
 4. i\lAKCII. 
 
 125. At this, the directing sergeant, the captain and the 
 men, will conform themselves to what is prescribed, No. 
 89 and following. 
 
 126. The instructor will cause to bo executed, marching 
 in retreat, all that is prescribed for marching in advance: 
 the commands and the means of execution will be the 
 same. 
 
 127. The instructor having halted the company, will, 
 when he may wish, cause it to face to the front by the 
 commands prescribed No. 119. The captain, the covering 
 sergeant and the directing sergeant, will resume their ha- 
 bitual places in line the moment they shall have faced 
 about. 
 
 128. The compan}^ being in march liy tlu' fr<nit rank, if 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPAXY LKSSOX III. 117 
 
 the instructor should wish it to inarch in retreat, he 'nill 
 cause the right about to be executed while marching, and 
 to this effect will command: 
 
 1. Company. 2. Right about. 3. March. 
 
 129. At the third command, the company will promptly 
 face about, and recommence the march by the rear rank. 
 
 130. The directing sergeant will face about with the 
 company, and will move rapidly six paces in front of the 
 file closers, and upon the prolongation of the guide. The 
 instructor will place him in the proper direction by the 
 means prescribed, No. 104. The captain, the covering 
 sergeant, and the men, will conform to the principles pre- 
 3cri')i'.l for the march in retreat. 
 
 131. "When the instructor wishes the company to march 
 by the front rank, he will give the same commands, and 
 will regulate the direction of the march by the same 
 means. 
 
 132. The instructor will cause to be executed in double 
 quick time, all the movements prescribed in the 3d, 4th, 
 5th, and 6th lessons of this school, with the exception of 
 the march backwards, which will be executed only in 
 quick time. He will give the same commands, observing 
 to add donhle quick before the command march. 
 
 133. "When the pieces are carried on the right shoulder, 
 in quick time, the distance between the ranks will be six- 
 teen inches. "Whenever, therefore, the instructor brings 
 the company from a shoulder to this position, the rear rank 
 must shorten a little the first steps in order to gain the 
 prescribed distance, and will lengthen the steps, on the 
 
118 
 
 TUE COMPANY — LESSON IV. 
 
 cuutrary, iu order to cluee ui' when the pieces are again 
 brought to a shoulder. In marching in double quick time, 
 the distance between the ranks will be twenty-six inches, 
 and the pieces will bo carried habitually on the right 
 shoulder. 
 
 134. Whenever a company is halted, the mc;i will bring 
 their pieces at once to a shoulder at the command half. 
 The rear rank will close to its proper distance. Thene 
 rales are (jciteial. 
 
 LESSON FOURTH. 
 Article First. 
 
 To march hy ilie jlanh. 
 
 135. The com[)any being in line of battle, and at a halt, 
 when the instructor shall wish to cause it to march by the 
 right flank, ho will command : 
 
 1. Company^ right — Face. 2. Forward. 
 3. March. 
 
 136. At the first command, the company will face to 
 the right, the covering sergeant Avill place himself at the 
 head of the front rank, the captain having stepped out for 
 the purpose, eo far as to find himself by the side of the 
 sergeant, and on his left; the front rank will double as is 
 
L ^ 
 
 4 
 
 I E 
 
 l^l^S^ !!v! 
 
 
 r — ; f — ; 
 
 
 y 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON IV. 119 
 
 prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 362 ; the rear 
 rank will, at the same time, side step to the right one pace, 
 and double in the same manner ; so that when the move- 
 ment is completed, the files will be formed of four men 
 aligned, and elbow to elbow. The intervals will be pre- 
 served, 
 
 137. The file closers will also move by side step to the 
 right, so that when the ranks are formed, they will be two 
 paces from the rearmost rank. 
 
 138. At the command march, the company will move off 
 briskly in quick time; the covering sergeant at the head 
 of the front rank, and the captain on his left, will march 
 straight forward. The men of each file will march abreast 
 of their respective front rank men, heads direct to the 
 front; tlie file closers will march opposite their places in 
 line of battle. 
 
 139. The instructor will cause the principles of the 
 march by the flank to be observed, in placing himself, 
 pending the march, as prescribed in the school of the sol- 
 dier, Ko. 357. 
 
 140. The instructor will cause the march by the left 
 flank to be executed by the same commands, substituting 
 left for ri(jht; the ranks will double as has been prescribed 
 in the school of the soldier, No. 354; the rear rank will 
 side step to the left one pace before doubling. 
 
 141. At the instant the company faces to the left, the 
 left guide will place himself at the head of the front rank; 
 the captain will pass rapidly to the left, and place himself 
 by the right side of this guide ; the covering sergeant 
 will replace the captain in the front rank, the moment the 
 latter quits it to go to the left. 
 
]-ji) s(MiooT. or Tin-: coMrANY — lksson iv. 
 
 AlJTICLK SkCOND. 
 
 To chatHfc direr/ion hy file. 
 
 142. The company being faced by the flank, and either 
 in march, or at a bait, when the instructor shall wish to 
 cause it to wheel by file, he will command ; 
 
 1. By file, Icf I (or ri(/ht). 2. March. 
 
 143. At the command march, the first file will wheel; if 
 to the side of the front rank man, the latter will take care 
 not to turn at once, but to describe a short arc of a circle, 
 shortening a little the first five or six steps in order to give 
 time to the fourth man of this file to conform himself to 
 the movement. If the wheel be to the side of the rear 
 rank, the front rank man will wheel in the step of twenty- 
 eight inches, and the fourth man will conform himself to 
 the movement by describing a short arc of a circle as has 
 been explained. Each lile will come to wheel on the same 
 ground where that which preceded it wheeled. 
 
 114. The instructor will see that the wheel be executed 
 according to these principles, in order that the distance 
 between the files muj' always be preserved, and that there 
 be no check or hindrance at the wheeling point. 
 

 
 fXO 
 
 
 
 . i*^^ 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 I^ 
 
 ^ 
 y 
 
 r7rr,ri-i 
 
 1 -1 1 T 1 
 
 n r.i 1 
 
 rr- 1 ? .1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 E21 
 
 rrrTH 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 rrrxD 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 tX-LU 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 □ 
 
 M !T i 
 
 r|, 1 m 
 ; : C2P 
 
 
 
 
 LJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 1^ : 
 
 
 
 
 »g 
 
 
 
 m tv\ 
 
 
 E2) 
 
 Bb^^ 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 >-1 
 
 B 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 \m 
 
 u 
 
 LJ 
 
 ^ ' 
 
 
 
 i ■ 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 
 w 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 %.:: 
 
 ■; 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON IV. 121 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 To halt the coynpamj inarching bf/ the Jlank, and to 
 face it to the front. 
 
 145. To effect these objects, the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Compamj. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 146. The second and third commands will be executed 
 as prescribed in the school of the soldier, Nos. 359 and 
 360. As soon as the files have undoubled, the rear rank 
 will close to its proper distance. The captain and cover- 
 ing sergeant, as well as the left guide, if the march be by 
 the left flank, will return to their habitual places in line at 
 the instant the company faces to the front. 
 
 147. The instructor may then align the company by one 
 of the means prescribed, No. 100. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 The company being in march by the flank, to form it 
 on the right (or lef) by file into line of battle. 
 
 148. If the company be marching by the right flank, 
 the instructor will command : 
 
 1. On the right, by file into line. 2. March. 
 
 149. At the command march, the rear rank men doubled 
 
r22 SCHOOL OF TIIK COMPANY — LKSSON IV. 
 
 will mark time ; (he captain and the covering sergeant 
 will turn to the right, march straigljt forward, and be 
 halted by the instructor when they shall have passed at 
 least six paces beyond the rank of file closers; the cap- 
 tain will place himself cojrectly on the line of battle, and 
 will direct the alignment as the men of the front rank suc- 
 cessively arrive ; the covering sergeant will place himself 
 behind the captain at the distance of the rear rank; the 
 two men on the right of the front rank doubled, will con- 
 tinue to march, and passing beyond the covering sergeant 
 and the captain, will turn to the right ; after turning, they 
 will continue to march elbow to elbow, and direct them- 
 selves toward the line of battle, but when they shall arrive 
 at two paces from this line, the even number will short^^n 
 the step so that the odd number may precede him on the 
 lino, the odd number placing himself by the side and on 
 the loft of the captain ; the even number will afterwards 
 oblique to the left, and place himself on the left of the odd 
 number ; the next two men of the front rank doubled, will 
 pass in the same manner behind the two first, turn then 
 to the right, and place themselves, according to the moans' 
 just explained, to the left, and by the side of the two men 
 already established on the line; the remaining tiles of this 
 rank will follow in succession, and be formed to the loft in 
 the same manner. The rear rank doubled will exeouto the 
 movement in the manner already explained for the front 
 rank, taking care not tu commence the movement until 
 four men of the front hink are establislied on the line of 
 battle ; the rear rank men, as they arrive on the line, will 
 cover accurately their file leaders. 
 
 150. If the company be marchiug by the left flank, the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON IV. 123 
 
 instmctor will cause it to furm by file on the left into line 
 of battle, according to the same principles and by the 
 same commands, substitutins the indication left for right. 
 In this case,, the odd numbera will shorten the step, so that 
 the even numbers may precede them on the line. The 
 captain, placed on the left of the front rank, and the left 
 guide, will return to their places in line of battle, by order 
 of the instructor, after* the company shall be formed and 
 aligned. 
 
 151. To enable the men the bettor to comprehend the 
 mechanism of this movement, the instructor will at first 
 cause it to be executed separately by each rank doubled, 
 and afterwards by the two ranks united and doubled. 
 
 152. The instructor will place himself on the line of 
 battle, and without the point where the right or left is to 
 rest, in order to establish the b«ge of the alignment, and 
 afterwards he will follow up the movement to assure him- 
 self that each file conforms itself to what is prescribed 
 No. 149. 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 
 The compani/ being in inarch by the jiank, to form it 
 by company, or by platoon, into line, and to cause it 
 to face to the right and left in marching. 
 
 153. The company being in march by the right flank, 
 the instructor will order the captain to form it into line; 
 the captain will immediately command : 1. Dy compau>/, 
 into line. 2. March. 
 
124 sciiooi. ov THK comi-any—lesson iv. 
 
 154. At the coimnuuil march, the covering sergeant will 
 continue to march straight forward; the men will advance 
 the right shoulder, take the double quick step, and move 
 into line by the shortest route, taking care to undouble the 
 files, and to come on the line one after the other. 
 
 155. As the front rank men successively arrive in line 
 with the covering sergeant, they will take from him th«- 
 step, and then turn their eyes to the front. 
 
 15G. The men of the rear rank will conform to the 
 movements of their respective file leaders, but without en- 
 deavoring to arrive in lino at the same time with the 
 lattijr. 
 
 157. At the instant the movement begins, the captain 
 will face to his company in order to follow up the execu- 
 tion ; and, as soon as the company is formed, he will 
 command, yuide left, place himself two paces before the 
 centre, face to the front, and take the step of the company. 
 
 158. At the command, ijnide left, the second sergeant 
 will promptly place himself in the front rank, on the left, 
 to .«erve as guide, and the covering sergeant, who is on 
 the opposite (lank, will remain there. 
 
 159. When the company marches by the loft flank, this 
 movement will be executed by the same commands, and 
 according to the same principles ', the company being 
 formed, the captain will command, guide ri<jht, and place 
 himself in front of his company, as above; the covering 
 sergeant, who is on the right of the front rank, will serve 
 an guide, and the .second sergeant placed on the left flank 
 will remain there. 
 
 100. Thus, in a column by company, right or left in 
 front, the covering .sergeant and the second sergeant of 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON IV. 125 
 
 each company will always be placed oq the right and left, 
 respectively, of the front rank ; they will be denominated 
 right i/uide and left guide, and the one or the other charged 
 with the direction. 
 
 161. The company being in march by the flank, if it be 
 the wish of the instructor to cause it to form platoons, he 
 will give an order to that effect to the captain, who will 
 command : 
 
 1. By platoon, into line. 2. March. 
 
 162. The movement will be executed by each platoon 
 according to the above principles. The captain will place 
 himself before the centre of the first platoon, and the first 
 lieutenant before the centre of the second, passing through 
 tlie opening made in the centre of the company, if the 
 march be by the right flank, and around the left of his 
 platoon, if the march be by the left ; in this last case, the 
 captain will also pass around the left of the second platoon 
 in order to place himself in front of the first. Both the 
 captain and lieutenant, without waiting for each other, will 
 command f/uidc /eft (or right) at the instant their respective 
 platoons are formed. 
 
 16o. At the command guide left (or right), the guide of 
 each platoon will pass rapidly to the indicated flank of the 
 platoon, if not already there. 
 
 164. The right guide of the company will always serve 
 as the guide of the right or loft of the first platoon, and 
 the left guide of the company will serve, in like manner, 
 as the guide of the second platoon. 
 
 165. Thus in a column, by platoon, there will be but one 
 
126 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON IV. 
 
 guide to each platoon ; he will always be placed on its left 
 flank, if the right be in front, and on the right flank, if 
 the left be in front. 
 
 Ifi6. In these movements, the file closers will follow the 
 platoons to which they are attached. 
 
 107. The instructor may cause the company, marching 
 by the flank, to form by company, or by platoon, into line, 
 by his own direct commands, using those prescribed for 
 the captain, No. 153 or 1(51. 
 
 168, The instructor will exercise the company iu pass- 
 ing, without a halt, from the march by the front, to the 
 march by the flank, and reciprocally. In either case, he 
 will employ the commands prescribed in the school of the 
 soldier, No, 363, substituting cumpany for squad. The 
 company will face to the right or left, iu marching, and 
 the captain, the guides, and file closers will conform them- 
 selves to what is prescribed for each in the march by the 
 front of a company supposed to be a subdivit^ion of a 
 column. 
 
 109, If, after facing to the right or left, in marching, the 
 company lind itself faced b}' the rear rank, the captain will 
 place himself two paces behind the centre of the front 
 rank, now in the rear, the guides will pass to the rear 
 rank, now leading, and the file closers will march iu front 
 of this rank. 
 
 170. The instructor, iu order to avoid fatiguing the men, 
 and to prevent them from being negligent in the position 
 of shoulder arms, will sometimes order support arms in 
 marching by the flank, and arms on the right shoulder, 
 when marching in lino. 
 
12^. 
 
 
 
 .'^'i^.- 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 B 6 n 
 
 
 
 G ■ 
 
 
 
 h ^'{^.•'ff:'^^^'!^^:^^^^^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 %. M^.f ^^tr*?^^';k>*-# 
 
 <h ra 
 
 
 
 ^"'^J.r^cr:^^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 -J 
 
 D 
 
 
 t'TT^-^ — 
 
 -i 
 
 
 ''^^ *^^^ 
 
 ~i 
 
 hD 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 [C 
 
 
 n,^--^-_^:^::ett 
 
 ;'< 
 
 
 
 tf^^^^S^^^^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 R 
 
 
 ^\ t::^ - 
 
 -I 
 
 € 
 
 
 V.._^; 
 
 
 -0 
 
 1 
 1 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON V. 12^ 
 
 LESSON FIFTH. 
 
 Article First. 
 
 To break into column by platoon, either at a halt or in 
 inarch. 
 
 171. The company being at a halt, in line of battle, the 
 instructor, wishing to break it into column, by platoon to 
 the right, will command : 
 
 1. By platoon^ right wheel. 2. March. 
 
 172. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon will 
 rapidly place themselves two paces before the centres of 
 their respective platoons, the lieutenant passing around the 
 left of the company. They need not occupy themselves 
 with dressing, one upon the other. The covering sergeant 
 will replace the captain in the front rank. 
 
 173. At the command march, the right front rank man 
 of each platoon will face to the right, the covering ser- 
 geant standing fast; the chief of each platoon will move 
 quickly by the shortest line, a little beyond the point at 
 which the marching flank will rest when the wheel shall 
 be completed, face to the late rear, and place himself so 
 that the line which he forms with the man on the right 
 (who had faced) shall be perpendicular to that occupied 
 by the company in line of battle ; each platoon will wheel 
 
128 SCHOOL OK THE COMPANY — LKSSON V 
 
 1 
 
 according to the principles prescribed for the wheel on a 
 fixed pivot, and when the man who conducts the marching 
 flank ghall approach near to the perpendicular, its chief 
 will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 174. At the comman<l httit, which will ha given at the 
 instant the man who conducts the marching flank shall 
 liave arrived at three paces from the perpendicular, the 
 phitoon will halt; the covering sergeant will move to the 
 point where the left of the first platoon is to rest, passing 
 by the front rank; the second sergeant will place himself, 
 in like manner, in respect to the second platoon. Each 
 will take «arc to Icavo between himself and the man on the 
 right of his platoon, a space equal to its front; the captain 
 and lirst lieutenant will look to this, and each take caro to 
 align the sergeant between himself and the man of the 
 platoon who had faced to the right. 
 
 175. The guide of each platoon, being thus established 
 on the perpendicular, each chief will place himself two 
 ])aceR outside of his guide, and facing toward him, will 
 command : 
 
 3. Left — Dkess. 
 
 176. The alignment being ended, each chief of platoon 
 will command, Front, and place himself two paces before 
 its centre. 
 
 177. The file closers will conform themselves to the 
 juovcment of their respective platoons, pn>serving always 
 the distance of two paces from the rear rank. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE CO:\IPANY- -LKSSON V. 129 
 
 178. The company will break by phitoon to the left, 
 according to the same principles. The instructor v.ill 
 command : 
 
 1. Bi/ jjlaloon, lefl ivJieel. 2. March. 
 
 179. The first command will be executed in the same 
 manner as if breaking by platoon to the right. 
 
 ISO. At the command march, the left front rank man of 
 each platoon will face to the left, and the platoons will 
 wheel to the left, according to the principles prescribed for 
 the wheel on a fixed pivot; the chiefs of platoon will con- 
 form to the principles indicated, Nos. 173 and 171. 
 
 181. At the command halt, given by the chief of each 
 platoon, the covering sergeant on the right of the front 
 rank of the first platoon, and the second sergeant near the 
 left of the second platoon, will each move to the points 
 where the right of his platoon is to rest. The chief of 
 each platoon should be careful to align the sergeant be- 
 tween himself and the man of the platoon who had faced 
 to the left, and will then command : 
 
 Riglit — Dress. 
 
 182. The platoons being aligned, each chief of platoon 
 will command. Front, and place himself opposite its 
 centre. 
 
 183. The instructor wishing to break the company by 
 platoon to the right and to move the column forward 
 
130 SCHOOL OF TIIK COMPANY — LKSSOX V. 
 
 after the wheel is completed, will caution tlie company to 
 that effect, and command : 
 
 1.. By phiioon^ rigid wheel. 2. March. 
 
 184. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon will 
 move rapidly in front of their respective platoons, con- 
 forming to what has been prescribed No. 172, and will 
 remnin in this position during the continuance of the 
 wheel. The covering sergeant will replace the chief of 
 the first platoon in the front rank. 
 
 185. At the command march, the i)latoons will wheel to 
 the right, conforrtiing to the principles herein prescribed ] 
 the man on the pivot will not face to the right, but will 
 mark time, conforming himself to the movement of the 
 inarching flank ; and when the man who is on the left of 
 this flank shall arrive near the perpendicular, the instructor 
 will command: 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Gxdde left. 
 
 186. At the fourth command, which will be given at the 
 instant the wheel is comploled, the platoons will move 
 straight to the front, all the men taking the step of twenty- 
 eight inches. The covering sergeant and the second ser- 
 geant will move rapidly to the left of their respective 
 platoons, the former passing before the front rank. The 
 leading guide will immediately take points on the ground 
 in the direction which may be indicated to him by the 
 instructor. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON V. 131 
 
 187. At tbe fifth command, the men will take the touch 
 of elbows lightly to the left. 
 
 188. If the guide of the second platoon should lose his 
 distance, or the line of direction, he will conform to the 
 principles heroin prescribed Nos. 202 and 203. 
 
 189. If the company be marching in line to the front, 
 the instructor will cause it to break by platoon to the right 
 by the same commands. At the command march, the pla- 
 toons will wheel in the manner already explained; the 
 man on tbe pivot will take care to mark time in his place, 
 without advancing or receding ; the instructor, the chiefs 
 of platoon and the guides, will conform to what has been 
 prescribed Nos. 184 and following. 
 
 190. The company may be broken by platoons to the 
 left, according to the same principles, and by inverse 
 means, the instructor giving the commands prescribed 
 Nos. 183 and 185, substituting left for rifjht, and recipro- 
 cally. 
 
 191. The movements explained in Nos. 183 and 189, will 
 only be executed after the company has become well estab- 
 lished in the principles of the march in column, Articles 
 Second and Third. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 192. The instructor, placed in front of the company, 
 will observe whether the movement be executed according 
 to the principles prescribed above; whether the platoons, 
 after breaking into column, are perpendicular to the line 
 of battle just occupied; and whether the guide, who placed 
 
132 SCHOOL OF THK (XIMI'ANY— LESSON V. 
 
 himself where tlic luarchirifj flauk of his platoon had to 
 rest, has left, between himself and the front rank man on 
 tlie rij^lit (or left) the space necessary to contain the front 
 of the platoon. 
 
 li).'{. After the platoons have broken, if the rearmost 
 guide should not accurately cover the leadinaj one, ho will 
 not seek to correct his position till the column be put in 
 march, unless the instructor, wishing to wheel immediately 
 into line, should think it necessary to rectify the direction 
 of the guides, which would be executed as will be herein- 
 after explained in Article Fifth of this Lesson. 
 
 194. The instructor will observe, that the man on the 
 right (or left) of each platoon, who, at the command 
 man-h, faces to the right (or left) being the true pivot of 
 the wheel, the front rank man next to him ought to gain a 
 little ground to the frt)nt in wheeling, so as to clear the 
 l)ivot man. 
 
 Article Second. 
 
 To jnarcJi in column. 
 
 19/>. The company having broken by platoon, right (or 
 left) in front, the instructor, wishing to cause the column 
 to march, will throw himself twenty-five or thirty paces in 
 front, face to the guides, place himself correctly, on their 
 direction, and caution the leading guide to take points on 
 the ground. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON V. 133 
 
 196. The instructor being thus placed, the guide of the 
 leading platoon will take two points on the ground in the 
 straight line passing between his own and the heels of the 
 instructor. 
 
 197. These dispositions being made, the instructor will 
 step aside, and command : 
 
 1. Column^ forward. 2. Guide left (or right). 
 3. March. 
 
 198. At the command march, promptly repeated by the 
 chiefs of platoon, they, as well as the guides, will lead off, 
 by a decided step, their respective platoons, in order that 
 the whole may move smartly, and at the same moment. 
 
 199. The men will each feel lightly the elbow of his 
 neighbor toward the guide, and conform himself, in 
 marching, to the principles prescribed in the school of the 
 soldier. No. .327. The man next to the guide, in each 
 platoon, will take care never to pass him, and also to 
 march always about six inches to the right (or left) from 
 him, in order not to push him out of the direction. 
 
 200. The leading guide will observe, with the greatest 
 precision, the length and cadence of the step, and main- 
 tain the direction of his march by the means prescribed 
 No. 89. 
 
 201. The following guide will march exactly in the trace 
 of the leading one, preserving between the latter and him- 
 self a distance precisely equal to the front of his platoon, 
 and marching in the same step with the leading guide. 
 
 202. If the following guide lose his distance from the 
 10 
 
 I 
 
134 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON V. 
 
 one leading (which can only happen by his own fault), ho 
 will correct himself by slightly lengthening- or shortening 
 a few steps, in order that there may not be sudden quic];- 
 enings or slackenings in the march of his platoon. 
 
 203. If the same guide, having neglected to march ex- 
 actly in the trace of the preceding one, find himself sen- 
 sibly out of the direction, he will remedy this fault by 
 advancing more or less the shoulder opposite to the true 
 direction, and thus, in a few steps, insensibly regain it, 
 without the inconvenience of the oblique step, which would 
 cause a loss of distance. In all cases, each chief of pla- 
 toon will cause it to conform to the movements of its 
 guide. 
 
 Remarks on the march in column. 
 
 204. If the chiefs and guides of subdivisions neglect to 
 lead off and to decide the march from the first step, the 
 march will be begun in uncertainty, which will cause 
 waverings, a loss of step, and a loss of distance. 
 
 205. If the leading guide take unequal steps, the march 
 of his subdivision, and that which follows, will be uncer- 
 tain : there will be undulations, quickenings and slacken- 
 ings in the march. 
 
 206. If the same guide be not habituated to prolong a 
 given direction, without deviation, he will describe a crook- 
 ed line, and the column must wind to conformi itself to 
 such line. 
 
 207. If the following guide be not habituated to march 
 ia the trace of the preceding one, he will lose his distance 
 
?s~i L.'..j L r I Ln 
 
 _i D 
 
 
 |h 
 
 -^ [E 
 j 
 
 ^^] 
 
 1 ■"+ 
 
 
 
 "* 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSOX V. 135 
 
 at every moment in endeavors to regain the trace, the 
 preservation of which is the most important principle in 
 the march in column. 
 
 208. The guide of each subdivision in column will he 
 responsible for the direction, distance, and step ; the chief 
 of the suljdivision, for the order and conformity of his 
 subdivision with the movements of the guide. Accord- 
 ingly, the chief will frequently turn, in the march, to ob- 
 serve his subdivision. 
 
 209. The instructor, placed on the flank of the guides, 
 will watch over the execution of all the principles pre- 
 scribed ; he will, also, sometimes place himself in the 
 rear, align himself on the guides, and halt, pending some 
 thirty paces together, to verify the accuracy of the guides. 
 
 210. In column, chiefs of subdivision will always re- 
 peat, with the greatest promptitude, the commands march 
 and hdlt, no chief waiting for another, but each fepcating 
 the command the moment he catches it from the instructor. 
 They will re]>eat no other command given by him ; but 
 will explain, if necessary, to their subdivisions, in an un- 
 der tone of voice, what they will have to execute, as indi- 
 cated by the commands of caution. 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 To change direction. 
 
 211. The changes of direction of a column while march- 
 ing, will be executed according to the principles prescribed 
 
i;]G SCHOOL OK Tlir. COMPANY — LKSSON V. 
 
 for wheeling on tlie march. Whenever, therefore, a column 
 is to change direction, the instructor will change the guide, 
 if not already there, to the flank opposite the side to Vhich 
 the change is to be made. 
 
 212. The column being in march right in front, if it be 
 the wish of the instructor to change direction to the right, 
 he will give the order to the chief of the first platoon, and 
 immediately go himself, or send a marker to the point at 
 which the change of direction is to be made; the instruc- 
 tor, or marker, will place himself on the direction of the 
 guides, so as to present the breast to that flank of the 
 column. 
 
 213. The leading guide will direct his march on that 
 person, so that, in passing, his left arm may just graze his 
 breast. When the leading guide shall have approached 
 near to the marker, the chief of his platoon will command : 
 
 1. Rigid wheel. 2. March. 
 
 214. The first command will be given when the platoon 
 is at the distance of four paces from the marker. 
 
 215. At the command m<irch, which will be pronounced 
 at the instant the guide shall have arrived opposite the 
 marker, the platoon will wheel to the right, conforming to 
 what is prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 396. 
 
 210. The wlieel being finished, the chief of each platoon 
 will command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 
 
 217. These commands will be pronounced and executed 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON V. 137 
 
 as is prescribed in the school of the sohlier, Nos. 398 and 
 .'}99. The guide of the first platoon will take points on the 
 ground in the new direction, in order the better to regu- 
 late the march. 
 
 218. The second platoon will continue to march straight 
 forward till up with the marker, when it will wheel to Ihe 
 right, and retake the direct march by the same commands 
 and the same means which governed the first platoon. 
 
 219. The column being in march right in front, if the 
 instructor should Avish to change direction to the left, he 
 will command, yuide right. At this command, the two 
 guides will move rapidly to the right of their respective 
 platoons, each passing in front of his subdivision ; the 
 men will take the touch of elbows to the right ; the in- 
 structor will afterward conform to what is prescribed, No. 
 212. 
 
 220. The change of direction to the left will then be 
 executed according to the same principles as the change of 
 direction to the right, but by inverse means. 
 
 221. When the change of direction is completed, the 
 instructor will command, guide left. 
 
 222. The changes of direction in a column, left in front, 
 will be executed according to the same principles. 
 
 223. In changes of direction in double quick time, the 
 platoons will wheel according to the principles prescribed 
 in the school of the soldier. No. 404. 
 
 224. In order to prepare the men for those formations in 
 line, which can be executed only by turning to the right 
 or the left, the instructor will sometimes cause the column 
 to change direction to the side of the guide. In this case, 
 
138 SCHOOL OF tup: comtaxy — lesson v. 
 
 the chief of the lejiilinj^ platoon will command: Left (or 
 r\<jhi) (urn insteail of left (or ritjht) wheel. Tho subdi- 
 visions will each turn, in succession, conforming to what 
 is prescribed in tho school of the soldier, No. 402. The 
 leading guide, as soon as ho has turned, will take points 
 on the ground, the better to regulate the direction of the 
 march. 
 
 225. It is highly important, in order to preserve dis- 
 tances and the direction, that all the subdivisions of the 
 column should change direction precisely at the point 
 where the leading subdivision changed ; it is for this rea- 
 son that that point ought fo be marked in advance, and 
 that it is prescribed that the guides direct their march on 
 the marker, also that each chief of subdivision shall not 
 cause the change to commence till the guide of his subdi- 
 vision has grazed the breast of this marker. 
 
 22G. Each chief will take care that his subdivision ar- 
 rives at the point of change in a square with the line of 
 direction : with this view, he will face to his subdivision 
 when the one which precedes has commenced to turn or to 
 wheel, and he will be watchful that it continues to march 
 squarely until it arrives at the point where the change of 
 direction is to commence. 
 
 227. If, in changes of direction, the pivot of the subdi- 
 vision which wheels should not clear the wheeling point, 
 the next subdivision would bo arrested and distances lostj 
 for the guide who conducts the marching flank having to 
 describe an arc, in length abouk a half greater than the 
 front of the subdivision, the second subdivision would be 
 already up with tho wheeling point, whilst tho first which 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. — LESSON V. 139 
 
 ^wheels has yet the half of its front to execute, and hence 
 would be obliged to mark time. until that half be executed. 
 It is, therefore, prescribed that the pivot of each subdi- 
 vision should take steps of nine or eleven inches in length, 
 according to the swiftness of the gait, in order not to 
 arrest the march of the next subdivision. The chiefs of 
 subdivision will look well to the step of the pivot, and 
 cause his step to be lengthened or shortened as may be 
 judged necessary. By the nature of this movement, the 
 centre of each subdivision will bend a little to the rear. 
 
 228. The guides will never alter the length or the ca- 
 dence of the step, whether the change of direction be to 
 the side of the guide or to the opposite side. 
 
 229. The marker, placed at the wheeling point, will 
 always present his breast to the flank of the column. The 
 instructor will take the greatest pains in causing the pre- 
 scribed principles, to be observed; he will see that each 
 subdivision only commences the change of direction when 
 the guide, grazing the breast of the marker, has nearly 
 passed him, and that the marching flank does not describe 
 the arc of too large a circle, in order Ihat it may not be 
 thrown beyond the new direction. 
 
 230. In change of direction by wheel, the guide of the 
 wheeling flank will cast his eyes over the ground at the 
 moment of commencing the wheel, and will describe an 
 arc of a circle whose radius is equal to the front of the 
 subdivision. 
 
140 school of the company — lksson v. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 To halt the column. 
 
 231. The column beinfr in march, when the instructor 
 shall wish to halt it, he will command : 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 232. At the second command, i^romptly relocated by the 
 chiefs of platoon, the column will halt; the guides also 
 will stand fast, although they may have lost both distance 
 and direction. 
 
 233. If the command lialt be not repeated with the 
 greatest vivacity, and executed at the same instant, dis- 
 tances will be lost. 
 
 234. If a guide, having lost his distance, seek to recover 
 it after that command, he will only throw his fault on the 
 following guide, who, if ho have marched well, will no 
 longer be«at his proper distance: and if the latter regain 
 what he has thus lost, the movement will be propagated to 
 tlic rear of the column. 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 
 Being in column by platoon, to form to the right or 
 left into line of battle, either at a halt or on the 
 march. 
 
 •235. The instructor having halted the column, right in 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON V. 141 
 
 front, and wishing to form it into line of battle, will place 
 himself at platoon distance in front of the leading guide, 
 face to him, and rectify, if necessary, the position of the 
 guide beyond ; which being executed, he will command : 
 
 Left — Dress. 
 
 23G. At this command, wliich Avill not be repeated by 
 the chiefs of platoon, each of them will place himself 
 briskly two paces outside of his guide, and direct the 
 alignment of the platoon perpendicularly to the direction 
 of the column. 
 
 lo7. Each chief having aligned his platoon, will com- 
 mand Froxt, and return quickly to his place in column. 
 
 238. This disposition being made, the instructor will 
 command : 
 
 1. Left into line, wheel. 2. March. 
 
 239. At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
 chiefs of platoon, the front rank man on the left of each 
 platoon will face to the left, and place his breast lightly 
 against the arm of the guide by his side, who stands fast; 
 the platoons will wheel to the left on the principle of 
 wheels from a halt, and in conformity to what is pre- 
 scribed No. 194. Each chief will turn to his platoon to 
 observe its movement, and when the marching flank has 
 [approached near the line of battle, he will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 240. The command halt, will be given when the march- 
 
142 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSOX V. 
 
 ing flank of the platDon is thrco paces from the line of 
 battle. I 
 
 241. The chief of tho second i)latoou, having halted it, 
 Avill return to his place as a file closer, passing around the 
 left of his subdivision. 
 
 242. The captain having halted tho first jilatoon. will 
 move rapidly to tho point at which the right of the com- 
 pany will rest in line of battle, and command: 
 
 Right — DiiESS. 
 
 243. At this coiiiiiiand, the two ]ilatoons will dress up on 
 the alignment; the front rank man on the right of the 
 leading platoon, who finds himself opposite the instructor 
 established on the direction of the guides, will place his 
 breast lightly against the left arm of this officer. The 
 captain will direct the alignment from the right on the 
 man on the opposite flank of tho company. 
 
 244. The company being aligned, the captain will com- 
 mand : 
 
 FUONT. 
 
 245. The instructor seeing tho company in lino of battle, 
 will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 246. At this command, tlie covering sergeant will cover 
 the cMptain, and the left guide will return to his place as a 
 file closer. 
 
 247. If the column be left in front, and the instructor 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON V. 143 
 
 should wish to form it to the right into line of battle, he 
 will place himself at platoon distance in front of the lead- 
 ing guide, face to him, and rectify, if necessary, the posi- 
 tion of the guide beyond; which being executed, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Plight into line taheel. 2. March. 
 
 248. At the command viarch, tlie front rank man on the 
 right of each platoon will face to the right and place his 
 breast lightly against the left arm of the guide by his side, 
 who stands fast; each platoon will wheel to the right, and 
 will be halted by its chief, when the marching flank has 
 approached near the line of battle; for this purpose, the 
 chief of each platoon will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 219. The command halt, will l>e given when the march- 
 ing flank of the platoon is three paces from the line of 
 battle. The chief of the second platoon having halted his 
 platoon, will resume his place in the rank of file closers. 
 
 250. The captain having halted the first platoon, will 
 move briskly to the point at which the left of the company 
 [Will rest, and command : 
 
 Left — Dress. 
 
 251. At this command, the two platoons will dress up on 
 the alignment ; the man on tbe left of the second platoon, 
 [Opposite the instructor, will place his breast lightly against 
 
144 SCHOOL or tiik comtany — lksson v. 
 
 the rijrht arm of this (ifficcr, and the captain will direct the 
 alignment from the left on the man on tlie oi>i>osite flank 
 of the company. 
 
 252. The company hc'uti; alij^ned, the captain will com- 
 mand : 
 
 FUOXT. 
 
 253. The instructor will afterward command: 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 254. At this command, the captain -will move to the 
 rij;ht of his company, the covering sergeant will cover 
 him, and the left guide will return to his phice as a file 
 clo.^er. 
 
 255. The instructor may omit the command left or n'ljlit 
 dresH, previous to commanding left or r/r//t« into line, ichecl. 
 unless, after rectifying the position of the guides, it should 
 become necessary to dress the platoons, or one of them, 
 laterally to the right or left. 
 
 25G. The instructor, before the commaiul /<;/V (or rujht) 
 into line, uheel, will assure himself that the rearmost pla- 
 to(»n is at its e.\act wheeling distance from the one in front. 
 This attention is important, in order to detect negligence 
 on the part of guides in this essential point. 
 
 257. If the column be marching right in front, and the 
 instructor should wish to form it into line without halting 
 the column, he will give the commands prescribed No. 
 238. and move rapidly to platoon distance in front of the 
 leading guide. 
 
 258. At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
 
8CIIOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON V. 145 
 
 chiefs of platoon, the left guides will halt short, the instruct- 
 or, the chiefs of platoon^ and the platoons, will conform to 
 what is prescribed No. 239 and following. 
 
 259. If the column be in march left in front, this forma- 
 tion will be made according to the same principles and 
 by inverse means. 
 
 260. If the column be marching right in front, and the 
 instructor should wish to form it into line without halting 
 the column, and to march the company in line to the front, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. By platoons left wheel. 2. Makch. 
 
 261. At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
 chiefs of platoon, the left guides will halt: the man next 
 to the left guide in each platoon will mark time : the pla- 
 toons will wheel to the left, conforming to the principles 
 of the wheel on a fixed pivot. When the right of the 
 platoons shall arrive near the line of battle, the instructor 
 will command: 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide right (or left). 
 
 262. At the fourth command, given at the instant the 
 wheel is completed, all the men of the company will 
 move off together with the step of twenty-eight inches; 
 the captain, the chief of the second platoon, the covering 
 sergeant and the left guide, will take their positions as in 
 line of battle. 
 
 263. At the fifth command, which will be given immedi- 
 11 
 
146 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON VL 
 
 atoly after the fourth, the captain ami covering sergeant, 
 if not already there, will move briskly to the siilc on 
 which the guide is designated. The non-commissioned 
 officer charged with the direction will move rapidly in 
 front of the guide, and will be assured in his line of march 
 by the instructor, as is prescribed, No. 104. That non- 
 commissioned officer will immediately take points on the 
 ground as indicated in the same number. The men will 
 take the touch of elbows to the side of the guide, conform- 
 ing themselves to the principles of the march in line. 
 
 2G4. The same principles are applicable to a column left 
 in front. 
 
 LESSON SIXTH. 
 AUTICLE FlUST. 
 
 To break the company into platoons, and to re-form 
 the company. 
 
 To break the company into platoons. 
 
 265. The company marching in the cadenced step, and 
 supposed to make part of a column, right in front, when 
 the instructor shall wish to cause it to break by platoon, 
 he will give the order to the captain, who will command: 
 1. Break into ])latoo7i8, and immediately place himself 
 before the centre of the first platoon. 
 

 
 
 
 >.,j 
 
 ?n 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 1 F^ 5 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ! A 
 
 
 r^l, ^- [■ V...\:.±'M^^M^ 
 
 l^j'rf ! ■s.rU'^M^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 n ra 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '.j,,j i 1 • 1 1 i 1 ' 1 
 
 
 LJ.-I_.LJ_J.1,lJ__l 
 
 
 
 
 
 1Z3 a i±; a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 % "^ 
 
 j 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 J 
 
 ! 
 
 j 
 
 t?!".; 
 
 
 -l-L 
 
 Li J.L J'_LLJ_LJ.L J L J.!^ 
 
 
 1 _L 
 
 Li JJ..L.I_M_IJ..LLJ_. 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 A 
 
 CT B ^ ~ 
 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON VI. 147 
 
 266. At the command break into platoons, the first lieu- 
 tenant will pass quickly around the left to the centre of 
 his platoon, and give the caution : Mark time. 
 
 267. The captain will then command : 2. March. 
 
 268. The first platoon will continue to march straight 
 forward; the covering sergeant will move rapidly to the 
 left flank of this platoon (passing by the front rank), as 
 ^^oon as the flank shall be disengaged. 
 
 269. At the command march, given by the captain, the 
 second platoon will begin to mark time : its chief will 
 immediately add: 1. Jiifjht oblique ; 2. Mauch. The last 
 command will be given so that this platoon may com- 
 mence obliquing the instant the rear rank of the first 
 platoon shall have passed. The men will shorten the step 
 in obliquing, so that when the command forward march ig 
 given, the platoon may have its exact distance. 
 
 270. The guide of the second platoon being near the 
 direction of the guide of the first, the chief of the second 
 will command Forward, and add March, the instant that 
 the guide of his platoon shall cover the guide of the first. 
 
 271. In a column, left in front, the company will break 
 into platoons by inverse means, applying to the first pla- 
 toon all that has been prescribed for the second, and 
 reciprocally. 
 
 272. In this case, the left guide of the company will 
 shift to the right flank of the second platoon, and the 
 covering sergeant will remain on the right of the first. 
 
 To re-form the company. 
 
 273. The column, by platoon, being in march, right in 
 
148 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON VI. 
 
 front, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to form 
 Company, ho will give the order to the captain, who will 
 command : Form conipnin/, 
 
 274. Having given this command, the captain will im- 
 mediately add: 1. Fi'mt platoon ; 2. Ri(jht ohlhpic. 
 
 275. The chief of the second platoon will caution it to 
 continue to march straight forward. 
 
 276. The captain will then command: 3. March. 
 
 277. At this command, repeated by the chief of tho 
 second, the first platoon will oblique to the right, in order 
 to unmask the second; the covering sergeant, on tho left 
 of the first platoon, will return to the right of tho com- 
 pany, passing by the front rank. 
 
 27S. When the first platoon; shall have nearly unmasked 
 tho second, the captain will command: 1. Mark time, and 
 at the instant the unmasking shall be complete, he will 
 add: 2. March. The first platoon will then ceaso to 
 oblique, and mark time. 
 
 279. In the mean time the second platoon will have con- 
 tinued to march straight forward, and when it shall be 
 nearly up with the first, the captain will command For- 
 ward, and at the instant the two platoons shall unite, add 
 March; the first platoon will then ceaso to mark time. 
 
 280. In a column, left in front, the same movement will 
 be executed by inverse means, the chief of the second 
 platoon giving the command Forward, and the captain 
 adding the command March, when the platoons are united. 
 
 281. The guide of the second platoon, on its right, will 
 pass to its left flank the moment the platoon begins to 
 oblique; the guide of tho first, on its right, remaining on 
 that flank of the platoon. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMrANY — LESSON VI. 141) 
 
 282. The instructor will also sometimes cause the com- 
 pany to break and re-form, by platoon, by his own direct 
 commands. In this case, he will give the general com- 
 mands prescribed for the captain above: 1. Break into 
 ■pJatoonn ; 2. MarCH ; and 1. Form Covipanj/ ; 2. Maroh. 
 
 283. If, in breaking the company into platoons, the sub- 
 division that breaks oflf should mark time too long, it 
 might, in a column of many subdivisions, arrest the march 
 of the following one, which would cause a lengthening of 
 the column, and a loss of distances. 
 
 284. In breaking into platoons, it is necessary that the 
 platoons which oblique should not shorten the step too 
 much, in order not to lose distance in the column, and not 
 to arrest the march of the following subdivision. 
 
 285. If a platoon obliques too far to a flank, it would be 
 obliged to oblique again to the opposite flank to regain the 
 direction, and by the double movement arrest, probably, 
 the march of the following subdivision. 
 
 286. The chiefs of those platoons which oblique will 
 face to their platoons, in order to enforce the observance 
 of the foregoing principles. 
 
 287. When, in a column of several companies, they 
 break in succession, it is of the greatest importance that 
 each company should continue to march in the same step, 
 without shortening or slackening, whilst that which pre- 
 cedes breaks, although the following company should close 
 up on the preceding one. This attention is essential to 
 guard against an elongation of the column. 
 
 288. Faults of but little moment, in a column of a few 
 companies, would be serious inconveniences in a general 
 column of many battalions. Hence the instructor will 
 
150 SCHOOL OF THE company — LESSON VI. 
 
 give the greatest care in causing all the pres.cribed prin- 
 ciples to be strictly observed. To this end, he will hold 
 himself on the directing flank, the better to observe all 
 the muvcmcnts. 
 
 Article Second. 
 
 Be i Jig in column^ to break Jiles to the rear, and to 
 cause them to re-enter into line. 
 
 289. The company being in march, and supposed to 
 constitute a subdivision of a column, right (or left) in 
 front, when the instructor shall wish to cause files to break 
 off ho will give the order to the captain, who will immedi- 
 ately turn to liis company, and command: 
 
 1. Two Jiles from left (or right) to rear. 2. March. 
 
 290. At the command march, the two files on the left 
 (or right) of the company will mark time, the others will 
 continue to march straight fotward; the two rear rank 
 men of these files will, as soon as the rear rank of the 
 company shall clear them, move to the right by advancing 
 the outer shoulder; the odd number will place himself 
 behind the third file from that flank, the even number 
 behind the fourth, passing for this purpose behind the odd 
 number ; the two front rank men will, in like manner. 
 
& 
 
 rrr-T-r-TT-T-rTrfrj 
 
 rK 
 
 
 
 
 
 !■ I' r; '■ n^FE" 
 
 Li.L-j. J I J.La.L : L 
 
i 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON VI. 151 
 
 move to the rigbt when the rear rank of the company shall 
 clear them, the odd number will place himself behind the 
 first file, the even number behind the second file, passing 
 for this purpose behind the odd number. If the files are 
 broken from the right, the men will move to the left, ad- 
 vancing the outer shoulder, the even number of the rear 
 rank will place himself behind the third file, the odd num- 
 ber of the same rank behind the fourth; the even number 
 of the front rank behind the first file, the odd number of 
 the same rank behind the second, the odd numbers for this 
 purpose passing behind the even numbers. The men will 
 be careful not to lose their distances and to keep aligned. 
 
 291. If the instructor should still wish to break two files 
 from the same side, he will give the order to the captain, 
 who will proceed as above directed. 
 
 292. At the command march, given by the captain, the 
 files already broken, advancing a little the outer shoulder, 
 will gain the space of two files to the right, if the files are 
 broken from the left, and to the left, if the files are broken 
 from the right, shortening, at the same time, the step, in 
 order to make room between themselves and the rear rank 
 of the company for the files last ordered to the rear; the 
 latter will break by the same commands and in the same 
 manner as the first. The men who double should increase 
 the length of the step in order to prevent distances from 
 being lost. 
 
 293. The instructor may thus diminish the front of a 
 company by breaking off successive groups of two files, 
 but the new files must always be broken from the same 
 aide. 
 
 294. The instructor, wishing to cause files broken ofi" to 
 
152 SCHOOL OK THE COMPANY — LESSON VI. 
 
 return into line, will give the order to the captain, who 
 will immediately command : 
 
 1. Two files into line. 2. March. 
 
 295. At the commund march, the first two files of those 
 marching by the flank will return briskly into line, and 
 the others will gain the space of two files b^' advancing 
 the inner shoulder toward the flank to which they belong. 
 
 296. The captain will turn to his company, to watch the 
 observance of the principles which have just been pre- 
 scribed. 
 
 297. The instructor having caused groups of two files 
 to break one after another, and to return again into line, 
 will afterwards cause two or three groups to break to- 
 gether, and for this purpose, will command: Four or six 
 files from left (or right) to rear; MAnCH. The files desig- 
 nated will mark time; each rank will advance a little the 
 outer shoulder as soon as the rear rank of the company 
 shall clear it, will oblique at once, and each group will 
 place itself behind the four neighboring files, and in the 
 game manner, as if the movement had been executed 
 group by group, taking care that the distances are pre- 
 served. 
 
 298. The instructor will next order the captain to cause 
 two or three groups to bo brought into line at once, who, 
 turning to the company, will command: 
 
 Four or six Jil.es into line — March. 
 
 209. At the command march, the files designated will 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK COMPANY LESSOX VI. 153 
 
 advance tbe inner shoulder, move up and form on the 
 flank of the company by the shortest lines. 
 
 300. As often as files shall break off to the rear, the 
 guide on that flank will gradually close on the nearest 
 front rank man remaining in line, and he will also open 
 out to make room for files ordered into line. 
 
 301. The files which march in the rear are disposed in 
 the following order: the left files as if the company was 
 marching by the right flank, and the right files as if the 
 company was marching by tlie left flank. Consequently, 
 whenever th,ere is on the right or left of a subdivision a 
 file which does not belong to a group, it will be broken 
 singly. 
 
 302. It is necessary to the preservation of distances in 
 column that the men should be habituated in the schools 
 of detail to execute the movements of this article with 
 precision. 
 
 303. If new files broken off do not step well to the left 
 or right in obliquing; if, when files are ordered into line, 
 they do not move up with promptitude and precision, in 
 either case the following files will- be arrested in their 
 march, and thereby cause the column to be lengthened 
 out. 
 
 304. The instructor will place himself on the flank from 
 which the files are broken, to assure himself of the exact 
 observance of the principles. 
 
 305. Files will only be broken off from the side of di- 
 rection, in order that the whole company may easily pass 
 from the front to the flank march. 
 
154 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY LESSON VI. 
 
 Article Tiiikd. 
 
 To march the column in route, and to execute the 
 movements incident thereto. 
 
 SOfi. The swiftness of the route step will be one hundred 
 and ten steps in a minute ; this swiftness will be habitually 
 maintained in columns in route, when the roads and ground 
 may permit. » 
 
 307. The company being at a halt, and supposed to con- 
 stitute a subdivision of a column, when the instructor 
 shall wish to cause it to march in the route step, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Column, forward. 2. Guide, left (or I'ight). 3. 
 Route- step. 4. March. 
 
 308, At the command march, repeated by the captain, 
 the two ranks will step off together ; the ret^r rank will 
 take, in marching, by shortening a few stops, a distance of 
 one pace (twenty-eight inches) from the rank preceding, 
 which distance will be computed from the breasts of the 
 men in the rear rank to the knapsacks of the men in the 
 front rank. The men without further command, will im- 
 mediately carry their arms at will, as indicated in the 
 school of the soldier, No, 219. They will no longer be 
 required to march in the cadence pace, or with the same 
 foot, or to remain silent. The files will march at ease; but 
 care wil^ be taken to prevent the ranks from intermixing. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON YI. 15o 
 
 the front rank from getting in advance of the guide, and 
 the rear rank from opening to too great a distance. 
 
 309. The company marching in the route step, the in- 
 structor will cause it to change direction, which will be 
 executed without formal commands, on a simple caution 
 from the captain; the rear rank will come up to change 
 direction in the same manner as the front rank. Each 
 rank lyill conform itself, although in the route step, to the 
 principles which have been prescribed for the change in 
 closed ranks, with this diiference only — that the pivot- 
 man, instead of taking steps of nine, will take steps of 
 fourteen inches, in order to clear the wheeling point. 
 
 310. The company marching in the route step, to cause 
 it to pass to the cadenced step, the instructor will first 
 order pieces to be brought to the right shoulder, and then 
 command : 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. March. 
 
 311. At the command march, the men will resume the 
 cadenced step, and will close so as to leave a distance of 
 sixteen inches between each rank. 
 
 312. The company marching in the cadenced pace, the 
 instructor to cause it to take the route st€p, will command: 
 
 1. Route step. 2. March. 
 
 313. At the command march, the front rank will con- 
 tinue the step of twenty-eight inches, the rear rank will 
 take, by gradually shortening the step, the distance of 
 
loG SCHOOL OF TIIK rOMPAXY — ^LESSON VI. 
 
 twentj'-eight inches from the fmnt rank : the men will 
 carry their arms at will. 
 
 .314. If the company be marching in the route step, and 
 the instructor should suppose the necessity of marching 
 by the flank in the same direction, he will command : 
 
 1. Company hy the riylit (or Jefl^ flank. 2. By Jile 
 left (or right). 3. March. 
 
 ."15. At the command march, the corapanj' will face to 
 the right (or left) in marching, the captain will place him- 
 pelf by the side of the guide who conducts the leading 
 flank; this guide will wheel immediately to the left or 
 right; all the files will come in succession to wheel on the 
 same spot as the guide ; if there be files broken off to the 
 rear, they will, by wheeling, regain their respective places, 
 and follow the movement of the company. 
 
 816. The instructor having caused the company to bo 
 again formed into line, will exercise it in increasing and 
 diminishing front, by platoon, which will bo executed by 
 the same commands, and the same means, as if the com- 
 pany were marching in the cadenced step. When the 
 company breaks into platoons, the chief of each will 
 move to the flank of his platoon, and will take the place 
 of the guide, who will step back into the rear rank. 
 
 ?A7. The company being in column, by platoon, and 
 supposed to march in the route step, the instructor can 
 cause the front to be diminished and increased, by section, 
 if the platoons have a front of twelve files or more. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON VI. 157 
 
 318. The movements of diminishing and increasing 
 front, by section, will be executed according to the princi- 
 ples indicated for the same movements by platoon. The 
 right sections of platoons will be commanded by the cap- 
 tain and first lieutenant, respectively ; the left sections, by 
 the two next subalterns in rank, or, in their absence, by 
 sergeants. 
 
 319. The instructor wishing to diminish by section, will 
 give the order to the captain, who will command : 
 
 1. Break into sections. 2. March. 
 
 320. As soon as the platoons shall be broken, each chief 
 of section will place himself on its directing flank in the 
 front rank, the guides who will be thus displaced will fall 
 back into the rear rank ; the file closers will close up to 
 within one pace of this rank. 
 
 321. Platoons will be broken into sections only in the 
 column in route, the movement will never be executed in 
 the manoeuvres, whatever may be the front of the com- 
 pany. 
 
 322. When the instructor shall wish to re-form platoons, 
 he will give the order to the captain, who will command : 
 
 1. Form platoons. 2. March. 
 
 323. At the first command, each chief of section will 
 place himself before its centre, and the guides will pass 
 into the front rank. At the command march, the move- 
 
 12 
 
158 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON VI. 
 
 ment will be executed as has been prescribed for forming 
 company. The moment the platoons are formed, the chiefs 
 of the left sections will return to their places as tile closers. 
 
 324. The instructor will also cause to be executed the 
 diminishing and increasing front by liles, as prescribed in 
 the preceding article, and in the same manner, as if 
 marching in the cadonced step. When the company is 
 broken into sections, the subdivisions must not be reduced 
 to a front of less than six files, not counting the chief of 
 the section, 
 
 325. The company being broken by platoon, or by sec- 
 tion, the instructor will cause it, marching in the route 
 step, to march by the flank in the same direction, by the 
 commands and the means indicateel, Nos. 314 and 315. 
 The moment the subdivisions shall face to the right (or 
 left), the first file of each will wheel to the left (or right), 
 in marching, to prolong the direction, and to unite with 
 the rear file of the subdivision immediately preceding. 
 The file closers will take their habitual places in the march 
 l)y the flank, before the union of the subdivisions. 
 
 320. If the company be marching by the right flank, 
 and the instructor should wish to undouble the files, which 
 might sometimes bo found necessary, he will inform the 
 captain, who, after causing the cadenced step to be re- 
 sumed, and arms to be shouldered or supported, will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. In two rauls, undouble files. 2. Marcil 
 
 327. At the second command, the odd numbers will con- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LKSSOX VI. 159 
 
 tinue to march straight forward, the even numbers will 
 shorten the step, and obliquing to the left will place them- 
 selves promptly behind the odd numbers ; the rear rank 
 will gain a step to the left so as to retake the touch of 
 elbows on the side of the front rank. 
 
 328. If the company be marching by the left flank, it 
 will be the even numbers who will continue to march for- 
 ward, and the odd numbers who will undouble. 
 
 329. If the instructor should wish to double the files, he 
 will give the order to the captain, who will command : 
 
 1. In four ranks, double files. 2. March. 
 
 330. At the command march, the files will double in the 
 manner as explained, when the company faces by the 
 right or the left flank. The instructor will afterwards 
 cause the route step to be resumed. 
 
 331. The various movements prescribed in this lesson 
 may be executed in double quick time. The men will be 
 brought, by degrees, to pass over at this gait about eleven 
 hundred yards in seven minutes. 
 
 332. When the company marching in the route step 
 shall halt, the rear rank will close up at the command 
 halt, and the whole will shoulder arms. 
 
 333. Marching in the route step, the men will be per- 
 mitted to carry their pieces in the manner the}^ shall find 
 most convenient, paying attention only to holding the 
 muzzle up, so as to avoid accidents. 
 
igo school of the company — lksson vi. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 Countermarch. 
 
 .334. The compauy being at a halt, and supposed to con- 
 stitute part of a column, right in front, when the in- 
 structor shall wish to cause it to countermarch, he will 
 command: 
 
 1, Counterinarch. 2. Company^ right — Face. 3. By 
 file left. 4. March. 
 
 335. At the second command, the company will face to 
 the right, the two guides to the right about; the captain 
 will go to the right of his company and cause two files to 
 break to the rear, and then place himself by the side of 
 the front rank man, to conduct him. 
 
 336. At the command march, both guides will stand 
 fast; the company will step off smartly; the first file con- 
 ducted by the captain, will wheel around the right guide, 
 and direct its march along the front rank so as to arrive 
 behind, and two paces from the left guide; each file will 
 come in succession to wheel on the same ground around 
 the right guide ; the loading file having arrived at a point 
 opposite to the left guide, the captain will command ; 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Right — 
 Dress. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON YI. 161 
 
 337- The first command will be given at four paces 
 from the point where the leading file is to rest. 
 
 338. At the second command, the company will halt. 
 
 339. At the third, it will face to the front. 
 
 340. At the fourth, the company will dress by the right; 
 the captain will step two paces outside of the left guide, 
 now on the right, and direct the alignment, so that the 
 front rank may be enclosed between the two guides ; the 
 company being aligned, he will command Front, and 
 place himself before the centre of the company as if in 
 column ; the guides, passing along the front rank, will 
 shift to their proper places, on the right and left of that 
 rank. 
 
 341. In a column, by platoon, the countermarch will be 
 executed by the same commands, and according to the 
 same principles; the guide of each platoon will face about, 
 and its chief will place himself by the side of the file on 
 the right, to conduct it. 
 
 342. In a column, left in ft-ont, the countermarch will be 
 executed by inverse commands and means, but according 
 to the same principles. Thus, the movement will be made 
 by the right flank of subdivisions, if the right be in front, 
 and by the left flank, if the left be in front; in both cases 
 the subdivisions will wheel by file to the side of the front 
 rank. 
 
1G2 SCHOOL OF THE company — LESSON VI. 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 
 Being in column hj platoon, to form on the right 
 (or left) into line of battle. 
 
 343. The column by platoon, right in front, being in 
 march, the instructoi-, wishing to form it on the right into 
 line of battle, will command : 
 
 1. On the right into line. 2. Guide right. 
 
 314. At the second command, the guide of each platoon 
 will shift quickly to its right flank, and the men will touch 
 elbows to the right; the column will continue to march 
 straight forward. 
 
 345. The instructor having given the second command, 
 will move briskly to the point at which the right of the 
 company ought to rest in line, and place himself facing 
 the point of direction to the left which he will choose. 
 
 346. The line of battle ought to be so chosen that the 
 guide of each platoon, after having turned to the right, 
 may have, at least, ten paces to take before arriving upon 
 that line. 
 
 .347. The head of the column being nearly opposite to 
 the instructor, the chief the first platoon will command: 
 1. I{i<iht turn; and when exactly opposite to that point, he 
 will add : 
 
 2. March. 
 
 348. At the command march, the first platoon will turn 
 
^ 
 
 XJ 1 ! I I I rn " 
 
 J-,J-i M INI I 
 
 niT 
 
SCHOOL OF THK COMPANY — LESSON VI. 163 
 
 to the right, in conformity with the principles prescribed 
 in the school of the soldier, No. 402. Its guide will so 
 direct his march as to bring the front rank man, next on 
 his left, opposite to the instructor; the chief of the platoon 
 will march before its centre ; and when its guide shall be 
 near the line of battle, he will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 o49. At the command haJt, which will be given at the 
 instant the right of the platoon shall arrive at the distance 
 of three paces from the line of battle, the platoon will 
 halt; the files, not yet in line, will come up promptly. 
 The guide will throw himself on the line of battle, oppo- 
 site to one of the three left files of his platoon ; he will 
 face to the instructor, who will align him on the point of 
 direction to the left. The chief of platoon having, at the 
 same time, gone to the point where the right of the com- 
 pany is to rest, will, as soon as he sees all the files of the 
 platoon in line, command : 
 
 Flight — Dkess. 
 
 350. At this, the first platoon will align itself; the fx*ont 
 rank man, who finds himself opposite to the guide, will 
 rest his breast lightly against the right arm of this guide, 
 and the chief of the platoon, from the right, will direct 
 the alignment on this man. 
 
 351. The second platoon will continue to march straight 
 forward, until its guide shall arrive opposite to the left file 
 of the first; it will then turn to the right at the command 
 
164 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LESSON VI. 
 
 of its chief, and march toward the line of battle, its guide 
 directing himself on the left file of the first platoon. 
 
 352. The guide having arrived at the distance of three 
 paces from the line of battle, this platoon will be halted, 
 as prescribed for the first; at the instant it halts, its guide 
 will spring on the line of battle, opposite to one of the 
 three left files of his platoon, and will be assured in hi? 
 position by the instructor. 
 
 353. The chief of the second platoon, seeing all its files 
 in line, and its guide established on the direction, will 
 command : 
 
 Right — Dress. 
 
 354. Having given this command, he will return to his 
 place as a file closer, passing around the left; the second 
 platoon will dress up on the alignment of the first, and. 
 when established, the captain will command : 
 
 Front. 
 
 355. The movement ended, the instructor will command: 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 35G. At this command, the two guides will return to 
 their places in line of battle. 
 
 357. A column, by platoon, left in front, will form on the 
 left into line of battle, according to the same principles, 
 and, by inverse means, applying to the second platoon 
 what is jprescribed for the first, and reciprocally. The 
 
SCIIOOI- OP^ THE COMPAXY — LESSON VI. 1G5 
 
 chief of the second platoon having aligned it, from the 
 point of appui (the leftj, will retire to his place as a file 
 closer. The captain having halted the first platoon three 
 paces behind the line of battle, will go to the same point 
 to align this platoon, and then command : Front. At the 
 command, rjuides — posts, given by the instructor, the cap- 
 tain will shift to his proper flank, and the guides take 
 their places in the line of battle. 
 
 358. When the companies of a regiment are to be exer- 
 cised, at the same time, in the school of the company, the 
 colonel will indicate the lesson or lessons they arc sever- 
 ally to execute. The whole will commence by a bugle 
 signal, and terminate in like manner. 
 
 Formation of a company from two ranks into single 
 rank, and reciprocally. 
 
 359. The company being formed into two ranks in the 
 manner indicated No. 8, school of the soldier, and sup- 
 posed to make part of a column, right or left in front, 
 when .the instructor shall wish to form it into single rank, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. In one rank, form company. 2. March. 
 
 360. At the first command, the right guide will face to 
 the right. 
 
 361. At the command march, the right guide will step 
 off and march in the prolongation of the front rank. 
 
 362. The first file will step off at the same time with the 
 
1G6 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY — LKSSON VI. 
 
 guide; the front rank mim will turn to the ri-rlit ut the 
 first step, follow the guide, and be himself followed by the 
 rear rank man of his file, who will come to turn on the 
 same spot where he had turned. The second file, and suc- 
 cessively all the other files, will step off as has been pro- 
 scribed for the first, the front rank man of each file follow- 
 ing immediately the rear rank man of the file next on 
 his right. The captain will superintend (he movement, 
 and when the last man shall have stepped off, he will halt 
 the company, and face.it to the front. 
 
 363. The file closers will take their places in line of bat- 
 tle, two paces in rear of the rank. 
 
 364. The company being in single rank, when the in- 
 structor shall wish to form it into two ranks, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. In two ranks^ form company. 2. Company^ right — 
 Face. 3. March. 
 
 365. At the second command, the comjiany will face to 
 the right: the right guide and the man on the right will 
 remain faced to the front. 
 
 306. At the command march, the men who have faced 
 to the right will step oflF, and form files in the following 
 mannor: the second man in the rank will place himself 
 ])chind the first to form the first file ; the third will place 
 himself by the side of the first in the front rank; the 
 fourth behind the third in the rear rank. All the others 
 will, in like manner, place themselves, alternately, in the 
 front and rear rank, and will thus form files of two men, 
 on the left of those already formed. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPAXY — LESSON VI. 16 7 
 
 367. The formations above described will be habitually 
 executed by the right of companies ; but when the in- 
 structor shall wish to have them executed by the left, hQ 
 will face the company about, and post the guides in the 
 rear rank. 
 
 368. The formation will then be ex,ecuted by the same 
 commandgi, and according to the same principles as by the 
 front rank ; the movement commencing with the left file. 
 now become the right, and in each file by the rear rank 
 man, now become the front; the left guide will conform to 
 what has been prescribed for the right. 
 
 369. The formation ended, the instructor will face the 
 company to its proper front. 
 
 370. When a battalion in line has to execute either of 
 the formations above described, the colonel will cause it to 
 break to the rear by the right or left of companies, and 
 will then give the commands just prescribed for the in- 
 structor. Each company will execute the movement as if 
 acting singly. 
 
 Formation of a compan?/ fi'om hco ranks into four^ 
 and reciprocally, at a halt and in march. 
 
 371. The company being formed in two ranks, at a halt, 
 j and supposed to form part of a column right in front, 
 1 when the instructor shall wish to form it into four ranks, 
 1 he will command : 
 
 1. In four ranks, form company. 2. Company, left — 
 Face. 3. March (or double quick— March). 
 
 372. At the second command, the left guide will remain 
 
1G8 SCHOOL OF TIIK COMPANY — LKSSOX VI. 
 
 faced to the front, the company will face to the left : thv 
 rear rank will gain the distance of one pace from the front 
 rank by a side step to the left and rear, and the men will 
 form into four ranks as prescribed in the school of the 
 soldier. 
 
 373. At the command march, the first file of four men 
 will re-faco to the front without undoubling. All the other 
 files of four will step off, and closing successively to about 
 five inches of the preceding file, will halt, and immedi- 
 ately face to the front, the men remaining doubled. 
 
 374. The file closers will take their new places in line of 
 battle, at two paces in rear of the fourth rank. 
 
 375. The captain will superintend the movement. 
 
 376. The company being in four ranks, when the in- 
 structor shall wi.'-h to form it into two ranks, ho will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. In two ranl:<<,fonn company. 2. Company^ rigid — 
 Face. 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 377. At the second command the left guide will stand 
 fast, the company will face to the right. 
 
 378. At the command march, the right guide will step 
 off and march in the prolongation of the front rank. The 
 leading file of four men will step otf at the same time, the 
 other files standing fast; the second file will step off when 
 there shall bo between it and the first space suflScient to 
 form into two ranks. The following files will execute suc- 
 cessively what has been prescribed for the second. As 
 soon as tlie last file shall have its distance, the instructor 
 will command: 
 
SCHOOL OF TUF COMPANY — LFSSON VI. 169 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 379. At the command front, the company will face to 
 the front, antl the files will undouble. 
 
 380. The company being formed in two ranks, and 
 marching to the front, when the instrnctor shall wish to 
 form it into four ranks, he will command : 
 
 1. In four ranks, form company. 2. By the 
 left, double files. 3. March (or double quick 
 — March). 
 
 381. At the command march, the left guide and the left 
 file of the company will continue to march straight to the 
 front; the company will make a half face to the left, the 
 odd numbers placing themselves behind the even numbers. 
 The even numbers of the rear rank will shorten their steps 
 a little, to permit the odd numbers of the front rank to get 
 between them and the even numbers of that rank. The 
 files thus formed of fours, except the left file, will continue 
 to march obliquely, lengthening their steps slightly, so as 
 to keep constantly abreast of the guide ; each file will 
 close successively on the file next on its left, and when at 
 the proper distance from that file, will face to the front by 
 a half face to the right, and take the touch of elbows to 
 the left. 
 
 382. The company being in march to the front in four 
 ranks, when the instructor shall wish to form it into two 
 ranks, he will command : 
 
 13 
 
170 SCHOOL OF TIIK COMPANY — LKSSON VI. 
 
 1. In tivo ranks^ form companTj. 2. Bjf the right, 
 uridouhle files, 3. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 383. At the command march, the left guide and the left 
 file of the company will continue to march straight to the 
 front; the company will make a half face to the right and 
 march obliquely, lengthening the step a little, in order to 
 keep, as near as possible, abreast of the guide. As soon 
 as the second file from the left shall have gained to the 
 right the interval necessary for the left file to form into 
 two ranks, the second file will face to the front by a half 
 face to the left and march straight forward ; the left file 
 will immediately form into two ranks, and take "the touch 
 of elbows to the left. Each file will execute successively, 
 what has just been prescribed for the file next to the left, 
 and each file will form into two ranks when the file next 
 on its right has obliqued the required distance and faced 
 to the front. 
 
 38i. If the company bo supposed to make part of a 
 column, left in front, these diflcrent movements will be 
 executed according to the same principles and by inverse 
 means, substituting the indication hj't for riyht. 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 General j)rinciples and division of the instruction. 
 
 1. The movements of skirmishers should be subjected 
 to such rules as will give to the commander the means of 
 moving them in any direction with the greatest prompti- 
 tude. 
 
 2. It is not expected that these movements should be 
 executed with the same precision as in closed ranks, nor is 
 it desirable, as such exactness would materially interfere 
 with their prompt execution. 
 
 3. When skirmishers are thrown out to clear the way 
 for, and to protect the advance of, the main corps, their 
 movements should be so regulated by this corps as to keep 
 it constantly covered. 
 
 4. Every body of skirmishers should have a reserve, 
 the strength and composition of which will vary according 
 to circumstances. 
 
 5. If the body thrown out be within sustaining distance 
 of the main corps, a very small reserve will be sufficient 
 for each company, whose duty it shall be to fill vacant 
 places, furnish the line with cartridges, relieve the fa- 
 tigued, and serve as a rallying point for the skirmishers. 
 
 6. If the main corps be at a considerable distance, be- 
 sides the company reserves, another reserve will be re- 
 
172 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 quired, composed of entire companios, whieb will be em- 
 ployed to sustain and reinforce such parts of the line as 
 may be warmly attacked; this reserve should h% strong 
 enough to relieve at least half the companies deployed as 
 skirmishers. 
 
 7. The reserve should be placed behind the centre of the 
 line of skirmishers, the company reserves at one hundred 
 and fifty, and the principal reserve at four hundred paces. 
 This rule, however, is not invariable. The reserves, while 
 holding themselves within sustaining distance of the line, 
 should be, as much as possible, in position to afford each 
 other mutual protection, and must carefully profit by any 
 accidents of the ground to conceal themselves from the 
 view of the enemy, and to shelter themselves from his fire. 
 
 8. The movements of skirmishers will be e.vecuted in 
 quick, or double quick time. The run will be resorted to 
 only in cases of urgent necessity. 
 
 9. Skirmishers will be permitted to carry their pieces in 
 the manner most convenient to them. 
 
 10. The movements will be habitually indicated by the 
 sounds of the bugle. 
 
 11. The ofiicers, and, if necessary, the non-commissioned 
 officers, will repeat, and cause the commands to be execu- 
 ted, as soon as they are given ; but to avoid mistakes, 
 when the signals arc employed, they will wait until the 
 last bugle note is sounded before commencing the move- 
 
 •ment. 
 
 12. When skirmishers are ordered to move rapidly, the 
 ofiicers and non-commissioned officers will see that the 
 men economize their strength, keep cool, and profit by all 
 the advantages which the ground may ofi"er for cover. It 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 173 
 
 is only by this continual watchfulness on the part of all 
 grades, that a line of skirmishers can attain success. 
 
 13. This instruction will be divided into five articles, 
 and subdivided as follows : 
 
 Article First. 
 
 1. To deploy forward. 
 
 2. To deploy by the flank. 
 
 3. To extend intervals. 
 
 4. To close intervals. 
 
 5. To relieve skirmishers. 
 
 Article Second. 
 
 1. To advance in line. 
 
 2. To retreat in line. 
 
 3. To change direction. 
 
 4. To march bv the flank. 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 1. To fire at a halt. 
 
 2. To fire marching. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 1. The rally. 
 
 2. To form column to march in any direction. 
 
 3. The assembly. 
 
174 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 
 1. To deploy a battalion as skirmishers. 
 
 2. To rally the battalion deployed as skirmishers. 
 
 14. In the first four articles, it is supposed that the 
 movements are executed by a company deployed as skir- 
 mishers, on a front equal to that of the battalion in order 
 of battle. In the fifth article, it is supposed that each com- 
 pany of the battalion, being deployed as skirmishers, oc- 
 cupies a front of one hundred paces. From these two 
 examples, rules may be deduced for all cases, whatever 
 may be the numerical strength of the skirmishers, and the 
 extent of ground they ought to occupy. 
 
 Article First. 
 
 Deploymenia. 
 
 15. A company may be <lcploycd as skirmishers in tw<^ 
 ways : forward, and by the flank. 
 
 16. The deployment forward will be adopted when the 
 company is behind the line on which it is to be established 
 as skirmishers : it will be deployed by the flank, when it 
 finds itself already on that line. 
 
 17. Whenever a company is to bo deployed as skirmish- 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 1 7/j 
 
 ers, it will be divided into two platoons, and each platoon 
 will be subdivided into two sections ; the comrades in bat- 
 tle, forming groups of four men, will be careful to know 
 and to sustain each other. The captain will assure him- 
 self that the files in the centre of each platoon and section 
 are designated. 
 
 18. A company may be deployed as skirmishers on its 
 right, left, or centre file, or on any other named file what- 
 soever. In this manner, skirmishers may be thrown for- 
 ward with the greatest possible rapidity on any ground 
 they may be required to occupy. 
 
 19. A chain of skirmishers ought generally to preserve 
 their alignment, but no advantages which the ground may 
 present should be sacrificed to attain this regularity. 
 
 20. The interval between skirmishers depends on the 
 extent of ground to be covered ; but in general, it is not 
 proper that the groups of four men should be removed 
 more than forty paces from each other. The habitual 
 distance between men of the same group in open grounds 
 will be five paces ; in no case will they lose sight of each 
 other. 
 
 21. The front to be occupied to cover a battalion com- 
 prehends its front and the half of each interval which 
 separates it from the battalion on its right and left. If a 
 line, whose wings are not supported, should be covered by 
 skirmishers, it will be necessary either to protect the flanks 
 with skirmishers, or to extend them in front of the line so 
 far beyond the wings as eff"ectually to oppose any attempt 
 which might be made by the enemy's skirmishers to dis- 
 turb the flanks. 
 
176 1N8TUUCTION FOR SKIUMISHKRS. 
 
 To deploy forward. 
 
 22. A company being at a bait or in march, when the 
 captain shall wish to deploy it forward on the left file of 
 the first platoon, holding the second platoon in reserve, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. First platoon — as skirmisliers. 
 
 2. On the left file — take intervals. 
 
 3. MARcn (or double quick — March). 
 
 23. At the first command, the second and third lieuten- 
 ants will place themselves rapidly two paces behind the 
 centres of the right and left sections of the first platoon: 
 the fifth sergeant will move one pace in front of the cen- 
 tre of the first platoon, and will place himself between the 
 two sections in the front rank as soon as the movement 
 begins; the fourth sergeant will place himself on the left 
 of the front rank of the same platoon, as soon as he can 
 puss. The captain will indicate to this sergeant the point 
 oil which he wishes him to direct his march. The first 
 lieutenant, placing himself before the centre of the second 
 platoon, will command : 
 
 Second platoon backward — March. 
 
 24. At this command, the second platoon will step three 
 
"~1 
 
 liViniiiGi iiiifiirnJB.e a bm b e^fraa i cir i 
 
 M 
 
 IS D iri 
 
 'M^^'M* 
 
 i«M '<ik a« 
 
 __ BKII Bin IB ■■■ 
 
 ■ ■ v« »■ «» oa e|i ■■ SJ" 
 
 
 , I ! i ; ; ; ; < 
 
 I I s I I I 'I 
 
 / > ^ / J 
 
 ■■ ■■ ■■ kml'0 ///y' //. 
 
 ■■ ■■ ■■ -F^ ////,', V 
 
 I ^ 
 
 i 
 
 
 1 -y^^"^.- 
 
 
 L . 
 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 177 
 
 paces to the rear, so as to unmask the flank of the first 
 platoon. It will then be halted by its chief, and the 
 second sergeant will place himself on the left, and the 
 third sergeant on the right flank of this platoon. 
 
 25. At the command morcli, the left group of four men, 
 conducted by the fourth sergeant, will direct itself on the 
 point indicated ; all the other groups of fours throwing 
 forward briskly the left shoulder, will move diagonally to 
 the front in double quick time, so as to gain to the right 
 the space of twenty paces, which shall be the distance 
 between each group and that immediately on its left. 
 When the second group from the left shall arrive on a line 
 with, and twenty paces from the first, it will march 
 straight to the front, conforming to the gait and direction 
 of the first, keeping constantly on the same alignment and 
 at twenty paces from it. The third group, and all the 
 others, will conform to what has just been prescribed for 
 the second ; they will arrive successively on the line. The 
 right guide will arrive with the last group. 
 
 26. The left guide haviixg reached the point where the 
 left of the line should rest, the captain will command »he 
 skirmishers to halt; the men composing each group of 
 fours will then immediatly deploy at five paces from each 
 other, and to the right and left of the front rank man of 
 the even file in each group, the rear rank men placing 
 themselves on the left of their file leaders. If any groups 
 be not in line at the command halt, they will move up 
 rapidly, conforming to what has just been prescribed. 
 
 27. If, during the deployment, the line should be fired 
 upon by the enemy, the captain may cause the groups of 
 fours to deploy, as they gain their proper distances. 
 
178 INSTRUCTION FOK SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 28. The line bcin;; formed, the non-commissioned offi- 
 cers on the right, left and centre of the platoon will place 
 themselves ten paces in rear of the line, and opposite the 
 positions they respectively occupied. The chiefs of sec- 
 tions will promptly rectify any irregularities, and then 
 place themselves twenty-five or thirty paces in rear of the 
 centre of their sections, each having with him four men 
 taken from the reserve, and also a bugler, who will repeat, 
 if necessary, the signals sounded by the captain. 
 
 29. Skirmishers should bo particularly instructed to 
 take advantage of any cover which the ground may offer, 
 and should lie flat on the ground whenever such a move- 
 ment is necessary to protect them from the fire of the 
 enemy. Regularity in the alignment should yield to this 
 important advantage. 
 
 30. When the movement begins, the first lieutenant will 
 face the second platoon about, and march it promptly, and 
 by the shortest line, to about one hundred and fifty paces 
 in rear of the centre of the line. He will hold it always 
 at this distance, unless ordered to the contrary. 
 
 31. The reserve will conform itself to all the movements 
 of the line. Thin rule in general. 
 
 32. Light troops will carry their bayonets habitually in 
 the scabbard, and this rule applies equally to the skir- 
 mishers and the reserve; whenever bayonets are required 
 to be fixed, a particular signal will bo given. The cap- 
 tain will give a general superintendence to the whole 
 deployment, and then promptly place himself about eighty 
 paces in the rear of the centre of the lino. lie will have 
 with him a bugler and four men taken from the reserve. 
 
 33. The deployment may be made on the right or the 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 179 
 
 centre of the platoon, by the same commands, substituting 
 the indication right or centre, for that of left file. 
 
 .34. The deployment on the right or the centre will be 
 made according to the principles prescribed above ; in this 
 latter case, the centre of the platoon will be marked by the 
 right group of fours in the second section ; the fifth ser- 
 geant will place himself on the right of this group, and 
 serve as the guide of the platoon during the deployment. 
 
 35. In whatever manner the dcploj'ment be made, on the 
 right, left, or centre, the men in each group of fours will 
 always deploy at five paces from each other, and upon the 
 front rank man of the even numbered file. The deploy- 
 ments will habitually be made at twenty paces interval; 
 but if a greater interval be required, it will be indicated in 
 the command. 
 
 36. If a company be thrown out as skirmishers, so near 
 the main body as to render a reserve unnecessary, the en- 
 tire company will be extended in the same manner, and 
 according to the same principles, as for the deployment of 
 a platoon. In this case, the third lieutenant will command 
 the fourth section, and a non-commissioned officer desig- 
 nated for that purpose, the second section ; the fifth ser- 
 geant will act as centre guide ; the file closers will place 
 themselves ten paces in rear of the line, and opposite their 
 places in line of battle. The first and second lieutenant 
 will each have a bugler near him. 
 
180 INSTllUCTION FOR SKIUM ISII KRS. 
 
 To deploy hy the jlank. 
 
 37. The company being at a halt, when the captain shall 
 wish to deplo}' it by the flank, holding the first platoon in 
 reserve, he will coramand : 
 
 1. Second platoon — as skirmishers. 2. By the right 
 Jlank — take intervals. 3. M.\ii.cii (ot double quick 
 — March). 
 
 38. At the first command, the first and third lieiitenants 
 will place themselves, respectively, two paces behind the 
 centres of the first and second sections of the second pla- 
 toon ; the fifth sergeant will place himself one pace in 
 front of the centre of the second platoon; the third ser- 
 geant, as soon as he can pass, will place himself on the 
 right of the front rank of the satne platoon. The captain 
 will indicate to him the point on which he wishes him to 
 direct his march. The chief of the first platoon will exe- 
 cute Avhat has been prescribed for the chief of the second 
 platoon, Nos. 23 and 24. The fourth sergeant will place 
 himself on the left flank of the reserve, the first sergeant 
 will remain on the right flank. 
 
 39. At the second command, the first and third lieuten- 
 ants will place themselves two paces behind the left group 
 of their respective sections. 
 
 40. At the command march, the second platoon will face 
 to the right, and commence the movement; the left group 
 of fours will stand fast, but will deploy as soon as there is 
 
Pa<r 
 
 
 
 "^sms^m" 
 
 2 |[:ii B s B a Ks c a h: a B D % o* 
 
INSTRUCTIOX FOR SKIRMISIIKRS. 181 
 
 room on its right, conforming to what has been prescribed, 
 No. 26; the third sergeant will place himself on the left of 
 the right group, to conduct itj the second group will halt 
 at twenty paces from the cne on its left, the third group at 
 twenty paces from the second, and so on to the right. A3 
 the groups halt, they will face to the enemy, and deploy as 
 has been explained for the left group. 
 
 41. The chiefs of sections will pay particular attention 
 to the successive deployments of the groups, keeping near 
 the group about to halt, so as to rectify any errors which 
 may be committed. When the deployment is completed, 
 they will place themselves thirty paces in rear of the cen- 
 tre of their sections, as has been heretofore prescribed. 
 The non-commissioned oflScers will also place themselves 
 as previously indicated. 
 
 42. As soon as the movement commences, the chief of 
 the first platoon, causing it to face about, will move it as 
 indicated, No. 30. 
 
 43. The deployment may be made by the left flank ac- 
 cording to the same principles, substituting left flank for 
 right flanh. 
 
 44. If the captain should wish to deploy the company 
 upon the centre of one of the platoons, he will command : 
 
 1. Second platoon — as skirmishers. 2. By the right 
 and left flanks — take intervals. 3. March (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 45. At the first command, the officers and non-commis- 
 sioned officers will conform to what has been prescribed, 
 No. 38. 
 
 14 
 
182 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 46. At the second command, tbo first lieutenant will 
 place himself behind the left group of the right section of 
 the second platoon, the third lieutenant behind the right 
 group of the left section of the same platoon. 
 
 47. At the command march, the right section will face 
 to the right, the left section will face to the left, the group 
 on the right of this latter section will stand fast. The 
 two sections will move off in opposite directions; the third 
 sergeant will place himself on the left of the right file to 
 conduct it, the second sergeant on the right of the left file. 
 The two groups nearest that which stands fast, will each 
 halt at twenty paces from this group, and each of the 
 other groups will halt at twenty paces from the group 
 which is in rear of it. Each group will deploy as hereto- 
 fore prescribed. No. 40. 
 
 48. The first and third lieutenants will direct the move- 
 ment, holding themselves always abreast of the group 
 which is about to halt. 
 
 49. The captain can cause the deployment to be made 
 on any named group whatsoever; in this case, the fifth 
 sergeant will place himself before the group indicated, and 
 the deployment will bo made according to the principles 
 heretofore prescribed. 
 
 50. The entire company may be also deployed, accord- 
 ing to the same principles. 
 
 To extend intervals. 
 
 51. This movement, which is employed to extend a line 
 of skirmishers, will be executed according to the princi- 
 ples prescribed for deployments. 
 
INSTRUCTIOX FOR SKIRMISHERS. 183 
 
 52. If it bo supposed that the line of skirmishers is at a 
 halt, and that the captain wishes to extend it to the left, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. By the left Jlank (so many paces), extend intervals, 
 2. March (or douUe quick — March). 
 
 53. At the command march, the group on the right will 
 stand fast, all the other groups will face to the left, and 
 each group will extend its interval to the prescribed dis- 
 tance bj' the means indicated, No. 40. 
 
 54. The men of the same group will continue to pre- 
 serve between each other the distance of five paces, unless 
 the nature of the ground should render it necessary that 
 they should close nearer, in order to keep in sight of each 
 other. The intervals refer to the spaces between the 
 groups, and not to the distances between the men in each 
 group. The intervals will be taken from the right or left 
 man of the neighboring group. 
 
 55. If the line of skirmishers be marching to the front, 
 and the captain should wish to extend it to the right, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. On the left group (so many paces), extend inter- 
 vals, 2. March (or double quick — MarchJ. 
 
 56. The left group, conducted by the guide, will con- 
 tinue to march on the point of direction ; the other 
 groups throwing forward the left shoulder, and taking 
 the double quick step, will open their intervals to the 
 
184 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 prescribed distance, by tbe means indicated, No. 25, con- 
 forming also to what is prescribed, No. 54. 
 
 57. Intervals may be extended on the centre of the 
 line, according to the same principles. 
 
 58. If in extending intervals, it be intended that one 
 company or platoon should occupy a line which had been 
 previously occupied by two, the men of the company or 
 platoon which is to retire will fall successively to the 
 rear as they are relieved by the extension of the in- 
 tervals. 
 
 To clone intervals. 
 
 59. This movement, like that of opening intervals, will 
 bo executed according to the principles prescribed for the 
 deployments. 
 
 60. If the line of skirmishers be halted, and the cap- 
 tain should wish to close intervals to the left, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. By the left flank (so many paces), close intervals. 
 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 61. At the command march, the left group will stand 
 fast, tbe other groups will face to the left and close to the 
 prescribed distance, each group facing to the enemy as it 
 attains its proper distance. 
 
 62. If the line be marching to the front, the captain 
 will command : 
 
 1. On the left group (so many paces), close intervals. 
 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 
a.Tr. 
 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 185 
 
 63. The left group, conducted by the guide, will con- 
 tinue to move on in the direction previously indicated ; 
 the other groups, advancing the right shoulder, will close 
 to the left, until the intervals are reduced to the pre- 
 scribed distance. 
 
 64. Intervals may be closed on the right, or on the 
 centre, according to the same principles. 
 
 65. When intervals are to be closed up, in order to 
 reinforce a line of skirmishers, so as to cause two com- 
 panies to cover the ground which had been previously 
 occupied by one, the new company will deploy so as to 
 finish its movement at twenty paces in rear of the line it 
 is to occupy, and the men will successively move upon 
 that line, as they shall be unmasked by the men of the 
 old company. The reserves of the two companies will 
 unite behind the centre of the line. 
 
 To relieve a company deployed as skirmishers. 
 
 66. When a company of skirmishers is to be relieved, 
 the captain will be advised of the intention, which he 
 will immediately communicate to his first and second 
 lieutenants. 
 
 67. The new company will execute its deployment for- 
 ward, so as to finish the movement at about twenty paces 
 in rear of the line. 
 
 68. Arrived at this distance, the men of the now com- 
 pany, by command of their captain, will advance rapidly 
 a few paces beyond the old line and halt; the new line 
 being established, the old company will assemble on its 
 reserve, taking care not to get into groups of fours until 
 they are beyond the fire of the enemy. 
 
186 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 69. If tho skirmishers to be relieved are marching in 
 retreat, the company thrown out to relieve them will 
 deploy by the flank, as prescribed. No. 38 and following. 
 The old skirmishers will continue to retire with order, 
 and having passed the new line, they Avill form upon the 
 reserve. 
 
 Article Second. 
 
 To advance. 
 
 To advance in line, and to retreat in line. 
 
 70. When a platoon or a company, deployed as skir- 
 mishers, is marching by tho front, the guide will be 
 habitually in tho centre. No particular indication to 
 this effect need be given in the commands, but if on the 
 contrary it be intended that tho directing guide should 
 be on the right, or left, tho command yuide riyht, or (juidc 
 left, will bo given immediately after that of forward. 
 
 71. The captain, wisliing the line of skirmishers to 
 advance, will command : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. jNIarcti (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 72. This command will be repeated with the greatest 
 rapidity by the chiefs of sections, and in case of need, by 
 the sergeants. This rule is general, whether the skir- 
 mishers march by tho front or by the flank. 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 18/ 
 
 73. At the first command, three' sergeants will move 
 briskly on the line, the first on the right, the second on 
 the left, and the third in the centre. 
 
 74. At the command march, the lino will move to the 
 front, the guide charged with the direction will move on 
 the point indicated to him, the skirmishers will hold them- 
 selves aligned on this guide, and preserve their intervals 
 toward him. 
 
 75. The chiefs of sections will march immediately be- 
 hind their sections, so as to direct their movements. 
 
 76. The captain will give a general superintendence to 
 the movement. 
 
 77. When he shall wish to halt the skirmishers, he will 
 command: 
 
 Halt. 
 
 78. At this command, briskly repeated, the line will 
 halt. The chiefs of sections will promptly rectify any 
 irregularity in the alignment and intervals, and after tak- 
 ing every possible advantage which the ground may oflFer 
 for protecting the men, they, with the three sergeants in 
 the line, will retire to their proper places in rear. 
 
 79. The captain, wishing to march the skirmishers in 
 retreat, will command : 
 
 1. In retreat. 2. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 80. At the first command, the three sergeants will move 
 on the line as prescribed, No. 73. 
 
 81. At the command march, the skirmishers will face 
 
188 INSTRUCTIOX FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 about individually, and march to the rear, conforming to 
 the principles prescribed, No. 74. 
 
 82. The officers and sergeants will use every exertion to 
 preserve order, 
 
 8.3. To halt the skirmi.'^hers, marching in retreat, the 
 captain will command : 
 
 Halt. 
 
 84. At this command, the skirmishers will halt, and 
 immediately face to the front. 
 
 85. The chiefs of sections and the three guides will 
 each conform himself to what is prescribed. No. 78. 
 
 To change direction. 
 
 86. If the commander of a line of skirmishers shall 
 wish to cause it to change direction to the right, he will 
 command: 
 
 1. llifjht loheel. 2. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 87. At the command march, the right guide will mark 
 time in his place ; the left guide will move in a circle to 
 the right, and that ho may properly regulate his move- 
 ments, will occasionally cast his ej'cs to the right, so as to 
 observe the direction of the line, and the nature of the 
 ground to be passed over. The centre guide will also 
 march in a circle to the right, and in order to conform his 
 movements to the general direction, will take care that his 
 steps are only half the length of the steps of the guide on 
 the left. 
 
INSTPtUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 189 
 
 88. The skirmishers will regulate the length of their 
 steps by their distance from the marching flank, being 
 less as they approach the pivot, and greater as they are 
 removed from it; they will often look to the marching 
 flank, so as to preserve the direction and their intervals. 
 
 89. "When the commander of the line shall wish to 
 resume the direct march, he will command : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 90. At the command march, the line will cease to wheel, 
 and the skirmishers Avill move direct to the front; the 
 centre guide will march on the point which will be indi- 
 cated to him. 
 
 91. If the captain should Avish to halt the line, in place 
 of moving it to the front, he Avill command: 
 
 Halt. 
 
 92. At this command, the line will halt. 
 
 93. A change of direction to the left will be made 
 according to the same principles, and by inverse means. 
 
 94. A line of skirmishers marching in retreat, will 
 change direction by the same means, and by the same 
 commands, as a line marching in advance; for example, 
 if the captain should wish to refuse his left, now become 
 the right, he will command: 1. Left wheel. 2. March. 
 At the command halt, the skirmishers will face to the 
 enemy. 
 
 95. But if, instead of halting the line, the captain should 
 wish to continue to march it in retreat, he will, when he 
 judges the line has wheeled sufficiently, command: 
 
190 INRTRUCTIOX FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 1. In retreat. 2. March. 
 To march hj the Jiank. 
 
 96. The captain, wishing the skirmishers to march by 
 the right flank, will command : 
 
 1. By the right Jlank. 2. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 97. At the first command, the three sergeants will place 
 themselves on the line. 
 
 98. At the command iiuo-ch, the skirmishers will face to 
 the right, and move oS"; the rigl^t guide will place himself 
 bj' the side of the leading man on the right to conduct 
 him, and will march on the point indicated; each skir- 
 misher will take care to follow exactly in the direction of 
 the one immediately preceding him, and to preserve his 
 distance. 
 
 99. The skirmishers may bo marched by the left flank, 
 according to the same principles, and by the same com- 
 mands, sul)stituting Irft for riijht ; the left guide will 
 place himself by the side of the leading man to conduct 
 h i m . 
 
 lUO. If the skiniiishers be marrhing by the llaiik, and 
 the captain should wish to halt them, he will command: 
 
 Halt. 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 191 
 
 101. At this commanJ, the skirmishers will bait ami 
 face to the enemy. The oflBcers and sergeants will con- 
 form to what has been prescribed, No. 78. 
 
 102. The reserve should execute all the movements of 
 the line, and be held always about one hundred and fifty 
 paces from it, so as to be in position to second its opera- 
 tions. 
 
 103. When the chief of the reserve shall wish to march 
 it in advance, he will command: 1. Plalnon, foricard. 2. 
 Guide left. 3. March. If he should wish to march it in 
 retreat, he will command: 1. In retreat. 2. March. 3. 
 Guide ri'jht. At the command halt, it will re-face to the 
 enemy. 
 
 104. The men should be made to vinderstand that the 
 signals or commands, such as forward, mean that the 
 skirmishers shall march on the enemy; in retreat, that 
 they shall retire, and to the right or left fank, that the 
 men must face to the right or left, whatever may be their 
 position. 
 
 105. If the skirmishers be marching by the flank, and 
 the captain should wish to change direction to the right 
 (or left), he will command: 1. By file rifjht {ox left). 2. 
 March. These movements will also be executed by the 
 signals Nos. 14 and 15. 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 The firings. 
 106. Skirmishers will fire either at a halt or marching. 
 
192 INSTIUXTION FOR SKrR:MISHKI{S. 
 
 To fire at a halt. 
 
 107. To cause this fire to be executed, the cajitain will 
 command : 
 
 Commence — Firing. 
 
 108. At this command, briskly repeated, the men of the 
 front rank will commence firing ; they will reload rapidly, 
 and hold themselves in readiness to fire again. During 
 this time the men of the rear rank will come to a ready, 
 and as soon as their respective file loaders have loaded, 
 they will also fire and reload. The men of each file will 
 thus continue the firing, conforming to this principle, that 
 the one or the other shall always have his piece loaded. 
 
 109. Light troops should be always calm, so as to aim 
 with accuracy ; they should, moreover, endeavor to esti- 
 mate correctly the distances between themselves and the 
 enemy to bo hit, and thus be enabled to deliver their fire 
 with the greater certainty of success. 
 
 110. Skirnii.shers will not remain in the same place 
 whilst reloading, unless protected by accidents in the 
 ground. 
 
 To fire marcliing. 
 
 111. This fire will be executed by the same commands 
 the fire at a halt. 
 
INSTIircTIOX FOK SK 1 KMISHKUS. lUS 
 
 112. At the command commeuce fin'ixj, if tlie line be 
 advancing, the front rank man of every file will halt, fire, 
 and reload before throwing himself forward. The rear 
 rank man of the same file will continue to march, and 
 after passing ten or twelve paces beyond his front rank 
 man, will halt, come to a ready, select his object, and fire 
 when his front rank man has loaded; the fire will thus 
 continue to be executed by each file ; the skirmishers will 
 keep united, and endeavor as much as possible to preserve 
 the general direction of the alignment. 
 
 11.3. If the line be marching in retreat, at the command 
 commence Jiriny, the front rank man of evcrj^ file will 
 halt, face to the enemy, fire, and then reload whilst mov- 
 ing to the rear ; the rear rank man of the same file will 
 continue to march, and halt ten or twelve paces beyond 
 his front rank man, face about, come to a ready, and fire 
 when his front rank man has passed him in retreat and 
 loaded 3 after which, he will move to the rear and reload; 
 the front rank man in his turn, after marching briskly to 
 the rear, will halt at ten or twelve paces from the rear 
 rank, face to the enemy, load his piece and fire, conform- 
 ing to what has just been prescribed; the firing will thus 
 be continued. 
 
 114. If the company be marching by the right flank, at 
 the command, commence firing, the front rank man of 
 every file will face to the enemy, step one pace forward, 
 halt, and fire; the rear rank man will continue to move 
 forward. As soon as the front rank man has fired, he will 
 place himself briskly behind his rear rank man and reload 
 whilst marching. AVhen he has loaded, the rear rank 
 man will, in his turn, step one pace forward, halt, and 
 15 
 
104 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISIIKRS. 
 
 fire; and returning to the rank?, Avill place himself behind 
 his front rank man ; the latter, in his turn, will act in the 
 same manner, observing the same principles. At the com- 
 mand, cvase Jin'uf/, the men of the rear rank will retake 
 their original positions, if not already there. 
 
 115. If the company be marching by the left tlank, the 
 fire will be executed according to the same principles, but 
 in this case, it will bo the rear rank men who will fire 
 first. 
 
 116. The following rules will be observed in the cases 
 to which they apply. 
 
 117. If the line be firing at a halt, or whilst marching 
 by the flank, at the command, Forward — March, it Avill 
 be the men whose pieces are loaded, without regard to the 
 particular rank to which they belong, who will move to 
 the front. Those men whose pieces have been discharged, 
 will remain in their places to load them before moving 
 forward, and the firing will be continued agreeably to the 
 principles prescribed, No. 112. 
 
 118. If the line be firing either at a halt, advancing, or 
 whilst marching by the flank, at the command. In re- 
 treat — March, the men whose pieces are loaded will remain 
 faced to the enemy, and will firo in this position; the men 
 whose pieces are discharged will retreat loading them, and 
 the fire will be continued agreeably to the principles pre- 
 scribed. No. 113. 
 
 119. If the line of skirmishers be firing cither at a halt, 
 advancing, or in retreat, at the command, liy the right (or 
 Ic/t) Jiauk — March, the men whoso pieces are loaded will 
 step one pace out of the general alignment, face to the 
 enemy, and fire in this position ; the men whose pieces are 
 
INSTRUCTION TOR .SKIRMISHERS. 195 
 
 unloaded will face to the right (or left) and march in the 
 direction indicated. The men who stepped out of the 
 ranks will place themselves, immediately after firing, upon 
 the general direction, and in rear of their front or rear 
 rank men, as the case may be. The fire will be continued 
 according to the principles prescribed. No. 114. 
 
 120. Skirmishers will be habituated to load their pieces 
 whilst marching; but they will be enjoined to halt always 
 an instant, when in the act of charging cartridge and 
 priming. 
 
 121. The3' should be practised to fire and load kneeling, 
 lying down and sitting, and much liberty should be 
 allowed in these exercises, in order that they may be 
 executed in the manner found to be most convenient. 
 Skirmishers should be cautioned not to forget that, in 
 whatever position they may load, it is important that the 
 piece should be placed upright before ramming, in order 
 that the entire charge of powder maj reach the bottom of 
 the bore. 
 
 122. In commencing the fire, the men of the same 
 rank should not all fire at once, and the men of the same 
 file should be particular that one or the other of them be 
 always loaded. 
 
 123. In retreating, the officer commanding the skir- 
 mishers should seize on every advantage which the 
 ground may present for arresting the enemy as long as 
 possible. 
 
 124. At the signal to cease firing, the captain will see 
 that the order is promptly obeyed ; but the men who may 
 not be loaded, will load. If the line be marching, it will 
 continue the movement; but the man of each file who 
 
19G INSTHCCTIOX FOR SKI JOI ISIlliliS. 
 
 happens to be in front, will wait until the man in rear 
 shall be abreast with him. 
 
 125. If a line of skirmishers bo firing advancing, at 
 the command halt, the line will re-form upon the skir- 
 mishers who are in front : when the line is retreating, 
 upon the skirmif^hers who are in rear. 
 
 126. Officers should watch with the greatest possible 
 vigilance over a line of skirmishers; in battle, they 
 should neither carry a rifle or fowling piece. In all the 
 firings, they, as well as the sergeants, should see that 
 order and silence are preserved, and that the skirmishers 
 do not wander imprudently; they should especially cau- 
 tion them to be calm and collected; not to fire until they 
 distinctly perceive the objects at which they aim, and are 
 sure that those objects are within proper range. Skir- 
 mishers should take advantage promptly, and with intel- 
 ligence, of all shelter, and of all accidents of the ground, 
 to conceal themselves from the view of the enemy, and 
 to protect themselves from bis fire. It may often happen 
 that intervals are momentarily lost when several men 
 near each other find a common shelter; but when they 
 quit this position, they should immediately resume their 
 intervals and their places in line, so that they may not, 
 by crowding, needlessly expose themselves to the fire of 
 the enemy. 
 

 Di 
 
 
 ■''Ir 
 
 llBIQISiaOXD 
 
 
 i L^fliiaii I ii lis 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■ 
 
 t a 
 
 
 
 y^^cc^^;.^o 
 
 -^F'Vi. 
 
 ^cr^^tl^pijyia 
 
 p 
 
 
 veiMB 
 
 i 
 
 Bi E PI r; r. ■ r T rj * ■?• r 
 
 ■ r. c !v I. ' ;: 
 « 
 
 b" -a 13 II Q B ia«i>»f • ■ ■ 1 
 
 
 
 rj 
 
 1 
 
 °f 
 
 
 
 ■■.|n 
 
 
 L4:..^^ 
 
 
instruction for skirmishers. 197 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 the rally. 
 
 To form column. 
 
 127. A company deployed as skirmishers, is rallied in 
 order to oppose the enemy with better success ; the rallies 
 are made at a run, and with bayonets fixed; when or- 
 dered to rally, the skirmishers fix bayonets without 
 command. 
 
 128. There are several ways of rallying, which the chief 
 of the line will adopt according to circumstances. 
 
 129. If the line, marching or at a halt, be merely dis- 
 turbed by scattered horsemen, it will not be necessary to 
 fall back on the reserve, but the captain will cause bayo- 
 nets to be fixed. If the horsemen should, however, 
 advance to charge the skirmishers, the captain Avill com- 
 mand, rally by fours. The line will halt if marching, and 
 the four men of each group will execute this rally in the 
 following manner : the front rank man of the even num- 
 bered file will take the position of guard against cavalry ; 
 the rear rank man of the odd numbered file will also take 
 the position of guard against cavalry, turning his back to 
 him, his right foot thirteen inches from the right foot of 
 the former, and parallel to it; the front rank man of the 
 odd file, and the rear rank man of the even file, will also 
 place themselves back to back, taking a like position, and 
 
198 IXSTKUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 between the two men already established, facing to the 
 right and left; the right feet of the four men will be 
 brought together, forming a square and serving for mu- 
 tual support. The four men in each group will come to a 
 ready, fire as occasion may offer, and load without moving 
 their feet. 
 
 130. The captains and chiefs of seetions will each cause 
 the four men who constitute his guard to form square, the 
 men separating so as to enable him and the bugler to 
 place themselves in the centre. The three sergeants will 
 each promptly place himself in the group neare.-t him in 
 the line of skirmishers. 
 
 131. Whenever the captain shall judi>,c these squares 
 too weak, but should wish to hold his position by strength- 
 ening his line, he will command: 
 
 llalbj hy sections. 
 
 132. At this eoniniand, the chiefs of sections will move- 
 rapidly on the centre group of their respective sections, 
 or on any other interior group whose position might 
 otfer a shelter, or other particular advantage ; the skir- 
 mishers will collect rapidly at a run on this group, and 
 without distinction of numbers. The tnon composing the 
 group on which the formation is made, will immediately 
 form square, as heretofore explained, and elevate their 
 pieces, the bayonets uppermost, in order to indicate the 
 point on which the rally is to bo made. The other skir- 
 mishers, as they arrive, will occupy and fill the open 
 angular spaces between these four men, and successively 
 
INSTRUCTION FOK SKIRMISHERS. 199 
 
 rally around this first nucleus, and in sucb manner as to 
 form rapidly a compact circle. Tbc skirmishers will take 
 as they arrive, the position of charge bayonet, the point 
 of the bayonet more elevated, and will cock their pieces 
 in this position. The movement concluded, the two ex- 
 terior ranks \yill fire as occasion may offer, and load 
 without moving their feet, 
 
 133. The captain will move rapidly with his guard, 
 wherever be may judge his presence most necessary. 
 
 134. The officers and sergeants will be particular to 
 observe that the rally is made in silence, and with prompt- 
 itude and order; that some pieces in each of their sub- 
 divisions be at all times loaded, and that the fire is di- 
 rected on those points only where it will be most effective. 
 
 135. If the reserve should be threatened, it will form 
 into a circle around its chief. 
 
 136. If the captain, or commander of a line of skir- 
 mishers formed of many platoons, should judge that the 
 rally by section does not offer sufficient resistance, he will 
 cause the rally by platoons to be executed, and for this 
 purpose, will command : 
 
 Rally hy platoons. 
 
 137. This movement will be executed accordino- to the **'V 
 same principles, and by the same means, as the rally by 
 sections. The chiefs of platoons will conform to what has 
 
 been prescribed for the chiefs of section. 
 
 138. The captain wishing to rally the skirmishers on 
 the reserve, will command : 
 
200 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 Rally on the reserve. 
 
 139. At this commainl, the captain will move briskly on 
 the reserve ; the officer who commands it will take imme- 
 diate steps to form square; for this purpo3e, he will cause 
 the half sections on the flanks to be thrown perpendicu- 
 larly to the rear ,; he will order the men to come to a 
 ready. 
 
 140. The skirmishers of each section, taking the run, 
 will form rapidly into groups, and upon that man of each 
 group who is nearest the centre of the section. These 
 groups will direct themselves diagonally toward each 
 other, and in such manner as to form into, sections with 
 the greatest possible rapidity while moving to the rear : 
 the officers and sergeants will see that this formation is 
 made in proper order, and the chiefs will direct their sec- 
 tions upon the reserve, taking care to unmask it to the 
 right and left. As the skirmishers arrive, they will con- 
 tinue and complete the formation of the squai-e begun by 
 the reserve, closing in rapidly upon the latter, without 
 regard to their places in line ; they will come to a ready 
 without command, and firo upon the enemy ; which will 
 also be done by the reserve as soon as it is unmasked by 
 the skirmishers. 
 
 1 U. If a section should he closely pressed by cavalry 
 while retreating, its chief will command halt; at this 
 command, the men will form rapidly into a compact circle 
 around the officer, who will re-form his section and resume 
 the march, the moment he can do so with safety. 
 
 142. The formation of the square in a prompt and effi- 
 
IXSTllUCTION FOR SKIIIMISHEKS. 201 
 
 cient manner, requires coolness and activity on the part of 
 both officers and sergeants. 
 
 143. The captain will also profit by every moment of 
 respite which the enemy's cavalry may leave him ; as soon 
 as he can, he will endeavor to place himself beyond the 
 reach of their charges, either by gaining a position where 
 he may defend himself with advantage, or by returning to 
 the corps to which he belongs. For this purpose, being in 
 square, he will cause the company to break into column 
 by platoons at half-distance : to this effect, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Form, column. 2. March. 
 
 144. At tTie command march, each platoon will dress on 
 its centre, and the jilatoon which was facing to the rear 
 will face about without command. The guides will place 
 themselves on the right and left of their respective pla- 
 toons, these of the second platoon will place themselves at 
 half distance from those of the first, counting from the 
 rear rank. These dispositions being made, the captain 
 can move the column in whatever direction he may judge 
 proper. 
 
 145. If he Avishes to march it in retreat, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. In retreat. 2. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 146. At the command march, the column will imme- 
 diately face by the rear rank, and move off in the oppo- 
 
202 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 site direction. A.* .soon ji.** the column is in motion, the 
 captain will command : 
 
 3. (Juide right (or left). 
 
 147. He will indicate the direction to the leading guide: 
 the guides will march at their ]iroper distances, and the 
 men will keep aligned. 
 
 148. If again threatened by cavalry, the captain will 
 command : 
 
 1. Form square. 2. March. 
 
 149. At the command march, the column will halt: the 
 tirst platoon will face about briskly, and the- outer half 
 sections of each platoon will be thrown perpendicularly to 
 the rear, so as to form the second and third fronts of the 
 square. The officers and sergeants will promptly rectify 
 any irregularities which may be committed. 
 
 150. If he should wish to march the column in advance, 
 the captain will conimand: 
 
 1. Form column. 2. March. 
 
 151. Which will be executed as prescribed, No. 174. 
 
 152. The column being formed, the captain will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 Guide left (or right). 
 
 153. At the second command, the column will move 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMI8IIERS. 203 
 
 forward, and at the third command, the men will take the 
 touch of elbows to the side of the guide. 
 
 154. If the captain should wish the column to gain 
 ground to the right or left, he will do so by rapid wheels 
 to the side opposite the guide, and for this purpose, will 
 change the guide whenever it may be necessary. 
 
 155. If a company be in column by platoon, at half dis- 
 tance, right in front, the captain can deploy the first pla- 
 toon as skirmishers by the means already expliiined; but 
 if it should be the wish to deploy the second platoon for- 
 ward on the centre file, leaving the first platoon in reserve, 
 he will command : 
 
 I, Second platoon — as skirmhliers. 2. On the centre 
 jile — take intervals. 3. March (or double quick 
 — March). 
 
 156. At the first command, the chief of the first platoon 
 will caution his platoon to stand fast; the chiefs of sec- 
 tions of the second platoon will place themselves before 
 the centre of their sections ; the fifth sergeant will place 
 himself one pace in front of the centre of the second 
 platoon. 
 
 157. At the second command, the chief of the right 
 section, second platoon, will command : Section, right face; 
 the chief of the left section : Section, left face. 
 
 158. At the command march, these sections will move 
 off briskly in opposite directions, and having unmasked 
 the first platoon, the chief of sections will respectively 
 
201 INSTRTTCTIOX FOR SKI UMISIIFRS. 
 
 command : Tiij ike left jlanh — March, and By the right 
 jiank — March ; and as soon as these sections arrive on the 
 alignment of the first platoon, they will command: As 
 likirmixhevH — March. The groups will then deploy accord- 
 ing to prescribed principles, on the right group of the left 
 section, which will lie directed by the fifth sergeant on the 
 point indicated. 
 
 • 159. If the captain should wish the dci)loyment made 
 by the flank, the second platoon will be moved to the 
 front by the means above stated, and halted after passing 
 some steps beyond the alignment of the first platoon ; the 
 deployment will then be made by the flank according to 
 the principles prescribed. 
 
 160. When one or more platoons are deployed as skir- 
 mishers, and the captain should Avish to rally them on the 
 battalion, he will command : 
 
 lldUy on the hallcdion. 
 
 161. At this command, the skirmishers and the reserve, 
 no matter what position the company to which they be- 
 long may occupy in order of battle, will rapidly unmask 
 the front of the battalion, directing themselves in a run 
 toward its nearest flank, and then form in its rear. 
 
 162. As soon as the skirmishers have passed beyond the 
 line oT file closers, the men will take the quick step, and 
 the chief of each platoon or section will re-form his sub- 
 division, and place it in column behind the wing on which 
 it is rallied, and at ten paces from the rank of file closers. 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 205 
 
 These subdivisions will not be moved except by order of 
 the commander of the battalion, who may, if ho thinks 
 proper, throw them into line of battle at the extremities of 
 the line, or in the intervals between the battalions. 
 
 163. If many platoons should be united behind the same 
 wing of a battalion, or behind any shelter whatsoever, 
 they should be formed always into close column, or into 
 column at half distance. 
 
 164. When the battalion, covered by a company of skir- 
 mishers, shall be formed into square, the platoons and 
 sections of the covering company will be directed by their 
 chiefs to the rear of the square, which will be opened at 
 the angles to receive the skirmishers, who will be then 
 formed into close column by platoons in rear of the first 
 front of the square. 
 
 165. If circumstances should prevent the angles of the 
 square from being opened, the skirmishers will throw 
 themselves at the feet of the front rank men, the right 
 knee on the ground, the butt of the piece resting on the 
 thigh, the bayonet in a threatening position. A part may 
 also place themselves about the angles, where they can 
 render good service by defending the sectors without fire. 
 
 166. If the battalion on which the skirmishers are ral- 
 lied be in column ready to form square, the skirmishers 
 will be formed into close column by pkitoon, in rear of the 
 centre of the third division, and at the command, Form 
 square — March, they will move forward and close on the 
 buglers. 
 
 167. When skirmishers have been rallied by platoon or 
 section behind the wings of a battalion, and it be wished to 
 deploy them again to the front, they will be marched by 
 
 16 
 
20G INSTUUCTION FOR SKIIOIISIIKRS. 
 
 the flank toward the intervals on the wings, and be then 
 deployed so as to cover tha front of the battalion. 
 
 168. When platoons or sections, placed in the interior 
 of squares and columns, arc to be deployed, they will be 
 marched out by the flanks, and then thrown forwanl, as is 
 prescribed. No. 157,- as soon as they shall have unmasked 
 the column or square, they will be deployed, the one on 
 the rioiht, the other on the left file. 
 
 Tlie assembly. 
 
 169. A company deployed as skirmishers will be assem- 
 bled when there is no lon<;er danger of its being disturbed : 
 the assembly will be made habitually in quick time. 
 
 170. The captain wishing to assemble the skirmishers 
 on the reserve, will command : 
 
 Assemble on the reserve. 
 
 171. At this coiinnnnd. tlic .^kirniisbers will assemble by 
 groups of fours; the front rank men will place themselves 
 behind their rear rank men ; and each group of fours will 
 direct itself on the reserve, where each will take its proper 
 place in the ranks. »When the company is re-formed, it 
 will rejoin the battalion to which it belongs. 
 
 172. It may bo also proper to assemble the skirmishers 
 on the centre, or on the right or left of the line, either 
 marching or at a halt. 
 
 173. If the captain should wish to assemble them on the 
 centre while marching, he will command : 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIKiMISIIKRS. 20; 
 
 Assemble on the centre. 
 
 174. At this command, the centre guide will continue 
 to march directly to the front on the point indicated; the 
 front rank man of the directing file will follow the guide, 
 and be covered by his rear rank man ; the other two 
 comrades of this group, and likewise those on their left, 
 will march diagonally, advancing the left shoulder and 
 accelerating the gait, so as to re-form the groups while 
 drawing nearer and nearer the directing file ; the men of 
 the right section will unite in the same manner into 
 groups, and then upon the directing file, throwing forward 
 the right shoulder. As they successively unite on the 
 centre, the men will bring their pieces to the right 
 .shoulder. 
 
 175. To assemble on the right or left file will be exe- 
 cuted according to the same principles. 
 
 176. The assembly of a line marching in retreat will 
 also be executed according to the same principles, the 
 front rank men marching behind their rear rank men. 
 
 177. To assemble the line of skirmishers at a halt, and 
 on the line they occupy, the captain will give the same 
 commands ; the skirmishers will face to the right or left, 
 according as they should march by the right or left 
 flank, reform the groups while marching, and thus arrive 
 on the file which served as the point of formation. As 
 they successively arrive, the skirmishers will support 
 arms. 
 
208 INSTRUCTION FOR SKlKMISHKIiS. 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 
 To deploy a battalion as skirmishers, and to rally this 
 battalion. 
 
 To deploy the battalion as skir^nishers. 
 
 178. A battalion being in line of battle, if the com- 
 mander should wish to deploy it on the right of the sixth 
 company, holding the three right companies in reserve, he 
 will signify his intention to the lieutenant-colonel and 
 adjutant, and also to the major, who will be directed to 
 take charge of the reserve. He will point out to the 
 lieutenant-colonel the direction he wishes to give the 
 line, as well as the point where ho wishes the right of the 
 sixth company to rest, aiid to the commander of the re- 
 servo the place he may wish it established. 
 
 179. The lieutenant-colonel will move rapidly in front 
 of the right of the sixth company, and the adjutant in 
 front of the left of the same company. The commander 
 of the reserve will dis[)osc of it in the manner to be 
 hereinafter indicated. 
 
 180. The colonel will command : 
 
 1. Fii'st (or second) platoons — as skirmishers. 
 
 2. On the right of the sixth company — take in- 
 tervals. 
 
 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
J'c-cT 
 
 vi 
 
 L- ,! .i &■ I r 
 
 . • . , 
 
 a ', 
 and...' 
 
 i 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 209 
 
 181. At the second command, the captains of the fifth 
 and sixth companies will prepare to deploy the first pla- 
 toons of their respective companies, the sixth on its right, 
 the fifth on its left file. 
 
 182. The captain of the fourth company will face it 
 to the right, and the captains of the seventh and eight 
 companies will face their respective companies to the left. 
 
 183. At the command inarch, the movement will com- 
 mence. The platoons of the fifth and sixth companies 
 will deploy forward ; the right guide of the sixth will 
 march on the point which Avill be indicated to him by the 
 lieutenant-colonel. 
 
 184. The com))any which has faced to the right, and 
 also the companies which have faced to the left, will 
 march straight forward. The fourth compai>y will take 
 an interval of one hundred paces counting from the left 
 of the fifth, and its chief will deploy its first platoon on 
 its left file. The seventh and eighth companies will each 
 take an interval of one hundred paces, counting from the 
 first file of the company, which is immediately on its 
 right; and the chiefs of these companies will afterward 
 deploy their first platoons on the right file. 
 
 185. The guides who conduct the files on which the 
 deployment is made, should be careful to direct themselves 
 toward the outer man of the neighboring company, 
 already deployed as skirmishers; or if the company has 
 not finished its deployment, they will judge carefully the 
 distance which may still be required to place all these 
 files in line, and will then march on the point thus 
 marked out. The companies, as they arrive on the line, 
 will align themselves on those already deployed. 
 
210 INSTRUCTION FOll SKIIIMISIIKRS. 
 
 186. The licntenant-cdlonel and juljutant will follow 
 the de]iloymcnt, the one on the right, the other on the 
 left; the movement concluded, they will i)lace themselvce 
 near the colonel. 
 
 187. The reserves of the companies will be established 
 in echellon in the following manner: the reserve of the 
 sixth company will be placed one hundred and fifty paces 
 in rear of the right of this company: the reserves of the 
 fourth and fifth companies, united, opposite the centre of 
 their line of skirmishers, and thirty paces in advance 
 of the reserve of the sixth company ,• the reserves of 
 tlic seventh and eighth companies, also united, opposite 
 the centre of their line of skirmishers, and thirty paces 
 farther to the rear than the reserve of the sixth com- 
 pany. 
 
 188. The major commanding the companies composing 
 the reserve, on receiving an order from the colonel to that 
 etfect, will march these companies thirty paces to the 
 rear, and will then deploy them into column by company, 
 at half distance; after which, he will conduct the column 
 to the point which shall have been indicated to him. 
 
 189. The colonel will have a general snperintendence of 
 the movement; and when it is finished, will move to a 
 point in rear of the line, whence his view may best 
 embrace all the parts, in order to direct their move- 
 ments. 
 
 190. If, instead of deploying forward, it be desired to 
 deploy by the flank, the sixth and fifth companies will be 
 moved to the front ton or twelve paces, halted, and de- 
 ployed by the flank, the one on the right, the other on the 
 left file, by the means already indicated. Each of the 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMI8IIEKS. 211 
 
 other companies will be inarched by the flank; and as 
 soon as the last file of the compauy, next toward the 
 direction, shall have taken its interval, it will be moved 
 upon the line established by the fifth and sixth companies, 
 halted, and deployed. 
 
 191. In the preceding example, it has been supposed 
 that the battalion was in order of battle; but if in column, 
 it would be deployed as skirmishers by the same commands 
 and according to the same principles. 
 
 192, If the deployment is to be made forward, the di- 
 recting company, as soon as it is unmasked, will be moved 
 ten or twelve paces in front of the head of the column, 
 and will be then deployed on the file indicated. Each of 
 the other companies will take its interval to the right or 
 left, and deploy as soon as it is taken. 
 
 19?). If the deployment is to be made by the flank, the 
 directing company will be moved in the same manner to 
 the front, as soon as it is unmasked, and will then be halt- 
 ed and deployed by the flank on the file indicated. Each 
 of the other companies will be marched by the flank, and 
 when its interval is taken, will be moved on the line, halt- 
 ed, and deployed as soon as the company next toward the 
 direction shall have finished its deployment. 
 
 194. It has been prescribed to place the reserves in 
 echellon, in order that they may, in the event of a rally, 
 be able to protect themselves without injuring each other; 
 
 j and the reserves of two contiguous companies have been 
 united, in order to diminish the number of the echellons, 
 and to increase their capacity for resisting cavalry. 
 
 195. The echellons, in the example given, descend from 
 right to left, but they may, on an indication from the colo- 
 
212 INSTUUCTION FOR SKI IIM ISIIKUS. 
 
 nel to that effect, he posted on the sauie principle, so as to 
 descend from left to right. 
 
 19G. When the color-company is to be dei)loyod as skir- 
 mishers, the color, without its guard, will be detached, and 
 remain with the battalion reserve. 
 
 The rally. 
 
 197. The colonel may cause all the various movement.-; 
 prescribed for a company, to he executed by the battalion, 
 and by the same commands and the same signals. When 
 he wishes to rally the battalion, he will cause the rally on 
 the battalion to be sounded, and will so dispose his reserve 
 as to protect this movement. 
 
 198. The companies deployed as skirmishers will be ral- 
 lied in squares on their respective reserves j each reserve 
 of two contiguous companies will form the first front of 
 the S({uare, throwing to the rear the sections on the flanks : 
 the skirmishers who arrive first will complete the lateral 
 fronts, and the last the fourth front. The ofiicers and ser- 
 geants will superintend the rally, and as fast as the men 
 arrive, they will form them into two ranks, without regard 
 to height, and cause them to face outward. * 
 
 199. The rally being efiected, the commanders of squares 
 will profit by any interval of time the cavalry may allow 
 for i)utting them in safety, either by marching upon the 
 battalion reserve, or by seizing an advantageous position ; 
 to this end, each of the s(iuares will be formed into col- 
 umn, and march in this order j and if threatened anew, it 
 will halt, and again form itself into square. 
 

 r'Wiij^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 n I 
 
 IJ u 
 
 I I 
 
 
 *te 
 
 on 
 
 a::i 
 
 H ti 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 213 
 
 200. As the companies successively arrive near the bat- 
 talion-reserve, each will re-form as promptly as possible, 
 and without regard to designation or number, take place 
 in the column next in rear of the companies already in it. 
 
 201. The battalion reserve will also form square, if itself 
 threatened by cavalry. In this ease, the companies in 
 marching toward it will place themselves promptly in the 
 sectors without fire, and thus march on the squares. 
 
•il4 -W<Oil) MAXIAI., E\C. 
 
 MANUAL OF THE SWORD OR SABRE, FOR 
 OFFICERS. 
 
 POSITION OF THE SWOKD OR SABRE, UNDER ARMS. 
 
 Tlw vuny. Tlie jrripe in in the ri^^ht hand, which will be 
 snpported against the ri^ht hip, the back of the blade 
 afjainst the slufuldcr. 
 
 T(.> SAi.iTK w 11 n Tin: swokd or sahre. 
 
 Three times (or pauses). 
 
 Oni . At tin* di.-^taiicc of .<i.\ paces from the person to be 
 .Maluted, raise the sword or sabre perpendicularly, the point 
 up, the flat of the blade opposite to the right eye, the 
 ;;uard at the liei;;lit of the shoulder, the elbow supported 
 on the body. 
 
 Two. I)r(ip the point of the sword or sabre by extend- 
 ing the arm. so that the right hand may be brought to the 
 .side of the right thigh, and remain in that position until 
 the per.son to whom the salute is rendered shall be passed, 
 or shall have pas.sed, six paces. 
 
 Three, liaise the sword or sabre smartly, and place the 
 back of the blade against the right shoulder. 
 
COLOK-SALUTE, ETC. 215 
 
 COLOR-SALUTE. 
 
 In the ranks, the color-bearer, whether at a halt or in 
 march, will always carry the heel of the color-lance sup- 
 ported at the right hip, the right hand generally placed 
 on the lance at the height of the shoulder, to hold it 
 steady. When the color has to render honors, the color- 
 bearer will salute as follows : 
 
 At the distance of six paces slip the right hand along 
 the lance to the height of the eye ; lower the lance by 
 straightening the arm to its full extent, the heel of the 
 lance remaining at the hip, and bring back the lance to 
 the habitual position when the person saluted shall be 
 passed, or shall have passed, six paces. 
 
 MANUAL 
 
 FOR RELIEVING SENTINELS. 
 
 Anns — Port. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 Throw the piece diagonally across the body, the lock 
 to the front, seize it smartly at the same instant with 
 both hands, the right at the handle, the left at the lower 
 
21 G RKLIEVING SEXTINKLS. 
 
 band, the two thumbs pointinji^ toward the muzzle, the 
 barrel sloping upward and cro.ssing opposite the point of 
 the left shoulder, the butt proportionally lowered. The 
 palm of the right hand will be above, and that of the left 
 under the piece, the nails of both hands next to the body, 
 to which the elbows will be closed. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 {First }uotion.) Bring the piece smartly to the right 
 shoulder, placing the right hand as in the position of 
 shoulder arms, slip the left hand to the height of the 
 shoulder, the fingers extended. 
 
 [Second motion.) Drop the left hand smartly by the 
 side. 
 
 Being on parade and at order arms, if it be wished to 
 give the men rest, the command will be : 
 
 Parade — Rest. 
 
 At the command rest, turn the piece on the heel of the 
 butt, the barrel to the left, the muzzle in front of the 
 centre of the body ; seize it at the same time with the 
 left hand just above, and with the right at the upper 
 band J carry the right foot six inches to the rear, the left 
 knee slightly bent. 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR CHIEF BUCrLER, ETC. 
 
 INSTRUCTION 
 
 FOR THE CHIEF BUGLER AND DRUM-MA.TOU. 
 
 The posts of the field music and band have been s^iven. 
 TiTLK I, for the order in battle. 
 
 In column in manoeuvre, the field music and band will 
 march abreast with the left centre company, and on the 
 side opposite the guide. 
 
 In column in route, as well as in the passu i^e of defiles, 
 to the front or in retreat, they will march at the head of 
 rheir respective battalions. 
 
 GENERAL CALLS. 
 
 1. 
 
 Attention. 
 
 2. 
 
 4. 
 
 The general. 
 The assemblt/. 
 To the CDior. 
 
 5, 
 
 The recall. 
 
 (I. 
 
 Quick time. 
 
 7. 
 
 Double quick tirnf. 
 
 s. 
 
 The charge. 
 
 9. 
 
 The reveille. 
 
 10. 
 
 Retreat. 
 
 11. 
 
 Tattoo. 
 
 12. 
 13. 
 
 2\) extinguish lights. 
 Assembly of the buglers 
 
 ir 
 
21.S IXSTRT'CTIOX FOR CHIEF RTGLER, FTC. 
 
 14. Asi^emhlf/ of the guar<l. 
 
 15. Orders for orderlf/ serrfeants. 
 
 16. For officers to take their ])l aces 
 
 in line after firing. 
 
 1 7. The disperse. 
 
 18. Officers' call. 
 
 19. Breakfast call. 
 
 20. Dinner call. 
 
 21. Sick call. 
 
 22. Fatigue call. 
 2.S. Cliurch call. 
 24. Z)/-/// rail. 
 2.'). School rail. 
 
 CALLS FOR SKTR]\nSHERS. 
 
 1. F/.r bagonet. 
 
 2. f^nfi.r bayonet. 
 ;j. Quick time. 
 
 4. Double (/uick time. 
 
 (5. Deplog as skirmishers. 
 
 7. Forirard. 
 
 8. /n retreat. 
 
 9. ^a//. 
 
 10. ^?/ ^//e right flank. 
 
 11. %<//e left flank. 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR (JIHEl' BLGLEK, KTC 21i^ 
 
 1 2. Com ineiice Jirin</. 
 
 13. Cease Jiring. 
 
 14. Change direction to the right. 
 
 15. Change direction to the left. 
 1 6. Z/e doivn. 
 
 1 7. /ii.s'e t^y>. 
 
 ly. Rally by fours. 
 
 19. Rally by sections. 
 
 20. Rally by platoons. 
 
 21. ita% on ^y^e reserve. 
 
 22. ita% on i/^e battalion. 
 
 23. Assemble on the battalion. 
 
 Note. — When the whole of the troops, in the same 
 camp or garrison, are to depart, the general, the assembly, 
 and to the color, will be beaten or sounded, at the proper 
 intervals, in the order here mentioned. At the first, the 
 ti'oops will prepare for the movement: at the second, they 
 will form by company, and at tlie third unite by battalion. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Vol. I. 
 
 T I T L E F j; R S T. 
 
 I'AGK. 
 
 Fi»rmatiou of a regiment in order of buttie, or in line. 5 
 
 Posts of companj' officers, sergeants and corporals... 7 
 
 Posts of field officers and regimental stafl' 8 
 
 posts of field music and baud 9 
 
 Color-guard 1* 
 
 (General guides 10 
 
 Artici-k Second. 
 
 Instruction of the battalion 1] 
 
 Instruction of officers 1:5 
 
 Instruction of sergeants lo 
 
 Instruction of corporals 11 
 
 Commands U 
 
TABLK OK CONTENTS 
 
 TITLE SECOND. 
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 rA(.:i;. 
 
 General rules aud ilivision of the school of tlie sol- 
 dier IH 
 
 Lesson I. — Positio^i of the soldier (No. 78). Eyes 
 right, left and front (Nos. SO, 83) IS 
 
 Lesson II.— Facings (Nos. 88, 91) 2;; 
 
 Lesson III. — Principles of the direct stop in eoinmon 
 and quick time (Nos. 94,102) 24 
 
 Lksson IV. — Principles of the double ([uick step (No. 
 llllj 2C. 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 (ieneral rules 28 
 
 IjKSSon I. — Principles of shouldered arms 29 1 
 
 Lksson IL — Manual of arms. Support arms (No. 
 133). Present arms (No. 143). Order arms (No. 
 117). Position of order arras (No. 149). Load in 
 nine times (No. 156). Heady (No. 171). Aim (No, 
 174). Fire (No. 177). Fix bayonet (No. 188). 
 Charge bayonet (No. 198). Trail arms (No, 197). 
 
TAHLE OF COXTEXTS. 223 
 
 Unfix bayonet (Xo. 200). Secure arm? (No. 204). 
 Right shoulder shift arms (No. 210). Arms at will 
 (No. 219). Ground arms (No. 222). Inspection 
 Arms (No. 227). Remarks on the manual of arms 
 (No. 237). Mark time (No. 241). Change step 
 (No. 245). March backwards (No. 247) ?>0 
 
 Lesson III. — Load in four times (No. 260). Load 
 at will CNo. 257) 56 
 
 Lksson IV.— Firings. Direct fire (No. 261). 01)lique 
 firings (No. 266). Position of the two ranks in the 
 oblique fire to the right (No. 267). Position of the 
 two ranks in the oblique fire to the left (No. 270). 
 Fire by file (No. 275). Fire by rank (No. 285) 57 
 
 Lesson V. — Fire and load, kneeling (No. 292). Fire 
 and load, lying (No. 300) 62 
 
 Lesson VT. — Bavonet exercise 65 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 Lesson I. — Alignments 67 
 
 Lesson II. — March by the front (No. 325). March 
 by the front in double quick time (No. 334). Face 
 about in marching (No. 343). March backwards 
 (No. 345 ) 70 
 
 Lesson III.— March by the flank (No. 351). March 
 l)y the flank in double quick time (No. 368) 76 
 
 Lesson IV. — General principles of wheeling (No. 
 377). Wheeling from a halt (No. 383). Wheeling 
 
224 lAlil-K or {'ONTINIS. 
 
 iu murching (No. o'Jii). Tiiruing (No. 400). 
 Wlieelinj; and turning in double quick time No. 
 
 403) Ml 
 
 Lksson V. — Long miirc-hos in duuldo quick time and 
 the run (No. 400). Stuck arms (No. 410). Take 
 arms (No. 413) S7 
 
 TITLK TIIIKJJ. 
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 General ruK-s and division n!' the scLiool of the com- 
 pany 90 
 
 Lrss, 
 
 A nricLE I. — To open ranks ( No. 8) H.J 
 
 Articli: TI. — Alignments in open ranks (No. IS). . . . 5»5 
 
 Article III. — Manual of arms (No. 2(5) I'T 
 
 Article IV. — To close ranks (No. 28) ws 
 
 Articlk V. — Alignments, an.l nnumal of arms in 
 
 closed ranks (No. lid) .... 9S 
 
TABLE OF CONTENT^ 
 
 Lesson Skcoxd. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Article I. — To load in four times, and at will (No. 
 
 44) 100 
 
 Article II. — To fire by'eompany (No. 48) 101 
 
 Article III.— To fire by file (No. 56) 102 
 
 Article IV.— To fire by rank (No. 58) 10."> 
 
 Article V. — To fire by the rear rank (No. 08) 10& 
 
 Lesson Third. 
 
 Article^ I. — To advance in line'of battle- (No. S4) . . 108 
 Article II. — To^halt tlie|company, marching in line 
 
 of battle, and to align it (No. 99) Ill 
 
 Article III. — Oblique inarch in line of battle (No. 
 
 101) Ill 
 
 ArticlI^ IV. — To mark time, to march in doubl'e 
 
 quick time, and to back step (No. 109) 11^^ 
 
 Article V. — To march in retreat (No. 119) 115 
 
 Lesson Foitrth. 
 
 Article I.— To march. by "the flank (No.' 135) 118 
 
 Article II. — To change direction by file (No. 142). . 120 
 Article III. — To halt the company, marching by 
 the flank, and to face it to the front (No. 145). . . • 121 
 18 
 
226 TABLE OF CONTENTvS. 
 
 PARK. 
 
 Article IV. — The company being in march by the 
 flank, to form it on the ri,t,'lit or lefr. by file, into 
 line of battle (No. 148) 121 
 
 AuTiCLK V. — The company marching l>y the flank, 
 to form it by company or platoon into line, and 
 cause it to face to the right and left in marching 
 (Xo. 153^ .123 
 
 LrS'^ON FlKTT?. 
 
 Artici.e I. — To bro.il; into coluin;! by platoon, either 
 
 at a lialt, or marching (No. 1 71 ) 127 
 
 Article II. — To march in column (No. 105) lo2 
 
 Article III. — To change direction (No. 211) L'U> 
 
 Article IV.— To halt the column (No. 231) 14li 
 
 Article V. — Being in column by platoon, to form to 
 the right or left into line of battle, either at a halt, 
 or marching (No. 23.)) 1 40 
 
 liF.ssoN Sixth. 
 
 Article I. — To break the company into platoons, 
 and to re-form the company (No. 265) 140 
 
 Article II. — To break hies to the rear, and to cause 
 them to re-enter into line (No. 289) 150 
 
 Article III. — To march in column in route, and to 
 execute the movements incident thereto (No. 306).. 154 
 
 Article IV.— Countermarch (No. 334) 160 
 
TAHLK OF COXTKX'IS. ^'iT 
 
 PAdK. 
 
 Article V. — Beiuj^ in column by platoon, to form on 
 
 the right or left into line of battle (No. 343) 162 
 
 Formation of a company from two ranks into single 
 
 rank, and reciprocally (No. 859) 1 G.> 
 
 Formation of a company from two ranks into four, 
 
 and reciprocalljs at a halt, and marching (No. 
 
 371) Ifi7 
 
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 (.l-eneral principles and division of tlie instruction. ... 171 
 
 Artict.e First. 
 
 Deployments (No. 15). De])loy forward (No. 22). 
 Deploy by the flank (No. 37). Extend intervals 
 (No. 51). Close intervals (No. 59). Relieve skir- 
 mishers (No. 66) 174 
 
 Article Secoxo, 
 
 March to the front (No. 71). March in retreat (No. 
 79). Change direction (No. 86). March by the 
 flank (No. 96) 186 
 
 IS* 
 
2'^ii lABLE OF CONTEXTS. 
 
 Akticlk Third. 
 
 PAGK. 
 
 BMrings (No. 106). Fire at a halt (No. 107).' Five 
 mnrchiu.tr (No. 1 U). Observations (No. 120) 101 
 
 Articm-: Foi kth. 
 
 Rally (No. 127). Rally by sections (No. lo2). Rally 
 by platoons (No. 137). Rally on the reserve (No. 
 139). Form column (No. 143). Rally on the bat- 
 talion (No. 161). Assemble on the reserve (No. 
 171). Assemble on the centre (No. 174) 
 
 Articl!-: Fifth. 
 
 Dej)loy the battalion as skirmishers (No. 178;. Ob- 
 servations (No. 194). Rally (197) 208 
 
 Manual "f the fabre fur oflicers 214 
 
 Salute of the color 215 
 
 Manual for relieving sentinels 215 
 
 Instruction for parade rest 210 
 
 Instruction for chief bugler, etc 217 
 
 General calls 217 
 
 Calls for skirmishers 21S 
 
R I F L E 
 
 AND 
 
 LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS; 
 
 THE EXERCISE AND MANffi'JVRES 
 
 TROOPS WHEN ACTING AS LIGHT INFANTRY OR 
 RIFLEMEN. 
 
 PHF-PARED UNDER THE DIRECTION OI-" 
 THE WAR DEPARTMENT, 
 
 BY 
 
 BREVET LIEUT.-COL. W. J. HARDEE, 
 
 V. S. AKMY. 
 
 VOL. II. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 RICHMONU. YA. 
 
 J. W. RANDOl.PH. 121 MAIN STREET. 
 
 1861. 
 
STKAM I'OWKR I'UK.S.SKS Of KVAXS AXD COGSWKl.l 
 BROAD STRKKT, CHARLESTON. 8. C. 
 
RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS. 
 
 TITLE FOURTH 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Formation of the Battalion. 
 
 1. Every colonel will labor to habituate his battalion 
 to form line of battle, by night as well as by day, with 
 the greatest possible promptitude. 
 
 2. The color-company will generally be designated as 
 the directing company. That, as soon as formed, will 
 be placed on the direction tlie colonel may have deter- 
 mined for the line of battle. The other companies will 
 form on it, to the right and left, on the principles of 
 successive fi,rmations which will be herein prescribed. 
 
 3. The color-bearer may have received the color from 
 the hands of the colonel ; but if there be daylight, and 
 time, the color will be produced with due solemnity. 
 
 Composition and march of the color escort. 
 
 4. When the battalion ttirns out under arms and the 
 
♦> SCHOOL or TIIK J?A'l TALION — I'AUT I. 
 
 color is wanted, a company, other than that of the color, 
 will be put in march to receive and escort it. 
 
 5. The march will be in the following order, in quick 
 time, and without music ; the field music, followed by the 
 band J the escort in column by platoon, right in front, 
 with arms on the right shoulder, and the color-bearer 
 between the platoons. 
 
 6. Arrived in front of the tent or quarters of the colonel. 
 the escort will form line, the field music and band on the 
 right, and arms will be brought to a shoulder. 
 
 7. The moment the escort is in line, the color-bearor, 
 preceded by the first lieutenant, and followed by a ser- 
 geant of the escort, will go to receive the color. 
 
 8. When the color-bearer shall come out, followed by 
 the lieutenant and sergeant, he will halt before the en- 
 trance; the escort will present arras, and the field music 
 will sound to the color. 
 
 9. After some twenty seconds, the captain will cause 
 the sound to cease, arms to be shouldered, and then break 
 by platoon into column ; the color-bearer will place him- 
 self between the platoons, and Hie lieutenant and sergeant 
 will resume their posts. 
 
 10. The escort will march back to the battalion to the 
 sound of music in quick lime, and in the same order as 
 above, the guide on the right. The inarch will be so 
 conducted that when the escort arrives at one hundred 
 and fifty paces in front of the right of the battalion, 
 the direction of the march will be parallel to its front, 
 and when the color arrives nearly opposite its place in 
 line, the column will change direction to the left, and 
 the right guide will direct himself on the centre of the 
 battalion. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — I'AKT I. 
 
 Honors paid to the color. 
 
 11. Arrived at the distance of twenty paces from the 
 battalion, the escort will halt, and the music cease ; the 
 colonel will place himself six paces before the centre of 
 the battalion, the color-bearer will approach the colonel, 
 by the front, in quick time j when at the distance of ten 
 paces, he will halt : the colonel will cause arms to be pre- 
 sented, and to the color to be sounded, which being exe- 
 cuted, the color-bearer will take his place in the front rank 
 of the color-guard, and the battalion, by command, shoul- 
 der arms. 
 
 12. The escort, field music, and baud, will return in 
 quick time to their several places in line of battle, march- 
 ing by the rear of the battalion. 
 
 13. The color will be escorted back to the colonel's tent 
 or quarters in the above order. 
 
 General Rules and Division of the School of the 
 Battalion. 
 
 14. This school has for its object the instruction of bat- 
 talions singly, and thus to prepare them for manoeuvres in 
 line. The harmony so indispensable in the movements of 
 many battalions, can only be attained by the use of the 
 same commands, the same principles, and the same means 
 of execution. Hence, all colonels and actual commanderi^ 
 of battalions will conform themselves, without addition or 
 curtailment, to what will herein be prescribed. 
 
8 SCHOOL OF TIIK HATTAI-IOX — PART I. 
 
 I.'). When a battalion instructed in this drill shall man- 
 cpuvre in line, the colonel will regulate its movements, as 
 prescribed in the third volume of the Tactics for heavy 
 infantry. 
 
 16. The school of the battalion will bo divided into five 
 parts, 
 
 17. The first will comprehend opening and closing ranks, 
 and the execution of the different fires. 
 
 18. The second, the different modes of passing from the 
 order in battle, to the order in column. 
 
 19. The third, the march in column, and the other move- 
 ments incident thereto. 
 
 20. The fourth, the different modes of passing from tlie 
 order in column to the order in battle. 
 
 21. The fifth will comprehend the march in line of battle, 
 in advance and in retreat j the passage of defiles in retreat: 
 the march by the flank; the formation by file into line of 
 battle; the change of front; the column doubled on the 
 centre; dispositions against cavalr}^ ; the rally, and rule.-, 
 for !n;ino uvring by the rear rank. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART I. 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 Opening and closing r-anJcs, and (he execution of (he 
 different fires. 
 
 Article First. 
 
 To open and to close ranks. 
 
 22. The colonel, wishing the ranks to be opened, will 
 command : 
 
 1. Prepare to open ranks. 
 
 2?>. At this command, the lieutenant-colonel and major 
 will place themselves on the right of the battalion, the 
 first on the flank of the file closers, and the second four 
 paces from the front rank of the battalion. 
 
 24. These dispositions being made, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 2. To the rear, open order. 3. March. 
 
 25. At the second command, the covering sergeants, and 
 the sergeant on the left of the battalion, will place them- 
 selves four paces in rear of the front rank, and opposite 
 their places in line of battle, in order to mark the new 
 
10 SCHOOL 01" Till-: dattaliox — part i. 
 
 alignment of the rear rank : they will be aligned by the 
 major on the left sergeant of the battalion, who will be 
 careful to place himself exactly four paces in roar of the 
 front rank, and to hold bis piece between the eyes, erect 
 and inverted, the better to indicate to the major the direc- 
 tion to be given to the covering sergeants. 
 
 20. At the command march, the rear rank and the tile 
 closers will step to the rear without counting steps ; the 
 men will pass a little in rear of the line traced for this 
 rank, halt, and dress forward on the covering sergeants, 
 who will align correct!}' the men uf their respective com- 
 panies. 
 
 27. The file closers will I'all liack and i)rcservo the di.s- 
 tance of two paces from the rear rank, glancing eyes to the 
 right; the lieutenant-colonel will, from the right, align 
 them on the tile closer of the left, who, having phiced him- 
 self accurately two paces from the rear rank, will invert 
 his piece, and to hold it up erect between his eyes, th«' 
 better to bo seen by the lieutenant-colonel. 
 
 2S. The culoncl, seeing the ranks aligned, will com- 
 mand : 
 
 4. Fkoxt. 
 
 At this command, the licutenant-colonul, major, and the 
 left sergeant, will retake their places in line of battle. 
 
 29. The colonel will cause the ranks to be dosed by the 
 commands prescribed for the instructor in the school of 
 the company, No. 28. 
 
school of the battalion' — i'akt i. 11 
 
 Article Second. 
 
 Manual of ai'Jiis. 
 
 ;iO. The ranks being closed, the colonel will cause the 
 fullowing times and pauses tu be executed: 
 
 Present arms. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Order arrns. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Support arms. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Fix haijonet. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Charge bayonet. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Unjix bayonef. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Article Third. 
 Loading at will, and the Firings. 
 
 31. The colonel will next cause to be executed loading 
 at will, by the commands prescribed in the school of the 
 company. No. 45 ; the ofi5cers and sergeants in the ranks 
 will half face to the right with the men at the eighth time 
 ()f loading, aud will face to the front when the men next to 
 them come to a shoulder. 
 
 32. The colonel will cause to be executed the fire bj- 
 company, the fire by wing, the fire by battalion, the fire by 
 file, and the fire by rank, by the commands to be herein 
 indicated. 
 
12 SCHOOL OF TIIK J3ATTALI0N — PAHT I. 
 
 33. The fire by company and the fire by file will always 
 be direct; the fire by battalion, the fire by wing, and thu 
 fire by rank, may be either direct or oblique. 
 
 34. When the fire ought to be oblique, the colonel will 
 give, at every round, the caution right (or left) oblique, 
 between the commands ready and aim. 
 
 35. The fire by company will be executed alternately by 
 the right and left companies of each division, as if the 
 division were alone. The right company will fire first; 
 the captain of the left will not give bis first command till 
 he shall see one or two pieces at a ready in the right com- 
 pany ; the captain of the latter, after the first discharge, 
 will observe the same rule in respect to the left company : 
 and the fire will thus be continued alternately. 
 
 36. The colonel will observe the same rule in the firing 
 by wing. 
 
 37. The fire ])y file will connnence in all the companies 
 at once, and will he executed as has been prescribed in the 
 school of the company, No. 55 and following. The fire 
 by rank will be executed by each rank alternatcl}'^, as has 
 been prescribed in the school of the company, No. 58 and 
 following. 
 
 38. The color-guard will not fire, but reserve itself for 
 the defence of the color. 
 
 The fire hi/ company. 
 
 39. The colonel, wishing the fire by company to be exe- 
 cuted, will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THP: battalion — PART 1. 1 .'5 
 
 1. Fire by company. 2. Commence firing. 
 
 40. At the first command, the captains and covering 
 .sergeants will take the positions indicated in the school of 
 the company, No. 49. 
 
 41. The color and its jruard will step back at the same 
 time, so as to- bring the front rank of the guard in a line 
 with the rear rank of the battalion. Thlt rule in f/enfral 
 for all the differ eut JiritH/9. 
 
 42. At the second command, the odd-numbered compa- 
 nies will commence to fire : their captains will each give 
 the commands prescribed in the school of the company, 
 No. 50, observing to precede the command company by 
 that of first, third, fifth, or seventh, according to the num- 
 ber of each. 
 
 43. The captain.« of the even-numbered companies will 
 give, in their turn, the same commands, observing to pre- 
 cede them by the number of their respective companies. 
 
 44. In order that the odd-numbered companies may not 
 all fire at once, their captains will observe, but only for 
 the first discharge, to give the command fire one after 
 another; thus, the captain of the third company will not 
 give the command fire until he has heard the fire of the 
 first company: the captain of the fifth will observe the 
 same rule with respect to the third, and the captain of the 
 seventh the same rule with respect to the fifth. 
 
 45. The colonel will cause the fire to cease by the sound 
 to cease firiny ; at this sound, the men will execute what 
 is prescribed in the school of the company. No. 63 : at the 
 .sound, for oflScers to take their places after tiring, the eaj)- 
 
14 .SCHOOL OF THK HAl lAJ.iON — I'AKT I. 
 
 tainy, covering sergeants, and color-guard, will promptly 
 resume their places in line of battle : thix rule is i/tneraJ 
 fur all tliv Jirimi^. 
 
 'lilt fir t by iciity. 
 
 ■in. When flic ccdoncl ghall wish this- firt- to be executed, 
 lie will eoinraand : 
 
 1. Fire hy iciny. 2. RiylU wing. o. Ready. 
 4. Aim. 5. Fire. 6. Load. 
 
 47. The colonel ^vill cause the wings to fire alternately, 
 and he will recommence the tire by the commands, 1. 
 Right wivy ; 2. Aim: .'!. Fihk; 4. Load. 1. Le/t winy ; 
 2. Aim; ."1. Fiiu; : 1. Load: in conforming to what is 
 prescribed, No. 3.). 
 
 '/'he fire by battalion. 
 
 48. The colonel will cause this lire tu be executed by the 
 commands last prescribed, substituting for the first two, 
 1. Fire by battulioii. 2. /iatta/ioii. 
 
 The fire by file. 
 
 49. To cause this to be executed, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Fire by file. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready. 
 4. Commence firing. 
 
 60. At the fourth command, the fire will commence on 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART I. lb 
 
 (be right of each company, as prescribed in the school of 
 the company, No. 57. The colonel may, if he thinke 
 proper, cause the fire to commence on the right of each 
 platoon. 
 
 The fire hy rank. 
 
 51. To cause this fire to be executed, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Fire hij rank. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready. 
 
 4. Rear rank. 5. Aim. 6. Fire. 
 
 7. Load. 
 
 52. This fire will be executed as has been explained 
 in the school of the company. No. 59, in following the 
 progression prescribed for the two ranks which should fire 
 alternately. 
 
 To fire hj the rear rank. 
 
 53. "When the colonel shall wish the battalion to fire 
 to the rear, be will command: 
 
 1. Face hy the rear rank. 2. Battalion. 
 3. About — Face. 
 
 54. At the first command, the captains, covering ser- 
 geants, and file closers will execute what has been pre- 
 scribed in the school of the company. No. 69; the color- 
 
 II-2 
 
16 SCHOOL OF TIIK l;ATTALTO^' PART I. 
 
 bearer will pass into the rear rank, and for this purpose, 
 the corporal of his file will step before the corporal next 
 ou his right to let the color-bearer pass, and will then 
 take his place in the front rank; the lieutenant-colonel, 
 adjutant, major, sergeant-major, and the music will place 
 themselves before the front rank, and face to the rear, 
 each opposite his place in the line of battle — the first two 
 pas.-^ing around tlic right, and the others around the left 
 of the battalion. 
 
 55. At the third command, the battalion will face about ; 
 the captains and covering sergeants observing what is pre- 
 scribed in the school of the company, No. 70. 
 
 56. The battalion facing thus by the rear rank, the 
 colonel will cause it to execute the different fires by 
 the same commands as if it were faced by the front 
 rank. 
 
 5T. The right and loft wings will retain the same desig- 
 nations, iilthough faced about; the companies also will 
 preserve their former designations, as firnt, second, third, 
 etc. 
 
 58. The lire by file will commence on the left of each 
 company, now become the right. 
 
 59. The fire by rank will commence by the front rank, 
 now become the rear rank. This rank will preserve its 
 denomination. 
 
 60. The captains, covering sergeants, and color-guard 
 will, at the first command given by the colonel, take the 
 places prescribed for them in the fires, with the front rank 
 loading. 
 
 61. The colonel, after firing to the rear, wishing to face 
 the battalion to its proper front, will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART I. 17 
 
 1. Face h/f the front rank. 2. BattaUo7i. 
 3. Ahout — Face. 
 
 62. At these commands, the battalion will return to its 
 proper front hy the means prescribed, Nos. 54 and 55. 
 
 6.3, The fire hy file being that most used in war, the 
 colonel Avill g\\Q it the preference in the preparatory exer- 
 cises, in order that the battalion may be brought to exe- 
 cute it with the greatest possible regularity. 
 
 64:. When the colonel may wish to give some relaxation 
 to the battalion, without breaking the ranks, he will exe- 
 eate •vfhat has been prescribed in the school of the com- 
 pany, Nos. 37 arid 3S or Nos. 39 and 40. 
 
 65. When the colonel shall wish to cause arms to be 
 stacked, he will bring the battalion to ordered arms, and 
 then command: 
 
 1. Stack — Arms. 2. Break ranks. 
 3. March. 
 
 66. The colonel wishing the men to retntn to the ranks, 
 will cause attention to be sounded, at which the battalion 
 will re-form behind the stacks of arms. The sound being 
 finished, the colonel, after causing the stacks to be broken, 
 will command : 
 
 Battalion. 
 
18 SCHOOL OF THE HATTALION PART II. 
 
 67. At this command, the men will fix their attention, 
 and remain immovable. 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 Different modes of passing from the order in battle to 
 the order in column. 
 
 Article First. 
 
 To break to the right or the left into coiu7nn. 
 
 68. liines of battle will habitually break into column 
 by company ; they may also break by divisions or by 
 platoon. 
 
 69. It is here supposed that the colonel wishes to break 
 by company to the right; he will command : 
 
 1. Bg compang, right wheel. 2. March (or double 
 
 quick — March). 3 
 
 70. At the first command, each captain will place him- 
 aolf rapidly before the centre of his company, and caution 
 
 it that it has to wheel to the right ; each covering sergeant | 
 
 will replace his captain in the front rank. , 
 
 71. At the command march, each company will break to J 
 the right, according to the principles prescribed in t^ie j 
 school of the company, No. 173; each captain will con- 
 
^IMlf'iP^llT 
 
 Hliill^i'llliiti^ 
 
 liTlEEIir: 
 
 ISEHHIir 
 
 HII!!lliH!lii|l!!iHi!i;ii.r 
 
 ^llliliin 
 
 ' ^igliiiiSiiiiiiiiiiiiir 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART II. 19 
 
 form himself to what is prescribed for the chiefs of jDla- 
 toon; the left guide, as soon as he can pass, will place 
 himself on the left of the front rank to conduct the 
 marching flank, and when he shall have approached near 
 to the perpendicular, the captain will command : 1. Such 
 company. 2. Halt. 
 
 72. At the second command, which will be given at the 
 instant the left guide shall be at the distance of three 
 paces from the perpendicular, the company will halt ; the 
 guide will advance and place his left arm lightly against 
 the breast of the captain, who will establish him on the 
 alignment of the man who has faced to the right; the 
 covering sergeant will place himself correctly on the 
 alignment on the right of that man; which being executed, 
 the captain will align his company by the left, command 
 Front, and place himself two paces before its centre. 
 
 73. The captains having commanded Front, the guides, 
 although some of them may not be in the direction of the 
 preceding guides, will stand fast, in order that the error of 
 a company that has wheeled too much or too little may not 
 be propagated; the guides not in the direction will readily 
 come into it when the column is put in march. 
 
 74. A battalion in line of battle will break into column 
 by company to the left, according to the same principles, 
 and by inverse means; the covering sergeant of each com- 
 pany will conduct the marching flank, and the left guide 
 will place himself on the left of the front rank at the mo- 
 ment the company halts. 
 
 75. When the battalion breaks by division, the indication 
 division will be substituted in the commands for that of 
 company ; the chief of each division (the senior captain) 
 
20 SCHOOL OF TIIK I5ATTALION — PART II. 
 
 will couform himself to what is prcseribod for the chief of 
 oompany, and will place himself two paces before the cen- 
 tre of his division ; the junior captain, if not already there, 
 will place himself in the interval between the two compa- 
 nies in the front rank, and be covered by the coverinj; t^er- 
 geant of the left company in the rear rank. The ri<rht 
 guide of the ri;;ht company will be the right guide, and thv 
 left guide of the left company, the left guide of the di- 
 vision. 
 
 76. When the battalion shall break by platoon to the 
 right or to the left, each first lieutenant will pass around 
 the left of his company to place himself in front of the 
 second platoon, and for this purpose, each covering ser- 
 geant, except the one of the right company, will step, for 
 the moment, in rear of the right file of his company. 
 
 77. When the battalion breaks by division to the right, 
 and there is an odd company, the captain of this company 
 (the left), after wheeling into column, will cause it to oblique 
 to the left, halt it at company distance from the preceding 
 division, place his left guide on the direction of the column, 
 and then align his company by the left. When the line 
 breaks by division to the left, the odd company will be in 
 front; its captain, having wheeled it into column, will 
 cause it to oblique to the right, halt it at division distance 
 from the division ne.xt in the rear, place his right guide on 
 the direction of the other guides, and align the company 
 by the right. 
 
 78. The battalion being in column, the lieutenant-colo- 
 nel and major will place themselves on the directing flank, 
 the first abreast with the leading subdivision, and the other 
 abreast with the last, and both six paces from the flank. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX PAKT IT. 21 
 
 The adjutant will be near the lieutenant-colonel, and the 
 jerpjeaut-major near the major. 
 
 79. The colonel will have no fixed place as the instrvctor 
 of his battalion; but in columns composed of many bat- 
 talions, he will place himself habitually on the directing 
 flank fifteen or twenty paces from the guides, and abreast 
 with the centre of his battalion. 
 
 80. AVhen the colonel shall wish to move the column 
 forward without halting it, he will caution the battalion to 
 that effect, and commaml: 
 
 1. By company^ right wheel. 2. March (or double 
 quick — March) . 
 
 81. At the first command, the captains of companies 
 will execute what is prescribed for breaking into column 
 from a halt. 
 
 82. At the second command, they will remain in front 
 of their companies to superintend the movement; the com- 
 panies will wheel to the right on fixed pivots as indicated 
 in the school of the company. No. 185; the left guides will 
 conform to what is prescribed above; when they shall ar- 
 rive near the perpendicular, the colonel will command: 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide left. 
 83. At the third command, each covering sergeant will 
 
22 SCHOOL OF Till-: UATTALION — PART II. 
 
 place himself by the right side of the man ou the right of 
 the front rank of his eomiiauy. At the foucth counnand, 
 which will be given at the instant the wheel is completed, 
 the companies will cease to wheel and march straight for- 
 ward. At the fifth, the men will take the touch of elbows 
 to the left. The leading guide will inarch in the direction 
 indicated to him by the lieutenant-colonel. The guides 
 will immediately conform themselves to the principles of 
 the march in column, school of tlic company, No. 200 and 
 following. 
 
 84. If the battalion be marching in line of battle, the 
 colonel will cause it to wheel to the right or left, by the 
 same commands and the same means, but he should pre- 
 viously caution the battalion that it is to continue the 
 march. 
 
 85. A battalion in line of battle will break into column 
 by company to the left, according to the same principles 
 and by inverse means j the covering sergeant of each com- 
 pany will conduct the marching flank, and the left guides 
 will place themselves on the left of their respective compa- 
 nies at the command /orir((i<f. 
 
 86. When a battalion has to prolong itself in column 
 toward the right or left, or has to direct its march in col- 
 umn perpendicularly or diagonally in front, or in rear of 
 cither flank, the colonel will cause it to break by company 
 to the right or left, as has just been prescribed; but when 
 the line breaks to the right, in order to march toward the 
 left, or the reverse, the colonel will command : Break to 
 the right to march to the left, or break to the left to inarch to 
 the riyht, before giving the command, hij compa)ri/, right (or 
 left) wheel. As soon as the battalion is broken, the lieu- 
 
r 
 
 r 
 
 m--''^\in- 
 
 r^ 
 
 TSffif 
 
 ( 
 
 /: 
 
 r 
 
 "ll!J''":l!'|!li!!'inr 
 
8CTI()0L OF TIIK 15ATTALION — PART II. 23 
 
 lonant-colonel will i)lace a marker abreast with the right 
 guide of the leading company. The instant the column ig 
 put in motion, this company will wheel to the left (or right), 
 march ten paces to the front without changing the guide, 
 and wheel again to the left (or right). The second wheel 
 being completed, the captain will immediately command 
 (jiiide lift (or right). The guide of this company will 
 march in a direction parallel to the guides of the column. 
 The lieutenant-colonel will be careful to place a second 
 marker at the point where the first company is to change 
 direction the second time. 
 
 Article Second. 
 
 To break to (lie reai% by the right or left^ into column, 
 and to advance or retire by the right or left of 
 companies. 
 
 87. When the colonel shall wish to cause the battalion 
 to break to the rear, by the right, into column by cora- 
 panj', he will command : 
 
 I. By the right of companies to the rear into column. 
 2. Battalion, right — Face. 3. March (or double 
 quick- — March). 
 
 88. At the first command, each captain will place him- 
 self before the centre of his company, and caution it to 
 face to the right j the covering sergeants will step into th(; 
 front rank. • 
 
24 SCHOOL OF THE HATTALION — PART II. 
 
 89. At the second command, the hattalion will face to 
 the right; each captain will hasten to the right of his 
 company, and break two files to the rear; the first file will 
 break the whole depth of the two ranks ; the second file 
 less; which being executed, the captain will place himself 
 so that his breast may touch lightly the left arm of the 
 front rank man of tlio last file in the company next on the 
 right of his own. The captain of the right company will 
 place himself as if there were a company on his right, and 
 will align himself on the other captains. The covering 
 sergeant of each company will break to the rear with the 
 right files, and place himself before the front rank of the 
 first file, to conduct him. 
 
 90. At the command march, the first file of each com- 
 pany will wheel to the right; the covering sergeant placed 
 before this file, will conduct it perpendicularly to the rear. 
 The other files will cdiae successively to wheel ou the 
 i^auie si)ot. The captain^; will stand fast, see their ccm- 
 panies file past, and at the instant the last file shall have 
 wheeled, each captain will command : 
 
 1. Such company. 2. Halt. 3. Fiiont, 
 4. Left — DuESS. 
 
 91. At the instant the conii»any faces to the front, its 
 left guide will place himseif so that liis left arm may 
 touch lightly the breast of his captain. 
 
 92, At the fourth command, the company will align 
 itself ou its left guide, the captain so directing it, that the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART 11. 2.) 
 
 new alignment may be perpendicular to that which the 
 company had occupied in line of battle, and, the better to 
 judge this, ho will step back two paces from the flank. 
 
 93. The company being aligned, the captain will com- 
 mand : FuoNT, and take his place before its centre. 
 
 94. The battalion marching in line of battle, when the 
 colonel shall wish to break into column by company, to 
 the rear, by the right, he will command: 
 
 1. By the right of companies io the rear into column. 
 2. Battalion^ hy the right flank. 3. Makch (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 95. At the first command, each captain will step briskly 
 in front of the centre of his company, and caution it to 
 face by the right Jlaii/c. 
 
 96. At the command march, the battalion will face to 
 the right; each captain will move rapidly to the right of 
 his company, and cause it to break to the right; the first 
 file of each company will wheel to the right, and the cov- 
 ering sergeant placed in front of this file will conduct it 
 perpendicularly to the rear ; the other files will wheel suc- 
 cessively at the same place as the first. The captains will 
 .see their companies file past them; when the last files have 
 wheeled, the colonel will command : 
 
 3. Battalion, hy the left flank — March. 
 4. Guide left. 
 
2G SCHOOL OK thk battalion — part il 
 
 97. At the command iiiarvli, the companies will face to 
 the left, and march in column in the new direction. The 
 captains will place themselves in front of the centres of 
 their respective companies. At the fourth command, the 
 guides will conform to the principles of the march in 
 column; the leading one will move in the direction indi- 
 cated to him by the lieutenant-uolonel. The men will take 
 the touch of elbows to the left. 
 
 98. To break to the rear by the left, the colonel will give 
 the same commands as in the case of breaking to the rear 
 by the right, substituting the indication h/t. for that of 
 right. 
 
 99. The movement will be executed according to the 
 same principles. Each captain will hasten to the left of 
 his company, cause the first two files to break to the rear, 
 and then place his breast against the right file of the com- 
 pany next on the left of his own, in the manner prescribed 
 above. 
 
 100. As soon as the two files break to the rear, the left 
 guide of each company will place himself before the front 
 rank man of the headmost file, to conduct him. 
 
 101. The instant the companies face to the front, the 
 right guide of each will place himself so that his right arm 
 may lightly touch the breast of his captain. 
 
 102. The battalion may be broken by division to thej 
 rear, by the right or left, in like manner; in this case, the 
 indication divisions will be substituted, in the first com-' 
 mand, for that of companies ; the chiefs of division will 
 conform themselves to what is prescribed for the chiefs of j 
 company. The junior captain in each division will place 
 himself, when the division faces to a flank, by the side of! 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART II. 2 i 
 
 the covering sergeant of the left company, who steps into 
 the front rank. 
 
 10.3. If there be an odd number of companies, and the 
 battalion breaks by division to the rear, whether by the 
 right or left, the c«aptain of the left company will conform 
 to what is prescribed, No. 77. 
 
 104. This manner of breaking into column being at 
 once the most prompt and regular will be preferred on 
 actual service, unless there be some particular reason for 
 breaking to the front. 
 
 105. If the battalion be in line and at a halt, and the 
 colonel shoiild wish to advance or retire by the right of 
 companies, he will command : 
 
 1. By the rigid of companies to the front for rear). 
 2. Battalion, right — Face. 3. March (or double 
 quicTc — March). 4. Guide right, (J^fO or (cen- 
 tre). 
 
 106. At the first command, each captain will move rap- 
 idly two paces in front of the centre of his company, and 
 caution it to face to the right : the covering sergeants will 
 replace the captains in the front rank. 
 
 107. At the second command, the battalion will face to 
 the right, and each captain moving quickly to the right 
 of his company will cause files to break to the front, ac- 
 cording to the principles indicated No. 89. 
 
 108. At the command mnrch, each captain placing him- 
 II-3 
 
28 SCHOOL OF THE nATTALIOX — PART 11. 
 
 self on the left of his leading guide will conduct bis com- 
 pany perpendicularly to the original line. At the fourth 
 command, the guide of each company will dress to the 
 right, left, or centre, according to the indication givei*. 
 taking care to preserve accurately his distance. 
 
 109. If the colonel should wish to move to the front, or 
 rear, by the left of companies, the movement will be exe- 
 cuted by the same means and the same commands, substi- 
 tuting left for r\qhi. 
 
 110. If the battalion be in march, and the colonel should 
 wish to advance or retire by the right of companies, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. By the rigid of companies to the front (or rear). 
 2. Battalion, by the right flank. 3. March (or 
 double quick — March). 4. Guide right (l<fi) or 
 (centre). 
 
 111. Which will be executed according to the principles 
 and means prescribed, Nos. 95 and following, and 106 and 
 following. At the first command, the color and general 
 guides will take their places as in column. 
 
 112. If the colonel should wish to advance or retire 
 by the left of companies, the movement will be executed 
 by the same moans and the same commands, substituting 
 left for rii/ht. 
 
 113. If the battalion be advancing by the right or left 
 of companies, and the colonel should wish to form line to 
 the front, he will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART II, 29 
 
 1. Bij companies into line. 2. March (or double 
 quick — March). 3. Guide centre. 
 
 HI. At tlie command march, briskly repeated hy the 
 captains, each company will be formed into line, as pro- 
 scribed in the school of the company, No. 154. 
 
 115. At the third command, the color .ind general 
 guides will move rapidly to their places in line, as will 
 be hereinafter prescribed, No. 405. 
 
 116. If the battalion be retiring by the right or left 
 of companies, and the colonel should wish to form line 
 facing the enemy, he will first cause the companies to face 
 about while marching, and immediately form in line by 
 the commands and means prescribed, Nos. 113 and fol- 
 lowin"-. 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 To ploy the battalion into close column. 
 
 117. This movement may be executed by company or 
 by division, on the right or left subdivision, or on any 
 other subdivision, right or left in front. 
 
 118. The examples in this school will suppose the pre- 
 sence of four divisions, with directions for an odd com- 
 pany ; but what will be prescribed for four, will servo 
 equally for two, three or five divisions. 
 
30 SCHOOL OF THE 15ATTALION PART II. 
 
 119. To ploy the battalion into close column l)y division 
 in rear of the first, the colonel will commaud: 
 
 1. Close column^ hy division. 2. On the first divi- 
 sion^ right in front. 3. Battalion, right — Face. 
 4. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 120. At the second command, all the chiefs of division 
 will place themselves before the centres of their divisions ; 
 the chief of the first will caution it to stand fast; the 
 chiefs of the three others will remind them that they will 
 have to face to the right, and the covering sergeant of the 
 right company of each division will replace his captain in 
 the front rank, as soon as the latter steps out. 
 
 121. At the third command, the last three divisions will 
 face to the right; the chief of each division will hasten to 
 its right, and cause files to be broken to the rear, as 
 indicated, No. 89; the right guide will break at the same 
 time, and place himself before the front rank man of the 
 first file, to conduct him, and each chief of division will 
 place liimself by the side of this guide. 
 
 122. The moment these divisions face to the right, the 
 junior captain in each will place himself on the left of the 
 covering sergeant of the left company, who will place 
 himself in the front rank. Thin ride is (jcneral for all the 
 plorjmeu(8 hy division. 
 
 123. At the command march, the chief of the first divis- 
 ion will add, fjuide left ; at this, its left guide will place 
 himself on its left, as soon as the movement of the second 
 
"D^r— ^---cv 
 
 r- — , 
 
 Fi-6.3 
 
 
 «in 
 
 V , >|!| ,HI|;i7 ' M I|l!l' 1,1.1 .„, |ll i,H l lM, . < ) <] 
 
 irt^ Mii!ilii!!liM!ilill!h»!li!;:ii,!IBlF^ 
 
 ^■'■i'' 41ii|lllii»ii!ll!ili!il!lN'l!i!iiMlill!illiMF 
 
 
 ::t 
 
 iTTirr™ 
 
 K. 
 
 '^l|!l!i!!!l!ilSltiJl!ife^'lllki:!lli!aiilliir 
 

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PAKT 11. 31 
 
 division may permit, and the file closers will advance one 
 pace upon the rear rank. 
 
 124. All the other divisions, each conducted by its chief, 
 will step off together, to take their places in the column; 
 the second will gain, in wheeling by file to the rear, the 
 space of six paces, which ought to separate its guide from 
 the guide of the first division, and so direct its march as 
 to enter the column on a line parallel to this division ; the 
 third and fourth divisions will direct themselves diagon- 
 ally toward, l)ut a little in rear of, the points at which 
 they ought, respectively, to enter the column; at six paces 
 from the left flank of the column, the head of each of these 
 divisions will incline a little to the left, in order to enter 
 the column as has just been prescribed for the second, tak- 
 ing care also to leave the distance of six paces between its 
 guide and the guide of the preceding division. At the 
 moment the divisions put themselves in march to enter the 
 column, the file closers of each will incline to the left, so 
 as to bring themselves to the distance of a pace from the 
 rear rank. 
 
 125. Each chief of these three divisions will conduct 
 his division till he shall be up with the guide of the direct- 
 ing one ; the chief will then himself halt, see his division 
 file past, and halt it the instant the last file shall have 
 passed, commanding: 1. Such division; 2. Halt; .3. 
 Front ; 4. Left — Dress.- 
 
 126. At the second command, the division will halt; the 
 left guide will place himself promptly on the direction, six 
 paces from the guide which precedes him, in order that 
 the column being formed, the divisions may be separated 
 the distance of four paces. 
 
:V2 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PAIJT II. 
 
 127. At the third command, tho division will face to the 
 front; at the fourth, it will be aligned by its chief, who 
 will place himself two paces outside of his guide, and 
 direct the alignment so that his division may be parallel 
 to that which precedes — which being done, he will com- 
 mand Front, and place himself before the centre of his 
 division. 
 
 128. If any division, after the command front, be not at 
 its proper distance, and this can only happen through the 
 negligence of its chief, such division will remain in its 
 place, in order that the fault may not be propagated. 
 
 129. The colonel will superintend the execution of the 
 movement, and cause the prescribed principles to be ob- 
 served. 
 
 130. The lieutenant-colonel, placing himself in succes- 
 sion in rear of the left guides, will assure them on the 
 direction as they arrive, and then move to his place outside 
 of the left flank of the column six paces from, and abreast 
 with, the first division. In assuring the guides on the 
 direction, he will be a mere observer, unless one or more 
 should fail to cover exactly tho guide or guides already 
 established. Thin rule is r/etieraL 
 
 I. '51. The major will follow the movement abreast with 
 tho left of the fourth division, and afterward take his 
 position outside of the left flank of the coUnun, six paces 
 from, and abreast with, this division. 
 
 132. To ploy tho battalion in front of the first division, 
 the colonel will give tho same commands, substituting the 
 indication I'/t for that of right in front. 
 
 133. At the second and third commands, the chiefs of 
 division and the junior captains will conform themselves 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART II. 33 
 
 to what is prescribed, Nos. 120, 121, 122; but the chiefs of 
 the last three divisions, instead of causing the first two 
 files to break to the rear, will cause them to break to the 
 front. 
 
 134. At the fourth command, the chief of the first divis- 
 ion will add: Guide right. 
 
 135. The three other divisions will step ofi" together to 
 take their places in the column in front of the directing 
 division ; each will direct itself as prescribed, Xo. 124, 
 and will enter in such manner that, when halted, its guide 
 may find himself six paces from the guide of the division 
 next previously established in the column. 
 
 136. Each chief of these divisions will conduct his divis- 
 ion, till his right guide shall be nearly up with the guide 
 of the directing one; he will then halt his division, and 
 cause it to face to the front: at the instant it halts, its 
 right guide will face to the rear, place himself six paces 
 from the preceding guide, and cover him exactly — which 
 being done, the chief will align his division by the right. 
 
 137. The lieutenant-colonel, placed in front of the right 
 guide of the first division, will assure the guides on the 
 direction as they successively arrive, and then move out- 
 side of the right flank of the column, to a point six paces 
 from, and abreast with, the fourth division, now in front. 
 
 138. The major will conform himself to what is pre- 
 scribed. No. 131, and then move outside of the right flank 
 of the column, six paces from, and abreast with, the first 
 division, now in the rear. 
 
 139. The movement being ended, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE RATTALION — PAUT II. 
 
 Guides, about — Face. 
 
 1 10. At til is. the guide.', who arc faced to the rear, will 
 face to the front. 
 
 141. To jjloy the hattalion in rear, or in front of the 
 fourth division, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. Close column by division. 2. On the fourth di- 
 vision, left (or rif/ht) in front. 3 Battalion, left 
 — Face. 4. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 142. These movements will be executed according to the 
 principles of those which precede, but bj-^ inverse means : 
 the fourth division on which the battalion ploys will stand 
 fast; the instant the movement commences, it.s chief will 
 command, (jnkle right (or left). 
 
 14;l. The foregoing examples embrace all the principles: 
 thus, when the colonel shall wish to ploy the battalion on 
 an interior division, he will command: 
 
 1. Close column by division. 2. On such division, 
 riyht for left) in front. 3. Battalion, inward — 
 Face. 4. March (ov double quick — March). 
 
 144. The instant the movement commences, the chief of 
 the directing division will command, guide left (or right). 
 
 145. The divisions which, in the order in battle, are to 
 the right of the directing division, will face to the left: 
 those which arc to the left, will face to the right. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART II. 35 
 
 146. If the right is to be in front, the right divisions 
 will ploy in front of the directing division, and the left in 
 ity rear; the rejerse, if the left is to be in front. And in 
 all the foregoing suppositions, the division or divisions 
 contiguous to the directing one, in wheeling by file to the 
 front or rear, will gain the space of six paces, which ought 
 to separate their guides from the guide of the directing 
 division. 
 
 147. In all the ployments on an interior division, the 
 lieutenant-colonel will assure the positions of the guides 
 in front, and the major those in rear of the directing 
 division. 
 
 148. If the battalion be in march, instead of at a halt, 
 the movement will be executed by combining the two 
 gaits of quick and double quick time, and always in rear 
 of one of the flank divisions. 
 
 149. The battalion being in march, to ploy it in rear of 
 the first division, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Close column by division. 2. On tlie Jirst division. 
 3. Battalion — hy the right fiank. 4. Double quick 
 —March. 
 
 150. At the second command, each chief of division will 
 move rapidly before the centre of his division and caution 
 it to face to the right 
 
 151. The chief of the first division will caution it to 
 continue to march to the front, and he will command: 
 Quick 1)1 arch. 
 
36 SCHOOL OF TlIK BATTALION — J'AllT II. 
 
 152. At the commanti mnnh, the chief of the first clivifs- 
 ion will command : Giiide left. At this, the left guide will 
 move to the left flank of the division and dy-eot himself on 
 the point indicated. 
 
 153. The three other divisions will face to the right and 
 move off in double quick time, breaking to the right to 
 take their places in column ; each chief of division will 
 move rapidly to the right of his division in order to con- 
 duct it. The files will be careful to preserve their dis- 
 tances, and to march with a uniform and decided step. 
 The color-bearer and general guides will retake their 
 places in the ranks. 
 
 154. The second division will immediately enter the 
 column, marching parallel to the first division ; its chief 
 will allow it to file past him, and when the last file is 
 abreast of him, will command : 1. Second division, hy the 
 left fiaitk — March. 2. Guide left, and i)lace himself in 
 front of the centre of his division. 
 
 ir)5. At the command march, tlic division will face to 
 the left ; at the second command, tlie left guide will 
 march in the trace of the left guide of the first division: 
 the men will take the touch of elbows to the left. When 
 the second division has closed to its proper distance, its 
 chief will command : Quick time — MAncil. This division 
 will then change its step to quick time. 
 
 156. The chiefs of the third and fourth divisions will 
 execute their movements according to the same principles, 
 taking care to gain as much ground as possible toward 
 the head of the column. 
 
 157. If the battalion had been previously marching in 
 line at double quick time, when the fourth division shall 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK UATTALIOX — PART III. 37 
 
 have gained its distance, the colonel will command : 
 J)onble quick — MAncn. 
 
 158. In this movement, the lieutenant-colonel will move 
 rapidly to the side of the leading guide, give him a point 
 of direction, and then follow the movements of tlie first 
 division. The major will follow the movement abreast 
 with the left of the fourth division. 
 
 Remarks on ploying the battalion into column. 
 
 159. The battalion may be ployed into column at full, or 
 half distance, on the same principles, and by the same 
 commands, substituting for the first command : Column at 
 
 fall (or half) distance by division. 
 
 160. In the ploymcnts and movements in column, when 
 the subdivisions execute the movements successively, such 
 as — to take or close distances ; to change direction by the 
 flank of subdivisions, each chief of subdivision will cause 
 his men to support arms after having aligned it and com- 
 manded, Front. 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 Article First. 
 
 To march in column at full distance. 
 
 161. When the colonel shall wish to put the column in 
 march, ho will indicate to the leading guide two distinct 
 
38 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. 
 
 objects in front, on the Hue which the guide ought to 
 follow. This guide will immediately put his shoulder's in a 
 square with that line, take the more distant object as the 
 point of direction, and the nearer one as the intermediate 
 point. 
 
 162. If only a single prominent object present itself in 
 the direction the guide has to follow, he will face to it as 
 before, and immediately endeavor to catch on the ground 
 some intermediate point, by which to give steadiness to 
 his march on the point of direction. 
 
 163. There being no prominent object to serre as the 
 point of direction, the colonel will despatch the lieutenant- 
 colonel or adjutant to place himself forty paces in ad- 
 vance, facing the column, and by a sign of the sword 
 establish him on the direction he may wish to give to the 
 leading guide ; that officer being thus placed, this guide 
 will take him as the point of direction, conforming him- 
 self to what is prescribed in the school of the company. 
 No. 87. 
 
 164. These dispositions being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Column forward. 2. Guide left (or right). 
 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 165. At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
 chiefs of subdivision, the column will put itself in march, 
 conforming to what is prescribed in the school of the com- 
 pany, No. 200 and following. 
 
 166. The leading guide may always maintain himself 
 correctly on the direction by keeping steadily in view the 
 
/ 
 
SCHOOL OV THE liATTALION PART III. 39 
 
 two points indicated to liim, or chosen by himself; if 
 these points have a certain elevation, he may bo assured 
 he is on the true direction, when the nearer masks the 
 more distant point. 
 
 107. The following guides will preserve with exactness 
 both step and distance ; each will march in the trace of 
 the guide who immediately precedes him, without occupy- 
 ing himself with the general direction. 
 
 168. The lieutenant-colonel will hold himself, habitu- 
 ally, abreast with the leading guide, to see that he does 
 not deviate from the direction, and will observe, also, that 
 the next guide marches exactly iu the trace of the first. 
 
 lOy. The major will generally be abreast with the last 
 subdivision; he will see that each guide marches exactly 
 in the trace of the one immediately preceding ; if either 
 deviate from the direction, the major will promptly rectify 
 the error, and prevent its being propagated ; but he need 
 not interfere, in this way, unless the deviation has become 
 sensible, or material. 
 
 170. The column being in march, the colonel will fre- 
 quently cause the <ibout to be executed while marching : to 
 this effect, he will command : 
 
 1. Battalion^ right about. 2. March. 
 3. Guide right. 
 
 171. At the second command, the companies will face to 
 the right about, and the column will then march forward 
 II-4 
 
40 SCHOOL OK TIIK BATTALION PART III. 
 
 in an opposite direction; the chiefs of suKdivisions will re- 
 main behind the front raul;, the file closers in front of the 
 roar rank, and the gniJes will place themselves in the 
 same rank. The lieutenant-colonel will remain abreast of 
 the first division, now in rear; the major will give a point 
 of direction to the loading guide, and march abreast of 
 him. 
 
 172. The colonel will hold himself habitually on the 
 directing flank ; ho will look to the step and to the dis- 
 tances, and see that all the principles prescribed for the 
 march in column, school of the company, are observed. 
 
 173. These means, which the practice in that school 
 ought to have rendered familiar, will give sufficient exact- 
 ness to the direction of the column, and also enable it to 
 form forward or faced to the rear, on the right, or on the 
 left, into line of battle, and to close in niasa. 
 
 174. But when a column, arriving in front, or in rear of 
 the line of battle, or, rather, on one of the extremities of 
 that line, has to prolong itself on it, in order to form to the 
 left or to the right into line of battle, then, as it is essen- 
 tial, to prevent the column from cutting the line, or sensi- 
 bly deviating from it, other moans, as follows, will be 
 employed. 
 
 The column arriving in front of the line of battle, to 
 prolong it on this line. 
 
 175. If the column right in front arrive in front of the 
 line of battle, as it should cross it and find itself four 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — rART IIL 41 
 
 paces beyond it after having changed direction, the colonel 
 will cause to bo placed, in advance, a marker on the line 
 to indicate the point at which the column ought to cross 
 it, and another marker to indicate the point where the 
 first subdivision should commence to wheel; he will be so 
 placed that when the wheel is executed, the left guide will 
 find himself four paces within the line of battle. The 
 chief of the leading subdivision, when the head of the 
 column shall have arrived near the line, will take the 
 guide to the right, and this guide will immediately direci, 
 himself on the second marker. On arriving abreast of 
 him, this subdivision will be wheeled to the left, and when 
 the wheel is completed, the guide will be changed again to 
 the left; this guide will then march parallel to the line of 
 battle by the means to be hereinafter indicated. 
 
 176. The instant the first subdivision wheels, the right 
 general guide, who, by a caution from the lieutenant-colo- 
 nel, will before have placed himself on the line of battle 
 at the point where the column crosses it, and who will 
 have faced to the two points of direction in his front, indi- 
 cated l)y the colonel, will march forward correctly on the 
 prolongation of those points. 
 
 177. The color-bearer will place himself in like manner 
 on the line of battle : and, at the instant the color subdi- 
 vision wheels, he will prolong his march on that line, 
 abreast with this subdivision, taking care to carry the 
 color-lance before the centre of his person, and to main- 
 tain himself exactl}'^ in the direction of the general guide 
 who precedes him, and the point of direction in front 
 which will have been indicated to him. 
 
 178. Finally, the lefD general guide will place himself in 
 
42 SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PART IIL 
 
 the same manner on the line of battle; and, at the instant 
 the last sulxJivision of the battnlion wheels, he will march 
 correctly in the direction of the color-bearer, and the other 
 general fjuide. 
 
 179. The guide of the first subdivision will march stead- 
 ily abreast with the right general guide, and about four 
 pace;> to his right; each of the guides of the following 
 subdivisions will march in the trace of the guide who im- 
 mediately precedes him, as prescribed, No. 107. 
 
 180. The colonel, placed outside of the general guides, 
 will see that the column marches nearly parallel to, and 
 about four paces within these guides. 
 
 181. The lieutenant-colonel and major will look to the 
 direction of the general guides, and to this end, place 
 thejnselves sometimes in rear of the color-bearer, or the 
 left general guide. 
 
 182. If the column be composed of several battiilions, 
 the general guides of each will successively place them- 
 gelves on the line of battle to prolong their march on this 
 line, as the leading subdivision, that of the color, and the 
 one in the rear of their battalion, shall wheel into the new 
 direction : these guides will conform themselves respect- 
 ively, as will also the colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and 
 major, to what is prescribed above for those of the lead- 
 ing battalion. 
 
 183. In the case of several battalions, the lieutenant- 
 colonel of each will maintain steadily the guide of his 
 leailing subdivision about four paces within the line of 
 general guides, even should the last subdivisions of the 
 battalion iminediatuly preceding deviate from the parallel- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART III. 43 
 
 ism. in order that the false direction of one battalion may 
 not influence that of the battalions which follow. 
 
 The column arriving behind (he line of bottle, to p?'o- 
 long it on this line. 
 
 184. If the column, right in front, arrive behind the 
 line of battle, as it ought to find itself four paces within 
 this line, after having changed direction, the colonel will 
 cause a marker to be placed at the point where, according 
 to that condition, the first subdivision ought to commence 
 wheeling. Another marker will be established on the line 
 of battle, to indicate the point at which the general guides 
 ought, in succession, to begin to prolong themselves on 
 that line; he will be so placed that each subdivision, hav- 
 ing finished its wheel, may find itself nearly in a line with 
 this marker. 
 
 185. At the instant the first subdivision, after having 
 wheeled to the right, begins to prolong itself, parallelly to 
 the line of battle, the leading general guide, placed in 
 advance on that line, will direct himself on the two points 
 taken in his front ; the color-bearer and the other general 
 guide will successively place themselves on the same line 
 the instant that their respective subdivisions shall have 
 finished their wheel. 
 
 186. If the column be composed of several battalions, 
 the general guides of the following battalions will suc- 
 cessively execute what has been just prescribed for those 
 
44 SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PART III. 
 
 of the leadin-^ battiilion, and the whole will conform them- 
 selves, as well as the guides of subdivisions, and the field 
 officers of the several battalions, to what is indicated, 
 above, for a column arriving in front of the line of battle. 
 187. In a column, left in front, arriving in front or in 
 rear of the line of battle, these movements will bo exe- 
 cuted on the same i^rinciplcs, and by inverse means. 
 
 
 The column arrivwg on the right or the loft of the I'm 
 of battle^ to prolong it on this line. 
 
 188. If the column, instead of arriving in front or in 
 rear of the line of battle, arrive on its right or left, and if 
 it have to prolong itself on that line, in order afterward 
 to form to the left or right into line of battle, the colonel 
 will bring the color and general guides on the flank of the 
 column by the command color and general gukles on the 
 line: and these guides will prolong themselves on the line 
 of battle, conforming to what is prescribed above. 
 
 Manner of prolonging a line of battle by markers. 
 
 189. When a column prolongs itself on the line of battle, 
 it being all-important that the general guides march cor- 
 rectly on that Hue, it becomes necessary that colonels, 
 lioutenaut-folonels, and majors, whose duty it is to main- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART III. 45 
 
 tain the true direction, should be able to see, as far as 
 practicable, the two objects, on which the march of the 
 general guides ought to be directed; consequently, when 
 no prominent objects present themselves in the desired 
 direction, the chief of the column Avill supply the want of 
 them in advance by aids-de-camp, or other mounted offi- 
 cers, and in such number as may be necessary. 
 
 190. Three such officers may prolong a line as far as 
 may be desired in the following manner: they will place 
 themselves in advance on the line of battle, the first at the 
 point where the head of the column ought to enter; the 
 second, three or four hundred paces behind the first, and 
 the third, a like distance behind the second. The first of 
 these officers will remain in position till the leading gen- 
 eral guide shall have entered on the line of battle, and 
 then, at a gallop, place himself at a convenient distance 
 l)ehind the third. The second will do the like in respect 
 to the first, when the head of the column shall be near 
 him, and so on in continuation. These officers, without 
 dismounting, will face to the column, and cover each other 
 accurately in file. It Avill be on them that the general 
 guides will steadily direct their march, and it will be so 
 much the more easy for the latter to maintain themselves 
 on the direction, as they will always be able to see the 
 mounted officers over the heads of the preceding guides; 
 thus the deviation from the direction, by one or more gen- 
 eral guides, need not mislead those who follow. 
 
 191. A single mounted officer may suffice to assure the 
 direction of a column, when the point of direction toward 
 which it marches is very distinct. In this case, that officer 
 will place himself on the line of battle within that point, 
 
4G SCHOOL OF TIIK nATTAI.ION — PART III. 
 
 and bcj'ond the one at wbich the head of the column will 
 halt, and remain in position till the column halts: serving 
 thus as the intermediate point for giving steadiness to the 
 march of the general guides. 
 
 192. For a column of one or two battalions, markers on 
 foot will suffice to indicate the line to be followed by the 
 genernl guides. 
 
 JicmarL'^ on the march in column. 
 
 193. Although the unoadonecd step be that of columns 
 in route marches, and also that which ought to be habitu- 
 ally employed in the Evolutions of the Line, because it 
 leaves the men more at ease, and, consequently, is better 
 adapted to movements on a large scale and to difficult 
 grounds, nevertheless, as it is of paramount importance to 
 confirm soldiers in the measure and the movement of the 
 cadenced pace, the route stop will be but little practised in 
 the exercises by battalion, except in going to, and return- 
 ing from, the ground of instruction, and for teaching the 
 mechanism and movements of columns in route. 
 
 194. It is highly essential to the regularity of the march 
 in column that each guide follow exactly in the trace of 
 the one immediately preceding, without occupying his 
 attention witli the general direction of the guides. If this 
 principle be steadily observed, the guiilcs will find them- 
 selves aligned, provided that the leading one march exactly 
 in the direction indicated to him; and even should obsta- 
 cles in his way force him into a momentary deviation, the 
 direction of the column would not necessarily be changed; 
 
l\ 
 
 \i\^ 
 
 ''-1 
 
 p 
 
 
 H_ , i-^ 
 
 
 __:i' 
 
 rr 'p 
 
 
 %- 
 
 M 
 
 ^i— 
 
 ^.._.._H 
 
 
 
 u-f_ 
 
 1 1 
 
 H._. 
 
 ■-.p 
 
 cj- 
 
 P 
 
 i- 
 
 -._p 
 
 H...__ 
 
 -p 
 
 4.. - 
 
 ...J- 
 
 n 
 
 . — 
 
 — P 
 
 M. .. 
 
 f' 
 
 H_ 
 
 ._ H 
 
SCHOOL OF THE 15ATTALIOX — PAllT III. 47 
 
 whereas, if the following guides endeavor to conform them- 
 selves at once to all the- movements of the leading one, in 
 I order to cover him in file, such endeavors would nt-cessa- 
 V^ily cause corresponding fluctuations in the column, from 
 right to left, and from left to right, and render the pres- 
 04-vation of distances extremely difficult. 
 
 I'Jo. As a consequence of the principle, that ench (jnide 
 nhall exaciJy foUoio in {he trace of the one who immediately 
 pretedes, if, pending the march of the column, the colonel 
 shall give a new point of direction, too near to the first to 
 require a formal change of direction, the leading guide, 
 advancing the one or other shoulder, will immediately 
 direct himself on this point; the other guides will only 
 conform themselves to this movement as each arrives at 
 the point at which the first had executed it. Each sub- 
 division will conform itself to the movement of its guide, 
 the men insensibly lengthening or shortening the step, 
 and advancing or refusing (throwing back) the shoulder 
 opposite to the guide, but without losing the touch of the 
 elbow toward his side. 
 
 196. The column, by company, being in march, the 
 colonel will cause it to diminish front by platoon, from 
 front to rear, at once, and to increase front by platoon in 
 like manner, which movements will be commended and 
 executed as prescribed in the school of the company, Nos. 
 282 and 273 and following, changing the command form 
 compa7iij to form companies. So may he increase and 
 diminish, or diminish and increase front, according to the 
 same principles and at once, by company, changing the 
 command form companies to form divisions, and the com- 
 mand break into platoons, to break into companies. In 
 
48 SCHOOL OK Tin: HATTALION — PART III. 
 
 this case, the companies and divisions will execute what 
 is prescribed for platoons and companies respectively. 
 
 197. The column being at a halt, if the colonel should 
 wish to march it to the rear, and the distance to be gained 
 be so inconsiderable as to render a countermarch a dispro- 
 portionate loss of time, he will cause the column to face 
 about, and then put it in mai'ch by the commands pre- 
 scribed, No. 164; the chiefs of the subdivisions will re- 
 main behind the front rank, the file closers before the rear 
 rank, and the guides will step into the rear rank, now in 
 front. In a column, by division, the junior captains, in 
 the intervals between companies, will replace thtir cov- 
 ering sergeants in the rear rank, and these sergeants will 
 step into the lino of file closers in front of their in- 
 tervals. 
 
 Article Skcond. 
 Column in route. 
 
 198. A column in route, like a column in raanreuvro, 
 ouglit never to have a depth greater than about the front 
 it had occupied in the line of battle, less the front of a 
 subdivision. 
 
 199. The observance of this iiriiiciplc rccjuircs no par- 
 ticular rule for a column in manoeuvre; but, as a column 
 in route may have hourly to pass narrow ways, bridges, or 
 other defiles, rendering it necessary to diminish the front 
 of subdivisions, it becomes important to give rules and 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PART III. 49 
 
 ir.cans by which the column may, for any length of 
 march, preserve the case of the route step without clon- 
 <;ation from front to rear. 
 
 200. A column in route will be habitually formed by 
 company. 
 
 201. AVhen a column in route shall arrive at a pass too 
 narrow to receive the front of a company, the column 
 will diminish front by platoon before entering. This 
 movement will be executed successively, or by all the 
 companies at once. 
 
 202. If, however, the defile be very short, and it may 
 be passed by the diminution of a few files, it will be 
 preferable to break to the rear the limited number of 
 files. 
 
 203. The column being by platoon, and the want of 
 space rendering a further diminution of front necessary, 
 it will be diminished by section, if the platoons be of 
 twelve or more files. 
 
 204. The column being by section, will continue to 
 march by that front as long as the defile may permit. 
 
 205. If the platoons have le?s than twelve files, one 
 or two files will be broken to the rear, according to the 
 narrowing of the defile, and the route step continued as 
 long as six files can march abreast. 
 
 206. What has just been explained for breaking files to 
 the rear in a column by platoon, is equally applicable to a 
 column by section. 
 
 207. If the defile be too narrow to permit six men 
 to march abreast, the subdivisions will be marched suc- 
 cessively by the flank, conforming to what is prescribed, 
 Nos. 314 and 315, school of the company. 
 
50 SCHOOL OF TIIK I'.ATTAMOX — IWUT III. 
 
 208. The l>att!iliun, miirohinp^ by the flank, will be 
 formed into column, by section, by platoon, or by com- 
 pany, as soon as the breatlth of the way may jiermit: 
 the several movements which these formations include 
 will be executed by the commands of the companies, 
 as their companies successively clear the defile, observing 
 the followinjjj rules. 
 
 209. As soon as the way is sufTiciently broad to contain 
 six men abreast, the captain will command : 
 
 1. By section {or hy jilaioon^ into line. 2. March. 
 
 210. At the command march, the subdivisions indicated 
 will form themselves into linej the files which have not 
 been able to enter, will follow (by the flank) the last 
 four files of their subdivision which have entered into 
 line. 
 
 211. The column marching in this order, the files in 
 rear will bo caused to enter into line as the increased 
 breadth of the way may permit. 
 
 212. The column marching by section or by platoon, 
 platoons or companies, will be formed as soon as the 
 breadth of the way may permit. 
 
 213. The leading subdivision will follow the windings 
 of the pass or defile ; the following subdivisions will not 
 occupy themselves with the direction, but all, in succes- 
 sion, pass over the trace of the subdivisions which pre- 
 cede them respectively. The men will not seek to avoid 
 the bad parts of the way, but pass, as far as practicable, 
 each in the direction of his file. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX — PART III. 51 
 
 214. Changes of direction will always be made without 
 command J if the change be important, a caution merely 
 from the respective chiefs to their subdivisions will suflBce, 
 and the rear rank, as well as the files broken to the rear, 
 will execute successively the movement where the front 
 rank had executed it. 
 
 215. The colonel will hold himself at the head of the 
 battalion ; he will regulate the step of the leading subdi- 
 vision, and indicate to its chief the instant for executing 
 the various movements which the nature of the route may 
 render necessary. 
 
 216. If the column be composed of several battalions, 
 each will conform itself, in its turn, to what shall have 
 been commanded for the leading battalion, observing to 
 execute each movement at the same place, and in the same 
 manner. 
 
 217. Finally, to render the mechanism of all those 
 movements familiar to the troops, and to habituate them 
 to march in the route step without elongating the column, 
 commanders will generally cause their battalions to march 
 in this step, going to, and returning from, fields of exer- 
 cise. Each will occasionally conduct his battalion through 
 narrow passes, in order to make it perceive the utility of 
 the principles prescribed above ; and he will several times 
 in every course of instruction, march it in the route step, 
 and cause to be executed, sometimes at once, and some- 
 times successively, the divers movements which have just 
 been indicated. 
 
 II-5 
 
52 8t"!iu(>L or Tin: hatiamon — i'akt m. 
 
 General remarks on the column in route. 
 
 218. The lesson relative to the coluiiin in route is, by its 
 frequent application, one of the most important that can 
 be given to troops. If it be not ■well taught and estab- 
 lished on right principles, it will happen that tlie rear of 
 the column in route will be obliged to run, to regain dis- 
 tances, or thiit the front will be forced to halt till the roar 
 shall have accomplished that object; thus rendering the 
 march greatly slower, or greatly more fatiguing, generally 
 both, than if it were executed according to rule. 
 
 219. The ordinary progress of a column in route ought 
 to be, on good roads or good grounds, at the rate of one 
 hundred and ten paces in a minute. This rate may be 
 easily maintained by columns of almost any length; but 
 over bad roads, ploughed lields, loose sands, or mountain- 
 ous districts, the progress cannot be so great, and must 
 therefore be regulated according to circumstances. 
 
 220. The most certain mcaus of marching well in route, 
 is to preserve always a regular and equal movement, and, 
 if obstailes oblige one or more subdivisions to shicken or 
 to shorten the step, to cause the primitive rate of march to 
 be resumed the moment the difficulties are passed. 
 
 221. A subdivision ought never to take more than the 
 prescribed distance from the subdivision immediately pre- 
 ceding ; but it is sometimes necessary to lessen that dis- 
 tance. 
 
 222. Thus : the head of the column encounters an obsta- 
 cle which obliges it to relax its march ; all the following 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX — PART III. 5d 
 
 subdivisions will preserve the habitual step, and close up 
 in mass, if necessary, on the subdivision nearest to the 
 obstacle. Distances will afterward naturally be recovered 
 as each subdivision shall successively have passed the 
 obstacle. Nevertheless, if the diflSculty be too great to be 
 overcome by one subdivision, whilst the next is closing up, 
 so that distances cannot afterward be recovered with- 
 out running, the chief of the column will halt the leading 
 subdivision beyond the obstacle, at a distance sufficient to 
 contain the whole column in mass. He will then put the 
 column in march, the subdivisions taking distances by the 
 head, observing to commence the movement in time, so 
 that the last subdivision may not be obliged to halt, after 
 having cleared the obstacle. 
 
 223. When the chief of a column shall wish to change 
 the rate of march, he will cause the leading battalion to 
 quicken or to relax the step insensibly, and send orders to 
 the other battalions each to regulate itself by that which 
 precedes it. 
 
 224. The column being composed of several battalions, 
 the gencral-in-chief will always leave an aid-de-camp with 
 its rear to bring him prompt information if it find a diffi- 
 culty in following, 
 
 225. Subdivisions ought always to step out well in 
 obliquing, both in breaking and forming companies or 
 platoons. When either is done in succession, it is highly 
 important that no subdivision slacken or shorten the step 
 whilst that which precedes it is engaged in the movement. 
 The observance of this principle can alone prevent an 
 elongation of the column. 
 
 226. If the battalion, marching by the flank, encounter 
 
54 SCHOOL OF Tin: ijattamon — i'aut hi. 
 
 a pass so narrow as to oblige it to defile with a front of 
 two men, the colonel will order support arms, take the 
 cadenced step, and undouble the files, which will be execu- 
 ted as' prescribed in the school of the company, No. 326 ; 
 the files will double again as soon as the breadth of the 
 way will permit. 
 
 227. If the defile be only sufficient to receive a front of 
 one man, the colonel will cause the men to pass one at a 
 time. The men of the same file should follow each other 
 in their order as closely as possible, and without loss of 
 time. As soon as the defile permits a front of two or four 
 men, the battalion will be re-formed into two or four ranks, 
 and will march in this order until there be space to form 
 platoons or sections, as indicated, No. 209. 
 
 228. In both cases, just supposed, the head of the bat- 
 talion, after having passed the defile, will march till suffi- 
 cient space be left to contain the whole of the subdivisions 
 in mass; afterward it will be put in march by the moans 
 indicated, No. 222. 
 
 229. When a command has to move rapidly over a given 
 distance, the movements prescribed in this article will be 
 executed in double quick time; if the distance be long, the 
 chief of the column will not allow the march at this gait to 
 be continued for more than fifteen minutes; at thq end of 
 this time, ho will order ^hc ordinary route step to be 
 marched for five minutes, and then again resume the 
 double quick. If the ground be uneven, having consid- 
 erable ascents and descents, ho will reserve the double 
 quick for those parts of the ground most favorable to this 
 march. 
 
 230. A cidumu marching alternately in double quick 
 
i 
 
 ^lamiK'^iH 
 
 
 i i 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. 55 
 
 time and the ordinary route step, in the mailner stated, 
 can easily accomplish very long distances in a very short 
 space of time ; but when the distance to be passed over be 
 .not greater than two miles, it ought to be accomplished, 
 when the ground is favorable, without changing the rate 
 of march. 
 
 Article Third. 
 To change direction in column at full distance. 
 
 231. The column being in march in the cadcnced step, 
 when the colonel shall wish to cause it to change direction, 
 he will go to the point at which the change ought to be 
 commenced, and establish a marker there, presenting the 
 breast to the flank of the column ; this marker, no matter 
 to which side the change of direction is to be made, will 
 be posted on the opposite side, and he will remain in posi- 
 tion till the last subdivision of the battalion shall have 
 passed. The leading subdivision being within a few paces 
 of the marker, the colonel will command : 
 
 Head of column to the left (or right). 
 
 232. At this, the chief of the leading subdivision will 
 immediately take the guide on the side opposite the change 
 of direction, if not already there. This guide will direct 
 himself so as to graze the breast of the marker; arrived at 
 
56 SCHOOL OF THE battalion — PART III. 
 
 this point, the chief will cause his subdivision to change 
 direction by the commands and according to the princi- 
 ples prescribed in the school of the company. When the 
 wheel is completed, the chief of this subdiv*ision will ro-, 
 take the guide, if changed, on the side of the primitive di- 
 rection. 
 
 233. The chief of each succeeding subdivis^ion, as well 
 as the guides, will conform to Avhat has just been explain- 
 ed for the leading subdivision. 
 
 23-4. The cidonel will carefully see that the guide of each 
 subdivision, in wheeling, does not throw himself without 
 or within, but passes over all the points of the arc of the 
 circle, which he ought to describe. • 
 
 235. As often as no distinct object presents itself in the 
 new direction, the lieutenant-colonel will place himself 
 upon it in advance, at the distance of thirty or forty paces 
 from the marker, and be assured in this direction by the 
 colonel; the leading guide will take, the moment he shall 
 have changed direction, two points on the ground in the 
 straight line which, drawn from himself, would pass be- 
 tween the heels of the lieutenant-colonel, taking, after- 
 ward, new points as he advances. 
 
 236. The major will see that the guides direct them- 
 selves on the marker posted at the point of change, so as 
 to graze his breast. 
 
 237. If the column be composed of several battaliiuis, 
 the lieutenant-colonel of the second will cause the marker 
 of the first battalion, to be replaced as soon as the last 
 subdivision of this battalion shall have passed; this dispo- 
 sition will be observed by battalion after battalion, to the 
 rear of the column. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IIL 57 
 
 Bemarks. 
 
 238. It has bceu demonstrated, school of the company, 
 how important it is, first, that each subdivision execute its 
 change of direction precisely at the point where the lead- 
 ing one had changed, and that it arrive in a square with 
 the direction ; second, that the wheeling point ought, al- 
 ways, to be cleared in time, in order that the subdivision 
 engaged in the wheel may not arrest the movement of the 
 following one. The deeper the column, the more rigorous- 
 ly ought these principles to be observed ; because, a fault 
 that would be but slight in a column of a single battalion, 
 would cause much embarrassment in ona of great depth. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 To halt iJie column. 
 
 239. The column being in march, when the colonel shall 
 wish to halt it, he will command : 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 240. At the second command, briskly repeated by the 
 captains, the column will halt; no guide will stir, though 
 he may have lost his distance, or be out of the direction 
 of the preceding guides. 
 
58 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. 
 
 241. The column being in mjircb, in double quick time, 
 will be halted by the same commands. At; the command 
 halt, the men will halt in their places, and will themselves 
 rectify their positions in the ranks. 
 
 242. The column being halted, when the colonel shall 
 wish to form it into line of battle, he will move a little in 
 front of the leading guide, and face to him ; this guide and 
 the following one will fix their eyes on the colonel, in 
 order promptly to conform theuiselves to his directions. 
 
 243. If the colonel judge it not necessary to give a gen- 
 eral direction to the guides, be will limit himself to rectify- 
 ing the position of such as may be without, or within the 
 direction, by the command guide of (such) comjyany, or 
 fjntdea of (such) compatiiea, to the riyht (or to the left) ; at 
 this command, the guides designated will place themselves 
 on the direction; the others will stand fast. 
 
 244. If, on the contrary, the colonel judge it necessary 
 to give a general direction to the guides of the column, he 
 will place the first two on the direction be shall have 
 chosen, and command: 
 
 Guides, cover. 
 
 245. At this, the following guides will promptly place 
 themselves on the direction covering the first two in file, 
 and each precisely at a distance equal to the front of his 
 company, from the guide immediately preceding; the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel will assure them in the direction, and the 
 colonel will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. 59 
 
 Lefl (or rirjlit) — Dress. 
 
 246. At this command, each company will incline to 
 the right or left, and dress forward or backward, so as 
 to bring the designated flank to rest on its guide ; each 
 captain will place himself two paces outside of his guide, 
 promptly align his company parardly with that which 
 precedes, then command Imiont, and return to hi? place 
 in column. 
 
 247. Finally, if the general guides march on the flank 
 of the column, the colonel, having halted it, will place 
 himself in rear of the color-bearer, to ascertain whether 
 the leading general guide and the color-bearer be exactly 
 on the direction of the two points in advance, and estab- 
 lish them on that direction if they be not already on it; 
 the major will do the like, in respect to the general guide 
 in the rear : which being executed, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Guides — On the line. 
 
 243. At this command, the guide of each company of 
 the directing flank will step promptly into the direction 
 of the general guide?, and face to the front. The lieu- 
 tenant-colonel, placed in front of, and facing to, the lead- 
 ing general guide, and the major, "placed in rear of the 
 rearmost one, will promptly align the company guides. 
 
 249. The colonel, having verified the direction of the 
 guides, will command : 
 
60 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. 
 
 Left (or right) — DiiESS. 
 
 250. This will be executed as prcscribeil, No. 240. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 251. The means indicated, No. 244, and following, for 
 giving a general direction to the guides of a column, at 
 full distance, will apply only to a column composed of 
 two, or, at most, three battalions. If the number be more 
 numerous, its chief will cause the colors and general 
 guides of all the battalions to step out and place them- 
 selves on the direction which he may wish to give to the 
 column, as is explained in the evolutions of the line. 
 
 Article Fiftii. 
 To close the column to half distance, or m 7nass. 
 
 252. A column by company being at full distance right 
 in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall wisH to 
 cause it to close to half distance, on the loading company, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. 2o half distance, close column. 2. Mahcu (or 
 double quick — IMaucii). 
 
 253. At the first command, the captain of the leading 
 company will caution it to stand fast. 
 
SCHOOL OF TUE BATTALION — PART IIL Gl 
 
 254. At the command march, which will be repeated 
 by all the captains, except the captain of the leading 
 compau}', this company will stand fast, and its chief will 
 align it by the left ; the file closers will close one pace 
 upon the rear rank. 
 
 255. All the other companies will continue to march, 
 and as each in succession arrives at platoon distance from 
 the one Avhich precedes, its captain will halt it. 
 
 256. At the instant that each company halts, its guide 
 will place himself on the direction of the guides who 
 precede, and the captain will align the company by the 
 left ; the file closers will close one pace upon the rear 
 rank. 
 
 257. No particular attention need be given to the gen- 
 eral direction of the guides before they respectively halt ; 
 it will suffice if each follow in the trace of the one who 
 precedes him. 
 
 258. The colonel, on the side of the guides, will super- 
 intend the execution of the movement, observing that the 
 captains halt their companies exactly at platoon distance 
 the one from the other. 
 
 259. The lieutenant-colonel, a few paces in front, will 
 face to the leading guide and assure the positions of the 
 following guides as they successively place themselves on 
 the direction. 
 
 260. The major will follow the movement abreast with 
 the last guide. 
 
 261. If the column be in march, the colonel will cause 
 it to close by the same commands. 
 
 262. If the column be marching in double quick time, 
 at the first command, the captain of the leauing company 
 
G2 6CIIOOL OF TIIK IIATTALION — PART III. 
 
 Avill command quick time ; the chiefs of the other compa- 
 nies will caution (hem to continue their march. 
 
 2G3. At the command march, the leading company will 
 march in quick, and the other companies in double quick 
 time; and as each arrives at platoon distance from the 
 preceding one, its chief will cause it to march in quick 
 time. 
 
 264. When the rearmost company shall have gained its 
 distance, the colonel will command : 
 
 Douhle (luick — M.VRCii. 
 
 2(>5. When the colonel shall wish to halt the column 
 and to cause it to close to half distance at the same time, 
 he will notify the captain of the leading company of his 
 intention, who at the command march will halt his com- 
 pany and align it by the left. 
 
 2GG. If the column be marching in quick time, and the 
 colonel should not give the ctjmmand double quick, the 
 captain of tlio leading company will halt his company at 
 the command march, and align it by the left. In the 
 case where the colonel adds the command double quick, 
 the captains of companies will conform to what is pre- 
 scribed, No. 202, and the movement will bo executed as 
 indicated, No. 263. 
 
 To close the colinnn on the eighth, or rearmost com- 
 pani/. 
 
 267. The column being at a halt, if instead of causing 
 it to close to half distance on Ihe first company, the 
 colonel should wish to cause it to close on the eighth, 
 he will command : 
 

 ^^ 
 
 
 
 ^''J* 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 N- 
 
 r 
 
 1 
 
 
 f~ 
 
 r 
 
 
 •!^ 
 
 Li 
 
 r 
 
 '■ v 
 
 
 
 
 
 rr 
 
 M 
 
 r 
 
 i 
 
 1 '^' 
 
 ^-r 
 
 __p 
 
 h 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i-! 
 
 .p 
 
 H 
 
 '^' i 
 
 Hillllffli-' 
 
 1 ■*■ 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 iiiiSiiii^ 
 
 
 MlihSlHlF' 
 
 M 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 r' 
 
 
 
 — — n 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 ZIr 
 
 t]— 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PART III. G3 
 
 1. On the eighth company^ to half distance close 
 column. 2. Battalion about — Face. 3. Column 
 forward. 4. Guide right. 5. March (or double 
 quick — March). 
 
 268. At the second comraand, all the companies except 
 the eighth, will face about, and their guides will remain 
 in the front rank, now the rear. 
 
 269. At the fourth command, all the captains will place 
 themselves two paces outside of their companies on the 
 directing flank. 
 
 270. At the command march, the eighth company will 
 stand fast, and its captain will align it by the left, the 
 other companies will put themselves in march, and, as 
 each arrives at platoon distance from the one established 
 before it, its captain will halt it and face it to the front. 
 At the moment that each company halts, the left guide, 
 remaining faced to the rear, will place himself promptly 
 on the direction of the guides already established. Imme- 
 diately after, the captain will align his company by the 
 left, and the file closers will close one pace on the rear 
 rank. If this movement be executed in double quick time, 
 each captain, in turn, will halt, and command: Such com- 
 pany, right about — Halt. At this command, the company 
 designated will face to the right about and halt. 
 
 271. All the companies being aligned, the colonel will 
 cause the guides, who stand faced to the rear, to face 
 about. 
 
 272. The lieutenant-colonel, placing himself behind the 
 rearmost guide, will assure successively the positions of 
 
 II-6 
 
64 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PAUT IIL 
 
 the other guides, ns prescribed, No. 259; tlic innjor will 
 remain abreast with the rearmost company. 
 
 273. The column being in march, when the colonel shall 
 wish to close it on the eighth company, he will command : 
 
 1. On the eighth company, to half distance, close col- 
 umn. 2. Battalion, riyht about. 3. ;M.\14CU (or 
 double quick — March). 4. Guide riyht. 
 
 274. At the first command, the captain of the eighth 
 company will caution his company that it will remain 
 faced to the front; the captains of the other companies 
 will caiiliun tlieir companies that they will have to face 
 about. 
 
 275. At the command march, the captain of the eighth 
 company will halt his company and align it by the left; 
 the tile closers will close one pace upon the rear rank. 
 
 276. The captains of the other companies, at the same 
 command, will place themselves on the flank of the col- 
 umn ; the subdivisions will face about, and as each arrives 
 at platoon distance from the company immediately pre- 
 ceding it, its chief will face it to the front and halt it as 
 prescribed, No. 270. The instant each company halts, the 
 guide on the directing flank, remaining faced to the rear, 
 will quickly i)lace himself on the direction of the guides 
 already established. After which, the captain will align 
 the company by the left, and the file closers will close one 
 pace upon the rear rank. 
 
 277. The lieutenant-colonel will follow the movement 
 abreast of the first company. The major will place him- 
 self a few paces in roar of the guide of the eighth com- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IIL 65 
 
 pany, and ^Yill assure successively the position of the other 
 guides. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 278. A column by division at full distances will close to* 
 half distance by the same means and the same commands. 
 
 279. A column, by company, or by division, being at 
 full or half distance^ the colonel will cause it to close in 
 mass by the same means and commands, substituting the 
 indication, column, clone in mass, for that of to half dis- 
 tance, close column. Each chief of subdivision will con- 
 form himself to all that has just been prescribed, except 
 that he will not halt his subdivision till its guide shall be 
 at a distance of six paces from the guide of the subdivi- 
 sion next preceding. 
 
 280. In a column, left in front, these various move- 
 ments will be executed on the same princijiles. 
 
 \ • 
 
 Article Sixth. 
 
 To march in column at half distance, or closed in 
 mass. 
 
 281. A column at half distance or in mass, being at a 
 halt, the colonel will put 'it in march by the commands 
 prescribed for a column at full distance. 
 
 282. The means of direction will also be the same for a 
 column at half distance or in mass, as for a column at full 
 distance, except that the general guides will not step out. 
 
6G SCHOOL OF TIIK JJATTALION — part III. 
 
 2S3. A column at half distance or iu mass, being in 
 march, when the colonel .>*hall wi.sh to halt it, ho will give 
 the commands prej!cribe<l for halting a column at full dis- 
 tance, and if. afterwards, he judge it necessary to give a 
 general direction to the guides of the column, he will 
 employ, to this end, the commands and means indicated. 
 No. 244, and following. 
 
 284. In columns at half distance, or closed in mass, 
 chiefs of subdivision will repeat the commands nmrch and 
 halt, as in columns at full distance. 
 
 285. The colonel will often march the column to the 
 rear, by the means and the commands prescribed, Nos. 
 170 and 171. 
 
 286. A column by division or company, whether at full 
 or half distance or closed in mass, at a halt or marching, 
 can be faced to the right or left, and marched off in the 
 new direction. 
 
 . Article Seventh. 
 
 To cJiaiu/e direction in column at half distance. 
 
 287. A column at half distance, being in march, will 
 change direction by the same commands and according to 
 the same principles as a column at full distance; but as 
 the distance between the subdivisions is less, the pivot man 
 in each subdivision will take sttps of fourteen inches in- 
 stead of nine, and of seventeen inches instead of eleven, 
 according to the gait, in order to clear, in time, the wheel- 
 ing point, a)iid the marching flank will describe the arc of 
 a larger circle, the better to facilitate the movement. 
 
66 
 
 F.3^ 
 
school of the battalion — part iii. 67 
 
 Article Eighth. 
 
 To change direction in column closed in mass. 
 
 1st. To chcnige direction in marching. 
 
 288. A eolumn by division, closed in mass, being in 
 march, will change direction by the front of subdivisions. 
 
 289. Whether the change be made to the reverse, or to 
 the pivot flank, it will always be executed on the principle 
 of wheeling in marching; to this end, the colonel will first 
 cause the battalion to take the guide on the flank opposite 
 to the intended change of direction, if it be not already 
 on that flank. 
 
 290. A column by division, closed in mass, right in 
 front, having to change direction to the right, the colonel, 
 after having caused a marker to be placed at the point 
 where the change ought to commence, will command : 
 
 1. Battalion, right wheel. 2. March. 
 
 291. At the command march, the leading division will 
 wheel as if it were part of a column at half distance. 
 
 292. The instant that this division commences the 
 wheel, all the others will, at once, conform themselves to 
 its movement ; to this end the left guide of each, advancing 
 slightly the left shoulder, and lengthening a little the step, 
 will incline to the left, and will observe, at the same time, 
 
68 SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PART III. 
 
 to gain so much ground to the front that there may con- 
 stantly be an interval of four paces between his division 
 and that which precedes it; and as soon as he shall cover 
 the preceding guide, he will cease to incline and then 
 march exactly in his trace. 
 
 293. Each division will conform itself to the movement 
 of its guide ; the men will feel lightly the elbow toward 
 him and advance a little the left shoulder the instant the 
 movement commences; each tile, in inclining, will gain so 
 much the less ground to the front, as the tile shall be nearer 
 to the pivot, and the right guide will gain only so much 
 as may be necessary to maintain between liis own and the 
 l)receding division the same distance which separates their 
 marching Hanks. 
 
 294. Each chief of division, turning to it, will regulate 
 its march, and see that it remains constantly included be- 
 tween its guides, that its alignment continues nearly par- 
 allel to that of the preceding division, and that the centre 
 bends only a little to the rear. 
 
 295. The colonel will superintend the movement, and 
 cause the pivot of the leading division to lengthen or to 
 shorten the step, conforming to the principle established, 
 school of the company, No. 227 — if either be necessary to 
 facilitate the movement of the other divisions. 
 
 290. The lieutenant-colonel, placed near the left guide 
 of the leading division, will regulate his march, and take 
 care, above all, that he does nut throw himself within the 
 arc he ought to describe. 
 
 297. The major, placed in the rear of the guides, will 
 see that the last three conform themselves, each by slight 
 degrees, to the movement of the guide immediately pre- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART HI. 69 
 
 ceding, and that neither inclines too much in the endeavor 
 to cover too promptly the guide in his front; he will rectify 
 any serious fault that ma)' be committed in either of those 
 particulars. 
 
 298. The colonel, seeing the wheel nearly ended, will 
 command : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 299. At the second command, which will be given at the 
 instant the leading division completes its wheel, it will 
 resume the direct march; the other divisions will conform 
 themselves to this movement; and if any guide find him- 
 self not covering his immediate leader, he will, by slight 
 degrees, bring himself on the trace of that guide, by ad- 
 vancing the right shoulder. 
 
 300. If the column, right in front, has to change direc- 
 tion to the left, the colonel will first cause it to take the 
 guide to the right, and then command : 
 
 1. Battalion, left wheel. 2. March. 
 
 301. At the command march, the battalion will change 
 direction to the left, according to the principles just pre- 
 scribed, and by inverse means. 
 
 302. When the battalion shall have resumed the direct 
 
70 SCHOOL OF THF. BATTALION PART IIL 
 
 march, the colonel will change the guide to the left, on 
 seeing the last three guides nearly in the direction of the 
 one in front, 
 
 803. The foregoing changes of direction will be executed 
 according to the same principles in a column, left in front. 
 
 304. A column by company, closed in mass, will change 
 direction in marching, by the commands and means indi- 
 cated for a column by division. 
 
 305. The guide who is the pivot of the particular wheel, 
 ought to maintain himself at his usual distance of six 
 paces from the guide who precedes him ; if this distance 
 be not exactly preserved, the divisions would necessarily 
 become confounded, which must be carefully avoided. 
 
 2(i. To chantje direction from a halt. 
 
 306. A column bj' company, or by division, closed in 
 mass, being at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to give 
 it a new direction, and in which it is to remain, he will 
 cause it to execute this movement by the flanks of subdi- 
 visions, in the following manner : 
 
 307. The battalion having the right in front, when the 
 colonel shall wish to cause it to change direction by the 
 right flank, he will indicate to the lieutenant-colonel the 
 point of direction to the right; this officer will immediately 
 establish, on the new direction, two markers, distant from 
 each other a little less than the front of the first subdi- 
 vision, the first marker in front of the right file of this 
 subdivision; which being executed, he will command: 
 
t 
 
 i 
 
 •m. 
 
 U 
 
 4_. JL 
 
 
 
 M y 
 
 H 
 
 
 1:^ . - i^ 
 
 H 
 
 
 .4. _1_ 
 
 H 
 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. 71 
 
 1. Change direction hj/ the right flank. 2. Batta- 
 lion, right — Face. 3. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 308. At the second command, the column will face to 
 the right, and each chief of subdivision will place himself 
 by the side of his right guide. 
 
 309. At the command march, all the subdivisions will 
 step off together; the right guide of the leading one will 
 direct himself from the first step, parallelly to the markers 
 placed in advance on the new direction; the chief of the 
 subdivision will not follow the movement, but see it fiie 
 pstst, and as soon as the left guide shall have passed, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. First company (or Jirst division). 2. Halt. 
 3. Front. 4. Left — Dress. 
 
 310. At the fourth command, the subdivision will place 
 itself against the two markers, and be promptly aligned 
 by its chief. 
 
 311. The right guide of each of the following subdivi- 
 sions will conform himself to the direction ot the right 
 guide of the subdivision preceding his own in the column, 
 so as to enter on the new direction parallelly to that sub- 
 division, and at the distance of four paces from its rear 
 rank. 
 
 312. Each chief of subdivision will halt in his own 
 person, on arriving opposite to the left guides already 
 placed on the new direction, see his subdivision file past, 
 
72 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART 111. 
 
 and conform himself, in baltin;^ and aligning- it, to what 
 is prescribed, No. 309, 
 
 31.3. If the change of direction be by the left flank, the 
 colonel will cause the markers to be established as before, 
 the first in front of the left file of the leading subdivision, 
 and then give the same commands, substituting the indi- 
 cation left for rif/ht. 
 
 314. At the second command, all the subdivisions will 
 face to the left, and each chief will place himself by the 
 side of his left guide. 
 
 315. At the command viawh, all the subdivisions will 
 step off together, each conducted bj' its chief. 
 
 ' 316. The guide of the leading subdivision will direct 
 himself, from the first step, parallelly to the markers; the 
 subdivision will be conducted by its chief; and as soon as 
 its left guide shall have passed the second marker, it will 
 be halted and aligned as prescribed above; and so of each 
 of the following subdivisions. 
 
 317. The colonel will hold himself on the designated 
 flank, to see that each subdivision enters the new dirojtion 
 parallelly to the leading one, and at the presc-ribed dis- 
 tance from that which precedes. 
 
 318. The lieutenant-colonel will place himself in front 
 of, and facing to, the guide of the leading subdivision, 
 and will assure the i)ositions of the following guides, as 
 they successively arrive on the new direction. 
 
 319. The major will follow the movement abreast with 
 the last subdivision. 
 
 320. In order that this movement may bo executed iVith 
 facility and precision, it is necessary that the loading sub- 
 division should entirely unmask the column ; for example, 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IIL 73 
 
 the movement being made by the right flank, it is neces- 
 dary, before halting the leading subdivision, that its left 
 guide shall, at least, have arrived at the place previously 
 occupied by its right guide, in order that each folloAving 
 subdivision which has to pass over a space at least equal 
 to its front to put itself in the new direction, and whose 
 left ought to pass the point at which the right had rested, 
 may, at the command halt, find itself, in its whole front, 
 parallel to the leading subdivision. 
 
 321. By this method there is no direction that may not 
 be given to a column in mass. 
 
 Article Ninth. 
 
 Being in column at half distance^ or closed in mass, 
 to take distances. 
 
 322. A column at half distance will take full distances 
 hjl the head of the column when it has to prolong itself on 
 the line of battle. If, on the contrary, it has to form 
 itself in line of battle on the ground it occupies, it wil^ 
 take distances on the leading or on the rearmost subdivi- 
 sion, according as the one or other may find itself at the 
 point where the right or left of the battalion ought to rest 
 in line of battle. 
 
 Is/. To take distances hy the head of the column. 
 
 323. The column being by company at half distance and 
 at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to take 
 full distances by the head, he will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE RATTAMON — PART III, 
 
 By the head of cohnnn, taTce wheeling dislance. 
 
 324. At this ooramand, the captain of the leading com- 
 pany will put it in march ; to this end, he will command : 
 
 1. First company, forward. 2. Guide left. 
 3. Makcii (or double quick — March). 
 
 325. When the .second shall have nearly its wheeling 
 distance, its captain will command : 
 
 1. Second company, forward. 2. Guide left. 
 3. ]M.A.ucn (or double quick — March). 
 
 326. At the command luavrh, which will be pronounced 
 at the in.stant that this company shall liave its wheeling 
 distance, it will step off smartly, taking the step from the 
 preceding company. Each of the other companies will 
 successively execute what has just been prescribed for the 
 second. 
 
 327. The colonel will sec that each company puts itself 
 in march at the iuh-tant it has its distance. 
 
 328. The lieutenant-colonel will hold himself at the 
 head of the column, and direct the march of the leading 
 guide. 
 
 329. The major will hold himself abreast with the rear- 
 most guide. 
 
 330. If the column, instead of being at a halt, be in 
 march, the colonel will give the same commands, and add : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. 75 
 
 March (or double quick — March). 
 
 331. If the column be marching in quick time, at the 
 command vmrch, the captain of the leading company will 
 cause double quick time to be taken; which will also be 
 done by the other captains as the companies successively 
 attain their proper wheeling distance. 
 
 332. If the column be marching in double quick time, 
 the leading company will continue to march at the same 
 gait. The captains of the other companies will cause 
 quick time to be taken, and as each company gains its 
 proper distance, its captain will cause it to retake the 
 double quick step. 
 
 2d. To take distances on the rear of the column. 
 
 333. If the colonel wish to take distances on the rear- 
 most company, he will establish two markers on the direc- 
 tion he shall wish to give to the line of battle, the first 
 opposite to the rearmost company, the second marker 
 toward the head of the column, at company distance 
 from the first, and both facing to the rear; at the same 
 time, the right general guide, on an intimation from the 
 lieutenant-colonel, will move rapidly a little beyond the 
 point to which the head of the column will extend, and 
 place himself correctly on the prolongation of the two 
 markers. These dispositions being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 II-7 
 
76 SCHOOL OF THK HATTALION PAKT III. 
 
 1. On the eighth company^ take wheelinrj dhtance. 
 2. Column forward. 3. Guide left. 4. March 
 (or double quick — Makcii). 
 
 33'i. At the third command, the captains will place 
 themselves two paces outside of the directing flank : 
 the captain of the eighth company will caution it to 
 stand fast. 
 
 335. At the command march, repeated by all the cap- 
 tains, except the captain of the eighth company, this latter 
 company will stand fast; its chief will align it by the left 
 on the first marker, who is opposite to this company, and 
 place himself before its centre, after commanding: Front. 
 At this command, the marker will retire, and the left guide 
 will take his place. 
 
 336. All the other companies will put themselves in 
 march, the guide of the leading one directing himself a 
 little within the right general guide; when the seventh 
 company has arrived opposite the second marker, its cap- 
 tain will halt, and align it on this marker, in the manner 
 prescribed for the eighth company. 
 
 337. "When the captain of the sixth company shall seu 
 that there is, between his company and the seventh, the 
 necessary space for wheeling into line, he will halt his 
 company ; the guide facing to the rear will place himself 
 promptly on the direction, and the moment he shall be 
 assured in his position, the captain will align the company 
 by the left, and then place himself two paces before its 
 centre; the other companies will successively conform 
 
W ' 
 
 
 ' - 
 
 
 
 lr,^I^::,liarl-. 
 
 « 
 
 . ■ ■•■ ■ h 
 
 
 n 
 
 i 
 
 JilKWiffl. 
 
 ^nafiiiin 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 JiiiiilM. 
 
 1 
 
 ,-r — — «. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 — — 1 11 
 
 ! H'iiiiiiiiiiiiiiffliik 
 
 
 
 .-.! 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 
 
 r- 
 
 
 
 — > 1 
 
 :- — 
 
 —^ 
 
 
 
 
 
I 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTAT.TOX PART III. 7 7 
 
 themselves to what has just been prescribed for the sixth 
 oompauy. 
 
 ooS. The colonel will follow the movement, and see 
 that each company halts at the prescribed distance; 
 he will promptly remedy any fault that may be com- 
 mitted, and, as soon as all the companies shall be 
 aligned, he will cause the guides, who are faced to the 
 rear, to face about. 
 
 339. The lieutenant-colonel will successively assure the 
 loft guides on the direction, placing himself in their rear, 
 !i3 they arrive. 
 
 340. The major will hold himself at the head of the 
 column, and will direct the march of the leading guide. 
 
 3d. To take distances on the head of the coluviu. 
 
 341. The colonel, wishing to take distances on the lead- 
 ing company, will establish two markers in the manner 
 just prescribed, one abreast with this company, and the 
 other at company distance in rear of the first, but both 
 facing to the front : the left general guide, on an intima- 
 tion from the lieutenant-colonel, will move rapidly to the 
 rear and place himself correctly on the prolongation of the 
 two markers, a little beyond the point to which the rear of 
 the column will extend : these dispositions being made, 
 the colonel will command : 
 
 1. On the frst company, take wheeling distance. 
 2. Battalion, about — Face. 3. Column forward. 
 4. Guide right. 5. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
/8 SCHOOL OF THK BATTAF.ION PART III. 
 
 342. At the second commaml, uU the companies, except 
 the one designated, will face about, the guides remaining 
 in the front rank, now become the rear. 
 
 343. At the fourth command, the captains will place 
 themselves outside of their guides. 
 
 344. At the command 7uarch, the captain of the desig- 
 nated company will align it, as prescril)cd. No. .335, on the 
 marker placed by its side, 
 
 345. Tiie remaining companies will put themselves in 
 march, the guide of the rearmost one will direct himself a 
 little within the left general guide ; when the second com- 
 pany shall have arrived opposite the second marker, its 
 captain will face it about, conforming to what is pre- 
 scribed, No. 270, and align it, as has just been prescribed 
 for the first company. 
 
 346. The instant that the third coni])any shall have its 
 wheeling distance, its captain will halt it facing it about, 
 as proscribed. No. 270, and align it by the left ; the cap- 
 tains of the remaining companies will each, in succession, 
 conform himself to what has just been prescribed for the 
 captain of the third. 
 
 347. The colonel will follow the movement, as indicated 
 No. 38S ; the lieutenant-colonel and major will conform 
 themselves to what is prescribed, Nos. 339 and 340. 
 
 348. Those various movements will be executed accord- 
 ing to the same principles in a column with the left in 
 front. 
 
 349. They will be executed in like manner in a column 
 closed in mass ; but, if it bo the wish of the colonel to 
 open out the column to half, instead of full distance, he 
 

 li. - .^ 
 
 
 y^ 
 
 » - 
 
 
 B .. ' "^ 
 
 
 
 
 J :_r 
 
 ^^« 
 
 '\J 
 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. /9 
 
 will substitute, in the commands, the indication half, for 
 that of wheeling distance. 
 
 350. In a column by division, distances will be taken 
 according to the same principles. 
 
 Article Tenth. 
 
 Countermarch of a column at full or half distance. 
 
 351. In a column at full or half distance, the coun- 
 termarch will be executed by the means indicated, school 
 of the compan}' ; to this end, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. Countermarch. 2. Battalion, right for left) — 
 Face. 3. By file left (or right). 4. March (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 To countermarch a column closed in mass. 
 
 352. If the column be closed in mass, the counter- 
 march will be executed by the commands and means 
 subjoined. 
 
 353. The column being supposed formed by division, 
 right in front, the colonel will command : 
 
 I. Countermarch. 2. Battalion, right and left — Face. 
 3. By file left and right. 4. March (or double 
 quick — March). 
 
80 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART III. 
 
 354. At the first commiiml, the chiefs of the odd num- 
 bered divisions will caution them to face to the right, and 
 the chiefs of the others to face to the left. 
 
 355. At the second command, the odd divisions will face 
 to the right, and the even to the left; the right and left 
 guides of all the divisions will face about; the chiefs of 
 odd divisions will hasten to their right and cause two files 
 to break to the rear, and each chief place himself on the 
 left of the leading front rank man of his division; the 
 chiefs of even divisions will hasten to their left, and 
 cause two files to break to the rear, and each chief place 
 himself on the right of his leading front rank man. 
 
 356. At the command march, all the divisions, each 
 conducted by its chief, will step oflF smartly, the guides 
 standing fast ; each odd division will wheel by file to 
 the left around its right guide; each even division will 
 wheel by file to the right around its left guide, each 
 division so directing its march as to arrive behind its 
 opposite guide, and when its head shall bo up with this 
 guide, the chief will halt the division and cause it to 
 face to the front. 
 
 357. Each division, on facing to the front, will be 
 aligned by its chief by the right; to this end, the chiefs 
 of the even divisions will move rapidly to the right of 
 their respective divisions. 
 
 358. The divisions being aligno<l, each chief will com- 
 mand, Fuont; at thin, the guides will shift to their proper 
 flanks. 
 
 359. In a column with the left in front, the counter- 
 march will be executed b}' the snme commands and 
 means; but all the divisions will be alignt^d by the 
 

 rf- - H ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J- -W 
 
 •i L 
 
 
 
 
 r-r- -" tr 
 
 
 X L 
 
 
 
 - - -D 
 
 .H u. ■ 
 
 i 
 
 r ' ■ '-"v.. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. 81 
 
 left; to this end, the chiefs of the odd divisions will 
 hasten to the left of their respective divisions as soon 
 as the latter shall have been faced to the front. 
 
 360. The colonel, placed on the directing flank, will 
 superintend the general movement. 
 
 361. The countermarch being ended, the lieutenant- 
 colonel will always place himself abreast with the lead- 
 ing, and the major abreast with the rearmost division. 
 
 362. In a column by company, closed in mass, the coun- 
 termarch will be executed by the same means and com- 
 mands, applying to companies what is prescribed for 
 divisions. 
 
 363. The countermarch will always take place from 
 a halt, whether the column be closed in mass, or at full, 
 or half distance. 
 
 Article Eleventh. 
 
 Being in column hij company^ closed in mass, to form 
 dioisions. 
 
 364. The column being closed in mass, right in front, 
 and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form divi- 
 sions, he will command : 
 
 1. Form divisions. 2. Left companies, left — Face. 
 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
82 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. 
 
 30'). At the first command, the captains of the left com- 
 panies will caution them to face to the left. 
 
 366. At the second command, the left companies will 
 face to the left, and their captains will place themselves 
 by the side of their respective left guides. 
 
 367. The right companies and their captains, will stand 
 fast; but the right and left guides of each of these com- 
 panies will place themselves respectively before the right 
 and left files of the company, both guides facing to the 
 right, and each resting his right arm gently against the 
 breast of the front rank man of the file, in order to mark 
 the direction. 
 
 368. At the command mnrch, the left companies only 
 will put themselves in march, their captains standing fast; 
 as each shall see that his company, filing past, has nearly 
 cleared the column, he will command : 
 
 1. Such compan)/. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 360. The first command will bo given when the com- 
 pany shall yet have four paces to march ; the second at 
 the instant it shall have cleared its right company; and 
 the third immediately after the second. 
 
 370. The company having faced to the front, the files, 
 if there bo intervals between them, will promptly incline 
 to the right ; the captain will place himself on the left of 
 the right company of the division, and align himself cor- 
 rectly on the front rank of that company. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. 83 
 
 371. The left guide Avill place himself at the same time 
 before one of the three left files of his company, face to 
 the right, and cover correctly the guides of the right com- 
 pany ; the moment his captain sees him established on the 
 direction', he will command: 
 
 Right — Dress. 
 
 372. At this, the left company will dress forward on the 
 alignment of the right company; the front rank man, 
 who may find himself opposite to the left guide, will, 
 without preceding his rank, rest lightly his breast against 
 the right arm of this guide; the captain of the left com- 
 pany will direct its alignment on this man, and the align- 
 ment being assured, he will command, Front; but not 
 quit his position. 
 
 373. The colonel seeing the divisions formed, will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 374. At this, the guides who have marked the fronts of 
 divisions will return to their places in column, the left 
 guide of each right company passing through the interval 
 in the centre of the division, and the captains will place 
 themselves as prescribed. No. 75. 
 
 375. The colonel, from the directing flank of the column, 
 will superintend the general execution of the movement. 
 
 376. If the column be in march, instead of at a halt, 
 when the colonel shall wish to form divisions, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
84 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION IWItT 111. 
 
 1. Form divisions. 2. Left companies., hj/ the left 
 Jiank. 3. Mauch (or double quick — March). 
 
 377. At tlie first command, the captains of tho right 
 companies will command, viark time, the captains of the 
 left companies will caution their companies to face by the 
 left flmik. 
 
 378. At the third command, the right companies will 
 mark time, tho left companies will face to the left; the 
 captains of the left companies will each see his companj- 
 file past him, and when it has cleared the column, will 
 command : 
 
 Such company., by the right Jlank — March. 
 
 As soon as the divisions arc formed, tho colonel will 
 command : 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 
 
 379. At tho fifth command, the column will resume the 
 gait at which it was marching previous to the commence- 
 ment of tho movement. The guides of each division will 
 remain on the right and Icfi of their respective companies; 
 the left guide of the right company will pass into the line 
 of file closers, before the two companies are united; the 
 right guide of the left company will step into the rear 
 rank. Tho captains will place themselves as prescribed, 
 No. 75. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART III. 85 
 
 Being in column at full or half distance, to form 
 divisions. 
 
 380. If the column be at a halt, and, instead of being 
 closed in mass, is at full or half distance, divisions will be 
 formed in the same manner; but the captains of the left 
 companies, if the movement be made in quick time, after 
 commanding Front, will each place himself before the 
 centre of his company, and command: 1. Such company, 
 forward. 2. Guide right. 3. March. If the movement 
 be made in double quick time, each will command as soon 
 aa his company has cleared the column, 
 
 1. Such company .1 by the right flank. 2. March. 
 
 381. The right guide of each left company will so direct 
 his march as to arrive by the side of the man on the left 
 of the right company. The left company being nearly up 
 with the rear rank of the right company, its captain will 
 halt it, and the movement will be finished as prescribed, 
 No. 371 and following. 
 
 382. If the left be in front, the movement will be exe- 
 cuted by inverse means: the right companies will conform 
 themselves to what is prescribed above for the left compa- 
 nies ; and the two guides, placed respectively, before the 
 right and left files of each left company, will face to the 
 left. As the command, guidefi, posts, given by the colonel, 
 the guides, who have marked the front of divisions, and 
 the captains, will quickly retake their places in the column. 
 
 383. If the column be marching at full distance, the di- 
 
86 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART III. 
 
 visions will be formed as proscribed, No. 19fi. If it be 
 marching at half distance, the formation will take place by 
 the commands and according to the principles indicateil. ' 
 No. 376; if the column be marching in double quick time, 
 the companies which should mark time will march in 
 quick time by the command of their captains. 
 
 ]lema7-ks on the formation of (Jiri^lons from a halt. 
 
 .384. As this movement may be considered as the element 
 of depl(»ymeuts, it ought to be executed with the utmost 
 accuracy. 
 
 385. If com])anies marching by the flank do not preserve 
 exactly their distances, there will be openings between the 
 files at the instant of facing to the front. 
 
 380. If captains halt their conipanies too early, they 
 will want space, and the files which have not cleared the 
 flanks of the standing companies will not be able to dress 
 into line without pushing their ranks laterally. 
 
 387. If on the contrary the companies be halted too 
 late, it will be necessary for them to incline to the right or 
 left in dressing; and in deployments, either of these faults 
 would lead to error in the following companies. 
 
 388. As often as a guide shall have to step out to place 
 himself before his subdivision in order to mark the direc- 
 tion, he will be particularly careful to place himself so as 
 to be opposite to one of the three outer files of the subdi- 
 vision when they shall be aligned ; if he take too much 
 distance, and neither of those files finds itself against 
 him, the chiefs of the subdivision will have no assured 
 point on which to direct the alignment. 
 
r-'-:w 
 
 ^: 
 
 ;i^ 
 
 # 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IV. 87 
 
 PART FOURTH. 
 
 Different modes of passing from the order in column 
 to the order in battle. 
 
 Article First. 
 
 Manner of determining the line of battle. 
 
 389. The line of battle may be marked or determined in 
 three difiFerent manners : 1«^ by placing two markers eighty 
 or a hundred paces apart, on the direction it is wished to 
 give to the line j 2c?, by placing a marker at the point at 
 which it may be intended to rest a flank, and then choosing 
 a second point toward, or beyond the opposite flank, and 
 there posting a second marker distant from each other a 
 little less than the leading subdivision; Sd, by choosing 
 at first the points of direction for the flanks, and then 
 determining, by intermediate points, the straight line 
 between those selected points, both of which may some- 
 times be beyond reach. 
 
 Article Second. 
 
 Different modes of passing from column at full dis- 
 tance into line of battle. 
 
 1. To the left (or right), 
 
 I: Forwa'rd!"^^ ^'' ^'^'^' ^ ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^"^^- 
 4. Faced to the rear, 
 11-8 
 
88 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IV. 
 
 1st. Column at full distance, right in front, to the left into 
 line of battle. 
 
 390. A column, right iu front, being at a halt, when the 
 colonel shall wish to form it to the left into line, ho will 
 assure the positions of the guides b^' the means previonsly 
 indicated, and then command : 
 
 1. Left inlo line, wheel. 2. March (or double 
 quick — March). 
 
 391. At the first command, the right guide of the lead- 
 ing company will hasten to place himself on the direction 
 of the left, guides of the column, face to them, and place 
 himself so as to bo opposite to one of the three right files 
 of his company, when they shall be in line : he will ho 
 assured in this position by the lieutenant-colonel. 
 
 3ii2. At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
 captains, the left front rank man of each company will 
 face to the left, and rest his breast lightly against the 
 right arm of his guide; the companies will wheel to the 
 left on the principle of wheeling from a halt, conforming 
 themselves to what is prescribed, school of the company, 
 No. 239: each captain will turn to his company, to observe 
 the execution of the movement, and, wlien the right of 
 the company shall arrive at three paces from the line of 
 battle, he will command : 
 
 1. Such company. 2. Halt. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IV. 89 
 
 oi)3. The company being halted, the captain will place 
 himself on the line by the side of the left front rank man 
 of the company next on the right, align himself corrijctly, 
 and com maud : 
 
 3. Right — Dress. 
 
 o94. At this command, the company will dress up be- 
 tween the captain and the front rank man on its left, the 
 i-aptain directing the alignment on that man; the front 
 rank man on the right of the right company, who finds 
 himself opposite to its right guide, will lightly rest his 
 ))rGast against the left arm of this guide. 
 
 ;}95. Each captain, having aligned his company, will 
 command, FRO^'T, and the colonel will add : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 396. At this command, the guides will return to their 
 places in line of battle, each passing through the nearest 
 captain's interval ; to permit him to pass, the captain will 
 momentarily step before the first file of his company, and 
 tlie covering sergeant behind the same file. This rule is 
 (feneral for all the fornintions into line of battle. 
 
 397. When companies form line of battle, file closers 
 will always place themselves exactly two paces from the 
 rear rank, which will sufficiently assure their alignment. 
 
 398. The battalion being correctly aligned, the colonel, 
 lieutenant-colonel, and major, as well as the adjutant and 
 sergeant-major, will return to their respective places in 
 line of battle. This rule is general for all the formations 
 
90 SCHOOL OF THK HATTALION — PART IV. 
 
 into line of battle ; ncverthclcsp, the battalion beinj; in the 
 school of elcincnlary instruction, the colonel will go to any 
 point he may deem necessary. 
 
 399. A column, with the left in front, will form itself tv 
 the riyht Into line of battle, according to the same princi- 
 ples ; the left guide of the left company will place himself, 
 at the first command, on the direction of the right guides, 
 in a manner corresponding to what is prescribed. No. 391, 
 for the right guide of the right company. 
 
 400. At the command guides, posts, the captains will take 
 their places in line of battle as well as the guides. This 
 rule 18 general for all for7nation»i into line of battle in which 
 the conipanien are aligned by ilie left. 
 
 401. A column by division may form itself into line of 
 battle \iy the same commands, and means, but observing 
 what follows : if the right be in front, at the command 
 halt, given by the chiefs of division, the left guide of each 
 right company will place himself on the alignment oppo- 
 site to one of the three files on the left of his company : 
 the left guide of the first company will be assured on the 
 direction by the lieutenant-colonel ; the left guides of the 
 other right companies will align themselves correctly on 
 the division guides ; to this end, the division guides (on 
 the alignment) will invert, and hold their pieces up perpen- 
 dicularly before the centre of their bodies, at the command 
 left into line, wheel. If the column by division bo with 
 the left in front, the right guides of left companies will 
 conform themselves to what has just been prescribed for 
 the left guides of right companies, and place themselves 
 on the line opposite to one of tho three right files of their 
 respective companies. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IV. 91 
 
 402. A column in march will be formed into line, with- 
 out halting, by the same commands and means. At 
 the command march, the guides will halt in their places, 
 and the lieutenant-colonel will promptly rectify their posi- 
 tions. 
 
 403. If, in forming the column into line, the colonel 
 should wish to move forward, without halting, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. By companies, left wheel. 2. March (or double 
 quick — March). 
 
 404. At the command inarch, briskly repeated by the 
 captains, each company will wheel to the left on a fixed 
 pivot, as prescribed in the school of the company, No. 
 261 ; the left guides will step back into the rank of file 
 closers before the wheel is completed, and when the right 
 of the companies shall arrive near the line, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide centre. 
 
 405. At the fourth command, given at the instant the 
 wheel is completed, the companies will march directly to 
 the front. At the fifth command, the color and the gen- 
 eral guides will move rapidly six paces to the front. The 
 colonel will assure the direction of the color; the captains 
 of companies and the men will, at once, conform them- 
 selves to the principles of the march in line of battle, to 
 be hereinafter indicated, No. 587 and following. 
 
92 SCHOOL OF TIIK HATTALION — PART IV. 
 
 •lOG. The same principles arc applicable to a column lefl 
 in front. 
 
 By inversion, to the ricjht (or left) into line of battle. 
 
 407. When a column, right in front, .shall be under the 
 necessity of forming itself into line, faced to the reverse 
 flank, and the colonel i^hall wish to execute this formation 
 by the shortest movement, he will commaud : 
 
 1. Bi/ inversion, riglit into line, wheel. 2. Battalion, 
 guide right. 
 
 408. At the first command, the lieutenant-colonel will 
 place himself in front, and facing to the right guide of the 
 
 ■ loading subdivision; at the second command, he will rec- 
 tify, as promptly as possible, the direction of the right 
 guides of the column ; the captain of the odd company, if 
 there be one, and the column be by division, will promptly 
 bring the right of his company on the direction, and at 
 company distance from the division next in front; the 
 left guide of the leading subdivision will place himself on 
 the direction of the right guides, and will bo assured in 
 bis position by the lieutenant-colnnel ; which being exe- 
 cuted, the colonel will command : 
 
 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 409. At this, the right front rank man of each sub- 
 division will face to the right, rest his breast lightly 
 against the left arm of his guide, and the battalion will 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IV. 93 
 
 form itself to the right into line of battle, according to the 
 principles prescribed; which being executed, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 410. If the column be with the left in front, it will form 
 itself, by inversion, to the left into line, according to the 
 same principles. 
 
 411. If the colonel should wish the battalion, when 
 formed into line of battle, to be moved forward, the move- 
 ment will be executed by the commands, and according 
 to the principles indicated in No. 403 ; always preceding 
 the command, by companies, right (or left) tchecl, by the 
 command, by inversion. 
 
 Successive Formations. 
 
 412. Under the denomination of successive formations 
 are included all those formations where the several subdi- 
 visions of a column arrive one after another on the line of 
 battle ; such are formations on the right, or left, forward 
 and faced to the rear into line of battle, as well as deploy- 
 ments of column in mass. 
 
 413. The successive formations which may be ordered 
 when the column is marching, and is to continue march- 
 ing, will be executed by a combination of the two gaits, 
 <iaick and double quick time. 
 
94 SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PAKT IV. 
 
 2(1. Column at. full distance, on the rhjht (or on the left), 
 into line ofhatth. 
 
 414. A column by company, at full distance and right 
 in front, having to form itself on the right into line of 
 battle, the colonel will indicate to the lieutenant-colonel a 
 little in advance, the point of apjnii, or rest, for the right, 
 as well as the point of direction to the left; the lieutenant- 
 colonel will hasten with two markers, and establish them 
 iu the following manner on the direction indicated. 
 
 415. The first marker will be placed at the point of 
 appui for the right front rank man of the leading com- 
 pany; the second will indicate the point where one of the 
 three left files of the same company will rest when in 
 lino ; they will be placed so as to present the right shoul- 
 der to the battalion when formed. 
 
 416. These dispositions being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. On the rights into line. 2. Battalion, guide right. 
 
 417. At the second command, the right will become the 
 directing flatik, and the touch of the elbow will bo to that 
 aide; the right guide of the leading company will march 
 straight forward until up with the turning point, and each 
 following guide will march in the trace of the one imme- 
 diately preceding. 
 
 418. The leading company being nearly up with the first 
 mai'ker, its captain will command: 1. Riijht turn, and 
 when the company is precisely up with this marker, he 
 will add : 2. March. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IV. 95 
 
 419. At the comman'l march^ the company will turn to 
 the right; the right guide will so direct himself as to brivg 
 the man next to him opposite to the right marker, and 
 when at three paces from him, the captain will command: 
 
 1. First company. 2. Halt. 
 
 420. At the second command, the company will halt; 
 the files, not yet in line, will form promptly : the left 
 guide will retire as a file closer; and the captain will then 
 command: 
 
 3. RigJit — Dress. 
 
 421. At this command, the company will align itself; 
 the two men who find themselves opposite to the two mark- 
 ers, will each lightly rest his breast against the right arm 
 of his marker ; the captain, passing to the right of the 
 front rank, will direct the alignment on these two men. 
 These rulea arc general fur all successive formations. 
 
 422. The second company will continue to march straight 
 forward; when arrived opposite to the left flank of the pre- 
 ceding company, it will turn to the right, and be formed 
 on the line of battle, as has just been prescribed; the right 
 guide will direct himself so as to come upon that line by 
 the side of the man on the left of the first company. 
 
 423. At the distance of three paces from the line of 
 battle, the company will be halted by its captain, who will 
 place himself briskly by the side of the man on the left of 
 
96 SCnOOL OF THE BATTALIOX PART IV. 
 
 the preoediug companv, and align himself correctly ou ita 
 front rank. 
 
 424. The left guide will, at the same time, place himself 
 before one of the three left files of his company, and, 
 facing to the right, he will place himself accurately on the 
 direction of the two markers of the preceding company. 
 
 425. The captain will then command : 
 
 Right — Dkess. 
 
 426. At this command, the second company will dress 
 forward on the line ; the captain will direct its alignment 
 on the front rank man who had rested his breast against 
 the left guide of the company. 
 
 427. The following companies will thus come successive- 
 ly to form themselves on the line of battle, each conform- 
 ing itself to what has just been proscribed for the one 
 next to the right; and when they shall all be established, 
 the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 428. At this command, the guides will take their places 
 in line of battle, and the markers placed before the right 
 company will retire. 
 
 429. If the column be marching in quick time, and the 
 colonel should wish to cause the movemept to be executed 
 in double quick time, he will add the command: Double 
 quick — Maucii. At the command march, all the compa- 
 nies will take the double quick step, and the movement 
 will be executed as prescribed, No. 417 and following. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IV. 97 
 
 430. The colonel will follow up the formation, passing 
 along the front, and being always opposite to the company 
 about to turn: it is thus that he will be the better able to 
 see and to correct the error that would result from a com- 
 mand given too soon or too late to the preceding company. 
 
 431. The lieutenant-colonel will, with the greatest care, 
 assure the direction of the guides; to this end, the instant 
 that the markers are established for the leading company, 
 he will move a little beyond the point at which the left of 
 the next company will rest, establish himself correctly on 
 the prolongation of the two markers, and assure the guide 
 of the second company on this direction ; this guide being 
 assured, the lieutenant-colonel will place himself farther 
 to the rear, in order to assure, in like manner, the guide of 
 the third company, and so on, successively, to the left of 
 the battalion. In assuring the guides in their positions on 
 the line of battle, he will take care to let them first place 
 themselves, and confine himself to rectifying their posi- 
 tions if they do not cover accurately, and at the proper 
 distance, the preceding guides or markers. Tkis rule is 
 general for all euccesHive formations. 
 
 432. A column, left in front, will form itself on the left 
 into line of battle according to the same principles ; the 
 captains will go to the left of their respective companies to 
 align them, and shift afterward to their proper flanks, as 
 prescribed, No. 400. 
 
P8 SCHOOL OF TIIK liATTALION PART IV. 
 
 Remarks on the formation on the rights or left^ into 
 line of battle. 
 
 433. In order that this movement may be cxooutcd with 
 regularity, it is necessary to establish the line of battle, so 
 that the guide of each company, after turning, may have 
 at least ten steps to take, in order to come upon that line. 
 
 434. In the first exercises, the line of battle will be es- 
 tablished on a direction parallel to that of the column : 
 but, when the captains and guides shall comprehend the 
 mechanism of the movement, the colonel will generally 
 choose oblique directions, in order to habituate the battal- 
 ion to form itself in any direction. 
 
 435. When the direction of the line of battle forms a 
 sensible angle with that of the march of the column, the 
 colonel, before beginning the movement, will give the head 
 of the column a new direction parallel to that line : to this 
 end, he will indicate to the guide of the leading company 
 a point in advance, on which this guide will immediately 
 direct himself, and the company will conform itself to the 
 direction of its guide, at the command, or on a mere cau- 
 tion, of the captain, according as the change of direction 
 may require ; each following company will make the same 
 movement, on the same ground, as it shall successively 
 arrive. By this means the guides of all the companies in 
 the column will have, after turning, nearly the same 
 number of paces to take in order to come upon the line of 
 battle. 
 
 436. Every captain will always observe, in placing him- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE IJATTALIOX — PART IV. 99 
 
 self on that line, not to give the command dress, until 
 after the guide of his company shall have been assured on 
 the direction by the lieutenant-colonel. This rule ia gene- 
 ral for all successive formations. 
 
 437. Each captain will cause his compan}-- to support 
 ,vrms, the instant that the captain, who follows him, shall 
 have commanded front. This rule is general for all suc- 
 cessive formations. 
 
 438. When, in the execution of this movement, the colo- 
 nel shall wish to commence firing, he will give the order 
 to that effect to the captain whose company is the first in 
 line of battle; this captain will immediately place himself 
 behind the centre of his company, and as soon as the next 
 captain shall have commanded front, he will commence 
 the fire by file, by the commands prescribed, school of the 
 company. At the command fire bij file, the marker at the 
 outer file of this first company will retire, and the other 
 will place himself against the nearest man of the next 
 company. The captain of the latter will commence firing 
 as soon as the captain of the third company, in line, shall 
 have commanded front; the murker before the nearest file 
 of the second company, in line, will now retire, and the 
 guide before the opposite flank will place himself before 
 the nearest file of the third company, in line, and so on, in 
 continuation, to the last company on the left or right of 
 the battalion, according as the formation may have com- 
 menced with the right or left in front. 
 
 439. In all the successive formations, the same princi- 
 ples will be observed for the execution of the fire by file. 
 This fire will always be executed by the command of each 
 captain of company. 
 
 II-9 
 
100 SCHOOL or tiik battalion — part iv. 
 
 3d. Cohnnn at full dixtanre, forirard into line of battle. 
 
 440. A column bcinc^ by compimj', at full distanoc, right 
 in front, and at a bait, when the colonel shall wish to form 
 if forward into line, he will conform to what is proscribed 
 Nos. 414 and 415, and then command: 
 
 1. Foncard into line. 2. By companj/, left half 
 wheel. 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 441. At the first command, the captain of the leading 
 company will add — (inide right, put the company in march, 
 halt it three paces from the markers, and align it against 
 the latter by the right. 
 
 442. At the comniniid march, all the other companies 
 will wheel to the left on fixed pivots 5 and, at the instant 
 the colonel shall jiulge, according to the direction of the 
 line of battle, that the companies have suflScicntly wheeled, 
 ho will command : 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 
 
 443. At the fifth command, (he companies, ceasing to 
 wheel, will march straight forward; and at the sixth, the 
 men will touch elbows toward the right. The right guide 
 of the second company, who is nearest to the line of battle, 
 will march straight forward; each succeeding right guide 
 will follow the file immediately before him at the cessation 
 of the wheel. 
 
 444. The second company having arrived opposite to 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART IV. 101 
 
 the left file of the first, its captain will cause it to turn to 
 the light, in order to approach the line of battle; and when 
 its right guide shall be at three paces from that line, the 
 captain will command : 
 
 1. Second company. 2. Halt. 
 
 445. At the second command, the company will halt; 
 the files not yet in line with the guide will come into it 
 promptly, the left guide will place himself on the line of 
 battle, so as to be opposite to one of the three files on the 
 left of the company; and, as soon as he is assured on the 
 direction by the lieutenant-colonel, the captain, having 
 placed himself accurately on the line of battle, Avill com- 
 mand: 
 
 3. Right — Dress. 
 
 446. At the instant that the guide of the second com- 
 pany begins to turn to the right, the guide of the third, 
 ceasing to follow the file immediately before him, will 
 march straightforward: and, when he shall arrive oppo- 
 site to the left of the second, his captain will cause the 
 company to turn to the right, in order to approach the line 
 of battle, halt it at three paces from that line, and align it 
 by the right, as pi-eseribed for the second company. 
 
 447. Each following company will execute what has just 
 been prescribed for the third, as the preceding company 
 shall turn to the right, in order to approach the line of 
 battle. 
 
 448. The formation ended, the colonel will command : 
 
102 SCIIOOI- OF TIIK I5ATTAM0X — PART IV. 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 449. The colonel and lieutenant-colonel will observe in 
 this formation, what is prescribed for them on the right 
 into line. 
 
 450. A column left in front, will form itself forward into 
 line of battle according to the same principles and by in- 
 verse means. 
 
 451. When a column by company at full distance, right 
 in front, and in march, shall arrive behind the right of the 
 line on Avhich it is to form into battle, the colonel and 
 lieutenant-colonel will conform themselves to what is pre- 
 scribed, Nos. 414 and 415. 
 
 452. The head of the column having arrived at com- 
 pany distance from the two markers established on the 
 line, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Forward into line. 2. By company, left half 
 wheel. 3. Maucii (or double quick — March). 
 
 45;5. At the first command, the captain of the first com- 
 pany will command, tjuicle ri(/ht, and caution it to march 
 directly to the front, the captains of the other companies 
 will caution theua to wheel to the left. 
 
 454. At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
 captains, the first company will continue to march to the 
 front, taking the touch of elbows to the right. Its chief 
 will halt it at three paces from the markers, and align it 
 by the right. The other companies will wheel to the left 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IV. 103 
 
 on fixed pivots, and at the instant the colonel shall judge 
 that they have wheeled sufficiently, he will command : 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 
 
 455. At the fifth command, the companies will cease to 
 wheel and move forward. At the sixth, they will take the 
 touch of elbows to the right. The movement will be exe- 
 cuted as previously explained. 
 
 456. If the colonel should wish to form the column for- 
 ward into line, and to continue to march in this order, he 
 will not cause markers to be established : the movement 
 will be executed in double quick time, by the same com- 
 mands and means, but with the following modifications. 
 
 457. At the first command, the captain of the first com- 
 pany will add quick time after the command guide right. 
 At the second command, the first company will continue 
 to march in quick time, and will take the touch of elbows 
 to the right; its chief will immediately place himself on 
 it3 right, and to assure the march, will take points of di- 
 rection to the front. The captain of the second company 
 will cause his company to take the same gait as soon as it 
 .'ihall arrive on a line with the first, and will also move to 
 the right of his company; the captains of the third and 
 fourth companies will execute successively what has just 
 been prescribed for the second. The companies will pre- 
 serve the touch of elbows to the right, until the command, 
 guide centre, 
 
 458. When the color company shall have entered the 
 
104 SCHOOL OF tup: hattalion — paut iv. 
 
 line, the colonel will coinnian<l, .^/M/f/c centre. At this com- 
 mand, the color-bearer and the right general guide will 
 move rapidly six paces in advance of the line. The colonel 
 will assure the direction of the color-bearer. The lieuten- 
 ant-colonel and the right companies will immediately con- 
 form themselves to the principles of the march in line of 
 battle. The left companies and the left general guide, as 
 they arrive on the line, will also conform to the same 
 principles. If the column be marching in double quick 
 time, when the last company shall have arrived on the 
 line, the colonel will cause the double quick to be resumed. 
 459. It is not necessary that the movement be entirely 
 completed, before halting the battalion. As soon as the 
 part of the battalion already formed shall have arrived 
 on the line of battle, the colonel will halt the battalion ; 
 the companies not in line will each complete the move- 
 ment. 
 
 Remarks on the formation forward, into line of 
 battle. 
 
 460, The precision of this movement depends on the 
 direction the companies have at the moment the colonel 
 commands, Furwarcl — March. The colonel will judge 
 nicely the point of time for giving this command, obserr- 
 ing that, if the direction of the line of battle form with 
 that of the column a right, or nearly a right angle, the 
 companies ought to wheel about the eighth of the circle, 
 and that the more acute the angle formed by the two di- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IV. 105 
 
 rections, so much the more the companies ought to wheel 
 before marching straight forward. 
 
 461. It is important that each company in marching 
 toward the line of battle should turn exactly opposite the 
 point where its captain ought to place himself on that line; 
 if a company turn too soon, it will find itself masked, in 
 part, by that which preceded it on the line of battle, and 
 be obliged to unmask itself by the oblique step ; if it turn 
 too late, it will leave an interval between itself and the 
 preceding company to be regained in like manner. In 
 either case, the next company will be led into error, and 
 the fault propagated to the opposite flank of the battalion. 
 
 462. The guide of each company ought so to regulate 
 himself in turning, as to bring his company to the halting 
 point parallelly with the line of battle. 
 
 463. If the angle formed by the. line of battle and the 
 primitive direction of the column be so acute, that the com- 
 panies, on arriving opposite to their respective places on 
 the line of battle, find themselves nearly parallel to it, the 
 captains will not give the command, r{<jht (or left) turn, 
 but each halt his company, place himself on the line, and 
 command : 
 
 Right (or lejt) — Dress. 
 
 464. If, on the contrary, the angle formed by the line of 
 battle and the primitive direction of the column be much 
 greater than a right angle, the formation should be exe- 
 cuted, not by the movement forward into line of buttle, 
 
106 SCHOOL OF THE battalion part IV. 
 
 but by that of on the rujht (or left) into line of bottle, and 
 according to the principles prescribed for this foi-matioii. 
 
 465. If a company encounter an obstacle sufficient to 
 prevent it from marching by the front, it will i-iyht (or left) 
 face in marching, by the commands and means indicated 
 in the school of the company, Nos. 314 and 315. The 
 guide will continue to follow the same tile behind which 
 he was marching, and will maintain exactly the same dis- 
 tance from the company immediately preceding his own. 
 The obstacle being passed, the company will be formed 
 into line by the command of its captain. 
 
 4th. Column at full distance, faced to the rear, into line of 
 battle. 
 
 466. A column being by company, at full distance, right 
 in front, and at a halt, wh'ni the colonel shall wish to form 
 it into line faced to the rear, he and the lieutenant-colonel 
 will conform themselves to what is prescribed, Nos. 414 
 and 115, and the colonel will then command : 
 
 1. Info lute, faced to the rear. 2. BaUalion, right — 
 Fack. '.\. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 407. At the first command, the captain of the leading 
 company will cause it to face to the right, and jmt it in 
 march, causing it to wheel by file to the left, and direct 
 its march toward the line of battle which it will pass in 
 rear of the left marker ; the first file having passed three 
 
IV. 107 
 
 again by 
 'f the two 
 11 hal* it, 
 gainst the 
 
 T— Iir 
 
 1^ ^ 
 
 jompanies 
 elf by the 
 
 i will put 
 e second, 
 Q advance 
 Drescribed 
 ate to his 
 he line of 
 le to the 
 r to tbat 
 
 iny shall 
 g one al- 
 and: 
 
 ONT. 
 
 the com- 
 the halt- 
 halt, 
 he front, 
 ae latter 
 will im- 
 
106 sciic 
 
 but by thai 
 according t 
 465. If i 
 prevent it : 
 face in ma 
 in the scb 
 guide will 
 be was ma 
 tanoe from 
 The obstai 
 into line b; 
 
 4th. CoUiih 
 
 466. A ( 
 in front, a; 
 it into lint 
 will confo 
 and 413, a 
 
 1. Into I 
 Fack. 
 
 467. At 
 company 
 march, ca 
 its march 
 rear of tb 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART IV. 107 
 
 paces beyond the line, the company will wheel again by 
 file to the left, in order to place itself in rear of the two 
 markers ; being in this position, its captain will halt it, 
 face it to the front, and align it by the right against the 
 markers. 
 
 468. At the second command, all the other companies 
 will face to the right, each captain placing himself by the 
 side of his right guide. 
 
 ^69. At the command 7?(a?-r7/, the companies will put 
 themselves in movement; the left guide of the second, 
 who is tiearest to the line of battle, will hasten in advance 
 to mark that line ; he will place himself on it as prescribed 
 above for successive formations, and thus indicate to his 
 captain the point at which he ought to pass the line of 
 battle, by three paces, in order to wheel by file to the 
 left, and then to direct his company parallelly to that 
 line. 
 
 470. As soon as the first file of this company shall 
 have arrived near the left file of the preceding one al- 
 ready on the line oT battle, its captain will command : 
 
 1. Second company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 4. Right — Dress. 
 
 471. The first command will be given when the com- 
 pany shall yet have four paces to take to reach the halt- 
 ing point. 
 
 472. At the second command, the company will halt. 
 
 473. At the third, the company will face to the front, 
 and if there be openings between the files, the latter 
 will promptly close to the right; the captain will im- 
 
108 SCHOOL OF TlIK HATTALIOX PART IV. 
 
 mediately place himself by the side of the man on the 
 left of the preceding company, and align himself on its 
 front rank. 
 
 474. The fourth command will be executed as prescribed, 
 No. 426. 
 
 475. The following companies will be conducted and 
 established on the line of battle as just prescribed for 
 the second, each regulating itself by the one that precedes 
 it; the left guides will detach themselves in time to pre- 
 cede their respective companies on the lino by twelve or 
 fifteen paces, and each place himself so as to be opposite 
 to o^e of the three left files of his company, when in 
 line. If the movement be executed in double quick time, 
 the moment it is commenced, all the left guides will 
 detach themselves at the same time from the column, 
 and will move at a run, to establish themselves on the 
 line of battle. 
 
 470. The formation ended, the colonel will comiiiand: 
 
 Guides— VosTS. 
 
 477. The colonel and lieutenant-colonel, in this forma- 
 tion, will each observe what is prescribed for him in that 
 of o» tfic ri'jJii, into line of battle. 
 
 478. A column, left in front, will form itself faced to 
 the rear into line of battle according to the same prin- 
 ciples and by inverse means. 
 
 479. If the column bo in march, and should arrive in 
 front of the right of the line on which it is to form into 
 battle, the colonel and lieutenant-colonel will conform to 
 what is prescribed, Nos. 414 and 415. 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PART IV. 109 
 
 •180. When the head of the column shall be nearly at 
 company distance from the two markers established on the 
 line, the colonel will command : 
 
 Into line, face to the rear. 2. Battalion, hy 
 the right Jlank. 3. Makcii (or double quick — 
 
 March). 
 
 481. At the first command, the captains will caution 
 their companies to face by the right flank. 
 
 482. At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
 captains of companies, all the companies will face to the 
 right; the first company will then wheel by file to the 
 left, and be directed by its captain a little to the rear of 
 the left marker,- then pass three paces beyond the line, 
 and wheel again by file to the left; having arrived on the 
 line, the captain will halt the company, and align it by 
 the right. The remaining part of the movement will be 
 executed as heretofore explained. 
 
 483. The foregoing principles are applicable to a col- 
 umn, left in front. 
 
 484. As the companies approach the line of battle, it is 
 necessary that their captains should so direct the march 
 as to cross that line a little in rear of their respective 
 guides, who are faced to the basis of the formation ; 
 hence each guide ought to detach himself in time to find 
 himself correctly established on the direction before his 
 company shall come up with him. 
 
110 school ok tiik battalion part iv. 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 Formation in line of battle by two movements. 
 
 485. If a column by company, right in front, and at 
 a halt, find itself in part on the line of battle, and the 
 colonel should think proper to form line of battle before 
 all the companies enter the new direction, the formation 
 will be executed in the following manner: 
 
 486. It will be supposed that the column has arrived 
 behind the line of battle, and that five companies have 
 entered the new direction. The colonel having assured 
 the guides of the first five companies on the direction, 
 will command: 
 
 1. Left into line, iclieel. 2. Three rear companies, 
 forward into line. 
 
 437. At the second command, the chief of each of the 
 rear companies will command : J^y vompatiy, left half 
 wheel ; and the colonel will add : 
 
 8. March (or double quick — March^. 
 
 488, At this command, briskly repeated, the first five 
 companies will form themselves to the left, into line of 
 battle, and the three last forward into line of battle, by 
 the means prescribed for these respective formations ; 
 each captain of the three rear companies will, when 
 his company shall have sufficiently wheeled, command : 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK IJATTALIOX PAUT IV. 11 J 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 489. If the column be in march, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 I. To the left., and forward into line. 2. March 
 (or double quick — March). 
 
 490. At the first command, the captains of those com- 
 I>anies which have not entered on the new direction, will 
 '•ommand : By compauij, left half wheel. At the com- 
 mand march, briskly repeated, the first five companies will 
 form left into line, and the last three forward into line, a? 
 prescribed for those respective formations. Those captain? 
 who form their companies forward into line will conforir. 
 to what is prescribed, No. 488. 
 
 491. If the colonel should wish, in forming the battalion 
 into line, to march it immediately forward, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. By company to the left., and forward into line. 
 2. March. 
 
 402. At the first command, each captain whose company 
 is not yet in the new direction, will command : 1. By cnm- 
 pniiy, left half wheel. 2. Double quick. At the command 
 march, briskly repeated by the captains, the companies not 
 in the new direction will execute what is prescribed above 
 for forming forward into line while marching ; each of the 
 other companies will wheel to the left on a fixed pivot, and 
 11-10 
 
l\2 SCHOOL OF XriK KATTALION PAUT IV. 
 
 when the right, of these corapunies shall arrive on the line, 
 the colonel will command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide centre. 
 
 493. The fifth cojnniand will ho given when the color- 
 bearer arrives on the line, if not already there. 
 
 494. If the battalion be marchinjj in double quick time, 
 t.he colonel will cause quick time to bo taken before com- 
 mencing the movement. 
 
 495. If, instead of arriving behind, the column should 
 arrive before the line of battle, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Left into line, icheel. 2. Three rear companies 
 
 into line, faced to the rear. 
 
 496. At the second command, the captain of each of the 
 three rear companies will command : 1. Such company. 
 
 2. /ii(fht—F\(:K. The colonel will then a.ld : 
 
 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 497. At this command, briskly repeated, the tirst five 
 companies will form themselves to the left, into line of bat- 
 tle, and the three last faced to the rear, into line of battle, 
 by the means prescribed for these respective formations. 
 
 498. If the column be in march, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
t^CHOOL OF TIIK llATTALION PART IV. 118 
 
 1. To the left, and into line faced to the rear. 
 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 499. The movement will be executed as prescribed, Now. 
 \Vn, 480 aud following. 
 
 i>00. These several movements in a column, left in front, 
 will be executed according to the same principles, and by 
 inverse means. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 Different modes of passing from column at half dis- 
 tance, into line of battle. 
 
 1. To the left (or right), 
 
 2. On the right (or left), 
 
 3. Forward, by deployment, 
 
 4. Faced to the rear, 
 
 into line of battle. 
 
 1st. Column at luilf distance, to the lejt [or rifjht) into linn 
 of battle. 
 
 501. A column at half distance having to form itself 
 to the left (or right) into line of battle, the colonel will 
 cause it to take distances by one of the means prescribed. 
 Article IX, Part Third, of this school ; which being ext- 
 cuted, he will form the column into line of battle, as has 
 been indicated, No., 390 and following. 
 
 502. If a column by company, at half distance, be in 
 march, and it be necessary to form rapidly into lino, of 
 battle, the colonel will command : 
 
( 1-1 SCHOOL OK TIIK HATTAHON — PAUT 
 
 1. By the rear of column, left (or rii/ht) into line, 
 wheel 2. March (or dovble quick — March). 
 
 503. At the first coiumaiul, the right general giiitle will 
 move rapidly to the front, and place himself a little beyond 
 the point where the l;eail of the column will rest, and on 
 the prolongation of the guides. The captain of the eighth 
 oonipany will command: Left into line, n-h eel : the other 
 captains will caution their companies to continue to march 
 to the front. 
 
 504. At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
 oaptain of the eighth company, the guide of this comi)any 
 will halt short, and the company will wheel to the left, 
 oonforming to the principles prescribed for wheeling from 
 4 halt ; when its right shall arrive near the line, the cap- 
 tain will halt the company, and align it by the left. The 
 other captaiijs will place themselves briskly on the flank 
 of the column ; when the captain of the seventh sees there 
 is sufficient distance l)etween his company and the eighth 
 to form the latter into line, he will command : Left into 
 tine, wheel — Maucm : the left guide will halt short, and 
 facing to the rear, will place himself on the line ; the com- 
 pany will wheel to the left, the man on the left of the 
 front rank will face to the left, and place his breast against 
 the left arm of the guide ; the captain will halt the com- 
 pany when its right shall arrive near the line, and will 
 align it by the left. The other companies will conform 
 successively to what has just been prescribed for the 
 30veuth. 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — I'ART IV. 115 
 
 5flf>. Each captain will direct the alignment of his com- 
 l>any on the left man in the front rank of the company 
 next on his right. 
 
 506. The lieutenant-colonel will be watchful that the 
 leading guide marches accurately on the prolongation 
 of the line of battle, and directs hiinself on the right, 
 general guide. The major, placed in the rear of the left, 
 guide of the eighth company, will, as soon as the guide of 
 the seventh company is established on the direction, hast- 
 en in rear of the guides of the other companies, so as to 
 assure each of them in succession on the line. 
 
 2d. Coluni)! at half distance, on the n'(/ht (or left) into line 
 of battle. 
 
 507. A column at half distance will form itself on the 
 riglit (or left) into line of battle, as prescribed for a col- 
 umn at full distance. 
 
 3d. Colnmn at haff distance, fuyinurd, into line of hattU. 
 
 508. If it be wished to form a column at half distance, 
 forward into line of battle, the colonel will first cause it. 
 to close in mass and then deploy it on the leading com- 
 pany. 
 
 1th. C'(duirin at lialf distance, faced to the rear, into line of 
 battle. 
 
 509. A column at half distance will be formed into lint 
 of battle, faced to the rear, as prescribed for a column at 
 full distance. 
 
IIG SCHOOL or the ijattalion — paut iv. 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 
 Deployment of columns closed in mass. 
 
 DIO. A column in ma4:s may be formed into lino of 
 battle : 
 
 1. Faced to the front, by the deployment. 
 
 2. Faced to tlio rear, by the countorniarch .ind the 
 
 deploy men t. 
 
 3. Faced to the right and faced to the left, by a 
 
 chanf!je of direction by the Hank, and the ile- 
 ploymcnt. 
 
 511. "When a column in mass, by division, arrives be- 
 hind the line on which it is intended to deploy it, the 
 colonel will indicate, in advance, to the lieutenant-colonel, 
 tho direction of the line of battle, as well as the point 
 on which he may wish to direct the column. The lieu- 
 tenant-colonel will immediately detach himself with two 
 markers, and establish them on that line, the first at the 
 point indicated, the second a little less than the front of a 
 division from tho first. 
 
 512. Deployments will always be made upon lines par- 
 allel, and lines perpendicular to the line of battle ; cou.se- 
 qucntly, if the head of the column be near the line of 
 battle, the colonel will commence by establishing the 
 direction of the column perpendicularly to that line, if 
 it be not already so, by one of the means indicated. 
 No. 244 and following, or No. 'M)7 and following. If 
 
SCHOOL OF THE RATTALION — PART IV, 117 
 
 tlie column be in march, he will so direct it that it may 
 arrive exactly behind the markers, perpendicularly to 
 the line of battle, and halt it at three paces from that 
 line. 
 
 5ir>. The column, right in front, being halted, it is sup- 
 posed that the colonel wishes to deploy it on the first 
 division ; he will order the left general guide to go to 
 a point on the line of battle a little beyond ttat at which 
 the left of the battalion will rest when deployed, and 
 place himself correctly on the prolongation of the mark- 
 ers established before the first division. 
 
 .314. These dispositions being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. On the first division^ deploy column. 2. Battalion, 
 left— Fack. 
 
 i>15. At the first command, the chief of the first divi- 
 sion will caution it to stand fast ; the chiefs of the three 
 other divisions will remind them that they will have to 
 face to the left. 
 
 .516. At the second command, the three last divisions 
 will face to the left ; the chief of each division will place 
 himself by the side of its left guide, and the junior cap- 
 tain by the side of the covering sergeant of the left com- 
 pan)-, who will have stepped into the front rank. 
 
 517. At the same command, the lieutenant-colonel will 
 place a third marker on the alignment of the two first, 
 opposite to one of the three left files of the right com- 
 pany, first division, and then place himself on the line of 
 
118 SCHOOL OV TIIK UATTAMOX — PART IV. 
 
 liattlc a few paces bcj'ond the puint at which the Icf'l of 
 the second division will rest. 
 
 518. The colonel will then command : 
 
 3. March — (or double quick — March). 
 
 519. At this command, the chief of the lirst division 
 will t,'o to its right, and command: 
 
 Jligh(~-J)llKSS. 
 
 520. At this, the division will dress up against the 
 markers; the chief of the division, and its junior captain, 
 will each align the company on his? left, and then com- 
 mand : 
 
 Front. 
 
 521. The tliree divisions, faced to the left, will put 
 themselves in march : the left guide of the second will 
 direct himself parallelly to the line of battle; the left 
 guides of the third and fourth divisions will march 
 abreast with the guide of the second; the guides of 
 the third and fourth, ea-h preserving the prescribed dis- 
 tance between himself and the guide of the division 
 which preceded his own in the column. 
 
 522. The chief of the second division will not follow 
 its movement; he will see it file by him, and when 
 its right guide shall be abreast with him, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Second d'wmon. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK I5A ITALION- -PART IV. Hi) 
 
 523. The first command will be given when the divisio'.i 
 shall yet have seven or eight paces to march; the sccoucl, 
 when the right guide shall be abreast with the chief of 
 the division, and the third immediately after the second. 
 
 524. At the second command, the division will halt; at 
 the third, it will face to the front, and if there be openings 
 between the files, the chief of the division will cause them 
 to he promptly closed to the right; the left guides of both 
 companies will step upon the line of battle, face t) the 
 right, and place themselves on the direction of the mark- 
 ers established before the first division, each guide oppo- 
 site to one of the three left files of his company. 
 
 525. The division having faced to the front, its chief 
 will place himself accurately on the line of battle, on the 
 left of the first division; and when he shall see the guides 
 iis.-<ured on the direction, he will command. Right — Dress. 
 At this, the division will be aligned by the right in the 
 manner indicated for the first. 
 
 526. The third and fourth divisions will continue to 
 march; at the command huh, given to the second, the 
 chief of the third will halt in his own person, place him- 
 self exactly opposite to the guide of the second, after this 
 division shall have faced to the front and closed its files ; 
 he will see his division file juist. and when his right guide 
 ."^hall be abreast with him, ho will oommaud : 
 
 1. Third division. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 527. As soon as the division faces to the front, its chief 
 will place himself two paces before its centre, and cin- 
 mand : 
 
120 SCHOOL OF TIIK UATTALIOX — I'AUT IV. 
 
 1. Third division, forioard. 2. Guide right. 
 3. March. 
 
 528. At tlic tliiri.1 command, the division will march to- 
 ward the line of battle: the right guide will so uiroct him- 
 self as to arrive by the side of the man on the left of the 
 second division, and when the division is at three paces 
 from the line of battle, its chief will halt it and align it by 
 the right. 
 
 529. The chief of the fourth division will conform him- 
 self (and the chief of the fifth, if there be a fifth) to what 
 has just been prescribed for the third. 
 
 630. The deployment ended, the colonel will command: 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 531. At this command, tlie guides will resume their 
 places in line of battle, and the markers will retire. 
 
 532. If the column be in march, and the colonel shall 
 wish to deploy it on the first division without halting tho 
 «;olunin, he will make the dispositions indicated, Nos. 512 
 and 513, and when the first division shall have arrived at 
 three paces from the line, he will command : 
 
 J. (fn the first dii'ision, dcploij column. 2. Battalion, 
 hy the left Jlanlc. 3. Makcii (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 533. At the firtt command, the chief of the first division 
 
SCHOOL OF THK BATTAMOX PART IV. 121 
 
 will caution it to halt, aud will command, Jirst divhiou ; 
 l!ie other chiefs will caution their divisions to face by the 
 loft flank. 
 
 534. At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
 chiefs of the rear divisions, the chief of tlie first division 
 will command. Halt, and will align his division by the 
 right against the markers; the other divisions will face to 
 the left, their chiefs hastening to the left of their divisions. 
 The second division will conform its movements to what is 
 prescribed, No. 522 and following. The third and fourth 
 divisions will execute what is prescribed, No. 526 and fol- 
 lowing ; but the chief of each division will halt in his 
 own person at the command march given by the chief of 
 the division which precedes him, and when the right of his 
 division arrives abreast of him, he will command: * 
 
 Such diolnion, hy the right Jiank — Marcei. 
 
 535. The lieutenant-colonel will assure the position of 
 the guides, conforming to what is prescribed, No. 431. 
 The major will follow the movement abreast with the 
 fourth division. 
 
 536. If the colonel shall wish to deploy the column 
 without halting it, and to continue the march, the markers 
 will not be posted ; the movement will be executed by the 
 same commands and the same means as the foregoing, but 
 with the following modifications : 
 
 537. At the first command, the chief of the first division 
 will command: 1. Guide right. 2. Quick time. At the 
 command, Double quick — Matich, given by the colonel, 
 the first division will march in quick time and will take 
 
1 2'i SCHOOL OK Trri. rattauox — part iv. 
 
 the touch of elbows to the ri.i^ht; the captains will plac»- 
 tlicm.selves on the right of their respective companies; the 
 captain on the right of the hattalion will take points on 
 the ground to assure the direction of the march. Tiie 
 chief of the second division will allow his division to file 
 past liim, and when he sees it right abreast of him, he will 
 command: \. Second division, l>;.i the rirjht Jiaiik. 2. MARCH. 
 'A. Guide ri(/ht, and when this division shall arrive on the 
 alignment of the first, he will cause it to march in quick 
 time. The third and fourth divisions will deploy accord- 
 ing to the same principles as the second. 
 
 538. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, major, and color- 
 bearer, will conform themselves to what is proscribed. 
 No. 458. 
 
 [)'.VJ. The colonel will scis, pending the movement, that 
 the principles just prescribed are dul^' observed, and par- 
 ticularly that the divisions, in deploying, be not halted too 
 soon or too late. He will correct promptly and quickly the 
 faults that rday be committed, and prevent their propaga- 
 tion. T/iin rti/c is (jcneral fov all dcploymentn. 
 
 540. The column being at a halt, if, instead of deploying 
 it on the first, the colonel shiill wish to deploy it on the 
 rearmost division, he will cause the dispositions to be 
 made indicated. No. 511 and following; but it will be the 
 right general guide whom he will send to place himself 
 beyond the point at which the right of the battalion will 
 rest when deployed. 
 
 541. The colonel will then command: 
 
 1. On the fourth (or such) division, deploy column. 
 2. Battalion^ right — Face. 
 
. SCHOOL OF Tin-: hattaliox — part iv. 123 
 
 542. At the first command, the cliief of the fourth di- 
 vision will fcaution it to stand fast; the chiefs of the other 
 divisions will caution them that they will have to face to 
 the right. 
 
 543. At the second command, the fir?t three divisions 
 will face to the right : and the chief of each will place 
 himself by the side of its right guide. 
 
 544. At the same command, the lieutenant-colonel will 
 place a thifd marker between the first two, so that this 
 marker may be opposite to one of the three right files of 
 the left company of the division ; the lieutenant-colonel 
 will then place himself on the line of battle a few paces 
 be3'ond the point at which the right of the third division 
 will rest when deployed. 
 
 545. The colonel Avill then command: 
 
 3. March — (or double quick — March). 
 
 546. At this command, the three- right divisions will 
 put themselves in march, the guide of the first so direct- 
 ing himself as to pass three paces within the line marked 
 by the right general guide. The chief of the third divi- 
 sion will not follow its movement: he will see it file past, 
 halt it when its left guide shall be abreast with him, and 
 cause it to face to the front; and, if there be openings 
 between the files, he will cause them to be promptly closed 
 to the left. 
 
 547. The chief of , the fourth division, when he sees it 
 nearly unmasked by the three others, will command : 
 
 11-11 
 
12-1 SCIIOOI. OF TIIK i'.A'n'AI.iON^i'AK r IV. 
 
 1. Fourth division, fovirarcL 2. Guide left. 'J. 
 March. 
 
 548. At tlif commauil march, which will be givon the 
 inatant the fourth is uuin.iakc-d, this division will ap: 
 proach the line of battle, and when at three i)acos from 
 the markers on that line, its chief will halt it, ami 
 c'oniniunil : 
 
 Xe//!— DllESS. 
 
 .049. At this command, the division will dress forward 
 n>;;ainst the markers ; the chief of the division and tln' 
 junior captain will each align the company on his rifrht, 
 and then command : 
 
 FUONT. 
 
 5r)fl. The instant that the third division is unmaskoil. 
 its chief will cause it to apjtroach the lino of battle, and 
 halt it in the manner just prescribed for the fourth. 
 
 bb\. The moment the division halts, its rijjjht guide and 
 the covering sergeant of its left company will step on the 
 line of battle, placing themselves on the prolongation of 
 the markers established in front of the fourth division ; 
 as soon as they shall be assured in their positions, the 
 division will be aligned, as has just been prescribed for 
 the fourth. 
 
 552. The second and first divisiims which will have 
 continued to march, will, in succession, bo halted and 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PA HT IV. ] 'I't 
 
 aligned by the left, in the same manner as the third : 
 the chiefs of these divisions will conform themselves to 
 what is prescribed, No. 526. The second bcin;,' ne:ir the 
 line of battle, the command will not be given :or it to 
 move on this line, but it will be dressed up to it 
 
 ,'i5o. The deployment ended the colonel will command : 
 
 G uldcs — Po s r 8 
 
 .354. At this command, the chieib of division and the 
 guides will resume their places in line of battle, and the 
 markers will retire. 
 
 555. The lieutenant-colonel will assure the positions of 
 the guides by the means indicated. No. 431, and the major 
 will follow the movement abreast with the fourth di- 
 vision. 
 
 556. If the column be in march, and the colonel shall 
 wish to deploy it on the fourth division, he will make 
 the dispositions indicated. No. 511 and following; and 
 when the head of the column shall arrive within three 
 paces of the line, he will command : 
 
 1. On the fourth division, deploy column. 2. Bat- 
 talion, hy the right flank. 3. March (or double 
 quick — March). 
 
 557. At the first command, the chief of the fourth di- 
 vision will caution it to Ijalt, and will command, Fourth 
 
126 SCHOOL OF Till-: I5AJ lALIDN — TAliT 1 V. 
 
 din'aioii ; the chiefs of the other (livisions will caution 
 their divisions to face to the right. 
 
 558. At the comiuand march, briskly repeated by the 
 chiefs of the first three divisions, the chief of the fourth 
 will command: Ualt. The first three divisions will face 
 to the right, and be» directed parallelly to the line of 
 battle. The chief of each of these divisions will place 
 himself by the side of its right guide. The chief (.f the 
 third division will see his division file past him, and 
 when his left guide is abreast of hiui, he will halt it, and 
 face it to the front. The chief of the fourth division, 
 when he shall sec it nearly unmasked, will command : 
 1. Fourth (/icinioti, fitriL-ard ; 2. (hiide h-ft; ?>. Marcu 
 (or double. </uick — Mahch). This division will move 
 toward the line of battle, and when at three paees from 
 tliis line, it will be liallcd b}' its chief, and aligned by 
 the left. 
 
 559. The chief of the third division Avill move his di- 
 vision forward, conforming to what has just been pre- 
 scribed for the fourth. 
 
 500. The chiefs of the second and lirBt divisiuns, after 
 halting their divisions, will confurni to what is prescribed, 
 No. 552. 
 
 5G1. If the colonel should wi^•h to deploy on the fourth 
 division withuut halting the column, and to continue to 
 march forward, he will not have markers posted, and the 
 movement will be executed by the same commands and 
 the same means, with the following modifications: the 
 fourth division, when unmasked, will bo moved forward 
 iu quick lime, and will continue to march, instead of 
 being halted, and will take the touch of elbows to the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART IV. 127 
 
 left. The third division, on being unmasked, will be 
 moved to the front in double quick time, but when it 
 arrives on the alignment of the fourth it will take the 
 quick step, and dress to the left until the command guide 
 centre, is given by the colonel. The chiefs of the second 
 and first divisions will conform to what has been pre- 
 scribed for the third. When the first division shall arrive 
 on the line, the colonel may cause the battalion to take 
 the double quick step. 
 
 562, The colonel and lieutenant-colonel will conform to 
 what has been prescribed, Nos. 458 and 459. 
 
 563. To deploy the column on an interior division, the 
 colonel will cause the line to be traced by the means 
 above indicated, and the general guides will m')ve briskly 
 on the line, as prescribed, Nos. 51.3 and 540. This being 
 executed, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. On such division, deploy column. 2. Battalion, 
 outward — Face. 3. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 564, Whether the column be with the right or left in 
 front, the divisions which, in the order in battle, belong to 
 the right of the directing one, will face to the right ; the 
 others, except the directing- division, will face to the left ; 
 the divisions in front of the latter will deploy by the means 
 indicated. No. 542 and following; those in its rear will 
 deploy as is prescribed, No. 513 and following. 
 
 565. The directing division, the instant it finds itself 
 unmasked, will approach the line of battle taking thi 
 
128 SCHOOL or the ijattaliox — part iy. 
 
 j;uide left or right, aceordiuji; as ibc ri>;bt or left uf tho 
 column m;iy be in front. The chief of this divinion will 
 align it by the directiu<^ flank, and then step bauk into 
 the rear, in order luomentarily to give place to the chief of 
 the next for aligning the next division. 
 
 566. The lieutenant-colonel will assure tlie positions of 
 the guides of divisions, which, in the line of battle, take 
 the riglu of the directing division, and the major will 
 assure the positions of tiie otlier guides. 
 
 .367. If the ooluuin be in march, the colonel will coiii- 
 mand : 
 
 1. On such division, deploy column. 2. Battalion, htf 
 the right and Icjl Jlank's. 3. March (or double 
 quick — March). 
 
 568. Tho divisions which are in front of the directing 
 one will ik'iduy by the means indicated, No. 557 and fol- 
 lowing: those in rear, as {)rescribcd, No. 5.^.3 and following. 
 
 509. The directing division, when unmnsked, will con- 
 form to what is prcscril)ed for tho fourth division. No. 558. 
 
 570. Tho colonel, lieulcnant-eolonel, and major will con- 
 form to what has been prescribed, Nos. 158 and 459. 
 
 571. In a column, left in front, deployments will bo 
 executed according to tlie sairle principles, and by inverse 
 means. 
 
 i 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION' — PART IV. 129 
 
 Renutrks on the deployment of cohtmns, clo.^ed in 
 
 572. All the divisions ought to deploy rectangularly, to 
 march off abreast, and to preserve their distances toward 
 the line of battlo. 
 
 573. Each division, the instant that it is unmasked, 
 ought to be marched toward the line of battle, and to be 
 aligned upon it by the flank next to the directing division ,< 
 the latter, whether the right or left be in front, will always 
 be aligned by the flank next to the point of appui, when 
 the <lcployment is made on the first or last division; but 
 if the column be deployed on the interior division, this 
 division will be aligned by the flank which wan that of 
 ■lirection. 
 
 574. The chiefs of division will see that, in deploying, 
 the principles prescribed for marching by the flank are 
 well observed, and if openings between the files occur, 
 which ought not to happen except on broken or difficult 
 grounds, the openings ought to be promptly closed toward 
 the directing flank as soon as the divisions face to the 
 front. 
 
 575. If a chief of division give the command halt, or 
 the command, hy the right or left flank, too soon or too 
 late, his division will be obliged to oblique to the right or 
 left in approaching the line of battle, and his fault may 
 lead the following subdivision into error. 
 
 576. In the divisions which deploy by the left flank, it 
 is always the left guide of each company who ought to 
 place himself on the line of battle, to mark the direction ; 
 
130 SCHOOL OF Tin: battalion — PART IV. 
 
 in divisions which ilcjiloy bj' (he right flank, it is the right 
 guide. 
 
 577. A column by company, closed in mass, may be 
 formed to the left or to the right into line, in the same 
 manner as a column nt half distance, and by the means 
 indicated, No. 502 and followiug. 
 
 578. A column by company, closed in mass, may be 
 formed on the right or on the left into line of battle, as a 
 column at half distance ; but in order to execute this 
 movement, without arresting the march of the column, it 
 is necessary that the- guides avoid, with the greatest care. 
 shortening the step in turning, and that the men near 
 them, respectively, conform themselves rapidly to the 
 movements of their guides. 
 
 Rejuarls on iniiersions. 
 
 .)79. Inversions giving frequently the means of forming 
 line of battle, in thp promptest manner, arc of great utility 
 in the movements of an army. 
 
 580. The application that may be made of inversions in 
 the formations to the right and to the left in lino of battle, 
 has been indicated. No. 407 and following. They may also 
 be advantageously employed in the successive formations, 
 except in that of faceil to the rear, into line of battle. 
 
 581. Formations, by inversion, will be executed accord- 
 ing to the same principles as formations in the direct 
 order; but tlic coluners first command will always begin 
 hi/ inversion. 
 
 582. The battalion being in line of battle by invcrsi<»ii 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION' — PART IV. 131 
 
 when tho colonel shall wish, bj' forming it into column, to 
 l)ring it back to the direct order, he will cause it either to 
 hreak or to jjloy by Company, or by division, accordingly 
 as the column may have been by company or by division 
 l)efore it had been formed into line of battle by inversion. 
 
 J8I3. AVhen a battalion in line of battle, formed by inver- 
 .sion, has to be ployed into column, the movement will be 
 executed according to the same principles as if the lii;e 
 were in the direct order, but observing what follows. 
 
 584. If it be intended that the column shall be b}' divi- 
 sion, with the first in front, or by company, with the first 
 company in front, the colonel will announce in the second 
 command — left in front, because the battalion being in 
 line of battle by inversion, that subdivision is on the left. 
 
 .)85. Each chief whose subdivision takes position in the 
 column in front of the directing one, will conduct his sub- 
 ilivision till it halts,- and each chief whose subdivision 
 takes position in rear of the directing one, will halt in his 
 own person when up with the preceding right guide, and 
 stie his subdivision file past: and each chief will align 
 his subdivision by the right. When the column is to be 
 put in march, the second command will be — ynide lefty be- 
 cause the proper right is in front. 
 
 ;)86. For the same reason, if it be intended that the last 
 subdivision shall be in front, riifht in front, will be an- 
 nounced in the second command : the subdivisions will be 
 aligned by the left, and to put the column in march, the 
 second command will be, yuidc n'yht, because the proper 
 left is in front. 
 
i:^2 SCHOOL OF TIIK UATTAMON — I'AUT V. 
 
 PART FIFTH. 
 
 AuTicLE First. 
 To advance in line of battle. 
 
 6S7. The battalion being correctly aligned, and supposed 
 to be the directing one, when the colonel sliall wish to 
 march in line of battle, he will give the lieutenant-colonel 
 an intimation of his purpose, place himself about forty 
 paces in rear of the color-file, and face to the front. 
 
 5S8. The lieutenant-colonel will place 'himself a like dis- 
 tance in front of the same file, and face to the colonel, 
 who will establish him as correctly as possible, by signal 
 of the sword, perpendicularly to the line of battle oppot'ite 
 to the color-bearer. The colonel will next, above the 
 heads of the lieutenant-colonel and color-bearer, take a 
 point of direction in the field beyond, if a distinct one pre- 
 sent itself, exactly in the prolongation of those first two 
 points. 
 
 589. The colonel will then move twenty paces farther to 
 the rear, and establish two markers on the prolongation of 
 tlie straight line passing through the color-bearer and the 
 lieuLen:int-colonel J these markers will face to the rear, the 
 first placed about twenty-five paces behind the rear rank 
 
le distance from 
 
 efl to take, the 
 tablished on the 
 in the straight 
 is.s between the 
 ts will be taken 
 iarer. 
 he colonel will 
 
 -guard will ad- 
 •als in the rear 
 ank, and these 
 
 closers ; at the 
 ve in advance, 
 he right, oppo- 
 ; other opposite 
 -ttalion. 
 
 shift, passing 
 •espective coni- 
 talion will step 
 ergeant of the 
 lany, will step 
 
 red the color- 
 corporal of the 
 o the position 
 
p 
 
 ^ H" 
 
 ^' - -^ -Y 
 
 "1 
 
SCHOOL OF TUK RATTALIOX I'AUT V. 13:5 
 
 oi' the battalion, and the second at the same distance from 
 the first. 
 
 590. The color-bearer will be instructed to take, the 
 moment the lieutenant-colonel shall be established on tho 
 perpendicular, two points on the ground in the straight 
 line which, drawn from himself, would pass between the 
 heels of that officer; the first of these points will l)e taken 
 at fifteen or twenty paces from the color-bearer. 
 
 591. These dispositions being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Battalion, forward. 
 
 592. At this, the front rank of the color-guard will ad- 
 vance six paces to the front; the corporals in the rear 
 rank will place themselves in the front rank, and these 
 will be replaced by those in the rank of file closers; at the 
 same time the two general guides will move in advance, 
 abreast with the color-bearer, the one on the right, oppo- 
 gite to the captain of the rigbt company, the other opposite 
 to the sergeant who closes the left of the battalion. 
 
 593. The captains of the left wing will shift, passing 
 before the front rank, to the left of their respective com- 
 panies ; the sergeant on the left of the battalion will step 
 back into the rear rank. The covering sergeant of the 
 company next on the left of the color-company, will step 
 into the front rank. 
 
 594. The lieutenant-colonel having assured the color- 
 bearer on the line between himself and the corporal of the 
 color-file, now in the front rank, will go to the position 
 which will be hereinafter indicated, No. 602. 
 
134 scriooL OF Tin: battalion' — part v. 
 
 595. The m.ajor will place himself six or eight paee? on 
 ciihcr flank of (he color-rank. 
 
 bOQ. The colonel will (hen command: 
 
 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 597. At this command, the battalion will step off with 
 life : the color-bearer, charged with the step and direction, 
 will st'rui)ulously observe the length and cadence of the 
 pace, marchiiig on the prolongation of the two points pre- 
 viously taken, and successivelj' taking others in advance 
 by the means indicated in the schofd of the company : the 
 corporal on his right, and the one on his left, will march 
 in the same step, taking care not to turn the head or 
 slioulders, the color-bearer supporting the color-lance 
 against the hip. 
 
 598. The two general guides will inarch in the same 
 step with the color-rank,' each maintaining himself abreasl 
 or nearly so, with that rank, and neither occupying him- 
 self with the movement of the other. 
 
 699. The three corporals of the color-guar'l. now in the 
 front rank of (ho battalion, will march well aligned, elbow 
 to elbow, heads direct to the front, and without deranging 
 the line of their shoulders ; the centre one will follow 
 exactly in the trace of the color-bearer, and maintain the 
 same step, without lengthening or shortening it, except on 
 an intimation from the colonel or lieutenant-colonel, al- 
 though he should find liiraself more or less than six paces 
 from the color-rank. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE HATTALTON — PAUT V. 135 
 
 GOO. The covering sergeant in the front rank, between 
 the color company and the next on the left, will march 
 elbow to elbnw, and on the same line, with the three cor- 
 porals in the centre, his head well to the front. 
 
 601. The captains of the color company, and the com- 
 pany next to the left, will constitute, with the three 
 corporals in the centre of the front rank, the basis of 
 alignment for both wings of the battalion ; they will 
 march in the same step with the color-bearer, and exert 
 themselves to maintain their shoulders exactly in the 
 square with the dix-ection. To this end, they will keep 
 their heads direct to the front, only occasionally casting 
 an eye on the three centre corjiorals, with the slightest 
 possible turn of the neck, and if they perceive themselves 
 in advance, or in rear of these corporals, the captain, or 
 two captains, will almost insensibly shorten or lengthen 
 the step, so as, at the end of several paces, to regain the 
 true alignment, without giving sudden checks or impul- 
 sions to the wings beyond them resi>ectivcly. 
 
 602. The lieutenant-colonel, placed twelve or fifteen 
 paces on the right of the captain of the color-company, 
 will maintain this captain and the next one beyond, 
 abreast with the three centre corporals: to this end, he 
 will caution either to lengthen or to shorten the step as 
 may be necessary, which the captain, or two captains, will 
 execute as has just been explained. 
 
 603. All the other captains will maintain themselves on 
 the prolongation of this basis ; and, to this end, they will 
 cast their eyes toward the centre, taking care to turn the 
 neck but slightly, and not to derange the direction of their 
 shoulders. 
 
 11-12 
 
13G SCHOOL OK TIIK HATTALIOX — P.MIT V. 
 
 60i. The cai'tains will observe the marcli of their coin- 
 panies, and prevent the men from getting; in advance of 
 the line of captains ; they will not lengthen or shorten stcti 
 except when evidently neci'.-sarj' ; because, to orrect. 
 with too scrupuh.us attention, small faults, is apt to cau^e 
 the production of greater — loss of calmness, silence, and 
 equality of step, each of which it is so important to 
 maintain. 
 
 fi05. The men will constantly keep their heads well 
 directed to the front, feel lightly the elbow toward the 
 centre, resist pressure coming from the flank, give the 
 greatest attention to the squareness of shoulders, and hold 
 themselves always very sliglitly behind the lino of the 
 captains, in order never to shut out from the view of the 
 latter the basis of alignment; they will, from time to 
 time, cast an eye on the color- rank, or on the general 
 guide of the wing, in order to march constantly in the 
 same step with those advanced persons. 
 
 606. Pending the march, the lino determined by the 
 two markers (A and d) will ha prolonged b^- placing, in 
 proportion as the battalion advances, a third mitrker (?) 
 in the rear of the tirst (h), then the marker ((/) will quit 
 his place and go a like distance in rear of (/) ; the marker 
 (A) will, in his turn, do the like in respect to (d), and so 
 on, ill succession, as long as the battalion continues to 
 advance; each marker, on shifting position, taking care to 
 face to the rear, and to cover accurately the two markers 
 already established on the direction. A statf officer, or 
 the quartermaster-sergeant, designated for the purpose, 
 !ind who will hold himself constantly fifteen or twenty 
 iiaces facinir the marker farthest from the battalion, will 
 
 J 
 
IT V. 1-5^ 
 d assure him 
 
 dui!?clf about 
 talion, taking 
 i-kers; if, for 
 , or the indi- 
 foUowing, be 
 not pcrpcn- 
 
 left). 
 
 hasten thirty 
 ik, halt, face 
 •ection which 
 ord ; the cor- 
 n direct him- 
 the colonel, 
 der ; the cor- 
 n themselves? 
 
 self upon the 
 major onus- 
 right or left, 
 • iiis file; the 
 round in this 
 
 themselves to 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTA I.ION— PAKT V. K)7 
 
 caution Oiich nuirker wlicii to shift place, and assure him 
 on the direction behind the other two. 
 
 607. The colonel will habitually hold himself about 
 thirty paces in roar of the centre of bis battalion, taking 
 care not to put himself on the line of markers; if, for 
 example, by the; slanlint,' of the battalion, or the indi- 
 cations which will be given, Xo. G17 and following, he 
 find that the march of the color-bearer is not perpen- 
 dicular, he will promptly eommaud : 
 
 Point of direction to the right (or Icft^. 
 
 608. At this command, the major will hasten thirty 
 or forty paces in advance of the color-rank, halt, face 
 to the colonel, and place himself on the direction which 
 the latter will indicate by signal of the sword; the cor- 
 ))oral in the centre of the battalion will then direct him- 
 self upon the major, on a caution from the colonel, 
 advancing, to that end, the opposite shoulder; the cor- 
 l)orals on his right and left will conform themselves 
 to bis direction. 
 
 609. The color-bearer will also direct himself upon the 
 major, advancing the opposite shoulder, the major caus- 
 ing him, at the same time, to incline to the right or left, 
 until be shall exactly cover the corporal of his file; the 
 color-bearer will then take points on the ground in this 
 new direction. 
 
 610. The two general guides will conform themselves to 
 the new direction of the color-rank. 
 
138 SCHOOL OF TlIK IJATTALION — I'AUT V. 
 
 Gil. The officer charged with observing the successive 
 replacing of the markers in the rear of the centre, will 
 establish them promptly on the new direction, taking 
 for basis the color-bearer and the corporal of his file 
 in the centre of the battalion ; the colonel will verily the 
 new direction of the markers. 
 
 012. The lieutenant-colonel, fr;'m the position given^ 
 No. G02, will see that the two centre ompauies, and suc- 
 cessively all the others, conform themselves to the new 
 direction of the ccitre, but without precipitancy or dis- 
 order; he will then endeavor to maintain that basis of 
 alignment for the battalion, perpendicularly to the direc- 
 tion pursued by the color-bearer. 
 
 Ol.'i. He will often observe the march of the two wings: 
 and, if ho discover that the captains neglect to conform 
 themselves to the basis of alignment, he will recall their 
 attention by the command — captain nf (such) compaui/, or 
 coptainH of (such) comjxini'ei. on the line — without, how- 
 over, endeavoring too scrupulously to correct small faults. 
 
 Gil. The major on the flank of the color-rank will, 
 during tlio march, place himsolf, from time to time, 
 twenty paces in front of that rank, face to the rear, and 
 place himself correctly on the prolongation of the mark- 
 ers established behind the centre, in order to verify the 
 exact march of the color-bearer on that line ; he will 
 rectif3', if necessary, the direction of the color-bearer, 
 who will immediately take two new points on the ground 
 between himself and the major. 
 
 615. All the principles applicable to the advance in line, 
 are the same for a Huhurdinate as for the clirectin(j battal- 
 ion ; but when the battalion under instruction is apposed 
 

 I 
 
 f 
 
 „ .^...iicu, a me nies crowd each otbcr, 
 
 if, in short, disorder ensue, the remedy ought to be applied 
 as promptly as possible, but calmly, with few words, and 
 as little noise as practicable. 
 
 620. The object of the general guides, in the march in 
 line of battle is, to indicate to the companies near the 
 flanks the step of the centre of the battalion, and to afford 
 more fsfcility in establishing the wings on the direction of 
 
"MIIIIHfflfili'WiiiHHlllWli- 
 
 ^ 
 
 IHl 
 
 laiiiiiiiffliiiHi'ipiBiiiiB 
 
 "^iiiiiiuiiaKiiLiiMiwjeLi:^!! i| 
 
 ^''t 
 
 ja a_ B Q- ^' 
 
 _jL „H & 
 
 J B ~i s X- - -j:,- 
 
 HIBP ■■ Bi" 
 
 ^rM 
 
 M„_,J 1 ^ 
 
 :^' 
 
 
 
 L*- 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 ^, 
 
 c 
 
 _^J____ 
 
 ----fl 
 
 n ra . 
 
 __ H, 
 
 A— 
 
 ti._._ 
 
 f^ 
 
8CH00L OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 139 
 
 to be mhordiuate, no markers will bo placed behind its 
 centre. 
 
 Remarks on the advance in line of hatlle. 
 
 616. If, in the exercise of detail, or courses of element- 
 ary instruction, the officers, sergeants, corporals, and men, 
 have not been well confirmed in the principles of the posi- 
 tion under arms, as well as in the length and cadence of 
 the step, the march of the battalion in line will be floating, 
 unsteady and disunited. 
 
 617. If the color-bearer, instead of marching perpendic- 
 ularly forward, pursue an oblique direction, the battalion 
 will slant; crowdings in one wing, and openings in the 
 other, will follow, and these defects in the march, becom- 
 ing more and more embarrassing in proportion to the <le- 
 viation from the perpendicular, will commence near the 
 centre. 
 
 618. It is then of the greatest importance that the color- 
 bearer should direct himself perpendicularly forward, and 
 that the basis of alignment should always be perpendicu- 
 lar to the line pursued by him. 
 
 619. If openings be formed, if the files crowd each other, 
 if, in short, disorder ensue, the remedy ought to be applied 
 as promptly as possible, but calmly, with few words, and 
 as little noise as practicable. 
 
 620. The object of the general guides, in the march in 
 line of battle is, to indicate to the companies near the 
 flanks the step of the centre of the battalion, and to afford 
 more fsfcility in establishing the wings on the direction of 
 
140 SCHOOL or THK HATTALION — PART V. 
 
 the centre if they should be too inuch in the rear; hence 
 the necessity that these guides should maintain the same 
 step, and march abreast, or very nearly so, with the color- 
 rank, which it will be easy for them to do by casting from 
 time to time an eye on that rank. 
 
 621. If the battalion happen to lose the step, the colonel 
 will recall its attention by the command, ^^ the — Step; 
 captains and their companies will immediately cast an eye 
 on the color-rank, or one of the general guides, and 
 promptly conform themselves to the step. 
 
 622. Finally, it is of the utmost importance to the at- 
 tainment of regularity in the march in line of battle, to 
 habituate the battalion to execute with as much order as 
 promptness the movements prescribed, No. 607 and follow- 
 ing, for rectifying the direction; it is not less essential 
 that commanders of battalions sliould exercise themselves, 
 with the greatest care, in forming their own cuup d'opil, in 
 (jrdcr to be able to judge with precision the direction to be 
 'jriven to their baltulious. 
 
school of the battalion part v. 141 
 
 Article Second. 
 Oblique march in line of battle. 
 
 623. The battalion marching in line of battle, when the 
 oolouel shall wish to cause it to oblique, he will command : 
 
 1. Right (or left) oblique. 2. March (or double 
 quick — March) . 
 
 624. x\t the first command, the major will place himself 
 in front of, and faced to the color-bearer. 
 
 625. At the command vmrch, the whole battalion will 
 rake the oblique step. The companies and captains will 
 >>trietly t)bserVe the principles established in the school of 
 the company. 
 
 626. The major in front of the color-bearer ought to 
 maintain the latter in a line with the centre corporal, so 
 that the color-bearer may oblique neither more nor less 
 than that corporal. He will carefully observe also that 
 they follow parallel directions, and preserve the same 
 length of step. 
 
 627. The lieutenant-colonel will take care that the cap- 
 tains and the three corporals in the centre keep exactly on 
 a line and follow parallel directions. 
 
 62S. The colonel will see that the battalion preserves its 
 parallelism ; he will exert himself to prevent the files from 
 opening or crowding. If he perceive the latter fault, he 
 will cause the files on the flank, to which the battalion 
 obliques, to open out. 
 
1 42 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX PART V, 
 
 629. The colonel, Avisliing the direct imirch to be re- 
 sumed, -will command: 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 630. At the command march, the battalion will resume 
 the direct march. The major will place himself thirty 
 paces in front of the color-bearer, and face to the colonel, 
 who will establish him, by a signal of the sword, on the 
 <lirection which the color-bearer ought to pursue. The 
 latter will immediately take two points on the ground 
 between himself and the major. 
 
 631. In resuming the direct march, care will be taken 
 that the men do not close the intervals which may exist 
 between the files at once: it should be done almost insen- 
 sibly. 
 
 Remarks on the oblique march. 
 
 632. The object of the oblique step is to gain ground to 
 the right or left, preserving all the while the primitive 
 direction of the line of battle; and thus, for example : the 
 battalion, departing from the line {hz), arrives on the line 
 {.r.r) parallel to {hz). 
 
 633. It is then essential that the corporals in the centre 
 of the battalion, and the captains of companies should 
 follow parallel directions, and maintain themselves at the 
 same height; without which they will give a false direc- 
 tion to the battalion. 
 
 634. The colonel and lieutenant-colonel will exert them- 
 selves to prevent the files from crowding ; for, without 
 such precaution, the oblique march cannot be executed 
 with facility. 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK JJAI'JALION I'AKT V. 14o 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 To halt the battalion^ marching in line of battle^ and 
 to align it. 
 
 ()."]5. The battalion, marching in the line of battle, when 
 the colonel shall wish to halt it, he will command : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 
 
 636. At the second command, the battalion will halt ; 
 the color-rank and the general guides will remain in front; 
 but if the colonel should not wish immediately to resume 
 the advance in line, nor to give a general alignment, he 
 will command : 
 
 Color and general guides — Posts. 
 
 637. At this command, the color-rank and general 
 guides will retake their places in line of battle, the 
 captains in the left wing will shift to the right of their 
 companies. 
 
 638. If the colonel should then judge it necessary to 
 rectify the alignment, he will command : 
 
 Captains., rectify the alignment. 
 
 639. The captains will immediately cast an eye toward 
 the centre, align themselves accurately, on the basis of 
 the alignment, which the lieutenant-colonel will see well 
 directed, and then promptly dress their respective com- 
 
144 pCIIOOL ok TIIK HATTALION — PART V. 
 
 ]ianic's. Tlic licutcnant-eoloucl will admoniMli sucb cap- 
 tains as may not be accurately on the alignment by the 
 command: Captain of (such) cnmpnny, or cnjjtuius oj 
 (such) companicH, move up or fall back. 
 
 640. But when the colonel shall wish to give the battal- 
 ion a general alignment, cither parallel or oblique, iisstea'l 
 of rectifying it as above, he will move some paces outside 
 of one of the general guides (the right will here be sup- 
 posed) and caution the right general guide and the color- 
 l)earer to face him, and then establish them by signal of 
 the sword, on the direction which he may wish to give to 
 the battalion. As soon as they shall bo correctly estab- 
 lished, the left general guide will place himself on their 
 ilirectiou, and be assured in his position by the major. 
 The color-bearer will carry the color-lance perpendicularly 
 between his eyes, and the two corporals of his rank will 
 return to their places in tlie front rank the moment lie 
 .-hall face to the colonel. 
 
 (ill. This disposition being made, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Guides — O.v Tin-: Link. 
 
 012. AL this command, the right guide of each company 
 in ihe right wing, an<l the left guide of each company in 
 the left, will each place himself on the direction of the 
 color-bearer and the two general guides, face to the color- | 
 bearer, place himself in rear of the guide who is next 
 before him at a distance equal to the front of his com- 
 pany, and align himself upon the color-bearer and the 
 general guide beyond. 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PART V. 145 
 
 ()Kj. The captains in the right wing will .shift to the left 
 of their companies, except the captain of the color-com- 
 pany, who will remain on its right, but step into the rear 
 rank ; the captains in the left wing will shift to the right 
 of their companies. 
 
 (544. The lieutenant-colonel will promptly rectify, if ne- 
 cessary, the positions of the guides of the right wing, and 
 the major those of the other; which being executed, the 
 colonel will command : 
 
 2. On the centre — Dress. 
 
 1)45. At this command, the companies will move up in 
 quick time against the guides, where, having arrived, each 
 captain will align his company according to prescribed 
 principles, the lieutenant-colonel aligning the color-com- 
 pany. 
 
 646. If the alignment be oblique, the captains will take 
 care to conform their companies to it in conducting them 
 toward the line. 
 
 647. The battalion being aligned, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 3. Color and guides — Posts. 
 
 6-18- At this command, the color-bearer, the general and 
 company guides, and the captains in the right wing, will 
 take their places in the line of battle, and the color-bearer 
 will replace the heel of the color-lance against the rigist 
 hip. 
 
 6i9. If the new direction of the line of battle bo such 
 that one or more companies find themselves in advance 
 
146 SCHOOL OF TUK I5ATTALION — PAUT V. 
 
 of that line, the colonel, before estiiblishinir the geueviil 
 •guides on the line, will cause such companies to be moved 
 to the rear, either by the back step, or by first facing about, 
 according as there may be less or more ground to be re- 
 passed to bring the companies in rear of the new direction. 
 G50. When the colonel shall wish to give a general 
 alignment, and the color and general guides nrc not on 
 the line, he will cause them to move out by the command : 
 
 1. Color and general guides — On the Line. 
 
 651. At this command, the color-bearer and the general 
 guides will place themselves on the line, conforming t" 
 what is prescribed, No. 040. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 Change of direction in marching in line of battle. 
 
 652. The battalion marching in line of battle, when the 
 colonel shall wish it to change direction to the right, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. Change direction to the right. 2. March (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 653. At the command march, the movement will com- 
 mence; the color-rank will shorten the step to fourteen or 
 seventeen inches, and direct itself circularly to the right, 
 taking care to advance the left shoulder, but only insensi- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART Y. 14 7 
 
 bly : the major will place himself before the color-hearer, 
 acing him, and so direct his march that he may describe 
 n arc of a circle neither too large nor too small ; be will 
 Iso see that the color-bearer takes steps of fourteen or 
 leventeen inches, according to the gait, 
 
 654. The right general guide will wheel on the right 
 aptain of the battalion as his pivot ; the left general 
 uide will circularly march in the step of twenty-ei^t 
 
 inches or thirty-three inches, according to the gait, and 
 11 align himself upon the color-bearer and the right 
 neral guide. 
 
 655. The corporal placed in the centre of the battalion 
 will take steps of fourteen or seventeen inches, and will 
 ■wheel to the right by advancing insensibly the left shoul- 
 der : the battalion will conform itself to the movement of 
 the centre ; to this end, the captain of the color-company, 
 and the captain of the next to the left, will attentively 
 regulate their march, as well as the direction of their 
 shoulders, on the three centre corporals. All the other 
 captains will regulate the direction of their shouldei's and 
 the length of their step on this basis. 
 
 656. The men will redouble their attention in order not 
 to pass the line of captains. 
 
 657. In the left wing, the pace will be lengthened in 
 proportion as the file is distant from the centre ; the 
 captain of the eighth, company who closes the left flank 
 of the battalion, will take steps of twenty-eight or thirty- 
 
 hree inches, according to the gait. 
 
 658. In the right wing the pace will be shortened in 
 )roportion as the file is distant from the centre ; the 
 japtain who closes the right flank will only slowly turn 
 
 11-13 
 
■ '1 
 
 148 SCHOOL OF THK BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 ia his person, observing to yield ground a little if 
 pushed. 
 
 6;>9. The colonel will take great caro to prevent the 
 conti-c of the battalion from describing an arc of a 
 circle, cither too great or too small, in order that the 
 wings may conform themselves to its movement. He 
 will see also that the captains keep their companies con- 
 stantly aligned upon the centre, so that there may be 
 no opening and no crowding of files. lie will endeavor 
 to prevent faults, and, should they occur, correct them 
 without noise. 
 
 660. The lieutenant-colonel, placed before the battalion, 
 will give his attention to the same objects. 
 
 661. When the colonel shall wish the direct march to 
 be resumed, he will command : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 662. At the command march, the color-rank, the gen- 
 eral guides, and the battalion will resume the direeti 
 march ; the major will immediately place himself thirt)i 
 or forty paces in front, face to the colonel, placed in rear; 
 of the centre, who will establish him by signal of the 
 sword on the perpendicular direction which the corpora^ 
 in the centre of the battalion ought to pursue; the majof 
 will immediately cause the color-bearer, if necessary, to 
 incline to the right or left, so as to be exactly opposite 
 to his file ; the color-bearer will then take two points on 
 the ground between himself and the major. 
 
 663. The lieutenant-colonel will endeavor to give to 
 
 P( 
 ta 
 
SCHOOL OF THE UATTALION PART V. 149 
 
 [the color-company and the next on the left a direction 
 perpendicular to that pursued by the centre corporal ; 
 and all the other companies, without precipitancy, will 
 [conform themselves to that basis. 
 
 / 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 
 To march in retreat.^ in line of battle. 
 
 664. The battalion being halted, if it be the wish of 
 the colonel to cause it to march in retreat, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 . 1. Face to the rear. 2. Battalion, about — Face. 
 
 665. At the second command, the battalion will face 
 about; the color-rank and the general guides, if in ad- 
 vance, will take their places in line ; the color-bearer will 
 pass into the rear rank, now leading; the corporal of his 
 file will step behind the corporal next on his own right, to 
 let the color-bearer pass, and then step into the front 
 rank, now rear, to re-form the color-file ; the colonel will 
 place himself behind the front rank, become the rear ; 
 the lieutenant-colonel and major will place themselves 
 before the rear rank, now leading. 
 
 666. The colonel will take post forty paces behind the 
 color-file, in order to assure the lieutenant-colonel on the 
 perpendicular, who will place himself at a like dis- 
 tance in front, as prescribed for the advance in line of 
 battle. 
 
150 SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 607. If the battalion be the one charged with the di- 
 rection, the colonel will establish markers in the manner 
 indicated, No. 589, except that they will face to the bat- 
 talion, and that the first will be placed twenty-five paces 
 from the lieutenant-colonel. If the markers be already 
 established, the oflBccr charged with replacing them in 
 succession will cause them to face about, the moment 
 that the battalion executes this movement, and then the 
 marker nearest to the battalion will hasten to the rear ot 
 the two others". 
 
 668. These dispositions being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 3. Battalion, forward. 
 
 669. At this command, the color-bearer will advance 
 six paces beyond the rank of file closers, accompanied 
 by the two corporals of his guard of that rank, the centre 
 corporal stepping back to let the color-bearer pass; the 
 two file closers nearest this centre corporal will unite 
 on him behind the color-guard to serve as a basis of 
 alignment for the line of file closers; the two general 
 guides will place themselves abreast with the color rank| 
 the covering sergeants will place themselves in the line 
 of file closers, and the captains in the rear rank, now 
 leading: the captains in the left wing, now right, will, 
 if not already there, shift to the left of their companiea,| 
 now become the right. 
 
 670. The colonel will then command : 
 
 4. March (or double quick — March). 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART Y. 151 
 
 671. The battalion will march in retreat on the same 
 principles which govern the advance in line : the centre 
 corporal behind the color-bearer will march exactly in his 
 trace. 
 
 672. If it be the directing battalion, the color-bearer 
 will direct himself on the markers, who will, of their own 
 accord, each place himself in succession behind the mark- 
 er most distant, on being approached hj the battalion ; 
 the officer charged with the superintendence of the mark- 
 ers will carefully assure them on the direction. 
 
 673. In the case of a subordinate battalion, the color- 
 bearer will maintain himself on the perpendicular by 
 means of points taken on the ground. 
 
 674. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major will each 
 discharge the same functions as in the advance in line. 
 
 675. The lieutenant-colonel, placed on the outside of the 
 file closers of the color-company, will also maintain the 
 three file closers of the basis of alignment in a square 
 with the line of direction : the other file closers Avill keep 
 themselves aligned on this basis. 
 
 Article Sixth. 
 
 To halt the battalion marching in retreat^ and to face 
 it to the front. 
 
 676. The colonel having halted the battalion, and wish- 
 ing to face it to the front, will command : 
 
 1. Face to the front. 2. Battalion, about — Face. 
 
152 SCHOOL OF THK BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 G77. At the second comman<l, the color-rank, general 
 guides, captains, and covering sergeants, will all retake 
 their habitual places in line of battle, and the color-bearer 
 will repass into the front rank. 
 
 678. The battalion uaarching in lino of battle by the 
 front rank, when the colonel shall wish to march it in 
 retreat, he will command : 
 
 1. Battalion, right about. 2. Makch. 
 
 679. At the command march, the battalion will face to 
 the rear and move off at the same gait by the rear rank. 
 The principles prescribed. No. 669 and following will bo 
 carefully observed. 
 
 680. If the colonel should wish the battalion to march 
 again by the front, he will give the same commands. 
 
 Article Skvkntii. 
 
 Change, of direction, in marching in retreat. 
 
 681. A battalion retiring in line will change direction by 
 the commands and moans indicated. No. ()b2 aiul follow- 
 ing; the three file closers, united behind the color-rank, 
 will conform themselves to the movement of this rank, 
 and wheel like it; the centre file closer of the three will 
 take steps of fourteen or seventeen inches, according to 
 the gait, and keep himself steadily at the same distance 
 
to 
 a- 
 at 
 he 
 It 
 ird 
 
 my 
 id: 
 mn. 
 the 
 
 5 to 
 dis- 
 ide, 
 luct 
 elly 
 iself 
 
'PI ^f'^. 
 
 n 
 
 V 
 
 p. . -^ol 
 
 -A 
 
 -y/ 
 
 Ky 
 
 u-ii j 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 153 
 
 from the color-bearer ; the line of file closers will conform 
 themselves to the movement of its centre, and the lieuten- 
 aut-colonel will maintain it on that basis. 
 
 Article Eighth. 
 
 Passage of obstacles, advancing and retreating. 
 
 682. The battalion advancing in line will be supposed to 
 encounter an obstacle which covers one or more compa- 
 nies ; the colonel will cause them to ploy into column at 
 full distance, in rear of the next company toward the 
 color, which will be executed in the following manner. It 
 will be supposed that the obstacle only covers the third 
 company, the colonel will command : 
 
 Third company, obstacle. 
 
 683. At this command, the captain of the third company 
 will place himself in its front, turn to it, and command : 
 
 1. Third company, by the left fanh, to the rear into column. 
 
 2. Doable quick. ?>. March. He will then hasten to the 
 left of his company. 
 
 684. At the command march, the company will face to 
 the left in marching; the two left files will promptly dis- 
 engage to the rear in double quick time ; the left guide, 
 placing himself at the head of the front rank, will conduct 
 it behind the fourth company, directing himself parallelly 
 with this company; the captain of the third will himself 
 halt opposite to the captain of the fourth, and see his com- 
 
154 SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — rAUT V. 
 
 pany file past: when its right file shall bo nearly up with 
 bim, he will command: 1. Third company. 2. By the 
 right Jlaulc. 3. Maucii. 4. Guide rirjht, and place him- 
 self before the centre of his company. 
 
 685. At the command march, the company will face to 
 the right, preserving the same gait, but the moment it 
 shall be at the prescribed distance, its captain will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. March. 
 
 686. This company will thus follow in column that be- 
 hind which it finds itself, and at wheeling distance, its 
 right guide marching exactly in the trace of the captain 
 of that company. 
 
 687. As soon as the third company shall have faced to 
 the left, the left guide of the second will place himself on 
 the left of the front rank of his company, and maintain 
 between himself and the right of the fourth the sjuxce ne- 
 cessary for the return into line of the third. 
 
 688. The obstacle being passed, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Third company^ fonoard into line. 
 
 689. At this command, the captain turning to bis com- 
 pany, will add : 
 
 1. By company^ right half icheel. 2. Double quick. 
 3. March. 
 
 690. At the command march, the company will take the 
 
155 
 
 ptain 
 hiide 
 coin- 
 
 irect 
 i re- 
 pre- 
 
 sev- 
 i the 
 
 lefi 
 ck— 
 
 esig- 
 .boit 
 
 i4ke 
 
 bead 
 the 
 
 ink ; 
 
 aself 
 to wh„. ._ r- viiocu, i^u. U04 una loiiowing ; the cap- 
 tains of the other companies will conduct them by the 
 flank in rear of the third, inclining toward the head of 
 the column ; and, as the head of each company arrives 
 
f 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 f:l I 
 
 /7 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 155 
 
 double quick step, and execute a half wheel : its captain 
 will then command : 1. Foncard. 2. March. 3. Guide 
 left. The second command will be given when the com- 
 pany shall have sufficiently wheeled. 
 
 691. At the command march, the company will direct 
 itself straight forward toward the line of battle, and re- 
 take its position in it according to the principles pre- 
 scribed for the formation forward into line of battle. 
 
 692. It will be supposed that the obstacle covers sev- 
 eral contiguous companies (the three companies on the 
 right for example), the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Three right companies ^ obstacle. 2. By the left 
 Jlank, to the rear, into column. 3. Double quick — 
 March. 
 
 693. At the first command, the captains of the desig- 
 nated companies will each place himself before the centr/9 
 of his company, and caution it as to the movement about 
 to be executed. 
 
 694. At the command march, the designated companies 
 will face to the left in marching, and immediately t^ke 
 the double quick step ; each captain will' cause the head 
 of his company to disengage itself to the rear, and the 
 left guide will place himself at the head of the front rank ; 
 the captain of the third company will conform himself 
 to what is prescribed. No. 684 and following ; the cap- 
 tains of the other companies will conduct them by the 
 flank in rear of the third, inclining toward the head of 
 the column ; and, as the head of each company arrives 
 
15G SCHOOL OF THE IJATTALIOX — I'ART V. 
 
 opposite to the right of t])e one next before it in column, 
 its captain will himself halt, see his company file past, 
 and conform himself for facing it to the front, in march- 
 ing, to what is prescribed, No. 684 and following. 
 
 695. When the last company in column shall have 
 passed the obstacle, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Three right companies^ forward, into line. 
 
 696. At this command, the captain of each of these 
 three companies will command, Jii/ compamj, right half 
 tcheel. The colonel will then add : 
 
 1. Double quick. 2. March. 
 
 697. At this, briskly repeated by the captains of the 
 three companies, each company will conform itself to what 
 is prescribed. No. 690 and following. 
 
 698. It is supposed, in the foregoing examples, that the 
 companies belonged to the right wing ; if they make part 
 of the other, they will execute the passage of an ob- 
 stacle according to the same yirinciples and by inverse 
 means. 
 
 699. When flank companies arc broken off to pass an 
 obstacle, the general guide on that flank will place him- 
 self six paces in front of the outer file of the nearest 
 company to him remaining in line. 
 
 700. l»i the preceding movements, it has been supposed 
 that the battalion was marching in quick time, but if it 
 
SCHOOL OF THK BATTALIOX — PART V. 157 
 
 be inarching in double quick time, and the colonc4 shall 
 wish to cause several contiguous companies to break to 
 the rear, he will first order the battalion to march in 
 quick time ; the companies will break as indicated, No. 
 692. 
 
 701. When the movement is completed, the colonel will 
 order the double quick step to be resumed. He will also 
 cause the battalion to march in quick time when he shall 
 wish to bring into line the several companies which are 
 to the rear in column ; the movement will be executed as 
 previously indicated; and when the last company shall 
 have nearly completed its movement, the colonel will 
 cause the double quick step to be resumed. 
 
 702. In the movement of a single company, or of sev- 
 eral companies not contiguous to each other, the battal- 
 ion will continue to march in double quick time, but in 
 these cases the companies which are to ploy into column, 
 or re-enter the line, will increase the gait. 
 
 703. In the march in retreat, these several movements 
 will be executed on the same principles as if the battalion 
 marched by the front rank. 
 
 704. When a battalion, advancing in line of battle, 
 shall be obliged to execute the right about in order to 
 retreat, if there be companies in column, behind the rear 
 rank, these companies will also execute the right about, 
 put themselves in march, at the same time with the bat- 
 talion, and will thus precede it in the retreat : they will 
 afterward successively put themselves into line by the 
 oblique step, as the ground may permit. 
 
 705. If the battalion be marching in retreat in double 
 quick time, and many contiguous companies be marching 
 
158 SCIIOOr, OF TTIK BATTALIOX — PART V. 
 
 before the rear rank of the battalion, the colonel will not 
 change the _<rait of the battalion in causing them to re- 
 enter into line. 
 
 706. When the color-company shall be obliged to exe- 
 cute the movement of passing an obstacle, the color-rank 
 will return into line at the moment the company shall 
 face to the left or right; the major will place himself six 
 paces before the extremity of the company behind which 
 the color-company marches in column, in order to give 
 the step and the direction; he, himself, first taking the 
 step from the battalion. 
 
 707. As soon as the color-company shall have returned 
 into line, the front rank of the color-guard will again 
 move out six paces in front of the battalion, and take 
 the step from the major; the latter will immediately 
 place himself twenty or thirty paces in front of the 
 color-bearer, and face to the colonel placed behind the 
 centre of the battalion, who will establish him on the 
 perpendicular; and, as soon as he shall be assured on it, 
 the color-bearer will instantly take two points on the 
 ground between himself and the major. 
 
 708. It is prescribed, as a general rule, that the com- 
 panies of the right wing ought to execute the movement 
 of passing obstacles by the left flank, and the reverse for 
 the companies of the other wing ; but if the obstacle 
 cover at once several companies of the centre, each will 
 file into column behind that, still in line, and of the same 
 wing, which may be the nearest to it. 
 
1 
 
 n 
 
 p 
 
 i 
 
 - 
 
 ^' 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 |:: 
 
J^CHOOL OF TIIF. HATTALIOX — PART V. 159 
 
 Article Ninth. 
 
 To pass a dejile, in retreat, hy the right or left 
 flank. 
 
 709. When a battalion, retiring in line, shall encounter 
 a defile which it must pass, the colonel will halt the battal- 
 ion, and face it to the fi-ont. 
 
 710. It will be supposed that the defile is in rear of the 
 left flank, and that its width is sufiBcient to give passage 
 to a column by platoon ; the colonel will place a marker 
 fifteen or twenty paces in rear of the file closers at the 
 point around which the subdivisions will have to change 
 direction in order to enter the defile; he will then com- 
 mand : 
 
 To the rear, hy the right flank, pass the defile. 
 
 711. The captain of the first company will immediately 
 command : 
 
 1. First company, right — Face. 2. March (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 712. At the command march, the first company will 
 commence the movement ; the first file will wheel to the 
 
 11-14 
 
160 SCHOOL OF THK IJATTALIOX — PAUT V. 
 
 right, march to the rear till it shall have passed four pacp.> 
 beyond the lile closer^, wheu it will wheel again to the 
 right, and then direct itself straight forward toward the 
 left flank. All the other files of this company will come 
 to wheel in succession at the same place where the first 
 had wheeled. 
 
 713. The second company will execute, in its turn, the 
 same movement, by the commands of its captain, who will 
 give the command March, so that the first file of his com- 
 pany may immediately follow the last of the first, without 
 constraint, however, as to taking the step of the first ; the 
 first file of the second company will wheel to the right, on 
 its ground ; all the other tiles of this company will come 
 in succession to wheel at the same place. The following 
 companies will execute, each in its turn, what has just 
 been prescribed for the second. 
 
 714. When the whole of the second company shall be on 
 the same direction with the first, the captain of the first 
 will cause it to form, by platoon into line, and the moment 
 that it is in column, the guide of the first platoon will 
 direct himself on the marker around whom he has to 
 change direction in order to enter the defile. 
 
 715. The second company will continue to march by the 
 flank, directing itself parallelly with the line of battle ; 
 and it, in its turn, will form by platoon into line, when the 
 third company shall be wholly on the same direction with 
 itself. 
 
 716. The following companies will successively execute 
 what has just been prescribed for the second, and each 
 will form by platoon into line, when the next company 
 shall be on the same direction with itself. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 161 
 
 717. The first platoon of the leading company having 
 arrived opposite to the marker placed at the entrance of 
 the defile, will turn to the left, and the following platoons 
 will all execute this movement at the same point. As the 
 last companies will not be able to form platoons before 
 reaching the defile, they will so direct themselves, in enter- 
 ing it, as to leave room to the left for this movement. 
 
 718. The battalion Avill thus pass the defile by platoon ; 
 and, as the two platoons of each company shall clear it, 
 companies will be successively formed by the means indi- 
 cated, school of the company. No. 273 and following, 
 
 719. The head of the column having cleared the defile, 
 and having reached the distance at which the colonel 
 wishes to re-form line faced to the defile, he may cause 
 the leading company to turn to the left, to prolong the 
 column in that direction, and then form it to the left into 
 line of battle; or he may halt the column, and form it into 
 line of battle faced to the rear. 
 
 720. If the defile be in the rear of the right flank, it will 
 be passed by the left; the movement will be executed 
 according to the same principles, and by inverse means. 
 
 721. If the defile be too narrow to receive the front of 
 a platoon, it will be passed by the flank. Captains and 
 file closers will be watchful that the files do not lf)se their 
 distances in marching. Companies or platoons will be 
 formed into line as the width of the defile may permit, or 
 as the companies shall successively clear it. 
 
162 school of the battalion — pakt v. 
 
 Article Tenth. 
 
 To march by the fiank. 
 
 722. The colouel, wishing the battalion to march by the 
 flank, will command : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Right for hft)—F\cv.. 3. For- 
 ward. 4. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 723. At the second command, the captains and covering 
 sergeants will place themselves as prescribed, Nos. 1.36 
 and 141, school of the company. 
 
 724. The sergeant on the left of the battalion will place 
 himself to the left and b}' the side of the last file of his 
 company, covering the captains in file. 
 
 725. The battalion having to face by the left flank, the 
 captains, at the second command, will shift rajiidly to the 
 left of their companies, and each place himself by the side 
 of the covering sergeant of the company preceding his 
 own, except the captain of the left company, who will 
 place himself by the side of the sergeant on the left of the 
 battalion. The covering sergeant of the right company 
 will place himself by the right side of the front rank man 
 of the rearmost file of his company, covering the captains 
 in file. 
 
 726. At the command march, the battalion will step off" 
 with life ; the sergeant, placed before the leading file 
 
/^,e 
 
 I'.ss 
 
 L. I I U 
 1. -i I \ ' I 
 
 Lj_lx. i 
 nrrn 
 
 I I I i I 
 
 1 1 I"1"l 
 
 
 1 'TT' 1 i 
 
 
 1 I .■^ r--i- 
 
 
 L.I. i-r 1 
 
 Li4J 1 
 
 
 i-i.J_U 
 
 !-L 1 . 1 1 
 
 i^i^.n 
 
 LJ_! 1 I 
 
 I.I 1 1 ' I 
 
 
 Mill 
 
 
 n 1 'in 
 
 r M 1 1 
 
 
 Mill 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 163 
 
 (right or left in front), will be careful to preserve exactly 
 the length and cadence of the step, and to direct himself 
 straight forward j to this end, he will take points on the 
 ground. 
 
 727. "Whether the battalion march by the right or left 
 flank, the lieutenant-colonel will place himself abreast 
 with the leading file, and the major abreast with the color- 
 file, both on the side of the front rank, and about six 
 paces from it. 
 
 728. The adjutant, placed between the lieutenant-colonel 
 and the front rank, will march in the same step with the 
 head of the battalion, and the sergeant-major, placed 
 between the major and the color-bearer, will march in 
 the same step with the adjutant. 
 
 729. The captains and file closers will carefully see that 
 the files neither open out nor close too much, and that 
 they regain, insensibly, their distances, if lost. 
 
 730. The colonel wishing the battalion to wheel by file, 
 will command : 
 
 1. By file right (or left). 2. March. 
 
 731. The files will wheel in succession, and all at the 
 place where the first had wheeled, in conforming to the 
 principles prescribed in the school of the company. 
 
 732. The battalion marching by the flank, when the 
 colonel shall wish it to halt, he will command : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
164 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 733. These commands will be executed as prescribed in 
 the school of the company, No. 14 G. 
 
 734. If the battalion be marching by the flank and the 
 colonel should wish to cause it to march in line, either 
 to the front or to the rear, the movements will be exe- 
 cuted by the commands and means prescribed in the 
 school of the company. 
 
 Article Eleventh. 
 
 To form the battalion on the right or left, hy file, into 
 line of battle. 
 
 735. The battalion marching by the right flank, when 
 the colonel shall wish to form it on the right by file, 
 he will determine the line of battle, and the lieutenant- 
 colonel will place two markers on that line, in conformity 
 with what is prescribed. No. 415. 
 
 736. The head of the battalion being nearly up with the 
 first marker, the colonel will command : 
 
 1, On the right, by fie, into line. 2. March (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 737. At the command march, the leading company will 
 form itself on the right, by file, into line of battle, as 
 indicated in the school of the company. No. 149 ; the 
 front rank man of the first file will rest his breast lightly 
 against the right arm of the first marker; the other 
 companies will follow the movement of the leading com- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 165 
 
 pany ; each captain will place himself on the line at the 
 same time with the front rank man of his first file, and on 
 the right of this man. 
 
 738. The left guide of each company, except the lead- 
 ing one, will place himself on the direction of the mark- 
 ers, and opposite to the left file of his company, at the 
 instant that the front rank man of this file arrives on the 
 line. 
 
 739. The formation being ended, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 740. The colonel will superintend the successive forma- 
 tion of the battalion, moving along the front of the line of 
 battle. 
 
 741. The lieutenant-colonel will, in succession, assure 
 the direction of the guides, and see that the men of the 
 front rank, in placing themselves on the line, do not 
 pass it. 
 
 742. If the battalion march by the left flank, the move- 
 ment will be executed according to the same principles 
 and by inverse means. 
 
 Article Twelfth. 
 
 Changes of front. 
 
 Chanye of front perpendicularly forward. 
 
 743. The battalion being in line of battle, it is supposed 
 to be the wish of the colonel to cause a change of front 
 
16^ SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX — PART V. 
 
 forward on the right compauy, and that the angle formed 
 by the old and new positions be a right angle, or a few 
 degrees more or less than one ; he will cause two markers 
 to be placed on the new direction, before the position 
 to .be occupied by that company, and order its captain 
 to establish it against the markers. 
 
 744. The captain of the right company will immedi- 
 ately direct it upon the markers by a wheel to the right 
 on the fixed pivot: and after having halted it, he will 
 align it by the right. 
 
 745. These dispositions being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Change front forward on firat company. 2. Bij 
 company^ right half icheel. 3. March (or double 
 quick — March). 
 
 746. At the second command, each captain will place 
 himself before the centre of his company. 
 
 747. At the third, each company will wheel to the 
 right on the ti.\ed pivot; the left guide of each will 
 place himself on its left as soon as he shall bo able to 
 pass; and when the colonel shall judge that the com- 
 panies have sufficiently wheeled, he will command : 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 
 
 748. At the fifth command, the companies ceasing to 
 wheel will march straight forward; at the sixth, the 
 
 men will touch elbows toward the right. 
 
-H 
 
 re 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
' 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 167 
 
 749. The right guide of the second company will march 
 straight forward until this company shall arrive at the 
 point where it should turn to the right; each succeeding 
 right guide will follow the file immediately before him at 
 the cessation of the wheel, and will march in the trace of 
 this file until this company shall turn to the right to 
 move upon the line : this guide will then march straight 
 forward. 
 
 750. The second company having arrived opposite to 
 the left file of the first, its captain will cause it to turn to 
 the right; the right guide will direct himself so as to 
 arrive squarely upon the line of battle, and when he shall 
 be at three paces from that line, the captain will command: 
 
 1. Second company. 2, Halt. 
 
 751. At the second command, the company will halt; the 
 files not yet in line with the guide will come into it prompt- 
 ly, the left guide will place himself on the line of battle, 
 and as soon as he is assured in the direction by the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel, the captain will align the company by the 
 right. 
 
 752. Jlach following company will conform to what has 
 just been prescribed for the second. 
 
 753. The formation ended, the colonel will command : 
 
 G u ides — Po s t s . 
 
 754. If the battalion t^e in march, and the colonel shall 
 wish to change front forward on the first company, and 
 that the angle formed by the old and new positions be a 
 
1G8 SCHOOL OF THK HATTALION — I'AUT V. 
 
 right angle, he will cause two markers to be placed on the 
 new direction, before the position to be occupied by that 
 company, and will command : 
 
 1. Cuange front forward on. first company. 2. By 
 company., right half wheel. 3. March (or double 
 quick — March). 
 
 755. At the first command, the captains will move rapid- 
 ly before the centre of their respective companies ; the 
 captain of the first company will command: 1. Right 
 tarn. 2. Quick time ; the captains of the other companies 
 will caution them to wheel to the right. 
 
 756. At the command march, the first company will turn 
 to the right according to the principles prescribed in the 
 school of the soldier, No. 402 ; its captain will halt it at 
 three paces from the markers, and the files in rear will 
 promptly come into line. The captain will align the com- 
 pany by the right. 
 
 757. Each of the other companies will wheel to the right 
 on a fixed pivot; the left guides will place themselves on 
 the left of their respective companies, and when the col- 
 onel shall judge they have wheeled sufTu-icntly, he will 
 command : 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. G. Guide right. 
 
 758. These commands will be executed as indicated, No. 
 746 and following. 
 
 759. The colonel will cause the battalion to change front 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 169 
 
 forward on the eighth company, according to the same 
 principles and by inverse means. 
 
 Change of front perpeiidir.ularly to the rear. 
 
 760. The colonel wishing to change front to the rear on 
 the right company, will impart his purpose to the captain 
 of this company. The latter will immediately face his 
 company about, wheel it to the left on the fixed pivot, and 
 halt it when it shall be in the direction indicated to him by 
 the colonel : the captain will then face his company to the 
 front, and align it by the right against the two markers, 
 whom the colonel will cause to be established before the 
 right and left files. 
 
 761. These dispositions being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Change front to the rear^ on Jirst company. 2. 
 Battalion^ about — Face. 3. By company^ left half 
 wheel. 4. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 762. At the second command, all the companies, except 
 the right, will face about. 
 
 763. At the third, the captains, whose companies have 
 faced about, will each place himself behind the centre of 
 his company, two paces from the front rank, now the rear. 
 
 764. At the fourth, these companies will wheel to the 
 left on the fixed pivot by the rear rank ; the left guide of 
 each will, as soon as he is able to pass, place himself on 
 the left of the rear rank of his company, now become the 
 
170 SCHOOL OF TTTE RATTALIOX — PART V. 
 
 right; and wlien tho colonel phall judije t.liat the compa- 
 nies have sufficiently whccleti, he will command : 
 
 5. Forward. 6. March. 7. Guifle left. 
 
 765. At the sixth command, the companies will cease to 
 wheel, march straight forward toward the new line of hat- 
 tie, and, at the seventh, take the touch of the elhow to- 
 ward the left. 
 
 766. The guide of each company' on its right flank, 
 become left, will conform himself to the principles pre- 
 scribed, No. 748. 
 
 767. The second company from the right having arrived 
 opposite to the left of the first, will turn to the left ; the 
 guide will so direct himself as to arrive parallelly with the 
 line of battle, cross that line, and when the front rank, 
 now in the rear, shall be three paces beyond it, the captain 
 will conlmand : 1. Second cotiipaiii/. 2. Halt. 
 
 768. At the second command, the company will halt ; 
 the files which may^ not yet he in lino with the guide will 
 promptly come into it; the captain will cause the company 
 to face about, and then align it by the right. 
 
 769. All the other companies will execute what has just 
 been prescribed for the second, each as it successively 
 arrives opposite to the left of the company that precedes 
 it on the new line of battle. 
 
 770. Tho formation being ended, the colonel will com- 
 mand: 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PART V. 171 
 
 771. The colonel will cause a change of front on the left 
 company of the battalion to the rear, according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 772. In changes of front, the colonel will give a general 
 superintendence to the movement. 
 
 773. The lieutenant-colonel will assure the direction of 
 the guides as they successively move out on the line of 
 battle, conforming himself to what has been prescribed in 
 the successive formations. 
 
 Remarks on changes of front. 
 
 774. "When the new direction is perpendicular, or nearly 
 so, to that of the battalion, the companies ought to make 
 about a half wheel (the eighth of the circle) before march- 
 ing straight forward; but when those two lines are oblique 
 to each other, the smaller the angle which they form the 
 less ought the companies to wheel. It is for the colonel to 
 judge, according to the angle, the precise time when he 
 ought to give the command march, after the caution for- 
 tcard, and if he cannot catch the exact moment, the word 
 of execution should rather be given a little too soon than 
 an instant too late. 
 
 775. When the old and the new lines form an angle of 
 forty-five or fewer degrees, the colonel will find it necessa- 
 ry to arrest the wheel of the companies when the marching 
 flanks shall have taken but a few paces, or, it may be, 
 have but disengaged, respectively, from the fixed pivots 
 of the next companies ; and in all such cases, the compa- 
 nies will arrive so nearly parallel to the new line, as to be 
 
 11-15 
 
172 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 able to align themselves upon it without the intermediate 
 turn to the right or left: to execute the movement under 
 either circumstances supposed, the colonel will command : 
 
 Oblique change of front, forward (or to the rea?') on 
 (such company). 
 
 Article Thirteenth. 
 
 To ploy the battalion into column doubled on the 
 centre. 
 
 11Q>. This movement consists in ploying the correspond- 
 ing companies of the right and left wings into column at 
 company distance, or closed in mass, in rear of the two 
 centre companies, according to the principles prescribed, 
 Article Third. Part Second, of this school. 
 
 777. The colonel, wishing to form the double column at 
 company distance (the battalion being in line of battle), 
 will command : 
 
 1. Double column, at half distance. 2. Battalion, 
 inward — Face. 3. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 778. At the first command, the captains will place them- 
 selves two paces in front of their respective companies; 
 
rr'-h 
 
 
 :! 
 
 J^ 
 
 f^- 
 f^ 
 
 d 
 
m 
 
 CO 
 
 ce: 
 Ar 
 
 coi 
 vri] 
 
 iront of their respective companies; 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 173 
 
 the captains of the two centre companies will caution them 
 to stand fast, and the other captains will caution their 
 companies to face to the left and right, respectively. The 
 covering sergeants will step into the front rank. 
 
 779. At the second command, the fourth and fifth com- 
 panies will stand fast; the others of the right wing will 
 face to the left, and the others of the left wing face to the 
 right ; each captain whose compan}' has faced, will hasten 
 to break to the rear the two files at the head of his com- 
 pany; the left guide of each right company, and the right 
 guide of each left company will each place himself at the 
 head of its front rank, and the captain by the side of his 
 guide. 
 
 780. At the command mctrch, the fourth and fifth com- 
 panies, which are to form the first division, will stand fast; 
 the senior captain of the two will place himself before the 
 centre of the division, and command: guide right; the 
 junior captain will place himself in the interval between 
 the two companies, and the left guide of the left company 
 will place himself in the front rank on the left of the 
 division, as soon as he shall be able to pass. 
 
 781. All the other companies, conducted by their cap- 
 tains, will step off with life to arrange themselves in col- 
 umn at company distance, each company behind the pre- 
 ceding one in the column of the same wing, so that, in the 
 right wing, the third may be next behind the fourth, the 
 second next to the third, and so on to the right company ; 
 and, in the left wing, the sixth may be next behind the 
 fifth, the seventh next to the sixth, and so on to the left 
 company of the battalion. 
 
 782. The corresponding companies of the two wings will 
 
174 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 unite into divisions in arriingin-i^ themselves iu column ; 
 an instant before the union, at the centre of the column, 
 the left guides of right companies will pass into the line of 
 file closers, and each captain will command: 1. Such com- 
 pany. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 783. At the second command, which will be given at 
 the instant of union, each company will halt; at the third, 
 it will face to the front. The senior captain in each divi- 
 sion will place himself on its right, and command, Jiight — 
 Duicss, and the junior captain will place himself in the 
 interval between the two companies. The division being 
 aligned, its chief will command Front, aud take his posi- 
 tion two paces before its centre. 
 
 784. The column being thus formed, the divisions will 
 take the respective denominations of firxt, second, third, 
 etc., according to position in the column, beginning at the 
 front. 
 
 785. The lieutenant-colonel, who, at the second com- 
 mand given by the colonel, will have placed himself at a 
 little more than company distance in rear of the right 
 guide of the first division, will assure the right guides on 
 the direction as they successively arrive, b}' placing him- 
 self in their roar. 
 
 786. The music will pass to the rear of the column. 
 
 787. The battalion being in march, to form the double 
 column at company distance without halting the battalion, 
 the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Double column at half distance. 2. Battalion by 
 the right and left flanks. 3. March (or double 
 (juick — March). 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 175 
 
 788. At the first command, each captain will move 
 briskly in front of the centre of his company ; the cap- 
 tains of the fourth and fifth will caution their companies 
 to march straight forward; the other captains will caution 
 their companies to face to the right and left. 
 
 789. At the command march, the fourth and fifth com- 
 panies will continue to march straight forward; the senior 
 captain will place himself before the centre of his divi- 
 sion and command, </»)V/e right; the junior captain will 
 place himself in the interval between the two companies. 
 The left guide of the fifth company will place himself 
 on the left of the front rank of the division. The men 
 will take the touch of elbows to the right. The color and 
 general guides will retake their places. The three right 
 companies will face to the left, and the three left com- 
 panies will face to the right. Each captain will break 
 to the rear two files at the head of his company ; the 
 left guides of the right companies, and the right guides 
 of the left companies will each place himself at the 
 head of the front rank of his company, and the captain 
 by the side of his guide. 
 
 790. The third and sixth companies will enter the 
 column and direct themselves parallelly to the first di- 
 vision. Each of the other companies will, in like manner, 
 place itself behind the company of the wing to which it 
 belongs, and will be careful to gain as much ground as 
 possible toward the head of the column. 
 
 791. The corresponding companies of each wing will 
 unite into divisions on taking their positions in column, 
 and each captain, the instant the head of his company 
 
176 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 arrives at the centre of the column, will command, 1. 
 Such comjniuy by the right (or left) flank. 2. March. The 
 senior captain of the two companies will place himself in 
 front of the centre of his division, and command, yuide 
 n'tjhi ; the junior captain will place himself in the in- 
 terval between the two companies. The two companies 
 thus formed into a division will take the touch of el- 
 bows to the right, and when each division has gained 
 its proper distance, its chief will cause it to march in 
 quick time. 
 
 792. When the battalion presents an odd number of 
 companies, the formation will be made in like manner, 
 and the company on either flank which shall find itself 
 without a corresponding one, will place itself at company 
 distance behind the wing to which it belongs. 
 
 793. The double column, closed in mass, will be formed 
 according to the same principles and by the same com- 
 mands, substituting the indication, cloned in ?«««», for that 
 of at half distance. 
 
 794. The double column never being formed when two 
 or more battalions are to be in one general column, it 
 will habitually take the guide to the right, sometimes 
 to the left, or in the centre of the column ; in the last case, 
 the command will be, guide centre. The column will 
 march and change direction according to the principles 
 prescribed for a simple column by division. 
 
 795. The double column at company distance will be 
 closed in mass, or, if in mass, will take half distance, 
 by the commands and means indicated for a simple col- 
 umn by division. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 177 
 
 Deployment of the double column^ faced to the front. 
 
 796. The colonel, wishing to deploy the double column 
 will place a marker respectively before the right and 
 left files of the first division, and a third before the 
 left file of the right company, same division ; which 
 being done, he will cause the two general guides to 
 spring out on the alignment of the markers a little 
 beyond the points at which the respective flanks of the 
 battalion ought to i-est ; he will then command : 
 
 1. Deploy column. 2. Battalion, outivard — Face. 
 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 797. The column will deploy itself on the two com- 
 panies at its head, according to the principles prescribed 
 for the deployment of columns in mass. The captains 
 of these companies will each, at the command ntarch, 
 place himself on the right of his own company, and 
 align it by the right ; the captain of the fourth will then 
 place himself in the rear rank, and the covering sergeant 
 in the rank of file closers, at the moment the captain of 
 the third shall come to its left to align it. 
 
 798. The deployment being ended, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 799. If it be the wish of the colonel to cause the fire 
 to commence pending the deployment, he will give an 
 
1 78 SCHOOL OF THK BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 order to that effect to the captains of the fourth and fifth 
 companies, and the fire will be executed according to the 
 principles prescribed, No. 438. 
 
 800. The battalion being in double column and in 
 march, if the colonel shall wish to deploy it without 
 halting the column, he will cause three markers to be 
 posted on the line of battle, and when the head of the 
 column shall arrive near the markers, he will command : 
 
 1. Deploy column. 2. Batlalio7i, hy the right and 
 left Jlanks. 3. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 801. The column will deploy on the two leading com- 
 panies, according to the principles prescribed for the de- 
 ployment of a close column, No. 5o3 and following-; at 
 the command march, the chief of the first division will 
 halt it, and the captains of the fourth and fifth companies 
 will align their companies by the right. 
 
 802. If the column be in march, and it be the wish 
 of the colonel to deploy the column and to continue to 
 march in the order of battle, he will not cause markers 
 to be established at the head of the column. The move- 
 ment will be executed by the commands and means in- 
 dicated, No. 800, observing what follows. At the first 
 command, the chief of the first division will command, 
 quick time. At the command march, the first division 
 will continue to march in quick time ; the colonel will 
 command, guide centre. The captains of the fourth and 
 fifth companies, the color, and the men, will immediately 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 179 
 
 conform to the principles of the march in line of battle. 
 The companies will take the quick step by the command 
 of their captains, as they successively arrive in line. The 
 movement completed, the colonel may cause the battalion 
 to march in double quick time. 
 
 To form the double column into' line of battle^ faced 
 to the right or left. 
 
 803. The double column, being at company distance and 
 at a halt, may be formed into line of battle faced to the 
 right or left ; when the colonel shall wish to form it faced 
 to the right, he will command : 
 
 1. Right into line loheel, left coynpanies on the right 
 into line. 2. Battalion, guide right. 3. March 
 (or double quick — March). 
 
 804. At the first command, each captain will place him- 
 self before the centre of his company ; the right compa- 
 nies will be cautioned that they will have to wheel to the 
 right into line, the left companies that they will have to 
 march straight forward. 
 
 805. At the second command, the left guide of the fourth 
 company will place himself briskly on the direction of the 
 right guides of the column, face to them, and opposite to 
 one of the three last files of his company when in line of 
 battle ; the lieutenant-colonel will assure him in that po- 
 sition. 
 
 806. At the command march, briskly repeated by all the 
 
180 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 captaius, the right companies will form to the right into 
 line of battle, the left companies will put themselves in 
 order to form on the right into line of battle ; thesp forma- 
 tions will be executed by the means indicated, No. 391 and 
 following. No. 41G and following ; the lieutenant-colonel 
 Avill assure the guides of the left wing on the line of battle 
 as they successively come upon it. 
 
 807. If the column be in march, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Right into line wheel. 2. Left companies^ on the 
 right into line. 3. Battalion^ guide right. 4. March 
 — (or double quick — March). 
 
 808. At the first command, each captain will place him- 
 self promptly before the centre of his company; the right 
 companies will be cautioned that they will have to wheel 
 to the riglit, and the left companies that they will have to 
 form on the right into line. 
 
 809. At the command march, briskly repeated, the right 
 companies will form to the right into line, and the left 
 companies on the right into line. These formations will 
 be executed as prescribed, Nos. 402, 417 and following. 
 
 810. If the colonel should wish to move the battalion 
 forward, at the moment the right companies have com- 
 pleted the wheel, he will command : 
 
 5. Forward. 6. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 181 
 
 811. At the command forward, the captains of the right 
 companies will command, quick time. At the command 
 march, the right companies will cease to wheel, and march 
 straight forward. The colonel will then add : 
 
 7. Guide centime. 
 
 812. The movement of the left companies will be exe- 
 cuted in double quick time, as prescribed above, and as 
 they arrive on the line each captain will cause his company 
 to march in quick time. 
 
 •81.3. The column maybe formed faced to the left into 
 line of battle, according to the same principles. 
 
 814. If the company be closed in mass instead of at 
 company distance, these movements will be executed ac- 
 cording to the principles prescribed, Nos. 417, 502 and 510. 
 
 Remark on the deployment of the double column. 
 
 815. The depth of the double column, at company dis- 
 tance, being inconsiderable, closing it in mass, if at a halt, 
 in order to deploy it, may be dispensed with ; but if it be 
 in march, it will be preferable to cause it so to close, in 
 halting, before deploying. 
 
 816. The double column will be deployed habitually on 
 the centre companies, but the colonel may sometimes 
 deploy it on any interior company, or on the first or 
 eighth company. 
 
182 SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 Article Fourteenth. 
 
 Dispo.<<i({o7is against Cavalry. 
 
 817. A battalion heing in column by company, at full 
 distance, right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel 
 shall wish to form it into square, he will first cause divis- 
 ions to be formed: which being done, he will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. To half distance, close col- 
 umn. 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 818. At tho command march, the column will close to 
 company distance, the second division taking its distance 
 from the rear rank of the first division. 
 
 819. At the moment of halting the fourth division, the 
 file closers of each company of which it la composed, 
 passing by the outer flank of their companies, will place 
 themselves two paces before the front rank, opposite to 
 their respective places in line of battle, and face toward 
 the head of the column. 
 
 820. At the commencement of the movement, the major 
 will place himself on the right of the column abreast with 
 the first division ; the buglers formed in two ranks will 
 place themselves at platoon distance, behind tho inner pla- 
 toons of the second division. 
 
 821. These dispositions being made, tho colonel may. 
 
7 
 
 
 
 f- 
 
 
 H ■ 
 
 
 
 .:dDDUa aau 
 
 uric 
 
 ^=4 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 ;c^^ 
 
 sJIca'rT 
 
 r r; 3 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 ]-: an !3 
 
 Dn dnn 
 
 r' nn 
 
 
 ±. _ 
 
 H 
 
 
 -" 
 
 5^1^.. 2, 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 183 
 
 according to circumstances, put the column in march, or 
 cause it to form square ; if he wish to do the latter, he will 
 command: 
 
 1. Form square. 2. Right and left into line, wheel. 
 
 822. At the first coftmand, the lieutenant-colonel, fac- 
 ing to the left guides, and the major, facing to those 
 of the right, will align them, from the front, on the 
 respective guides of the fourth division, who will stand 
 fast, holding up their pieces, inverted, perpendicularly; 
 the right guides, in placing themselves on the direction, 
 will take their exact distances. 
 
 823. At the second command, the chief of the first 
 division will caution it to stand fast; all the captains of 
 the second and third divisions will place themselves be- 
 fore the centres of their respective companies, and caution 
 them that they will have to wheel, the right companies to 
 the right, and the left companies to the left into line of 
 battle. 
 
 824. The color-bearer will step back into the line of 
 file closers, opposite to his place in line of battle, and 
 will be replaced by the corporal of his file, who is in the 
 rear rank ; the corporal of the same file Avho is in the 
 rank of file closers will step into the rear rank. 
 
 825. The chief of the fourth division will command : 
 1. Fourth division, forward; 2. Guide left, and place 
 himself at the same time two paces outside of its left 
 flank. 
 
 11-16 
 
184 SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION PART V. 
 
 826. These dispositions ended, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 March (or double quick — March). 
 
 827. At this command, briskly repeated, the first divis- 
 ion will stand fast; but its right file will face to the 
 right, and its left file to the left. 
 
 828. The companies of the second and third divisions 
 will wheel to the right and left into line, and the buglers' 
 will advance a space equal to the front of a company. 
 
 829. The fourth division will close up to form the 
 square, and when it shall have closed, its chief will halt it, 
 face it about, and align it by the rear rank upon the 
 guides of the division, who will, for this purpose, remain 
 faced to the front. The junior captain will pass into the 
 rear rank, now become the front, and the covering ser- 
 geant of the left company will place himself behind him 
 in the front rank, become rear. The file closers will, at 
 the same time, close up a pace on the front rank, and 
 the outer file on each flunk of the division Avill face 
 outward. 
 
 830. The square being formed, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 831. At this command, the chiefs of the first and 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 185 
 
 fourth divisions, as well as the guides, will enter the 
 square. 
 
 832. The captains whose companies have formed to 
 the right into line, will remain on the left of their com- 
 panies; the left guide of each of those companies will, 
 in the rear rank, cover his captain, and the covering 
 sergeant of each will place himself as a file closer behind 
 the right file of his company. 
 
 833. The field and staff will enter the square, the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel placing himself behind the left, and the 
 major behind the right of the first division. 
 
 834. If the battalion present ten, instead of eight com- 
 panies, the fourth division will make the same movements 
 prescribed above for the second and third divisions, and 
 the fifth, the movements prescribed for the fourth di- 
 vision. 
 
 835. A battalion ought never to present, near the 
 enemy's cavalry, an odd company. The odd company, 
 under that circumstance, ought, when the battalion is 
 under arms, to be consolidated, for the time, with the 
 other companies. 
 
 836. The fronts of the square will be designated as 
 follows: the first division will always be the jirst front ; 
 the last division, the fimrth front ; the right companies 
 of the other divisions will form the second front, and 
 the left companies of the same divisions the third front. 
 
 837. A battalion being in column by company, at full 
 distance, right in front, and in march, when the colonel 
 shall Avish to form square, he will cause this movement 
 to be executed by the commands and means indicated. 
 No. 817. 
 
186 8CH00L OF THE BATTALION PART V. 
 
 838. At the command mnrch, the column will close to 
 company distance, as is prescribed, No. 278. When the 
 chief of the fourth division shall command quick, march, 
 the file closers of this division will place themselves be- 
 fore the front rank. 
 
 839. The major and the buglers will conform to what is 
 prescribed, No. 820. 
 
 840. If the colonel shall wish to form square, ho will 
 command : 
 
 1. Form square. 2. Right and left into line, tcheel. 
 3. March. 
 
 841. At the first command, the chief of the first divis- 
 ion will caution it to halt ; all the captains of the second 
 and third divisions will rapidly place themseVes before 
 the centres of their respective companies, and caution 
 them that they will have to wheel, the right companies 
 to the right, and the left companies to the left into line. 
 The chief of the fourth division will caution it to con- 
 tinue its march, and will hasten to its left flank. At 
 the third command, briskly repeated, the chief of the 
 first division will halt his division and align it to the 
 left, the outer files will face to the right and left, the 
 rest of the movement will be executed as prescribed. No. 
 828 and following. 
 
 842. The lieutenant-colonel and the major, at the 
 command march, will conform to what is prescribed, 
 No. 822. 
 
 843. If the battalion, before the square is formed^ 
 be in double column, the two leading companies will form 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART Y. 187 
 
 the first front, the two rear companies the fourth ; the 
 other companies of the right half battalion will form 
 the second, and those of the left half battalion the third 
 front. 
 
 844. The first and fourth fronts will be commanded by 
 the chiefs of the first and fourth divisions; each of the 
 other two by its senior captain. 
 
 845. The commander of each front will place himself 
 four paces behind its present rear rank, and will be re- 
 placed momentarily in the command of his company by 
 the next in rank therein. 
 
 846. If the column be at full distance, instead of at 
 company distance, as has been supposed, the square will 
 be formed in the manner prescribed. No. 817 or 838 and 
 following; and the dispositions indicated, Nos. 819 and 
 820, will be executed at the command form square. 
 
 847. If the column by division, whether double or single, 
 be in mass, and the colonel shall wish to form it into 
 square, he will first cause it to take companj^ distance : to 
 this effect, he will command: 
 
 1. To form aquare. 2. By the head of column, take 
 half distance. 
 
 848. The divisions will take half distance by the means 
 indicated. No. 324 and following. What is prescribed, No. 
 820, will be executed as the first and second divisions are 
 put in motion. 
 
 849. The colonel will halt the column the moment the 
 third division shall have its distance. As soon as the col- 
 
188 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PAllT V. 
 
 umu is halted, the dispDsitions indicated, Xo. SID, will bo 
 executed, and when these are completed, the colonel may 
 proceed to form square. 
 
 850. If the column be in march, he will also, in the first 
 place, cause company distance to be taken, and, for this 
 purpose, he will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. By the head of column, take 
 half distance. 3. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 851. This movement will be executed as prescribed, Nu. 
 3.*i0 and following. What is prescribed, No. 820, Will be 
 executed as the first and second divisions are put in motion. 
 
 852. 'XXi.ii colonel will proceed to form squai'e the moment 
 the third division shall have its distance ; at tlio-command 
 form square, the dispositions indicated, No. S19, will be ex- 
 ecuted. If it be intended merely to dispose the colaimt for 
 square, the colonel will not halt the column until the last 
 division has its distance. 
 
 853. In a simple column, left in front, these several 
 movements will be executed according to the same princi- 
 ples and by inverse means ; but the fronts of the square 
 will have the same designations as if the right of the col- 
 umn were in front, that is, the first division will constitute 
 the first front, and thus of the other subdivisions. 
 
 854. The battalion being formed into square, when the 
 colonel shall wish to cause it to advance a distance le^;-< 
 than thirty paces, he will command: 
 
 1. Bf/ (suuli) front, forward. 2. March. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V, 189 
 
 855. If it be supposed that the advance be made by the 
 irst front, the chief of this front will command : 
 
 1. First division, forward. 2. Guide centre. 
 
 856. The chief of the second front "will face his front to 
 the left. The captains of the companies composing this 
 front will place themselves outside, and on the right of 
 their left guides, who will replace them in the front rank : 
 the chief of the third front will face his front to the right, 
 and the captains in this front will place themselves out- 
 side, and on the left of their covering sergeants; the chief 
 of the fourth front will face his front about, and command : 
 I. Fourth division, forward. 2. Guide centra. The captain 
 wh(x is in the centre of the first front, will be charged with 
 the direction of the march, and will regulate himself by 
 the means indicated in the school of the company, No. 89. 
 
 857. At the command march, the square will put itself 
 in motion ; the companies marching by the flank will be 
 carefiil not to lose their distances. The chief of the fourth 
 division will cause his division to keep constantly closed 
 on the flanks of the second and third fronts. 
 
 858. This movement will only be executed in quick time. 
 
 859. The lieutenant-colonel will place himself in rear of 
 the file of direction in order to regulate his march. 
 
 860. If the colonel should wish to halt the square, he 
 will command : 
 
190 SCHOOL OF THK HATTALIOX — PART V 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 
 
 Sf)l. At the second command, the square will halt; the 
 fourth front will face about immediately, and without fur- 
 ther command ; the second and third fronts will face out- 
 ward; the captains of companies will resume their place? 
 as in square. 
 
 862. In moving the square forward by the second, third 
 or fourth fronts, the same rules will be observed. 
 
 863. The battalion being formed into square, when the 
 colonel shall wish to cause it to advance a greater distance 
 than thirty paces, he will command: 
 
 1. Form column. 
 
 804. The chief of the first front will command: 
 
 1. First division, forward. 2. Guide left. 
 
 865. The commander of the fourth front will caution it 
 to stand fast; the commander of the second front will 
 cause it to face to the left, and then command : hi/ com- 
 pany, bi/ file left. The commander of the third front will 
 cause it to face to the right, and then command: bi/ coin- 
 ]}anij, bji file 7'iffht. At the moment the second and third 
 fronts face to the left and right, each captain will cause 
 to break to the rear the two leading files of his companj'. 
 
ooD^ci; noaiA^ c zj 
 
 Tl6 . J 
 
 
 an DO on g pan. 
 
 --1 —-y 
 
 |h °^°;°^h^;^"^i ^_ 
 
 FX^. '2.. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE J5ATTALIOX — PART V. 191 
 
 866. These dispositions being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 3. Makch (or double quick — March). 
 
 867. At this command, the first front will march for- 
 ward ; its ohief will halt it when it shall have advanced a 
 space equal to half its front, and align it by the left. 
 
 868. The corresponding companies of the second and 
 third fronts will wheel by file to the left and right, and 
 march to meet each other behind the centre of the first 
 division, and the moment they unite, the captain of each 
 company will halt his company and face it to the front. 
 T!ie division being re-formed, its chief will align it by 
 the left. 
 
 869. The commander of the fourth front will cause it 
 to face about : its file closers will remain before the front 
 rank. 
 
 870. The column being thus re-formed, the colonel may 
 put it in march by the commands and means prescribed. 
 No. 164, and following; the right guides will preserve 
 company distance exactly as the directing guides. 
 
 871. When the colonel shall wish to re-form square, he 
 will give the commands indicated, No. 840. 
 
 872. To cause the square to march in retreat a dis- 
 tance greater than thirty paces, the colonel will first cause 
 column to be formed as indicated. No. 863 ; and when 
 formed, he will cause it to face by the rear rank ; to this 
 end, he will command : 
 
 1. To warch in retreat. 2. Face hy the rear rank. 
 3. Battalion, about — Face. 
 
192 SCHOOL OF THE UATTALION rAUT V. 
 
 873. At the second coinniund, the file closers of the in- 
 terior divisions will place themselves, passing by the outer 
 flanks of their respective companies, behind the front 
 rank opposite to their places in line of battle: the file 
 closers of the other divisions will stand fast. 
 
 874. At the third command, the battalion will face 
 about: each chief of division will place himself before 
 its rear rank, become front, passing through the interval 
 between its two companies; the guides will step into the 
 rear rank, now front. 
 
 875. The column being thus disposed, the colonel may 
 put it in march, or cause it to form square as if it were 
 faced by the front rank. The square being formed, its 
 fronts will preserve the same designations they had when 
 faced by the front rank. 
 
 876. The battalion being in square by the rear rank, 
 when the colonel shall wish to march it in retreat or in 
 advance, a distance less than thirty paces, he will con- 
 form to what is prescribed, No. 854 and following : other- 
 wise, he will re-form the column according to the prin- 
 ciples prescribed. No. 8G3, by marching forward the fourth 
 front. 
 
 877. If the square is to be marched to the front a 
 distance greater than thirty paces, the colonel will face 
 the coluniu by the front rank ; te this end, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. To march in advance. 2. Face hij the front rank. 
 3. Battalion, about — Face. 
 
 878. Which will be executed as prescribed, No. 873 and 
 following. 
 
i- 
 
 I' 
 
 '-■-'^ 
 
 ^m^^:^^^ 
 
 '^ ufmm ^i^: m* 1 
 
 ^^ 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 193 
 
 879. If the column be marching in advance, and the 
 colonel shall wish to march it in retreat, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 I. To march in retreat. 2. Battalion, right about. 
 3. March {ov double quick — March). 
 
 880. At the second command, the file closers of the 
 second and third divisions will place themselves rapidly 
 before the front rank of their respective divisions. At the 
 command march, the column will face about and move off 
 to the rear ; the chiefs of divisions and the guides will 
 conform to what is prescribed, No. 874. 
 
 881. If the column be marching in retreat, and the 
 colonel shall wish to march it in advance, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. To march in advance. 2. Battalion, right about. 
 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 882. At the second command, the file closers of the 
 second and third divisions will place themselves before 
 the rear rank of their respective divisions; at the third, 
 the column will face by the front rank. 
 
 To reduce the square. 
 
 883. The colonel, wishing to break the square, will 
 command : 
 
 1. Reduce square. 2. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
1!)4 SCHOOL OF Tin-: battalion — part v. 
 
 884. This moveiuent will be executed in the manner 
 indicated, No. 8G3 and fidlowing; but the file closers of 
 the fourth front will place themselves behind the rear 
 rank the moment it faces about; the field and staff, the 
 color-bearer and buglers, will, at the same time, return 
 to their places in column. 
 
 To form square from line of battle. 
 
 885. A battalion deployed, may be formed into square 
 in a direction cither parallel or perpendicular to the line 
 of battle. 
 
 886. In the first case, the colonel will cause the battal- 
 ion to break by division to the rear, by the right or left, 
 and then close the column to half distance, as indicated, 
 No. 817 and following. 
 
 887. In the second case, he will ploy the battalion into 
 simple column by division at half distance in rear of the 
 right or left division, or into column doubled on the 
 centre. 
 
 . 888. To ploy the battalion into column upon one of the 
 flank divisions, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. To form square. 2. Column at half distance, by 
 division. 3. On the first (or fourth) division. 4. 
 Battalion, right (or left) — Face. 5. March (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 889: This movement will be executed according to the 
 principles prescribed, No. 119 and following. 
 
SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION — PART V. 195 
 
 890. If the battalion be marching in line of battle, and 
 the colonel shall wish to form sqnare in a direction per- 
 pendicular to the line of battle, he will command: 
 
 1. To form square. 2. On the Jirst (or four(Ji) di- 
 vision, form column. 3. Battalion, hf/ the right 
 (or left) flank. 4. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 891. This movement will be executed according to the 
 principles prescribed for ploying a column by division at 
 half distance, No. 150. The chief of the first division will 
 halt bis division at the command march. 
 
 892. To ploy the battalion into double column, the colo- 
 nel will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. Double column at half dis- 
 tance. 3. Battalion, inward — Face. 4. March 
 (or double quick — March). 
 
 893. This movement will be executed as prescribed, No. 
 778 and following. 
 
 894. The battalion being in march, to ploy it into double 
 column to form square, the colonel Avill command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. Form double column. 3. 
 Battalion, by the right and left flanks. 4. March 
 (or double quick — March). 
 11-17 
 
196 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 895. Thi3 movement will be executed as prescribed, No. 
 788. The chief of the leading division will halt his divis- 
 ion at the command march. 
 
 Ohservalions relative to the formation of squares in ttco 
 ranks. 
 
 896. When the colonel shall judge it proper to have a 
 reserve, this reserve, in a column of three divisions, will 
 be formed of the inner platoons of the second division. 
 The second division will, in this ease, close to platoon dis- 
 tance on the first division. When the square is formed, 
 the reserve platoons will move forward a distance nearly 
 equal to a platoon front. 
 
 897. In re-forming column, the first division will move 
 forward platoon, instead of company distance. 
 
 898. If the column be formed of four divisions, the inner 
 platoons of the third division will compose the reserve ; 
 then, in re-forming column, the first division will conform 
 to the general rule, and the chief of the third, as soon as 
 bis division is formed, will close it to platoon distance on 
 the second division. The colonel may, if necessary, form 
 the reserve of the entire third division. In this case, the 
 movement will be executed in the following manner. 
 
 899. If the column be at full distance, when it shall 
 close, at the command to form square, to half distance, the 
 chief of the third division will cause four files to break to 
 the rear from the right and left of his division: the guides 
 will close upon the outer files remaining in line, and the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTAMOX — PART V. 197 
 
 left guide will march exactly iu the trace of the file imme- 
 diately in front of him. This division will then close in 
 mass on the second division ; and the chief of the fourth 
 division will close to half distance on the same division. 
 
 900. At the command form square, the chief of the 
 reserve division will command: 1. Third divinion, forward. 
 2. Guide centre ; at this command, the guides on the flanks 
 will fall into the line of file closers. At the command 
 march, the reserve will move forward the distance of a 
 company front. When halted, its chief will cause the pla- 
 toons to be doubled, and for this purpose will command : 
 
 1. On the centre, double platoons. 2. March. 
 
 901. At the first command, the chiefs of platoons will 
 place themselves in front of the centre of their respective 
 platoons ; the chief of each outer platoon will face his 
 platoon toward the centre, and cause to break to the rear 
 two files from the left or right. At the command march, 
 the outer platoons will direct their march so as to double 
 on the centre platoon at the distance of four paces; their 
 chiefs will align these outer platoons on the centre, and 
 the files previously broken to the rear will come into line. 
 
 902. If the column be at half, instead of full distance, 
 the colonel before forming square will order the chiefs of 
 the third and fourth divisions to move forward their divis- 
 ions as prescribed, No. 899. 
 
 903. If the column be closed in mass, at the command 
 to form square, the chief of the third division will break 
 
198 SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALIOX — I'AHT v. 
 
 four files to the rear from each of the flanks as prescribed. 
 No. 899. 
 
 904. The colonel will halt the column as soou as the 
 second division shall have ^'ained its distance. 
 
 905. If the colonel shall wish the column to continue 
 marching, at the command, /;y the head of column, tale 
 half distance, the chief of the reserve division will give his 
 cautionary commands in sufficient time to place his divi- 
 sion in motion simultaneously with the one which precedes 
 it. The chief of the fourth division will give the command 
 march at the instant there is compau}' distance between 
 his division and the second. 
 
 906. When the colonel shall wish to re-form the column, 
 at the command form column, the chief of the third divis- 
 ion will command: form division; at this command, the 
 chiefs of the outer platoons which have doubled in rear of 
 the centre platoons, will giS'c the commands and make the 
 preparatory movements for deploying on the centre pla- 
 toons, which will be executed at the command march, given 
 by the colonel and briskly repeated by the chief of this 
 division. The division being re-formed, the chiefs of the 
 outer platoons will retake their places in column, and the 
 chief of this division will again cause four files from each 
 of its flanks to break to the rear. 
 
 907. If before the formation of the square, the column 
 had been left in front, it would be formed by the same 
 commands and according to the same principles. The 
 second division, in this case, would form the i-eserve. 
 
 908. The column being formed, if the colonel should 
 •wish to march it in i*etreat ho will face it by the rear rank 
 The files of the third division broken off to the rear, will 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PAKT V. 199 
 
 face about with the battalion, and when the column is put 
 in motion will march in front of the rear rank. But 
 should the colonel wish to re-form the square, he will cause 
 the battalion to face by the front rank. 
 
 909. If the battalion be in line, instead of in column, 
 the chief of the reserve division will bring it into column 
 in such manner that there may be a distance of only four 
 paces between this division and the one which is to be im- 
 mediately in front of it; and when this division is halted 
 and aligned, its chief will cause the usual nun\ber of files 
 to be broken to the rear. The chief of the division which 
 should occupy in column a position immediately in rear of 
 the reserve division will, on entering the column, take a 
 distance of twelve paces between it and the division estab- 
 lished immediately in front of the reserve division. 
 
 Squares in four ranks. 
 
 910. If the square formed in two ranks, according to 
 the preceding rules, should not be deemed sufficiently 
 strong, the colonel may cause the square to be formed in 
 four ranks. 
 
 911. The battalion being in column by company at full 
 distance, right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel 
 shall wish to form square in four ranks, he will first cause 
 divisions to be formed, which being executed, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. To form square in four ranks. 2. To half dis- 
 tance, close column. 3. Makch (or double quick 
 — March). 
 
200 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX — PART V. 
 
 912. At the first command, the chief of the first division 
 will caution the right company to face to the left, and the 
 left company to face to the right. The chiefs of the other 
 divisions will caution their divisions to move forward. 
 
 913. At the command mnrch, the right company of the 
 first division will form into four ranks on its left file, and 
 the left company into four ranks on its right file. The 
 formation ended, the chief of this division will align it by 
 the left. 
 
 914. The other divisions will move forward and double 
 their files inarching ; the right company of each division 
 will double on its left file, and the left company on its 
 right file. The formation completed, each chief of divis- 
 ion will command, i/uide left. Each chief will halt his 
 division when it shall have the distance of a company 
 front in four ranks from the preceding one, counting from 
 its rear rank, and will align his division by the left. At 
 the instant the fourth division is halted, the file closers 
 will move rapidly before its front rank. 
 
 915. The colonel will form square, re-form column, and 
 reduce square in four ranks, by the same commands and 
 means as prescribed for a battalion in two ranks. 
 
 916. If the square formed in four ranks be reduced and 
 at a halt, and the colonel shall wish to form the battalion 
 into two ranks, he will command : 
 
 1. In two ranks, undouhle Jiles. 2. Battalion, out- 
 ward — Face. 3. March. 
 
 917. At the first command, the captains will stop before 
 the centres of their respective companies, and those on the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 201 
 
 right will caution them to face to the right, and those on 
 the left to face to the left. 
 
 918. At the second command, the battalion will face to 
 the right and left. 
 
 919. At the command march, each company will un- 
 double its files and re-form into two ranks as indicated in 
 the school of the company, No. 376 and following. Each 
 captain Avill halt his company and face it to the front. The 
 formation completed, each chief of division will align his 
 division by the left. 
 
 920. If the column be in march, with divisions formed 
 in four ranks, and the colonel shall wish to re-form them 
 into two ranks, he will command : 
 
 1. Guide centre. 2. In two ranks, undouhle files. 
 3. March. 
 
 921. The captain, placed in the centre of each division, 
 will continue to march straight to the front, as will also 
 the left file of the right company, and the right file of the 
 left company. Each company will then be re-formed into 
 two ranks, as prescribed in the school of the company. 
 
 922. The battalion being formed into two ranks, the 
 colonel will command, giiide left (or right). 
 
 923. To form square in four ranks on one of the flank 
 divisions, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. To form square^ in four ranks. 2. Column at 
 half distance, hy division. 3. On the first (or 
 fourth) division. 4. Battalion, right (or left) — 
 Face. 5. March (or double quick — March). 
 
202 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 924. At the second command, each chief of division will 
 place himself before the centre of his division, and caution 
 it to face to the right. 
 
 925. At the fourth command, the right guide of the first 
 division will rcmaiu faced to the front, the battulion will 
 face to the right. 
 
 926. At the command march, the first file of four men of 
 the first division will face to the front, remaining doubled. 
 All the other files of four men will step ofi" together, and 
 each in succession will close up to its proper distance on 
 the file preceding it, and face to the front, remaining 
 doubled. When the last file shall have closed, the chief of 
 division will command. Left — Dress. 
 
 927. The other divisions will ploy into column in the 
 same manner as with a battalion in two ranks, observing 
 what follows : the chiefs of division, instead of allowing 
 their divisions to file past them on entering the column, 
 will continue to lead them, and as each division shall arrive 
 on a line with the right guide of the first division, its chief 
 will halt the right guide, who will immediately face to the 
 frontj the first file of four men will also halt at the same 
 time and face to the front, remaining doubled. The second 
 file will close on the first, and when^loscd, halt, and face 
 to the front, remaining doubled. All the other files will 
 execute successively what has just been prescribed for the 
 second. When the last file shall have closed, the chief of 
 division will command, Left — Duess. 
 
 928. If the battalion be in march, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 I 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 203 
 
 1 . To form square^ in four ranks. 2. On the first 
 division, form column. 3, Battalion, hi the right 
 flank. 4. March (or double quick — MarchJ. 
 
 929. At the second command, each chief of division 
 will step in front of the centre of his division and caution 
 it to face by the right flank. The chief of the first divis- 
 ion will caution his covering sergeant to halt, and re- 
 main faced to the front. 
 
 930. At the command march, the battalion will face 
 to the right; the covering sergeant of the first division 
 will halt and remain faced to the front, the first division 
 will then form into four ranks as heretofore prescribed. 
 The other divisions will ploy into column in the same 
 manner as if the movement had taken place from a 
 halt. 
 
 931. If the colonel should wish to form a perpendicu- 
 lar square in four ranks, by double column, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Double column, 
 at half distance. 3., Battalion, iiiiuard — Face. 
 4. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 932. At the second command, the captains of com- 
 panies will place themselves before the centres of their 
 
204 SCHOOL OF TIIF: RATTALIOX — PAUT V. 
 
 respective companies, and caution those on tbe right to 
 face to the left, and those on the left to face to the right. 
 The captain of the fifth company will caution his covering 
 sergeant to stand fast. 
 
 933. At the third command, the battalion will face to 
 the left and right: at the command juarch, the left flic of 
 the fourth, and the right file of the fifth company, will 
 face to the front, remaining doubled. The fourth com- 
 pany will close successively by file of fours on the left 
 file, and the fifth company, in like manner, on the right 
 file; the files will face to the front, remaining doublc'd. 
 The formation completed, the chief of division will com- 
 mand, right dress. The junior captain will place himf^elf 
 in the interval between the two companies. 
 
 934. The other companies will close as prescribed for 
 the double column in two ranks, observing what folloAvs : 
 each captain will halt the leading guide of his company 
 the moment the head of his company arrives on a line 
 with the centre of the column. In the right companies, 
 the left guides will step into the line of file closers, and 
 the left file of four men will face immediately to the front, 
 remaining doubled, and by the side of the right guide of 
 the left company. The companies will each form into 
 four ranks, as prescribed. No. 926, the right companies 
 on the left file, and the left companies on the right file. 
 The formation completed, the junior captain will place 
 himself between the two companies, and the senior will 
 command, rifjht dress. 
 
 935. If the battalion be in march, the colonel will com- 
 mand: 
 
 I 
 
205 
 
 (Jonhle 
 flanks. 
 
 I place 
 ! coin- 
 to face 
 by the 
 autiou 
 to the 
 
 1 com- 
 ft and 
 y will 
 ■t will 
 
 n the 
 
 } will 
 
 ision 
 
 lonel 
 fol- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PAUT V. 205 
 
 1. To form square^ in four ranks. 2. Fonn double 
 column. 3. Battalion., hy the right and left flanks. 
 4. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 93G. At the second command, the captains will place 
 themselves before the centres of their respective com- 
 panies, and those on the right will caution them to face 
 by the left flank, and those on the left to face by the 
 right flank ; the captain of the fifth company will caution 
 his covering sergeant to halt, and remain faced to the 
 front. 
 
 937. At the command march, the fourth and fifth com- 
 panies will halt. The battalion will face to the left and 
 right; the covering sergeant of the fifth company will 
 halt and remain faced to the front, the movement will 
 then be executed as if the battalion was at a halt. 
 
 Oblique squares. 
 
 9o8. The battalion being in line of battle, when the 
 colonel shall wish to form the oblique square, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. To form oblique square. 2. On the first division 
 form column. 
 
 939. At the second command, the lieutenant-colonel 
 will trace the alignment of the first division in the fol- 
 
20G SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALIOX — PART V. 
 
 lowing manner: be will place himself before and near 
 the right file of this division, face to the left, march 
 twelve paces along the front rank, halt, face to the right, 
 march twelve paces perpendicularly to the front, halt 
 again, face to the right, and immediately place a marker 
 at this point. The covering sergeant of the right com- 
 pany will step, at the same time, before its right file, face 
 to the left, and conform the line of his shoulders to that 
 of the shoulders of the marker established by the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel. These two markers being established, the 
 lieutenant-colonel will place a third marker on the tame 
 alignment, at the point where the left of the division will 
 halt. 
 
 940. The chiefs of division will jdace themselves in 
 front of the centres of their divisions; the chief of the 
 first division will immediately establish it by a wheel to 
 the right on a fixed pivot, against the markers, and align 
 it by the left. The chiefs of the other divisions will cau- 
 tion them to face to the right. The colonel will then 
 command : 
 
 3. Battalion^ right — Face. 4. March (or double 
 quick — March). 
 
 911. The three rear divisions will direct their march 
 so as to place themselves at half distance from each 
 other, and in the rear of the first division, as previously 
 indicated, observing what follows : 
 
 942. The chief of the second division, instead of break- 
 ing the headmost files to the rear, will break them to the 
 
2<'^7 
 
 Fo6^ 
 
 □ D r; s ij 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 207 
 
 front, and at the command march, -will conduct his divis- 
 ion toward the point of entrance into the column. Ar- 
 rived at this point, ho will halt in his own person, cause 
 his division to wheel by file to the right, instructing the 
 right guide to direct himself parallelly to the first divis- 
 ion ; and as soon as the left file has passed, its chief 
 will halt the division, and align it by the left. The other 
 divisions will break to the rear, but slightly ; each will 
 enter the column as prescribed for the second, and the 
 moment the battalion is ployed into column, the colonel 
 will cause it to form square. 
 
 943. The formation of a battalion into oblique square on 
 the left division, will be executed according to the same 
 principles and by inverse means. 
 
 944. Should the battalion be in march, the colonel will 
 first cause it to halt. 
 
 945. In the preceding example, the battalion was sup- 
 posed to be deployed ; but if it be already formed in col- 
 umn, the desired obliquity will be established by causing 
 it to change direction by the flank ; to this end, the colo- 
 nel will command: 
 
 1. To form oblique square. 2. Change direction by 
 the right (or left) flank. 
 
 946. At the second command, the lieutenant-colonel will 
 trace the new direction in the following manner; he will 
 place before the right and left files of the headmost divis- 
 ion, two markers, and a third on the prolongation of the 
 first two, on the side of the change of direction, and at 
 11-18 
 
208 SCHOOL of the battalion — part v. 
 
 twelve paces from the flank of the column. He will then 
 place himself before the third marker, march twelve paces 
 perpendicularly to the front, halt, and finish tracing the 
 new dii-ection in the manner indicated. No. 939.- 
 
 947. The colonel will then command : 
 
 3. Battalion, right (or left) — Face. 4. March (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 948. The change of direction having been executed, the 
 colonel will cause the square to be formed. 
 
 949. Should the column be in march, the colonel will 
 first cause it to halt. 
 
 950. Oblique squares in four ranks will bo executed by 
 the same moans, and according to the principles prescribed 
 for the formation of squares in four ranks. 
 
 951. Whether the battalion be ployed into simple or 
 double column, the particular dispositions for the forma- 
 tion of the square will be executed as prescribed, No. 819 
 and following. The division which is to form the rear of 
 the column, will be closed in mass, and as soon as it is 
 aligned, the major will rectify the position of the guides 
 on the side of the column opposite to the direction. 
 
 952. If it be the wish of the colonel merely to prepare 
 for square, he will in all formations with that view substi- 
 tute the command prepare for square in jdace of to form 
 square, and in that case, the last division will enter the 
 column at company distance. 
 
 Remarks on the formation of squares. 
 
 953. It is a general principle that a column by company, 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART V. 209 
 
 which is to be formed into square, will first form divisions, 
 and close to half distance. Nevertheless, if it find itself 
 suddenly threatened by cavalry without sufficient time to 
 form divisions, the colonel will cause the column to close 
 to platoon distaucc and then form square by the commands 
 and means which have been indicated ; the leading and 
 rearmost companies will conform themselves to what has 
 been prescribed for divisions in those positions. The other 
 companies will form by platoon to the right and left into 
 line of battle, and each chief of platoon, after having 
 halted it, will place himself on the line, as if the platoon 
 were a company, and he will be covered b}^ the guide in 
 the rear rank. 
 
 954. A battalion in column at full distance, having to 
 form square, will always close on the leading subdivision ; 
 and a column closed in mass, will always, for the same 
 purpose, take distances by the head. In either case, the 
 second subdivision should be careful in taking its distance, 
 to reckon from the rear rank of the subdivision in front 
 of it. 
 
 955. If a column by company should be required to 
 form square in four ranks, the doubling of files will always 
 take place on the file next the guide. 
 
 956. When a column, disposed to form square, shall be 
 in taarch, it will change direction as a column at half dis- 
 tance ; thus, having to execute this movement, the column 
 will take the guide on the side opposite to that to which 
 the change of direction is to be made, if that be not already 
 the side of the guide. 
 
 957. A column doubled on the centre at company distance 
 
210 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 or closed in mass, may be formed into square according to 
 the same principles as a simple column. 
 
 958. When a battalion is ployed, with a view to the 
 square, it will alwaj-s be in rear of the right or left divis- 
 ion, in order that it may be able to commence firing, pend- 
 ing the execution of the movement. The double column, 
 also, affords this advantage, and being more promptly 
 formed than any other, it will habitually be employed, 
 unless particular circumstances cause a different formation 
 to be preferred. 
 
 959. A battalion, in square, will never use any other 
 than the fire by file and by rank ; the color being in the 
 line of file closers, its guard will not fall back as pre- 
 scribed, No. 41 ; it will fire like the men of the company 
 of which it forms a part. 
 
 960. If the square be formed in four ranks, the first two 
 ranks will alone execute the firings prescribed above ; the 
 other two ranks will remain either at shoulder or support 
 arms. 
 
 961. The formation of the square being often necessary 
 in war, and being the most complicated of the manoeuvres, 
 it will be as frequently repeated as the supposed necessity 
 may require, in order to render its mechanism familiar to 
 both oflScers and men. 
 
 962. In the execution of this manoeuvre, the colonel will 
 carefully observe that the divers movements wliich it in- 
 volves succeed each other without loss of time, but also 
 without confusion; for, if the rapidity of cavalry move- 
 ments requires the greatest promptitude in the formation 
 of squares, so, on the other hand, precipitancy always re- 
 
d- 
 
 _>.^ c 
 
 
 •^mtk-^ ■■^Mi'- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 211 
 
 suits in disorder, and in no circumstance is disorder more 
 to bo avoided. 
 
 963. When the colonel shall wish to cover by skirmish- 
 ers the movements of a column preparing to form square, 
 ho will detach for this purpose one or two inner platoons of 
 one of the interior divisions of the column. In this case, 
 the exterior platoons of this division and the following 
 subdivisions will, according to circumstances, close on the 
 preceding subdivision, in such manner, that there may be 
 between them only the distance necessary for forming into 
 line. 
 
 964. When the colonel shall be ready to form square, he 
 will, in order to recall the skirmishers, cause to the color to 
 be sounded. If on the return of the skirmishers there be 
 not room for them to form into line of battle, they will 
 double on the outer platoons of their respective companies. 
 
 Column against cavalry. 
 
 965. When a column closed in mass has to form square, 
 it will begin by taking company distance; but if so sud- 
 denly threatened by cavalry as not to allow time for this 
 disposition, it will be formed in the following manner: 
 
 966. The colonel will command : 
 
 1. Column against cavalry. 2. March. 
 
 967. At the first command, the chief of the leading di- 
 vision will caution it to stand fast and pass behind the rear 
 
212 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX — PART V. 
 
 rank; in the interior divisions each captain will promptly 
 designate the number of files necessary to close the inter- 
 val between his company and the one in front of it. The 
 captains of the divisions next to the one in rear, in addi- 
 tion to closing the interval in front, will also close up the 
 interval which separates this division from the last ; the 
 chief of the fourth division will caution it to face about, 
 and its file closers will pass briskly before the front rank. 
 
 968. At the command march, the guides of each division 
 will place themselves rapidly in the line of file closers. 
 The first division will stand fast, the fourth will face 
 about, the outer file of each of these divisions will then 
 face outward ; in other divisions the files designated for 
 closing the intervals will form to the right and left into 
 line, but in the division next to the rearmost one, the first 
 files that come into line will close to the right or left until 
 they join the rear division. The files of each company 
 which remain in column will close on their outer files, 
 formed into line, in order to create a vacant space in the 
 middle of the column. 
 
 909. If the column be in march, the column against cav- 
 alry will be formed by the same commands and means. 
 At the command march, the first and fourth divisions will 
 halt, and the latter division will face about ; the interior 
 divisions will conform to what has been prescribed above. 
 
 970. The battalion being no longer threatened by caval- 
 ry, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Form column. 2. Maiicii. 
 
 971. At the command march, the files in column will 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 213 
 
 close to the left and right to make room for those in line 
 who will retake their places in column by stepping back- 
 ward, except those closing the interval between the two 
 rear divisions, who will take their places in column by a 
 flank movement. The fourth division will face about, the 
 guides will resume their places. 
 
 972. If the colonel should be so pressed as not to have 
 time to order bayonets to be fixed, the men will fix them, 
 without command or signal, at the cautionary command, 
 '.olumn against cavalry. 
 
 973. As this manoeuvre is often used in war, and with 
 decided advantage, the colonel will frequently cause it to 
 be executed in order to render it familiar. 
 
 Article Fifteenth. 
 The rally. 
 
 974. The battalion being in line of battle, the colonel 
 will sometimes cause the disperse to be sounded, at which 
 signal, the battalion will break and disperse. 
 
 976. When the colonel shall wish to rally the battalion, 
 he will cause to the color to be sounded, and at the same 
 time place two markers and the color-bearer in the direc- 
 tion he may wish to give the battalion. 
 
 976. Each captain will rally his company about six 
 paces in rear of the place it is to occupy in line of battle. 
 
 977. The colonel will cause the color-company to be 
 
214 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX — PART V. 
 
 promptly established against the markers, and each com- 
 pany by the command of its captain will be aligned on the 
 color-company according to the principles heretofore pre- 
 scribed. 
 
 978. When the colonel shall wish to rally the battalion 
 in column, he will cause the asaembli/ to be sounded, and 
 place two markers before the position to be occupied by 
 the first company ; the captain of this company will rally 
 his company in rear of the two markers, and each of the 
 other captains will rally bis company at platoon distance, 
 behind the one which should precede it in the order in 
 column. 
 
 Article Sixteenth. 
 
 Rules for manceuvring hy the rear ranlc. 
 
 970. It may often be necessary' to cause a battalion to 
 manoeuvre by the rear rank ; when the case presents itself, 
 the following rules will be observed. 
 
 980. The battalion being by the front rank, when the 
 colonel shall wish to manoeuvre by the rear rank, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Face hy the rear rank. 2. Battalion. 
 3. Alout — Face. 
 
 981. If the battalion be deployed, this movement will be 
 executed as has been indicated for the iirc by the rear rank. 
 
 982. If the battalion be in column by company, or by 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 215 
 
 platoon, right or left in front, the chiefs of subdivision, to 
 take their new places in column, will each pass by the left 
 flank of his subdivision, and the file closers by the right 
 flank ; the guides will place themselves in the rear rank. 
 
 983. If the column be formed by division, the chiefs of 
 division will each pass by the interval in the centre of 
 his division, and the file closers by the outer flanks of 
 their respective companies ,• the junior captain in each 
 division will step into the rear rank, and be covered in 
 the front rank by the covering sergeant of the left com- 
 pany. 
 
 984. The lieutenant-colonel will place himself abreast 
 with the leading subdivision, and the major abreast with 
 the rearmost one. 
 
 985. The battalion being faced by the rear rank, com- 
 panies, divisions, and wings, will preserve their prior 
 denominations respectively. 
 
 986. The manoeuvres by the rear rank will be executed 
 by the same commands and on the same principles as if 
 the battalion faced by the front rank; but in such manner 
 that when the battalion shall be brought to its proper 
 front, all the subdivisions may find themselves in their 
 regular order from right to left. 
 
 987. According to this principle, when a column faced 
 by the rear rank is deployed, the subdivisions which, in 
 line of battle bj"^ the front rank, ought to find themselves 
 on the right of the subdivision on which the dejaloyment 
 is made, will face to the left; and those which ought to be 
 placed on its left, will face to the right. 
 
 988. When a battalion in line of battle, faced by the 
 rear rank, is to be ployed into column, the colonel will 
 
216 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION — PART V. 
 
 announce, in the commands, left or right in front, accord- 
 ing as it may bo intended that the first or last subdivision 
 shall be at the head of the column, because the first sub- 
 division is on the left, and the last on the right of the 
 battalion faced by the rear rank. The column by the 
 rear rank will take the guide to the right, if the first 
 subdivision be in front, and to the left in the reverse 
 case. 
 
 989. A column, faced by the rear rank, will be brought 
 to its proper front by the means heretofore prescribed. 
 If the column be formed by company, or by platoon, the 
 chiefs of subdivisions, in order to take their new places in 
 column, will pass by the left of subdivisions, now right, 
 and the tile closers by the right, now left. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION, 
 
 ARRANGED INTO LESSONS. 
 
 Lesson First. 
 
 Article I. — Open ranks (No. 23). 
 
 Article II. — Close ranks (No. 29). 
 
 Article III. — Manual of arms (No. 30). Loading at 
 
 will (No. 31). 
 Article IV. — Different fires by the front rank (No. 39), 
 
 and by the rear rank (No. 54). 
 
 Lesson Second. 
 
 Article I. — Break by company to the right (No. 69), or 
 
 to the left (No. 74). 
 Article II. — March in column, at the cadenced step, a 
 
 considerable distance (No. 164). Change of direction 
 
 (No. 231). Diminish and increase front in marching 
 
 (No. 196). March in retreat (No. 170). 
 
218 SCHOOL OF TIIK BATTALION. 
 
 AuTiCLE III.— Halt the column (No. 239). Form it to 
 the left or right into line of battle (No. 390). Execute 
 this formation, the column marching (No. 402). 
 
 AuTicLE IV. — Execute the countermarch, and repeat the 
 same movements (No. 351). 
 
 Article V. — Form column into line of battle, to the 
 right or left, by inversion (No. 407). 
 
 Lesson Third. 
 
 Article I. — Break by company to the rear by the right 
 or left, the battalion being at a halt (No. 87), or march- 
 ing (No. 94). 
 
 Article II. — March in the route step (No. 198). Cause 
 to be 'executed, at this gait and in double quick time, 
 the divers movements incident to the column in route, 
 and cause the cadenced step to be resumed. 
 
 Article III. — Form the column forward into line of bat- 
 tle (Nos. 440, 452), faced to tlie rear into line of battle, 
 (Nos. 4fiG, 480), the battalion being at a halt, or march- 
 ing. Form the column forward into line, and continue 
 the march in this order (No. 456). 
 
 Article IV. — Form the column on the right (No. 416), 
 or the left (No. 432,) into line of battle. 
 
 Article V. — March by the flank (No. 722), and form 
 companies into line, marching. 
 
 Article VI. — The column supposed to arrive before (No. 
 175) or behind the line of battle (No. 484), to prolong 
 it on that line. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX. 219 
 
 Akticle VII. — Change front forward (No, 743), or in rear 
 (No. 7G0), on the right or left of companies, in direc- 
 tions perpendicular or oblique. 
 
 Article VIII. — March by the right flank (No. 722), or 
 by the left flank (No. 725). Change direction by file 
 (No. 730). Form the battalion into line of battle, on 
 the right or left, by file (No. 735). 
 
 Article IX. — Pass the defile in retreat by the right (No. 
 709), or by the left flank (No. 720). 
 
 Lesson Fourth. 
 
 Article I. — Break by division to the rear, by the right or 
 left, the battalion being at a halt or marching (No. 102). 
 
 Article II. — March in column by division (No. 161). 
 Diminish and increase front by company (No. 196). 
 
 Article II F. — Close the column to half distance on the 
 headmost or the rearmost division (No. 278). 
 
 Article IV. — March in column at half distance (No. 2S1), 
 and change direction (No. 287). 
 
 Article V. — The column being at half distance, to form 
 square at a halt (No. 817), or marching (No. 837). 
 
 Article VI. — The battalion being in square, to march to 
 the front (No. 854). Halt the square (No. 860). Form 
 column to march to the front (No. 863), or in in retreat 
 (No. 872). Re-form the square (No. 875). 
 
 Article VII. — Reduce the square (No. 8So). 
 11-19 
 
u 
 
 220 SCUOUL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 AuTicLE VIII. — Close the foluran iu mass on the head- 
 most or rearmost division (No. 270). 
 
 Article IX. — March in column closed in mass, and 
 change direction by the front of subdivisions (No. 288). 
 
 Article X. — Form the column against cavalry (No. 96G). 
 
 Article XI. — Take distances by the head (Nos. 323 and 
 330), or on rear of the column (No. 333), the column 
 being at a halt or marching. 
 
 Article XII. — The column being by company, cause to 
 be executed the movements indicated in Nos. 3, 4, 5, 6, 
 7, S, 9, 10 and 11 of this lesson. The column being at 
 half distance, or closed in mass, to form to the left or 
 right, into line, wheel, on the rear of the column (No. 
 502). 
 
 Article XIII. — The column being by company, form di- 
 visions from a halt (No. 36-1), or in march (No. 376). 
 
 Article XIV. — The column being by division, to form it 
 
 . to the left or right into line of battle at a halt (No 401), 
 or in march (No. 402). 
 
 Lesson Fifth. 
 
 Article I. — The battalion being iu line of battle, and at 
 a halt, to ploy it t>y division into column closed in mass 
 on the right division (No. 119), or on the left division 
 (No. Ml), or on an interior division (No 113), the right 
 or left in front. Ploy the battalion marching in line of 
 battle on the right or left division (No. 149). 
 
SCHOOL OF THE liATTALIOX. 221 
 
 Article II. — Execute the coxintermarch (Xo. 352). 
 
 Articlk III. — Change direction to the right (No. 307), 
 to the left (Xo. 313), by the flank of the column. 
 
 Articlk IV. — Deploy the column on the right division 
 (No. 514), on the left division (No 541), or on any inte- 
 rior division, the column being at a halt, or marching 
 (No. 563). 
 
 Article V. — Ploy the battalion into column by division 
 at half distance, marching (No. 556). 
 
 Article YI. — Ploy the battalion by company, closed in 
 mass, and form it on the right or left into line of battle 
 (No. 577). 
 
 Article VII. — Ploy the battalion into double column, at 
 half distance (No. 777), or closed in mass (No. 793), the 
 battalion being at a halt, or marching. 
 
 Article VIII. — March in this order, and change direction 
 (No. 794). 
 
 Article IX. — Deploy the column at a halt (No. 796), or 
 marching (No. 800), and without suspending the march " 
 (No. 802). 
 
 Article X. — The double column being at half distanccw 
 form it into line of battle faced to the right or left (No. 
 (803), the column being in march (No. 807). Execute 
 the same movement without suspending the march (Nu. 
 810). 
 
 Article XI. — Perpendicular or parallel squares, the bat- 
 talion being deployed (Nos. 889, 895). Oblique squares, 
 the battalion being in line of battle (No. 938), or in col- 
 umn (No. 945). Squares in four ranks (No. 911). 
 
222 SCHOOL OF THK HATTALION. 
 
 Lessox Sixth. 
 
 Articlk I. — March in line of battle (No. 587). Halt the 
 battalion (No. 6.35). and align it (No. 640). 
 
 Article II. — Chani^e direction in line of battle, advanc- 
 ing (No. 052), or in retreat (No. 681). Execute passage 
 of obstacles (No. 682). 
 
 Articlk III. — Oblique march in line of battle (No. 623). 
 
 Article IV. — Disperse and rally the battalion in line of 
 battle (No, 974), and rally the battalion in column by 
 company (No. 978). 
 
 REMARKS 
 
 ' OaNT the school of the 15ATTALI0N. 
 
 In every course of instruction, the first lesson will bo 
 executed several times in the order in which it is ar- 
 ranged; but as soon as the battalion shall be confirmed 
 in the principles of the lesson, the fires will bo executed 
 after the advance in line, and after the various formations 
 into line of battle, and into square. Particular attention 
 will bo given to the fire by file, which is that principally 
 used in war. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 223 
 
 Every lesson of this school will be executed with the 
 utmost precision ; but the second, which comprehends the 
 march in column, and the march in line of battle, being of 
 the most importance, will be the oftenest repeated, espe- 
 cially in the beginning. 
 
 Great attention ought, also, to be given to the fourth 
 lesson, which comprehends the march in column by divis- 
 ion, and the dispositions against cavalry. 
 
 The successive formations will sometimes be executed 
 by inversion. 
 
 In the beginning, the march in column, the march in 
 line of battle, and the march by the flank, will be exe- 
 cuted only in quick time, and will be continued until the 
 battalion shall have become well established in the ca- 
 dence of this step. 
 
 The non-cadenced step will be employed in this school 
 only in the repetition of the movements incident to a 
 column in route, or when great celerity may be required. 
 
 When it may be desired to give the men relief, arms 
 may be supported, if at a halt, or marching by the flank. 
 
 In marching by the front, arms may be shifted to the 
 right shoulder; but not in the march in line of battle 
 until the battalions shall be well instructed. 
 
 After arms have been carried fur some time on the right 
 shoulder, they may be shifted, in like manner, to the left 
 shoulder. 
 
 When a battalion is manoeuvring, its movements will 
 be covered by skirmit^hers. 
 
 All the companies will be exercised, successively, in this 
 
 11-19^; 
 
 J 
 
224 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX. 
 
 "When a battalion, instructed in tbis drill, sbiill be re- 
 quired to niana'uvre in the evolutions of the line, its 
 movements will be regulated by the instructions con- 
 taineil in the thiid volume of the Tactics for Heavy 
 Infantry, approved by the War Department, April 10th, 
 1835. 
 
TABLE OFCONTEA^TS. 
 YoL. n. 
 
 TITLE FOURTH. 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Formation of the battalion (No. 1) 5 
 
 Composition and march of the color escort (No, 4). . . . 6 
 
 Honors paid to the color (No. 11) 7 
 
 General rules and division of the school of the bat- 
 talion (No. 14) 7 
 
 Part First. 
 
 AuTtrT.io I.— To open and close rank? (No. 22) 9 
 
 AiiTicLi; II. — Manual of arms (No. :>()) 11 
 
 AiMiCLK III. — Loadini; at will, and the lirin^s (No. 
 
 -U 11 
 
226 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Part Second. 
 
 AuTiCLE I. — To break by company to the right (No. 
 69). Break by company to the left (No. 74). Break 
 by division (No. 75). To break by company, march- 
 ing (No. 84) .' 18 
 
 Article II. — Break to the rear by the right or left of 
 coinpaiiies (No. S7). Break to the rear by the right 
 or left of conipanicp, marching (No. 94). Advance 
 or retire by the ri;,^ht or left of companies (No. 105). 
 Advance or retire by the right or left of companies, 
 marching (No. 110). Advancing or retiring, by the 
 riiiht or left of companies, to form line to the front i 
 (No. ll;i) 23 
 
 Apticlk III. — Ploy the battalion into close colunni on 
 the first division "(No. 119). Ploy the battalion into 
 close column on the fourth division (No. 141). Ploy ' 
 the battalion into close column on any interior divis- 
 ion (No. 1-13). Battalion being in march, to ploy it 
 into column on the first division (No. 149) 29 
 
 Part Third. 
 
 AnricLi: I. — March in column at full distance (No. 
 161). Column being in march, to execute the about 
 (No. 170). Column arriving in front of the line of 
 battle, to prolong it on this line (No. 175). Column 
 arriviiig behind the line of battle, to prolong it on . 
 this line (No. ISl). Column arriving on the right or 
 the left of the line of battle, to i)r(dong it oii this 
 line (No. 188). Manner of prolonging a line by 
 markers (No. 189) 37 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 227 
 
 Article II. — Column in route (No. 198) 48 
 
 Article III. — Change of direction in column at full 
 distance (No. 2,31) 55 
 
 Article IV.— Halt the column (No. 2:]()) 57 
 
 Article V. — Close the column to half di.stance, or in 
 mass (No. 252). Close the column on (he eighth 
 company (No. 267). E.Kecute this movement, inarch- 
 ing (No. 278) 60 
 
 Article VI. — March in column at half distance, or 
 closed in mass (No. 281) 65 
 
 Article VII. — Change direction in column at half dis- 
 tance (No. 287) 66 
 
 Article YIII. — Change direction of a column closed 
 in mass, marching (No. 288). Change direction of a 
 column, closed in mass, from a halt (No. 306) 67 
 
 Article IX. — Take distances bj^ the head of the col- 
 umn (No. ?>2'i). Take distances by the rear of the 
 column (No. .333). Take distances on the head of 
 the column (No. 341) 73 
 
 Article X. — Countermarch of a column at full or half 
 distance (No. 351 ). Countermarch of a column closed 
 in mass (No. 352). . . • 79 
 
 Article XI. — Being in column by companj', closed in 
 mass, to form divisions (No. 364). To form divis- 
 ions, marching (No. 376) 81 
 
 Part Fourth. 
 
 Article I. — Manner of determining the line of battle 
 (No. 380) 
 
 Article II. — To form a column, at full distance, to 
 the left into line of battle (No. 390). To form a col- 
 umn to the right into line of battle (No. 399), A 
 column being in march, to form it into line of battle 
 (No. 402). To form a column into line of battle, 
 
228 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 and to raove it forward (No. 403). By inversion to 
 the right or left into line of battle (No. 407). Col- 
 umn at full distance, to form it on the right or left 
 into line of battle (No. 414). Column at full dis- 
 tance, forward into line of battle (No. 440). For- 
 ward into line of battle, marching (No. 452). Col- 
 umn at full distance, faced to the rear into line of 
 battle (No. 466). Execute this movement, marching 
 (No. 479) 87 
 
 Article III. — Formation in line of battle by two 
 movements (No. 485) 110 
 
 Articlk IV. — Different modes of forming column at 
 half distance, to the left or right, into line of battle 
 (No. 501). By the rear of column, left or right, into 
 line, wheel (No. 503). Column at half distance, on 
 the right or left, into line (No. 507). Column at 
 half distance, forward into line (No. 508). Column 
 at half distance, faced to the rear into line (No. 
 509) 113 
 
 Articlk V. — Deployment of columns closed in mass 
 (No. 510). Deployment on the first division (No. 
 514). To deploy, whilst marching, on the first divis- 
 ion (No. 5.'52). To deploy without halting the col- 
 umn, and to continue marching (No. 536), To de- 
 ploy on the fourth division (No. 541). To deploy, 
 whilst marching, on the fourth division (No. 550^. 
 To deploy on the interior division (No. 563). To 
 deploy, whilst marching, on an interior division (No. 
 567) 116 
 
 Part Fifth. 
 
 Article I. — To advance in line of battle (No. 587). v 132 
 Article II. — Oblique march in line of battle (No. 
 623) ..141 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 229 
 
 Article III. — To halt the battalion, marching in lino 
 of battle and to align it (No. 635) 143 
 
 Article IV. — Change of direction in marching in line 
 of battle (No. 652) .146 
 
 Article V. — To march in retreat in line of battle (No. 
 664) 149 
 
 Article VI. — To halt the battalion, marching in re- 
 treat, and to face it to the front (No. 676) 151 
 
 Article VII. — Change of direction, in marching in 
 retreat (No. 681) 152 
 
 Article VIII. — Passage of obstacles, advancing and 
 retreating (No. 682) ." 153 
 
 Article IX. — To pass a defile, in retreat, by the right 
 or left flank (No. 710) 159 
 
 Article X.— To inarch by the flank (No. 722) 162 
 
 Article XI. — To form the battalion on the right or 
 left, by file, into line of battle (No. 735) 164 
 
 Article XII. — Change of front perpendicularly for- 
 ward (No. 743). Change front forward on the first 
 company, marching (No. 754). Change of front per- 
 pendicularly to the rear (No. 761) 165 
 
 Article XIII. — To ploy the battalion into column, 
 doubled on the centre (No. 776). To form double 
 column, marching (No. 787). Deployment of the 
 double column, faced to the front (No. 796). De- 
 ployment of the double column, marching (No. 800). 
 
 • To form the double column into line of battle, faced 
 to the right or left (No. 803). To form the double 
 column into line of battle, faced to the right or left, 
 marching (No. 807) 172 
 
 Article XIV. — Dispositions against cavalry (No. 817). 
 A column being in march at full distance, to form 
 square (No. 837). If the column be closed in mass, 
 to make dispositions to form square (No. 847). The 
 battalion being in square, to move it in advance by 
 one of its fronts (No. 854). To halt the square (No. 
 860). The battalion being in square, to form column 
 to march to the front, a distance greater than thirty 
 paces (No. 863). To march the square in retreat a 
 
230 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 greater distance than thirty paces (No. 872). The 
 battalion heinii; in square, to march it in advance, or 
 in retreat, a distance less than thirty paces (No. S70). 
 The column marching to the iVont, to march it in 
 retreat (No. S7'J). The column marching in retreat, 
 to march it to the front (No. 881). To reduce the 
 square (No. 883). To form square from line of bat- 
 tle (No. 885). Perpendicular square (No. 888). 
 Perpendicular square, marching (No. 890). To form 
 square by double column (No. 892).. To form square 
 by double column, marching (No, 894). Observa- 
 tions relative to the formation of squares in two 
 ranks (No. 896). The column being formed of four 
 divisions, to place the inner platoons of the third 
 division in reserve (No. 898). Squares in four 
 ranks (No. 910). The scjuare formed in four ranks, 
 being reduced, and at a halt, to form the battalion 
 into two ranks (No. 916). The column being in 
 inarch with divisions formed in four ranks, to re- 
 l\)rin it into two ranks (No. 920). To form square 
 in four ranks on one of the iiank divisions (No. 923). 
 Form square in four ranks on the first division, 
 marching (No. 928). Form perpendicular square in 
 four ranks, by double column (No. 931). Form per- 
 pendicular square in four ranks, by double column, 
 marching (No. 935). Oblique square (No. 938). 
 Oblique square, being in column (No. 945). Column 
 against cavalry (No. 965). The battalion being 
 no lonicer threatened by cavalry, to form column 
 
 (No. 970) 182 
 
 AuTiCLE XV.— The rally (No. 974) 213 
 
 Article XVI. — Rules for manoeuvring by the rear 
 rank (No. 979) 214